JP5344443B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a game stand represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine), and further enhances the interest of the game.
[Solution] _{The hold display unit 208 can display at least a hold animation including at least a mode in which the hold icon changes, and the hold display control unit 400 performs the hold animation display prohibition control when the display prohibition condition is satisfied. At least a part of the hold animation is invisible during execution of the hold animation display prohibition control by the hold display control means 400.
[Selection] FIG. 269}

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out a prize ball.

  In addition, in such a game stand, a single winning / failing determination is made based on a single winning of a game ball to the starting opening, and if the determination result is a specific winning / failing determination result, a variable winning is determined. A game state advantageous to the player is generated, for example, by opening the mouth for a predetermined time (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

  In the game machine, the interest of the game machine is improved by increasing or decreasing the opportunities for the player to obtain the above-mentioned benefits by controlling the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player.

  In such a game machine, the symbol variation display is performed before displaying the result of the determination. Normally, when a game ball wins a starting point while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display based on the winning is performed until the symbol variation display ends and the result of the determination of success or failure is displayed. The start of is suspended. The player is currently interested in how many times the start of the symbol variation display is held, and the game stand displays the current number of holds.

  In recent game machines, there is a display that displays the current number of reservations as a display on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device as one of the effects, and is trying to enhance the fun of the game.

JP 2009-254495 A Japanese Patent No. 4368929

  However, in recent game machines, it is desired to further enhance the interest of the game.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game table that can further enhance the interest of games.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-mentioned object is
A means for determining whether or not it is possible to determine whether or not it is correct;
A first display means capable of displaying at least a symbol variation display;
A second display means capable of displaying at least a hold icon;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the number of suspensions related to execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the number of holds based on the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of animations,
At least one of the plurality of types of animations is a pending increase animation,
At least one of the plurality of types of animation is a notice animation,
The hold increase animation includes at least a display in which the number of hold icons increases,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the hold increase animation when there is an increase in the number of holds.
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the hold increase animation over a first time,
The notice animation includes at least a display that suggests whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed.
The pending increase animation is not displayed on the second display means during the display of the notice animation.
The second display means displays the holding increase animation from the middle when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second time is shorter than the first time,
The second time is the time taken from the increase in the number of the hold to the end of the displayed notice animation when the number of the hold is increased during the display of the notice animation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the game stand of the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by an embodiment of the invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for the success / failure determination in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the special figure determination table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer number selection table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. Examples of variation time of each variation timer for each timer number in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention, a timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and an effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer are shown. FIG. (A) It is an example of the determination table for ordinary use. (B) It is an example of the table for common figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the internal structure of ROM406 and VRAM436 in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of reproducing the movie A and displaying a texture image superimposed on the said movie A in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of displaying the texture image which appears from the outside of a display area in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the standby animation of the pending | holding icon in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the presentation control process in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the pending | holding icon display control processing in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the fluctuation | variation icon display control processing in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a usual figure long open effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a usual figure long open effect control process. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example A in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example A in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example B in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example C in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example C in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example D in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example D in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example E in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example E in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example F in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example F in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example G in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example G in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example G in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example G in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example H in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example H in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example I in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing aspect of a hold icon. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example J in the time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example K in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example K in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. (A) Another example of the usual stop display symbol is shown. (B) It is an example of the table for a low probability common figure determination. (C) It is an example of the table for high-probability common figure determination. (D) It is an example of a lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an effect control process per normal symbol. It is the figure which showed the effect display of the electric chance chance effect in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display of the electric chance chance effect in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display of the electric chance chance effect in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example M in the time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example M in the time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example N in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example N in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example N in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example O in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing aspect of a hold icon. FIG. 10 is a view showing a modification of Example O. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example P in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example P in the time series in the unit of 1 frame. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example Q in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example Q in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example R in the time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example R in the time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example S in the time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the modification of Example S. It is the figure which showed an example of the layer structure of the image for performing the effect display which concerns on Example S. FIG. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example T in time series in 1 frame units. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example T in time series in 1 frame units. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display control in case the hold icon in movement animation and the hold icon in increase animation overlap. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of display control in case the hold icon in movement animation and the hold icon in increase animation overlap. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display control in case the hold icon in 1st movement animation and the hold icon in 1st movement animation overlap. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display control in case the hold icon in 1st movement animation and the hold icon in 1st movement animation overlap. It is the figure which showed the effect display which concerns on Example U in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of Example U. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the concept of the display time of an animation. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect display which concerns on Example V. FIG. 10 is a view showing a modification of Example V. FIG. 10 is a view showing a modification of Example V. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect display which concerns on Example W. It is an example of a moving animation performed when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 2 to 1. (A) This is an example in which the image displayed when there is no hold and the image of the auxiliary portion of the hold icon displayed after the hold occurs are the same. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the variation of the auxiliary | assistant part of a holding | maintenance icon. (C), (d) It is the figure which showed the example which controls a main part and an auxiliary | assistant part in a different aspect. It is the figure which showed the other example of the increase animation and the movement animation. It is an example of an increase animation. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (B) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (C) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (D) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the abnormality determination value table for variable winning openings for performing abnormality determination of the number of balls entered to the 1st variable winning opening 234 and the 2nd variable winning opening 235. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the abnormality determination value table for special figure starting ports for performing abnormality determination of the number of balls entering into the 2nd special figure starting opening 232. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table selection table for determining the variation classification determination table mentioned later. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table selection opportunity table for determining No in a table selection table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the variation type A determination table for determining the variation type A. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation classification B determination table for determining the fluctuation | variation classification B. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the timer number determination table for determining a timer number. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a winning opening counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prefetch process. (A) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the starting information storage area. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of a structure of the prefetch information storage area. It is a figure showing the contents of prefetch information. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed an example of the pending | holding increase command transmitted to the 1st sub-control part 400, after prefetching by the winning of the 1st special figure starting port 230. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an effect control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a pending | holding icon display control process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize alerting | reporting control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a fluctuation | variation icon display control process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is the figure which showed an example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the icon displayed as the hold icons 1-4 and the fluctuation icon. It is the figure which showed the other example of the icon of (b)-(d). (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure holding | maintenance display area in case the production mode is mode A (dono mode). (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure holding | maintenance display area in case production modes are mode B (princess mode). (C) It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure holding | maintenance display area | region when production | presentation modes are mode C (爺 mode). (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed an example of transfer of production mode. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the special reservation display area which concerns on the modifications 1-4. (A) It is the figure which showed the other example of the holding | maintenance icon in the special figure holding | maintenance display area 208j shown in the said FIG.116 (b). (B) It is the figure which showed the other example of the holding | maintenance icon in the special figure holding | maintenance display area 208m shown to the said FIG.118 (d). (C) It is the figure which showed the other example of the holding | maintenance icon in the special figure holding | maintenance display area 208j shown in the said FIG.116 (b). (A) It is an example when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is shut off when the production mode is mode B (princess mode) and the mode is changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power is restored. (B) An example in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power cut off) when the production mode is mode C (爺 mode) and the mode is changed to mode A (female mode) after the power is restored (after power recovery). It is. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to special unspecified hold display from the special specific hold display at the time of the start of reach production. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to a special specific hold display from a special non-specific hold display at the end of reach production. (C) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to a special unspecified hold display from a special specific hold display at the time of the start of a big hit game. (D) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to a special specific hold display from a special unspecified hold display at the time of completion | finish of a big hit game. The figure which showed an example when the power supply to the pachinko machine 100 was interrupted when the production mode was mode B (princess mode) and special unspecified hold display was made, and the mode changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power was restored It is. It is the figure which showed the example which performs special unspecified hold display with the increase in hold of a special figure variable game as a trigger. It is the figure which showed the example which performs a special unspecified hold display triggered by the several hold increase of a special figure variable game. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which covers a part of special special figure reservation display area 208j with the 2nd production movable body 225 which is one of the movable objects. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which covers a part of special special figure reservation display area 208j with the shielding apparatus 246 which is one of the movable objects. (A)-(c) It is the figure which showed the example which covers a part of display regarding a big hit game, and a special special figure holding | maintenance display with the production movable body 224 which is one of the movable objects. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which erases (or displays) a special special figure hold display and a normal special figure hold display in the same direction, when the number of hold of a special figure variable game decreases (or increases). (B) It is the figure which showed the example which erases (or displays) a special special figure holding | maintenance display and a normal special figure holding | maintenance display in the opposite direction when the number of holdings of a special figure variable game decreases (or increases). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 260 which concerns on a modification from the front. It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 260 shown in FIG. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 260 which concerns on a modification from the front. It is the figure which showed the example of displaying the number of suspension of special figure 1 variable game, and the number of suspension of special figure 2 variable game separately, and covering the number of suspension of special figure 2 variable game with a movable body. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of the prize alerting | reporting at the time of detecting one over winning after the maximum winning. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of an overwinning. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of a prize alert | report at the time of detecting two over winnings after maximum winning. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of (b)-(d) over winning. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of other winning alert | reports when two over winnings are detected. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of (b)-(c) over winning. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of a prize alert | report when one over-winning is detected after a door member is closed. (B) It is the figure which showed execution of a prize alert | report when one over-winning is detected before a door member closes. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of the abnormality generation alert | report performed by a prize abnormality response process. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect of abnormality notification. It is the figure which showed the example which outputs an abnormality occurrence signal based on multiple types of factors. (A) It is the time chart which showed the example which performs abnormality generation alerting | reporting during over-winning alerting | reporting. (B) It is the time chart which showed the example which performs abnormality occurrence alerting simultaneously with over-winning alerting | reporting. It is the figure which showed a part of prefetch information which concerns on other embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the table for a pending | holding icon display mode lottery which concerns on other embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the table for a pending | holding icon display mode lottery which concerns on other embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the table for a pending | holding icon display mode lottery which concerns on other embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the table for a pending | holding icon display mode lottery which concerns on other embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation icon display mode lottery table which concerns on other embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example 1 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 2 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 3 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 4 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 5 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 6 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 7 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a hold icon. It is the figure which showed the example 8 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 9 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 10 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed an example of the display period of a fluctuation | variation icon. It is the figure which showed the effect display in the case of complete | finishing a display of a change icon during the real stop of a decoration symbol in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display period of a fluctuation | variation icon. It is the figure which showed the effect display when the display period of a some fluctuation | variation icon overlaps in time series. It is the figure which showed the effect display when the display period of a some fluctuation | variation icon overlaps in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification in case the display period of several fluctuation | variation icons overlaps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display period of a fluctuation | variation icon. It is the figure which showed the effect display in the case of displaying a plurality of fluctuation icons by one fluctuation in time series. It is the figure which showed the effect display in the case of displaying a plurality of fluctuation icons by one fluctuation in time series. It is the figure which showed the effect display in the time series in the case of displaying a fluctuation | variation icon with the pattern fluctuation | variation without a holding | maintenance. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decoration An example of a symbol is shown, (d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal stop display symbol. 3 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit of the pachinko machine 100. 4 is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 100. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for the special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 was equipped. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the example of the special figure determination table in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer number selection table in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation kind which can be performed during the variation time using the variation time of each variation timer for every timer number in the pachinko machine 100, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and each variation timer. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption. The flow of a process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption process, (d) has shown the flow of the image control process. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of internal configurations of a ROM 406 and a VRAM 436 in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image drawing processing when a movie A is reproduced and a texture image is displayed superimposed on the movie A in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flow of image drawing processing when displaying a texture image appearing from outside the display area in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the example of the standby animation of the hold icon in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. The flow of a process is shown, (c) has shown the flow of the 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the presentation control process in the pachinko machine. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a flow of a hold icon display control process in the pachinko machine 100. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a flow of variable icon display control processing in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed an example of the execution opportunity of icon change animation, execution probability, icon display mode change, and a display mode. It is the figure which showed the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of the effect display of Example 1-2 in time series. It is a figure for comparing and explaining the display time of icon change animations 1-3. It is the figure which showed the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of the effect display in Example 1-4 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-1 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-1 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-2 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-2 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-3 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-3 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-4 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-4 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-5 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-5 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-6 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-6 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-7 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-7 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 5 in time series. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which is one Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 214 from the back side. FIG. 24 is a front view schematically showing the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 214 when viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. (A) shows an example of the stop display symbol of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of Special Figure 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) shows an ordinary figure. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not a general figure is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and (b) shows a table for determining a normal figure stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 and special figure 2 provided in main controller 300. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for true / false determination. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for special figure determination. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer number selection table. It is a figure which shows the example of the production type which can be performed during the variation time using the variation time of each variation timer for every timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and each variation timer. (A) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit main process, (b) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process. (D) shows the flow of the image control process. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of internal configurations of a ROM 406 and a VRAM 436 before image data is expanded on the VRAM 436. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of reproducing the movie A and displaying the texture image based on texture data superimposed on the said movie A. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of displaying the texture image which appears from the outside of a display area (for example, downward) and moves to the predetermined position in a display area gradually. It is a figure which shows the example of the standby animation of a holding | maintenance icon. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a figure which shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption process, (c) is a 2nd sub control part. It is a figure which shows the flow of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the presentation control process in a 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the pending | holding icon display control processing in a 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the change icon display control process in a 2nd sub control part. It is a figure which shows the example of a holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of a holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation icon display mode lottery table. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing part of a flowchart showing the flow of the ordinary long open effect control process (step S1104) shown in FIG. 242 is a diagram showing the remaining part of the flowchart shown in FIG. 242. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which an increase animation, an erasure | elimination animation, and a movement animation are performed. It is a figure which shows the example in which an increase animation and a movement animation are performed continuously. It is a figure which shows the example in which an increase animation and a movement animation are performed continuously in the state where the number of reservations is 0. It is a figure which shows the example which has the space | interval of an increase animation and a change animation. It is a figure which shows the example from which a movement animation is started between an increase animation and a change animation. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the example in which the pending | holding animation of a different combination is performed in two symbol fluctuation displays. It is a figure which shows the mode of the example shown to the time chart of FIG. 249 stepwise. It is a figure which shows the example in which a standby animation is not performed simultaneously with another animation. It is a figure which shows the example which produces discomfort by performing a standby animation. It is a figure which shows the example which alert | reports that the start time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display based on the holding | holding of a new hold icon was delayed by performing a change animation of an old hold icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which a hold display area 2083 of FIG. 1 is provided on the left side, a hold display area 2084 of FIG. 2 that is a priority change side is provided on the right side, and a change icon display area 2082 is provided in the center. . It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding | holding display area | region 2083 of the special figure 1 was provided in the near side, and the holding | holding display area | region 2084 of the special figure 2 used as a priority change side was provided in the back | inner side. It is a figure which shows the example in which the general figure long open effect and the general figure long open effect were performed. It is a figure which shows the example which special figure 1 evacuates according to the interruption of special figure 2 in a non-electric support state. It is a figure which shows the example from which a fluctuation | variation is postponed until predetermined | prescribed operation by a player is detected. It is a figure which shows the example by which a fluctuation | variation is postponed until predetermined | prescribed operation by a salesclerk is detected. It is a figure which shows the example in which the number of pending | holdings reduces during an increase animation execution, and an increase animation is canceled. It is a figure which shows the example which the number of pending | holdings reduces during execution of an increase animation, and the start of a movement animation is delayed. It is a figure which shows the example in which the number of pending | holdings decreased during execution of several increase animation, one animation continued, and the other animation changed. It is a figure which shows the example which the number of pending | holdings increased during execution of an increase animation. It is a figure which shows the example which the number of pending | holdings increased during execution of a movement animation. It is a figure which shows the example by which the execution aspect of a standby animation is changed by conditions satisfaction. It is a figure which shows the example in which the change animation with respect to the hold | maintenance of special figure 1 which was scheduled to be stopped is interrupted by interruption of special figure 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the aspect of a pending | holding animation according to the operation presence or absence of the fluctuation time shortening function. It is a figure which shows the example which may display the same holding | maintenance icon by the some holding | maintenance animation which each has a different aspect. It is a figure which shows the example from which the latter half part of a pending | holding animation becomes invisible by a specific production. It is a figure which shows the example which becomes impossible to visually recognize the first half part of a pending | holding animation by a specific production. It is a figure which shows the example in which the display start of a pending | holding animation is also controlled in a pending | holding animation non-display period. It is a figure which shows the example by which a several hold display is performed with respect to one hold. It is a figure which shows the example in a non-electric support state. It is a figure which shows the example in an electric support state. It is a figure which shows the example in which the middle of a pending | holding animation is difficult to visually recognize. It is a figure which shows the example from which the default display mode of a holding icon changes on both sides of the period with difficult visual recognition. It is a figure which shows the example in which the period with difficulty in visual recognition spans several pending | holding animations. It is a figure which shows the example which controls execution of a pending | holding animation at the time of abnormality occurrence.

[Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 91 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment 1 to 91 are given priority. Moreover, in this embodiment and FIGS. 1-91, in order to distinguish with other embodiment, "'(dash)" is attached | subjected to the end of a code | symbol.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 ′ according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 'viewed from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 ′ includes an outer frame 102 ′, a main body 104 ′, a front frame door 106 ′, a launching device 110 ′, and a game board 200 ′ on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 ′ is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 ′ is called an inner frame, and is provided inside the outer frame 102 ′, and becomes a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base shaft that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 ′ via a hinge portion 112 ′. It is a member. The main body 104 ′ is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 ′ inside. Further, when the main body 104 ′ is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 ′ is provided.

  The front frame door 106 ′ is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 ′ on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 ′ via a hinge portion 112 ′ so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 'on the inside. The front frame door 106 'is provided with a transparent plate member 118' made of glass or resin at the opening 116 ', and a speaker 120' and a frame lamp 122 'are attached to the front side. A game area 124 ′ is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 ′ and the front surface of the game board 200 ′. In addition, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 'when the front frame door 106' is opened is provided.

  Further, the front frame door 106 ′ can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 ′ and store the game balls to the launching device 110 ′. An upper plate 126 ′ provided with a passage to be guided, a lower plate 128 ′ that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126 ′, and game balls stored in the upper plate 126 ′ by a player's operation. A ball removal button 130 ′ for discharging to the lower plate 128 ′ and a ball discharge lever 132 ′ for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 ′ to the game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box) by the player's operation. And a ball launch handle 134 ′ for launching a game ball guided to the launch device 110 ′ by the player's operation to the game area 124 ′ of the game board 200 ′, and various effect devices 206 ′ (FIG. (See 3) A chance button 136 ', a chance button lamp 138' that emits the chance button 136 ', a setting operation unit 137' that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit A ball lending operation button 140 'for instructing a ball lending to (CR unit), a return operation button 142' for instructing a card unit to return a player's balance, a player's balance and a card unit state And a ball rental display unit (not shown). Further, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 'is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 ′ is attached below the main body 104 ′, and the launcher 146 ′ that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 ′ is operated by the player, and the game ball hits the tip of the launcher 146 ′. And a launcher 148 ′ to be provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 ′ is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and includes a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, a lower button located below the confirmation button, A right button positioned to the right of the confirm button; a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button; and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 ′ includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 ′ of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. Even if at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 ′ functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 ′ by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Good.

  The game board 200 ′ has a game area 124 ′ on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 ′ using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 ′ of the main body 104 ′. The game area 124 ′ can be observed from the opening 116 ′ after the game board 200 ′ is mounted on the main body 104 ′.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 ′ of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 ′ has an opening that opens upward, and is positioned below the ball tank 150 ′ and the ball tank 150 ′ for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154 ′ for guiding a sphere that has passed through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the sphere and dropped to the dispensing device 152 ′ located on the right side of the back surface is disposed.

  The payout device 152 ′ is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 'and flows down into the payout device 152' is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. By doing so, it is configured such that the temporarily accumulated game balls are delivered one by one downward to the payout device 152 ′.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 ′ (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches an upper plate 126 ′ disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 ′. With this configuration, a ball is paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 ′ in the figure, a main board case 158 ′ that houses a main board 156 ′ that constitutes the main control section 300 ′ that performs control processing for all games, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 ′. A first sub-control unit 400 ′ that performs a control process related to the presentation based on the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and a rotary sub-volume control switch 161 ′ that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 ′ by the operation of a game clerk. A second sub-board that constitutes a first sub-board case 162 ′ that houses the board 160 ′ and a second sub-control unit 500 ′ that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 ′. A second sub-board case 166 ′ that houses 164 ′ and a payout controller 600 ′ that performs control processing relating to the payout of game balls are configured, and the error is canceled by the operation of the game clerk. A payout board case 172 ′ that houses a payout board 170 ′ having an error release switch 168 ′, and a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 ′ that constitutes a launch control unit 630 ′ that performs control processing related to the launch of a game ball, The power control unit 660 ′ that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines is configured, and the power switch 178 ′ that turns the power on and off by the operation of the game shop clerk and the RWM clear signal that is operated when the power is turned on, A power board case 184 'for housing a power board 182' provided with an RWM clear switch 180 'for output to a CR interface unit 186' for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 'and the card unit, and a pachinko machine In order to output 100 ′ information to an external hall computer or the like, the main board 156 ′ and the first A relay substrate 188' which relays between the substrate 160 'or the like and the holes computer or the like, are disposed.

  The main board 156 ′, the first sub board 160 ′, the second sub board 164 ′ and the like need to be changed for each model, and thus are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 ′. The payout board 170 ′, the launch board 174 ′ and the power source The substrate 182 ′ and the like are provided in the outer frame 102 ′ because they are commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 ′ viewed from the front. The game board 200 'is provided with an outer rail 202' and an inner rail 204 ', and a game area 124' in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 ′ is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124 ′. In the effect device 206 ′, a decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is disposed substantially at the center. The effect device 206 ′ performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224 ′, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 'in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launch handle 134 ', the falling path of the game ball is changed to the right path on the right side of the effect device 206' and the left path on the left side of the effect device 206 '. Can be categorized. In this example, the entrance to the usual figure starting port 228 ', the special figure 1 starting port 230', the special figure 2 starting port 232 '(open state), the variable winning ports 234', 235 '(open state), etc. which will be described later. The ease of rolling differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  As for each of the ordinary figure starting port 228 ', the special figure 2 starting port 232' and the variable prize opening 235 ', the common figure starting port 228', the special figure 2 starting port 232 'and the variable prize winning port 235' are on the right path. Since it is arranged above, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 ′ and the variable winning port 234 ′, the entry of the game ball that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238 ′, the warp device 242 ′, etc. The ball is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). . The decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a ′, a middle symbol display area 208b ′, a right symbol display area 208c ′, a fourth symbol display area 208e ′, and an effect display area 208d ′. The left symbol display area 208a ′, the middle symbol display area 208b ′, and the right symbol display area 208c ′ display different decorative symbols, respectively. The fourth symbol display area 208e ′ displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d 'displays an image used for production. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a ′, 208b ′, 208c ′, 208d ′, and 208e ′ can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′.

  In this example, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e ′ is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. In the fourth symbol display area 208e ′, as the fourth symbol, for example, “−” is blinking displayed during special figure variable game (during special figure variation), and the result of special figure variable game is a win. Displays “O”, and displays “X” if the result of the special figure variation game is out of date.

  In this example, one 4th symbol display area 208e ′ corresponding to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. Only one corresponding fourth symbol display area 208e ′ may be provided. Further, the cycle of the variable display in the fourth symbol display area 208e ′ may be changed according to the gaming state, or may be made common to a plurality of gaming states. In addition, when there are first and second game states in which the display time of the hold animation, which will be described later, is different, the cycle of the variable display may be changed between the first and second game states. The game state may be common. In addition, the characters and graphics to be displayed may be the same while the colors may be different. Moreover, it is not limited to display of (circle), x, and-, You may use another figure and character for a display.

  Further, although the liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, it may be configured to display various effects and various game information without using the liquid crystal display device. Other display devices including an apparatus, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124 ′, a first special symbol display device 212 ′, a second special symbol display device 214 ′, a normal symbol display device 210 ′, a first special symbol hold lamp 218 ′, and a second special symbol display device 218 ′. A symbol holding lamp 220 ', a normal symbol holding lamp 216', and a high-probability medium lamp 222 'are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The common map display device 210 ′ is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 ′ and the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 216 ′ is a lamp for indicating the number of open-line variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games is stored. It is possible to hold until. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220' are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the special figure variable game is shown. Can be held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 ′ is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state. Turns on when switching to a high probability state and turns off when switching from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226 ′, a normal start port 228 ′, a special figure 1 start port 230 ′, and a special figure 2 start port 232 ′ around the effect device 206 ′. And variable prize-winning ports 234 'and 235' are arranged.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 ′ are arranged on the game board 200 ′, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general winning holes) 226 ′ is won), the payout device 152 ′ is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 ′. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126 ′. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 'is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100' and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 'is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124'. In this embodiment, the game board One is arranged on the left side of 200 '. Unlike the ball that has entered the general prize opening 226 ′, the ball that has passed the normal start port 228 ′ is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the normal map starting port 228 ', the pachinko machine 100' starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210 '.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 'is provided at the center of the game board 200'. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entrance to the special opening 1 '230', the payout device 152 'is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are placed on the upper plate 126' as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 ′ is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 ′ and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 ′ is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 ′ includes a pair of blade members 232a ′ that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the blade members 232a ′ are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When the figure display device 210 ′ stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a ′ opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232 ′, the payout device 152 ′ is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls are awarded to the upper plate 126 ′ as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 ′ is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 ′ and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 ′ and 235 ′ are called large winning openings or attackers. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 ′ is disposed below the center of the game board 200 ′. Only one 'is disposed on the right path. The variable winning openings 234 'and 235' are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variable game, for example, one of the variable winning holes 234 ′ and 235 ′ has a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds) , Closing time 1.5 seconds), and opening and closing at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning ports 234 'and 235', the payout device 152 'is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a prize ball to obtain the upper plate 126'. To discharge. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 'and 235' are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 'and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 'called a windmill and a game nail 238' are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and the lowermost part of the inner rail 204 ' Is provided with an out port 240 ′ for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 ′ and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 'supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126' by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, and drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134 '. The launcher 146 'and the launcher 148' pass the outer rail 202 'and the inner rail 204' and strike the game area 124 '. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 ′ falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the hitting direction changing member 236 ′, the game nail 238 ′, etc., and wins a prize winning hole (general winning hole 226 ′, variable winning hole 234. ', 235') or a start opening (Special Figure 1 start opening 230 ', Special Figure 2 start opening 232'), without winning any of the winning openings or start openings, or a normal start opening 228 Only passing through 'will reach the outlet 240'.

  Next, the rendering device 206 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ will be described. A warp device 242 ′ (242a ′, 242b ′) and a front stage 244 ′ are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll on the front side of the effect device 206 ′ so that the game ball cannot roll. An effect movable body 224 ′ is provided. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 ′ and a shielding device 246 ′ (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206 ′. That is, in the effect device 206 ′, the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ and the shielding device 246 ′ are positioned behind the warp device 242 ′, the front stage 244 ′, and the effect movable body 224 ′. The warp device 242 ′ discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a ′ provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 ′ from the warp outlet 242b ′ to the front stage 244 ′ below the front surface of the effect device 206 ′. The front stage 244 ′ can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b ′ or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 ′, and the like. 1 is provided with a special route 244a 'that makes it easier to enter the starting port 230'.

  The effect movable body 224 ′ of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 ′ is displayed. The effect movable body 224 ′ is movable in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 ′ includes a lattice-like left door 246a ′ and right door 246b ′, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ and the front stage 244 ′. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′. That is, the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ move to the left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ are closed, the shielding devices 246 ′ overlap each other so that the player can hardly see the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. In the state where the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ are opened, the inner ends thereof slightly overlap the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. All are visible. Further, the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively. For example, one of the decorative symbols can be identified so that the player can identify which decorative symbol is the displayed decorative symbol. Only the part can be shielded. Note that the left door 246a 'and the right door 246b' may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 'behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, and the shoji part of the lattice hole is formed by a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 ′ on the back may be vaguely recognized by the player, or the shoji part of the hole in the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 ′ on the rear is displayed. You may make it completely invisible. The shielding device 246 ′ of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ even when the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e ′ positioned at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246 ′.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 ′ will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 ′ is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 ′ that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300 ′. A first sub-control unit 400 ′ that controls the production, a second sub-control unit 500 ′ that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 ′, and a main control unit 300 ′. A payout control unit 600 ′ that mainly performs control related to game ball payout according to a command to be transmitted, a launch control unit 630 ′ that performs control of game ball launching, and a power source that controls power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 ′ And a control unit 660 ′.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ will be described. The main control unit 300 ′ includes a basic circuit 302 ′ that controls the entire main control unit 300 ′. The basic circuit 302 ′ includes a CPU 304 ′, a ROM 306 ′ for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 ′ for temporarily storing data, and an I / O for controlling input / output of various devices. O310 ′, a counter timer 312 ′ for measuring the time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 ′ for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 ′ and the RAM 308 ′, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the second sub-control unit 500 ′ described later. The CPU 304 ′ of the basic circuit 302 ′ operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316 b ′ as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 ′ has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a ′ is received. 318 '(this circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, Signals output from various sensors 320 ′ including a frame door open sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor are received, and the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage is sent to the random value generation circuit 318 ′ and the basic circuit 302 ′. A sensor circuit 322 ′ for output and a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ or the special figure 2 display device 214 ′. A drive circuit 326 ′ for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general symbol display device 210 ′, and various status display units 328 ′ (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216 ′, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218). ′, Special figure 2 holding lamp 220 ′, high-accuracy medium lamp 222 ′, etc.) and a drive circuit 330 ′ for controlling the display, and a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a ′ of the special figure 2 starting port 232 ′, A drive circuit 334 ′ for controlling various solenoids 332 ′ for opening and closing the door members and the like of the variable winning ports 234 ′ and 235 ′ is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a ′ and the random value generation circuit 318 ′ are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a ′ may be included in the random value generation circuit 318 ′.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 ′ detects that a sphere is won at the special opening 1 ′, the sensor circuit 322 ′ outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 ′. To do. The random value generation circuit 318 ′ receiving this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 ′, and the latched value is stored in the built-in corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 ′. Store in the counter value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 ′ receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232 ′, the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 ′ at the timing is also shown. And the latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 '.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 ′ is connected to the basic circuit 302 ′, and the main control unit 300 ′ inputs information provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336 ′. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the circuit 350 ′.

  Further, the main control unit 300 ′ is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 ′ for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power control unit 660 ′ to the main control unit 300 ′. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 ′.

  Further, the main control unit 300 ′ is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 ′ that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 ′ outputs the start signal. When an activation signal is input from the circuit 340 ′, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 ′ includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 ′ and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600 ′. Thus, communication with the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the payout control unit 600 ′ is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 ′, the first sub control unit 400 ′, and the payout control unit 600 ′ is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 ′ includes the first sub control unit 400 ′ and the payout control unit. The first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the payout control unit 600 ′ are configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 ′. ing. However, you may comprise so that information communication with main control part 300 ', 1st sub control part 400', and payout control part 600 'may be performed by bidirectional communication.

<First sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 ′ includes a basic circuit 402 ′ that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 ′ based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300 ′. The basic circuit 402 ′ includes a CPU 404 ′, a RAM 408 ′ for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 ′ for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time and frequency. A timer 412 'is mounted. The CPU 404 ′ of the basic circuit 402 ′ operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 ′ as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 'is provided with a ROM 406' for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 ′ may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 ′ controls a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 ′ for controlling the speaker 120 ′ (and amplifier) and various lamps 418 ′ (for example, a chance button lamp 138 ′). Drive circuit 420 ′ for driving, drive circuit 432 ′ for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246 ′, shielding device sensor 430 ′ for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246 ′, and pressing of the chance button 136 ′ are detected. A chance button sensor 426 ′, a volume adjustment switch 161 ′ that adjusts the volume output from the speaker 120 ′, an operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 ′, and these A sensor circuit 428 ′ for outputting a detection signal from the sensor to the basic circuit 402 ′ and a signal stored in the ROM 406 ′ based on a signal from the CPU 404 ′. Connected VDP for displaying an image by reading the image data and the like to generate a display image using a work area of VRAM436' with decorative pattern display device 208 '(Video Display Processor) 434' and, a.

<Second sub-control unit>
Next, the second sub control unit 500 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 ′ receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 ′ via the input interface, and controls a whole of the second sub-control unit 500 ′ based on the control command. 502 'is provided. The basic circuit 502 ′ includes a CPU 504 ′, a RAM 508 ′ for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 ′ for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 '. The CPU 504 ′ of the basic circuit 502 ′ operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 ′ as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 ′ is provided with a ROM 506 ′ in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500 ′, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 ′ includes a drive circuit 516 ′ for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 ′, an effect movable body sensor 424 ′ that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224 ′, and an effect movable body sensor. A sensor circuit 518 ′ for outputting a detection signal from 424 ′ to the basic circuit 502 ′, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 ′ for controlling the game board lamp 532 ′, and a game platform frame lamp 542 ′. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 ′ for performing the control and the game board lamp drive circuit 530 ′ and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 ′. 'And are connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600 ′, the launch control unit 630 ′, and the power supply control unit 660 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ will be described. The payout controller 600 ′ mainly controls the payout motor 602 ′ of the payout device 152 ′ based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main controller 300 ′ and based on control signals output from the payout sensor 604 ′. It is detected whether the payout of the winning ball or the rental ball is completed. The payout control unit 600 ′ communicates with a card unit 608 ′ provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 ′ via the interface unit 606 ′.

  The launch control unit 630 ′ is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 ′ for instructing permission or stop of launch, or a launching force output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 ′. Based on the control signal instructing the firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount of 134 ′, the launch motor 632 ′ for driving the launcher 146 ′ and the launcher 148 ′ is controlled, and the ball from the upper plate 126 ′ to the launcher 110 ′. The ball feeding device 634 for supplying is controlled.

  The power supply control unit 660 ′ converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 ′ into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 ′, the first sub control unit 400 ′, and the payout This is supplied to each device such as the device 152 ′. Further, the power supply control unit 660 ′ can store power for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. A circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided. In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 ′ to the payout control unit 600 ′ and the second sub control unit 500 ′, and the main control unit 300 ′ and the second sub control are supplied from the payout control unit 600 ′. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 500 ′ and the launch control unit 630 ′, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212 ′, the special figure 2 display device 214 ′, the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, and the universal map display device 210 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ are used. The types of special maps and ordinary maps that are stopped and displayed will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. Special figure 1 variable game is started on condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230 ', and the ball has entered the special figure 2 start opening 232'. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ performs “fluctuation display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows five types of special illustrations “special drawing A” to “special drawing E” as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a special diagram high probability normal diagram low probability state. “Special figure C” is 2R and does not shift to the time reduction state.

  “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are used as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 1, whereas “Stop Special” of Special Figure 2 is “Special Figure”. Four types of special figures, “a” to “special d”, are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where a difference can be provided between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable. In this example, the advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1. For example, the jackpot of special figure 1 includes a latent probability change (special figure C) in which almost no ball is obtained, whereas the jackpot of special figure 2 does not include a latent probability change.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 'or the special figure 2 start port 232', that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 ', or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the special drawing 2 starting port 232 ′, the left symbol display area 208a ′, the middle symbol display area 208b ′ of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, In each symbol display area of the right symbol display area 208c ′, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. The “decorative pattern change display” is performed to switch the display in the following order.

  Then, the 15R special jackpot for "Special Figure A", the 15R big jackpot for "Special Figure B", the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure a", the 8R special jackpot for "Special Figure b", and the 8R big jackpot for "Special Figure c" In the case of notification, a combination of symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a 'to 208c' (for example, "decoration 1-ornament 1-ornament 1", "decoration 2-ornament 2-ornament 2", etc.) Is displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “latency probability change (hidden probability change)” of “special drawing C” or the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” “1-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing E” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map starting port 228 ', the general map display device 210' lights up all the seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the “Following display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 ′ is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 ′ that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 ′ of the basic circuit 302 ′ to which this activation signal has been input executes a main control unit main process in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 ′ by performing a reset start by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101 ′, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 ′, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of an I / O 310 ′, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308 ′, The operation is permitted to the WDT 314 'and the initial value is set. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT 314 ′.

  In step S103 ′ following step S101 ′, the value of the counter of WDT 314 ′ is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 ′ is restarted. In step S105 ′ following step S103 ′, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 ′ supplies to the main control unit 300 ′ from the power supply control unit 660 ′. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 ′ detects that the power is cut off), the process returns to step S103 ′, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 ′ does not detect that the power is cut off). Then, the process proceeds to step S107 ′. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103 ′, and step S105 ′ is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107 ′, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 ′, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 ′ (for example, a test output port) , A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400 ′, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308 ′, and the like.

  In step S109 ′ following step S107 ′, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (basic of main control unit 300 ′). When the circuit 302 ′ is set to the initial state), the process proceeds to an initialization process (step S113 ′). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 ′ provided on the power supply board is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 ′ to set the basic circuit 302 ′ to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 'is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not there is. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 ′ to set the basic circuit 302 ′ to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 ′ is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 ′ to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 ′ to set the pachinko machine 100 ′ to the initial state.

  In step S111 ′, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 ′ at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 ′ at the time of power interruption is read, and after resetting to each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 ′ executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 ′ returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115 ′) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111 ′, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption. In the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 ′, which will be described later, the first sub control To the unit 400 ′.

  In step S113 ′, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308 ′, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in a transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113 ′) of the main control unit 300 ′ has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, command setting in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 ′. In the transmission process (step S233 ′), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′.

  In step S115 ′ following step S113 ′, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal variation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal variation time provided in the RAM 308 ′, After adding 1 to the acquired value, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207 ′) described later. The main control unit 300 ′ repeatedly executes the process of step S <b> 115 ′ except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 ′ includes a counter timer 312 ′ that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201 ′, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 ′ to the stack area is performed. In step S203 ′ following step S201 ′, the count value of WDT 314 ′ exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example), so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect processing abnormality) The WDT is periodically restarted (in this example, once every about 2 ms, which is the main control unit timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 ′ following step S203 ′, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection of various sensors 320 'including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors via the input port of the I / O 310'. A signal is input to monitor the presence / absence of a detection signal and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 ′ in the RAM 308 ′. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 ′ in each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided for each sphere, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 ′ in the previous detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor. The information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected 2 ms before) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308 ′, and this information is detected as described above. Store in the signal storage area. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205 ′, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205 ′. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal). In step S205 ′, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of a match to the general winning opening 226 ′, variable winning openings 234 ′, 235 ′, special figure 1 starting opening 230 ′, and special figure 2 starting opening 232 ′, Alternatively, it is determined that the normal start port 228 'has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226 ', 234', 235 'and these starting ports 230', 232 ', 228'. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor that detects the winning at the general winning opening 226 ′, the winning is made to the general winning opening 226 ′. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent processing is performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning a prize to the general winning opening 226 '.

  The ROM 306 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Yes. After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 ′ following step S205 ′, a basic random number initial value updating process is performed, and in the next step S209 ′, a basic random number updating process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 ′ is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 ′. Three random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308 ′, and 1 is set to the acquired value. After the addition, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 ′. When the stored initial value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value. The initial value set this time is set in the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value in the figure and determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. Remember. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 ′ is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 'following step S209', effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 ′ is updated.

  In step S213 ′ following step S211 ′, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying / changing / stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210 ′ is measured, and the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the special symbol display unit 212 ′ is displayed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for timekeeping, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214 ', predetermined winning effect time, predetermined release Various timers including a timer for measuring time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 'following step S213', a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226 ′, 234 ′, 235 ′ and starting openings 230 ′, 232 ′, 228 ′ are awarded, each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308 ′. Is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 'following step S215', a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 ', the special figure 2 starting port 232', the ordinary drawing starting port 228 'and the variable winning ports 234', 235 '. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205 ′.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 'has been won and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308' is not full, the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 'starts the special figure 1 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the port 230 'is acquired, and a special figure 1 random number value generation provided in the RAM 308' is obtained. The special figure 1 random value is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  Corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 'of the random value generation circuit 318' when the special figure 2 starting port 232 'is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308' is not full. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure is generated from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 ′. 2 random number values are acquired and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 ′ and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 ′ is not full, the value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value is set as the normal winning number. Acquire and store in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When a winning is made at the variable winning openings 234 ', 235', information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning openings 234 ', 235' is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning openings.

  In step S219 ′ following step S217 ′, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 ′ are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 shows power-on information (when it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of payout requests after encryption processing is indicated.

  In step S221 ′ following step S219 ′, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the general map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 ′ is repeatedly turned on and off.・ Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 'performs a normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED that constitutes the general-purpose display device 210 ′ is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the per-normal-flag flag is off, The 7-segment LED constituting the display device 210 'is controlled to be turned on / off. The RAM 308 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes as well as the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Further, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 'in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. In the case of the usual figure flag, the RAM 308 ′ is used in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Is set in the setting area, and a solenoid for driving to open and close the blade member 232a 'of the special opening 2232' for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) is set (part of various solenoids 332). In addition, a signal for holding the blade member 232a ′ in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308 ′.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 ′ for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 ′.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 ′ indicates that the normal state is not operating. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308 ′, “not operating normally” is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223 ′.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 'is not performed (the normal map state is inactive), and the general map variable game that is on hold is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for the usual figure provided in the RAM 308 ′ is set to ON, and in the case of being not won, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 ′ is selected from the plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is provided in the RAM 308 ′ as the normal map variable display time. Store in the usual map variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308 ′, and the number of pending custom figure variable games is determined each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 ′ following step S223 ′, special figure prefetching processing is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Subsequently, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225 ′). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 'performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  The RAM 308 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′ includes a 16R big hit flag, a 15R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, a general figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like. A flag is provided. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, the 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ is turned on / off to control the special figure d, and the setting area of the RAM 308 ′ is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 ′ performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 ′. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 ′ is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation If it is not medium, the hourly flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 ′ is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation Turn off the flag.

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. Is stored in the RAM 308 ′ as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the process ends.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 ' While the special figure 2 is in operation in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a waiting period for displaying an image informing the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is started In order to do this, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 '. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning openings 234 ′, 235 ′) solenoids for opening and closing the door members of the variable winning openings 234 ′, 235 ′ (various solenoids 332) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output to a part of 'and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308'. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 ', 235' (a part of various solenoids 332 '), and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308' Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Moreover, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 16 rounds or 8 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and starts at the timing when it is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process to be performed, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image for informing the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is to be ended is set. In order to do this, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 ′. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of hours and hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the time and number of times storage unit provided in the RAM 308 ′ simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 ′. Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a ′ of the special drawing 2 start port 232 ′ is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are entered in the variable winning holes 234 'and 235' during the big hit game. In order to solve this problem, a large number of game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 ′ simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 ′ has no special figure 2 Set in operation.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308 ', special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227 '.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227 '). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. Special figure B when figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure C when 2R big hit flag is on Special figure D when small hit flag is on Special figure D when special flag is on, Special figure when off flag is on E The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in each mode, and a setting indicating that special figure 1 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 ′. . By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the above-described timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 'performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to E. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 ′ and step S227 ′ is completed, a special figure-related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step S229 '), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). Process) (step S231 '). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 ′ performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special drawing 1 Even if the start conditions of the variable game are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ notifies the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, by the first sub-control unit 400 ′, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 ′. Is given priority over notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 lottery process in step S229 ′, the main control unit 300 ′ starts the special figure 2 start information from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (A special figure 2 winning random number value and a set of special figure 2 random value) are acquired, based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308 ', and the like. Then, determination of whether to make a big hit, a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1), or a loss (using the table for determining whether or not to store in ROM 306 ′) Make a decision. Next, the main control unit 300 ′ uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 ′ based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determination result determination result. The symbol to be stopped (stopped symbol) is determined after 2 fluctuations are displayed. Next, the main control unit 300 ′ stores, for example, in the ROM 306 ′ based on the determined determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) shown in FIG. 2 is determined using the various tables.

  The main control unit 300 ′, after taking out the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, deletes the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, The special figure 2 reservation number in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308 ', and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may make it perform. After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229 ′) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231 ′) is similarly performed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices to be displayed may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or a single display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 ′ following step S231 ′, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′ is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 Is a command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 ′, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 ′, variable winning ports 234 ′, 235 ′ Including the presence or absence of winning a prize. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 'as various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, a special figure probability variation flag value, a special figure 1 related lottery process and a special figure. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 ′ is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308 ′, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, various lamps 418 ′, and the speaker 120 ′ during the winning effect period, the special figure Information indicating the value of the probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are on hold is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, effect control information and special figure stored in the RAM 308 ′ as command data and output to the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, various lamps 418 ′, and the speaker 120 ′ during the effect standby period. Information indicating the value of the probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are on hold is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 ′, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. Set information such as number. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 ′, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set information such as number.

  Further, in this step S233 ′, general command special figure holding increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 ′, notice information (preliminary notice information, Set false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400 ′, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 ′ by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. The contents of the effect control can be determined based on the command data information.

  In step S235 ′ following step S233 ′, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 ′ is output to the information input circuit 350 ′ separate from the pachinko machine 100 ′ via the information output circuit 336 ′.

  In step S237 ′ following step S235 ′, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 ′ are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. To do. When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 'are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232' and the variable prize opening 234 ', and the universal display device 210' via the drive circuits 324 ', 326', 330 '. The display data to be output to the special figure 1 display device 212 ′, the special figure 2 display device 214 ′, various state display units 328 ′, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310 ′. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219 ′) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310 ′.

  In step S239 ′ following step S237 ′, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243 ′. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241 ′. move on. In step S241 ′, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 ′ is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main shown in FIG. Return to processing. On the other hand, in step S243 ′, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 ′, and power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224 ′) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 ′ prefetches the starting information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result ( The special figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9E) in the RAM 308 ′.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308 ′, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 ′ determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301 ′). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 ′ determines that the starting information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If it is equal to, it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303 ′, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307 ′.

  In step S303 ′, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a pair of special figure 2 random value) is obtained before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229 ′). Prefetch from the special figure 2 random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229 ′). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 ′ following step S303 ′, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 ′. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307 ′.

  In step S307 ′, the main control unit 300 ′ determines whether or not the starting information of FIG. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2 The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309 ′. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to the part timer interrupt process.

  In step S309 ′, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 ′ whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311 ′. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normally high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315 ′. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311 ′, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) is obtained before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231 ′). First, pre-read from the special figure 1 random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231 ′). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 ′ following step S311 ′, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315 ', the pre-read for special figure 1 in the RAM 308' is replaced with stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the start information without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. Store in the earliest free area of the result storage unit. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233 ′) described above, only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′, or the pre-read for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetch results in the result storage unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub control unit 400 ′ that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300 ′, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′, and the first sub-control unit 400 ′ may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-read result. Good.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 ′. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, “special symbol E” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “special symbol E” is stored as stop symbol information in the storage region “hold 2”. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  FIG. 9D shows another example of the state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the storage area "hold 1" stores "winning" information as a result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination, and the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 3". In addition, “out of” information is stored as the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game, and information indicating the determination result is not stored in the storage area “hold 4”.

  FIG. 9E shows another example of the state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9E, the storage area “pending 1” stores “timer group 1” information based on the determination of the variable display time (timer number), and determines the variable display time (timer number). "Timer group 2" information is stored on the basis of the information, "Timer group 7" information is stored on the basis of the determination of the variable display time (timer number), and the storage area "Pending 4" contains information indicating the determination result. Is not remembered. Here, the timer group refers to information composed of a plurality of types of timer numbers (or variable display times). For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the timer group 1 includes five types of timers 1 to 5. The timer group 2 is composed of two types of timer numbers, timers 6-7, and the timer group 7 is composed of five types of timer numbers, timers 18-22.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. However, the determination result, variable timer number (variable time), timer group to be described later, etc. The information may be determined and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ′ as prefetch result information.

<Various tables used in main controller 300 '>
Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 ′ of the pachinko machine 100 ′ according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 are stored in the ROM 306 ′ of the main control unit 300 ′, for example. FIGS. 10A to 10D are examples of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229 ′) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231 ′). Show. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

<Special figure determination table>
The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 164). / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

<Special figure determination table>
11 (a) and 11 (b) show a special figure determination table used when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229 ') or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231'). An example is shown. The special figure determination table shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is composed of items of “result of determination / non-response”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol”. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value or special figure 1 random value. The range that can be taken by the special figure 2 random value and the special figure 1 random value in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  FIG. 11A shows a special figure determination table for special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the special figure 1 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 25% for special figure A (15R special big hit) and 25% for special figure B (15R big hit). %, And special figure C (latency probability change) is 50%. The ratio of probability change jackpots (Special Figure A, Special Figure C) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability change probability is 75%. Moreover, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 50% for 15R and 50% for 2R.

  In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of small hit symbol of special figure 1, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, the stop symbol is special regardless of the special figure 1 random value. D is determined. Also, since there is only one type of missed symbol, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol E regardless of the special figure 1 random value. In FIG. 1, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided, and another symbol may be determined based on the result of random number lottery.

  FIG. 11B shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the special figure 2 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for special figure a (16R special big hit), and special figure b (8R special big hit) is 5%, and special figure c (8R big hit) is 25%. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figure a, special figure b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75% as in FIG. Further, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game is 70% for 16R and 30% for 8R.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one type of losing symbol of special figure 2, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct, the stop symbol is changed to special figure d regardless of the special figure 2 random value. It is determined. In FIG. 2, it is also possible to provide a plurality of different symbols and determine another symbol based on the result of random lottery.

<Timer number selection table>
FIG. 12 shows an example of the timer number selection table. The timer number selection table is used when the timer number is determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229 ′) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231 ′). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer number selection tables are provided, and one timer number selection table is selected based on various conditions such as the gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2. The FIG. 12 shows only the timer number selection table for the special figure 1 that is selected when the time of determination of success / failure is during non-electric support.

  In the timer number selection table shown in FIG. 12, the variation timer (timer number) can be determined based on the stop symbol, the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the random number value for determining the special diagram variation time. Here, the possible values of the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in this example are 0 to 65535. When the stop symbol is special figure E, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, the timer number is determined as one of timers 3 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining special figure fluctuation time. When the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1 or more (1 to 3 in this example), the timer number is one of the timers 2 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. It is determined. In this example, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the selection probability of each variable timer differs depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1, and the distribution of the variable timers also differs. For example, timer 2 can be selected when the number of holds is 1 or more, but is not selected when the number of holds is 0.

  As will be described later, the timers 6 to 22 are variable timers (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “variable timers greater than reach”) capable of executing effects of so-called reach or higher. In the table shown in FIG. 12, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the probability that a variable timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0 (reach occurrence probability) is about 1/8 (reach occurrence probability). = 8536/65536), and the probability that a variation timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 or more is approximately 1/32 (= 2036/65536). In this way, in this example, when the number of holdings is large (for example, when the number of holdings is 1 or more), the special figure variation is activated, and the reach occurrence probability due to the deviation fluctuation becomes lower as the number of holdings is larger. Yes.

  When the stop symbol is special figure A or special figure B, the timer numbers of timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, 18 to 22 are based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings of special figure 1. Decide on either. When the stop symbol is special figure C or special figure D, the timer number is determined by the timer 10 or 14 based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 1. Even in the case where the stop symbol is special figure A to special figure D, the selection probability and distribution of each variable timer may be varied depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1.

<Timer group>
FIG. 13 illustrates an example of the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer. As shown in FIG. 13, the timers 1 to 5 have a variation time of 2000 to 10000 ms and belong to the timer group 1 (immediately a shift system). The timers 6 and 7 have a fluctuation time of 20000 to 45000 ms, and belong to the timer group 2 (expected small). The timers 8 to 10 have a fluctuating time of 15000 to 55000 ms and belong to the timer group 3 (small expectation: hit). The timers 11 to 13 have a fluctuation time of 70000 to 100000 ms and belong to the timer group 4 (expected: missed). The timers 14 and 15 have a fluctuation time of 80000 to 95000 ms and belong to the timer group 5 (expected: hit). The timers 16 and 17 have a fluctuation time of 120,000 to 150,000 ms, and belong to the timer group 6 (expected large: disappointing). The timers 18 to 22 have a fluctuation time of 105,000 to 300,000 ms and belong to the timer group 7 (expected large: hit).

  In this example, the timers 6 to 22 are reachable or more variable timers. Timers 1 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 are variation timers that are selected when the determination result of the variation is out of order, and timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, and 18 to 22 are It is a variation timer that is selected when the variation determination result is a win. When comparing variation timers that can execute the same effect type, the variation timer that is selected at the time of winning is more variable than the variation timer that is selected at the time of losing so that the winning effect can be executed after the symbol stop display. Is longer by a predetermined time (for example, 10,000 ms). For example, comparing the timer 6 and the timer 9 capable of producing a normal reach, the timer 9 selected at the time of winning has a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms longer than the timer 6 selected at the time of loss. In the special figure variable game in which the timer 6 is selected and the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the normal reach effect in the same manner is possible until immediately before the symbol stops, and in the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the symbol A predetermined winning game can be executed after the stop.

  Note that the timer number and the effect type do not necessarily correspond one-on-one, and a plurality of effect modes may be provided for one timer number. For example, when a certain timer is selected, in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 ′ or the second sub-control unit 500 ′, a determination based on a predetermined condition or a lottery using a random number for effects is performed. The production mode to be executed with the timer varying time may be selected from a plurality of production modes.

  Further, in this example, when the timers 6 to 22 are selected, an effect higher than reach is executed, but whether or not an effect higher than reach is executed does not necessarily depend on the timer number. . For example, the lottery for the timer number and the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach or higher effect may be performed independently. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach or higher may be performed by the main control unit 300 ′ or the first sub control unit 400 ′.

<Table for determining whether or not it is normal>
FIG. 14 (a) shows an example of a table for determining whether or not there is a common use. When this success / failure determination table is used in the determination of the success / failure of the ordinary figure, when the ordinary figure probability is low, the probability of winning is about 1/20 (= 5/101), and the probability of ordinary figure is high. In the case of probability, the probability of winning is 100% (= 101/101).

<Table for determining customs>
FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of a table for determining general symbols used when determining a stop symbol in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223 ′). This common figure determination table is composed of items of “result determination / determination”, “probability of common figure”, “random number range”, “stop symbol”, and “open pattern”. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired ordinary random number value. The range that can be taken by the regular random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100). The item “opening pattern” indicates the opening time and the number of opening times of the blade member 232a ′ of the second special figure starting port 232 ′.

  In this example, the distribution rate of each symbol in the general-purpose variable game at the low probability of general-purpose figures is 33% for ordinary figure A, 34% for ordinary figure B, and 33% for ordinary figure C. In addition, the distribution rate of each symbol in the general variation game at the high probability of the general diagram is 100% for the general diagram D, and the distribution rate of the off symbol in the general diagram change game is 100% for the general diagram E. .

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 ′ of the first sub control unit 400 ′. First, in step S401 ′ of FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401 ′. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization process of a storage area in the RAM 408 ′, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 ′ following step S401 ′, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process in step S405 ′ is performed. Migrate to In step S405 ′, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 ′ following step S405 ′, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 ′ of the first sub control unit 400 ′ determines whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 ′.

  In step S409 ′ following step S407 ′, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407 ′, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 ′ is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Do.

  In step S411 ′ following step S409 ′, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 ′ is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 ′ is changed to the effect data in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 ′.

  In step S413 ′ following step S411 ′, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to VDP 434 ′ in the effect data read in step S409 ′, this command is output to VDP 434 ′ (details will be described later).

  In step S415 ′ following step S413 ′, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 ′ in the effect data read in step S409 ′, this command is output to the sound source IC 416 ′.

  In step S417 ′ following step S415 ′, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 ′ in the effect data read in step S409 ′, this command is output to the drive circuit 420 ′.

  In step S419 ′ following step S417 ′, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 ′ in the effect data read out in step S409 ′, this command is output to the drive circuit 432 ′.

  In step S421 ′ following step S419 ′, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 ′ in the effect data read out in step S409 ′, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403 ′.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 ′ of the first sub control unit 400 ′. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 ′ detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300 ′. In step S501 ′ of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 ′ is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408 ′.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 ′ of the first sub control unit 400 ′. The first sub-control unit 400 ′ includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 ′ of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 ′ described in step S403 ′ of the first sub-control unit main process to store the original timer variable. Store in the area. Therefore, in step S403 ′, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 ′ following step S601 ′, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 ′ set in the information transmission process (step S421 ′) of the first sub control unit main process, and other effects Performs numerical value update processing.

  FIG. 15D is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the image control process in step S413 ′ of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701 ', an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 ′ first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436 ′. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 ′. Next, the CPU 404 ′ sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406 ′), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436 ′), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 ′, and then ROM 406 ′. A command for instructing the start of transfer of image data to the VRAM 436 ′ is set. The VDP 434 ′ transfers the image data from the ROM 406 ′ to the VRAM 436 ′ based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 ′ outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404 ′.

  In step S703 ′ following step S701 ′, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 434 ′. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705 ′. Waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705 ', parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 ′ based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 ′ in step S 701 ′, the CPU 404 ′ is information on image data constituting the display image (in the VRAM 436. The coordinate axis, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434 ′. The VDP 434 'performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 ′ following step S705 ′, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 'instructs the VDP 434' to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 ′ starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404 ′.

  In step S709 ′ following step S707 ′, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 ′ based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711 ′. Otherwise, it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711 ′, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 ′ and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Internal configuration of ROM 406 'and VRAM 436'>
FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 ′ and the VRAM 436 ′ before image data is expanded on the VRAM 436 ′. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ includes the ROM 406 ′ for storing control programs and image data, the VRAM 436 ′ for temporarily storing image data and the like, and image data stored in the ROM 406 ′. And VDP 434 ′ for generating a display image using the storage area of the VRAM 436 ′ and displaying the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 ′.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 406 ′ stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data including a still image. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 16, movie data MVa for movie A, movie data MVb for movie B, movie data MVc for movie C, multiple types of movie data, texture data T001, texture data T002, etc. Are stored in the ROM 406 ′. In addition to these data, the ROM 406 ′ stores in advance control information including resolution (image size) of movie data. In this example, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVa is 1280 × 960, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVb is 1024 × 768, and the resolution of the movie data MVc is 800 × 600. And control information including the information indicating that is stored in the ROM 406 ′.

  In the VRAM 436 ′, a movie data expansion area MVE for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area TE for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a decorative symbol display A frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) are provided for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the device 208 ′. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, an image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 ′.

<Flow of image drawing processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flow of image drawing processing when a movie A is reproduced and a texture image based on texture data is displayed superimposed on the movie A. When reproducing the movie A, the first sub control unit 400 ′ decompresses the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) corresponding to the movie A into a plurality of image data, and then decompresses the image data for each frame. , The movie data expansion area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) set in the VRAM 436 ′. In the VRAM 436 ′ of this example, in addition to the movie data development area MVE1, another movie data development area having a different resolution (for example, a movie data development area with a resolution of 1024 × 768 and a movie data development with a resolution of 800 × 600). However, since the movie data development area MVE1 having the same resolution as the movie data MVa can be used, it is preferentially used. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ displays a plurality of texture data stored in the ROM 406 ′ (in this example, texture data T001 to display an animation in which a texture image (a hold icon or a change icon described later) rotates. T004) is transferred (developed) to the texture data development area TE (not shown in FIG. 16). Here, the texture data T001 of this example corresponds to the texture image in the initial state, the texture data T002 corresponds to the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture data T003 is 180 clockwise from the initial state. Corresponding to the rotated texture image, the texture data T004 corresponds to the texture image rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state. In this example, the texture image is displayed as a moving image by animation using a plurality of texture data, but the texture image may be composed of movie data.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ uses the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame of the VRAM 436 based on the movie data MVa transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 and the texture data transferred to the texture data development area TE. In order to form a display image in the buffer 2 (FB2), the image data and texture data information (coordinate axes of VRAM 436 ′, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) constituting the display image are instructed to the VDP 434 ′. At this time, 1280 × 960 is designated as an image size to be extracted from the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) to the frame buffer, and all areas of the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) can be displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ designates the entire area of the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and issues a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 ′ starts image drawing in the frame buffer in accordance with the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data MVa and an image corresponding to the texture data are displayed on the decorative design display device 208 ′. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ sequentially selects and indicates four types of texture data T001 to T004 in time series with respect to the VDP 434 ′, thereby expressing the motion (for example, rotation) of the texture image by animation. can do. In addition, when displaying a plurality of animations by the same texture image (for example, animations in which a plurality of held icons having the same display mode are respectively rotated), the same texture data is selected for each animation in each frame. For example, a plurality of animations can be synchronized, and a plurality of animations can be made asynchronous by selecting different texture data for each animation in each frame. In this example, four types of texture data T001 to T004 are used to express the operation of the texture image, but three or less types or five or more types of texture data may be used.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flow of image drawing processing when a texture image that appears from outside the display area (for example, below) and gradually moves to a predetermined position in the display area is displayed. The display position of the texture image is determined based on the arrangement coordinates of the texture data instructed by the first sub control unit 400 ′ to the VDP 434 ′. Therefore, by setting the arrangement coordinates of the texture data to gradually different values for each frame, the movement of the texture image can be displayed by animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, in a state where two texture images are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area, the third texture image appears from below the display area, and two textures are displayed. An animation that gradually moves to the right next position of the image is displayed. In the leftmost frame in the figure in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 ′, the third texture image has a resolution of 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin (in this example, the same as the range of the movie data MVa). Therefore, more than half of the texture image itself is arranged at a position protruding downward. Thereafter, in the middle frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a position above the position in the leftmost frame in the figure. Thereafter, in the rightmost frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a predetermined position (the same height as the other two texture images) further above the position in the center frame in the figure.

  After forming a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in each frame, the first sub control unit 400 ′ designates a range of resolution 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as an origin, and issues a drawing instruction. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a third texture image (increased) in a state where two texture images (the previous hold icon) are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area. A new hold icon) corresponding to the hold appears from below the display area, and an animation that gradually moves to the right adjacent position of the two texture images is displayed.

  As will be described later, in this example, a hold icon is displayed as an animation of a texture image. The number of held icons displayed is basically the same as the number of held special game games. Each hold icon can be prefetched about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, an animation that is executed when a hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), a previous hold is Due to the digestion, the order of the hold changes, and an animation executed when the hold icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left) (hereinafter, referred to as “pending icon moving animation”). ), Animation that is executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “change animation of the hold icon”), the hold is digested, and the hold icon is deleted (Hereinafter referred to as “pending icon deletion animation”) , An animation that is executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority change machine (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon save animation”) There is a case). In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  Further, in this example, after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held.

  For animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is moved to a different area from the hold icon display area when the hold is consumed. Animation that moves as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icons”) and animation that changes from the hold icon display form to the change icon display form (hereinafter “between hold and change icons” Sometimes called “change animation”. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons.

<Standby animation>
FIG. 19A shows an example (for example, a default mode) of a standby animation of a holding icon corresponding to holding of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, the texture image in the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001, the texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the clockwise rotation from the initial state corresponding to the texture data T003. The texture image rotated by 180 ° and the texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 and rotated by 270 ° clockwise from the initial state are sequentially displayed repeatedly. Each texture image has a circular outer shape with a predetermined color, and four characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle. ("Yatsushiro Shogun" pattern). Each character is arranged so that the center direction of the circle is downward. In the four texture images, only one of the characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” is in the normal position (the vertical position is correct), and in the initial texture image “ “8” is the correct position. When the standby animation shown in FIG. 19A is executed, the circular hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the circle.

  Note that, here, an example has been shown in which the entire circular hold icon with characters attached is rotated in the clockwise direction. For example, a circular image and “eight”, “dai”, “general”, “ It is also possible to rotate only the character portion in the clockwise direction after making the image of the character portion of “army” a separate image. In this case, another image (for example, a circular image shines on the outer edge of the circular image so that the circular image is not rotated and only the character portion is rotated). Or an image representing a shadow of a circular image) may be further added.

  FIG. 19B shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, the texture image in the initial state, the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, the texture image rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state Images are displayed in this order, and when the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image continues to be displayed. When this standby animation is executed, the circular hold icon is initially rotated only once, and thereafter, it is visually recognized to stop rotating and remain stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered part or all of the increase animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle.

  FIG. 19 (c) shows an example of a standby icon standby animation corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game hold. In this example, four texture images have a square outer shape. When this standby animation is executed, the square hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the square. In this example, the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 have different shapes, but they may have the same shape.

  FIG. 19D shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003 are repeatedly displayed in sequence. Each texture image matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani), and the states (for example, direction and pose) are different from each other. When this standby animation is executed, a predetermined character is visually recognized as walking in the left direction in the figure. Therefore, by executing this standby animation in combination with a moving animation for moving the hold icon to the left adjacent position, the player visually recognizes that the hold icon (character) moves to the left adjacent position. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 19E shows still another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 are sequentially repeated. Is displayed. The texture images all match the character design similar to that shown in FIG. 19D, and the states (for example, orientation and pose) are different from each other. Since this standby animation uses four types of texture data in the same way as the standby animation shown in FIGS. 19A, 19C, etc., the standby animation shown in FIGS. 19A, 19C, etc. It is possible to match the execution time (scale) of the animation for the period. Accordingly, even if the standby animation shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed for some of the multiple hold icons and the standby animation shown in FIG. 19 (a) is executed for another hold icon, these standby icons In some cases, animations can be executed synchronously. In the standby animation shown in FIG. 19 (e), after the four texture images are sequentially displayed and the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 19 (b). It may be displayed continuously.

  Note that although the movement of the standby animation has been described here, the same movement can be performed for other animations (for example, movement animation, increase animation, change animation, and digest animation).

  Here, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same before and after the display mode change. Thereby, the player can be caused to pay attention only to the display mode of the hold icon, and the player can be easily made aware of the change in the display mode.

  Moreover, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the prefetch result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be made different before and after the display mode change. In this case, the sense of incongruity may be caused by the change in the scale of the standby animation, and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the hold icon.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 ′ will be described. FIG. 20A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 ′ of the second sub control unit 500 ′. First, in step S801 ′ of FIG. 20A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801 ′. In this initialization process, initialization of the input / output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508 ′, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 'following step S801', it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process in step S805 'is performed. Migrate to In step S805 ′, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 ′ following step S805 ′, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 ′ of the second sub control unit 500 ′ determines whether or not a command is received from the first sub control unit 400 ′.

  In step S809 'following step S807', an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807 ′, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 ′ is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Do. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  In step S811 ′ following step S809 ′, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 ′ to the game board lamp 532 ′ or the game table frame lamp 542 ′, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520 ′.

  In step S813 ′ following step S811 ′, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 ′ to the effect movable body 224 ′, this command is output to the drive circuit 516 ′. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803 ′.

  FIG. 20B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 ′ of the second sub-control unit 500 ′. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 ′ detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400 ′. In step S901 ′ of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 ′ is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 ′.

  FIG. 20C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 ′ of the second sub control unit 500 ′. The second sub-control unit 500 ′ includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 ′ of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 ′ described in step S803 ′ of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803 ′, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 ′ following step S1001 ′, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the effect control process in step S809 ′ of the second sub control unit main process. In step S1101 ′ of the effect control process, the hold icon display control process is performed, in the next step S1103 ′, the variable icon display control process is performed, and in the next step S1104 ′, the normal map long open effect control process is performed. Details of the hold icon display control process, the variable icon display control process, and the ordinary long open effect control process will be described later. Note that the hold icon display control process, the variable icon display control process, and the ordinary figure long open effect control process may be executed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or the special figure 1 and the special figure display process. It may be executed in common in FIG. In step S1105 ′ following step S1103 ′, other effect control processing is performed.

<Hold icon display control process>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the hold icon display control process. First, in step S1201 ′ of the hold icon display control process, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the special figure variable game has increased based on various commands such as the prefetch result information command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 ′. To do. If it is determined that the number of holds has increased, the process proceeds to step S1203 ′. If it is determined that the number of holds has not increased, the process proceeds to step S1209 ′.

  In step S1203 ′, a pending icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the hold icon change scenario lottery process, with reference to a hold icon display mode lottery table (FIGS. 26 to 29), which will be described later, the number of hold of the special figure variable game, the timer group corresponding to the increased hold, and the hold icon display Based on the random number value for the mode lottery, a hold icon change scenario for the increased hold is determined by lottery. The on-hold icon change scenario is information representing a change in the display mode of the on-hold icon until the on-hold is consumed. For example, “On winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: blue” is expressed. . The display mode of the hold icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. If the timer group information corresponding to the increased hold cannot be acquired (for example, when prefetching is not executed), the display mode of the hold icon until the hold is consumed is set to the default “white”. Set.

  In step S1205 ′ following step S1203 ′, the determined hold icon change scenario is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 508 ′. Here, the number of scenario storage areas in the RAM 508 ′ is the same as the number of reserves for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (in this example, four for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). have. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the first hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the data (hold icon change scenario) in the storage area corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. The data in the storage area corresponding to 2 to 4 is moved up to the storage area corresponding to 1 to 3 and stored again.

  In step S1207 ′ following step S1205 ′, a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ (for example, including a process of setting an increase animation of the hold icon). I do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209 ′.

  In step S1209 ′, it is determined whether a hold icon change condition is satisfied. The hold icon change condition is, for example, that a special figure variable game is started. In this example, it is determined that the hold icon change condition has been satisfied if it is the timing at which a command indicating the start of a special symbol variation game such as a symbol variation start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400 ′, and otherwise It is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1211 ′. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213 ′.

  In step S1211 ′, a hold icon change process is performed. In the hold icon change process, the hold icon change scenario is read from each storage area of the scenario storage area in the RAM 508 ′, and it is determined whether or not the display mode of each hold icon needs to be changed based on each hold icon change scenario. If a change is necessary, a process of changing the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a process of setting a change animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1213 ′.

  In step S1213 ′, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. For example, if it is determined that the number of holds has decreased based on the symbol variation start command or the prefetch result information command from the first sub-control unit 400 ′, the process proceeds to step S1215 ′, and it is determined that the number of holds has not decreased. If it is, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1215 ′, a hold icon display position change process is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds (for example, a movement animation or deletion animation of the hold icon, a movement animation between the hold / change icon, etc. is set). Process). Thereafter, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

<Variation icon display control processing>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the change icon display control process. First, in step S1301 ′ of the variation icon display control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the special figure variation game is started. For example, if it is the timing at which the symbol variation start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400 ′, it is determined that the special symbol variation game is started, and otherwise, the timing at which the special symbol variation game is started. It is determined that it is not. When it is determined that it is the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1303 ′, and when it is determined that it is not the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1307 ′.

  In step S1303 ′, a variable icon lottery process is performed. In the variation icon lottery process, for example, with reference to a variation icon display mode lottery table (FIG. 30) described later, a display group immediately before the start of variation (immediately before suspension digestion) of the suspended icon corresponding to the started special figure variation game. (If the display mode immediately before the start of the change of the hold icon is white, blue, or red, it is “ball system”, and if it is a box or a thousand box, it is “box system”). Based on the timer and the random number value for variation icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon for the started special figure variation game is determined by lottery. The display mode of the variation icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest”. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be determined by the hold icon display control process (step S1203 ′) together with the display mode of the hold icon. In that case, the variation icon lottery process in step S1303 ′ can be omitted. In that case, the information on the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be included in the hold icon change scenario.

  In step S1305 ′ subsequent to step S1303 ′, a process for displaying the change icon of the determined display mode in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a moving animation or a change animation between the hold / change icons is set. Process). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1307 ′.

  In step S1307 ′, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. For example, if the timing is from receiving the symbol variation start command from the first sub-control unit 400 ′ to receiving the symbol variation stop command from the first sub-control unit 400 ′, the special symbol variation game is being executed. It is determined that there is, and otherwise, it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1309 ′. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed, the variable icon display control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control process. .

  In step S1309 ′, it is determined whether the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display interruption condition, for example, an effect executed on almost the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ such as a super reach effect is started, or that a power interruption has occurred (for example, the first sub-control) The occurrence of power interruption is detected based on a command from the section 400 '). If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1311 ′. If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313 ′.

  In step S1311 ′, a variable icon display interruption process is performed. In the change icon display interruption process, a process for interrupting (or stopping or stopping) the display of the change icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1313 ′. Here, when the display of the fluctuation icon corresponding to a certain special figure variable game is interrupted, the display of the fluctuation icon may be resumed during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game or may not be resumed. is there.

  In step S1313 ′, it is determined whether the display of the variation icon is suspended. If it is determined that the display of the variation icon is interrupted, the process proceeds to step S1315 ′. If it is determined that the display of the variation icon is not interrupted (for example, the variation icon is being displayed), step S1319 ′ is performed. Proceed to

  In step S1315 ′, it is determined whether the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display restart condition, for example, the super reach effect has been completed, the power has been recovered from the power interruption state (for example, the power recovery has been detected based on the command from the first sub-control unit 400 ′), for example. , Etc. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1317 ′. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323 ′.

  In step S1317 ′, a variable icon display restart process is performed. In the variation icon display restart process, a process for resuming the display of the variation icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323 ′. In the variation icon display restart process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a process of deleting the variation icon may be performed when the display of the variation icon is resumed.

  In step S1319 ′, it is determined whether the variable icon change condition is satisfied. Examples of the variable icon change condition include winning a predetermined random number lottery performed by the second sub-control unit 500 ′. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1321 ′. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323 ′.

  In step S1321 ′, change icon change processing is performed. In the variation icon change processing, processing for changing the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ (for example, processing for setting variation animation of the variation icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323 ′.

  In step S1323 ′, it is determined whether or not a variable icon display end condition is satisfied. As the change icon display end condition, for example, that the special figure change game has ended (for example, that a symbol change stop command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 '), a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of change, etc. There is. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1325 ′. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is not satisfied, the variable icon display control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control process. To do.

  In step S1325 ′, a variation icon display end process is performed. In the change icon display end process, a process for deleting the change icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ (for example, a process for setting a change icon deletion animation) is performed.

  Note that the variation icon may be displayed during all special figure variable games, or during a special figure variable game when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific performance mode is set). You may make it display only.

<Normal figure long opening effect control processing>
FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of the ordinary long open effect control process. First, in step S1401 ′, the ordinary long open turning effect execution flag stored in the RAM 508 ′ is referred to, and it is determined whether this ordinary figure long open turning effect execution flag is OFF or ON. As a result of the determination, when the ordinary figure long open turning effect execution flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1402 ′, and when it is ON, the process proceeds to step S1410 ′ shown in FIG.

  In step S1410 ′ shown in FIG. 25, it is determined whether or not the usual variable display is stopped. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1411 ′, and if not, the process ends. In step S1411 ′, the normal map long open effect execution flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S1412 ′, the normal map long open effect execution process is executed. Further, in the next step S1413 ′, the processing is terminated after the ordinary figure long opening effect execution flag is set to ON. That is, in Steps S1410 ′ to S1413 ′, the ordinary long opening effect is ended and the ordinary long opening effect is started with the suspension of the ordinary figure as a trigger.

  Returning to FIG. 24, in step S1402 ′, the ordinary long open effect execution flag stored in the RAM 508 ′ is referred to, and it is determined whether the ordinary long open effect execution flag is OFF or ON. As a result of the determination, if the ordinary figure long opening effect execution flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1403 '. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S1414' shown in FIG.

  In step S1414 'shown in FIG. 25, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable game has been suspended. If so, the process proceeds to step S1415'. If not, the process proceeds to step S1416 '. In step S1415 ′, 1 is added to the special figure 2 special hold counter stored in the RAM 508 ′. In the next step S1416 ′, it is determined whether or not the opening of the ordinary electric accessory (second special figure winning port 232 ′) is completed, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1417 ′ and the ordinary drawing long opening effect. The process ends after the execution flag is set to OFF. If not applicable, the process ends without performing the process of step S1417 ′. That is, in Steps S1416 ′ to S1417 ′, the ordinary drawing long opening effect ends with the end of opening of the ordinary electric accessory (second special figure winning port 232 ′).

  Returning to FIG. 24, in step S1403 ′, the value of the special figure 2 special hold counter described above is referred to and it is determined whether or not this special figure 2 special hold counter is zero. As a result of the determination, if the special figure 2 special hold counter is 0 (when there is no special figure 2 hold), the process proceeds to step S1404 '. If other than 0 (when there is no special figure 2 hold), The process proceeds to step S1418 ′ shown in FIG.

  In step S1418 ′ shown in FIG. 25, it is determined whether or not the variable display of FIG. 2 has been started. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1419 ′, and if not, the process ends. In step S1419 ′, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 special hold counter, and in the next step S1420 ′, the special figure effect processing is performed and then the process ends. That is, in steps S1418 ′ to S1420 ′, when there is a special figure 2 variable game on hold, a special figure 2 special variable effect is started together with the start of fluctuation of special figure 2. Here, in the special figure 2 special variation effect, a special effect different from the normal effect is performed in accordance with the variation time (timer number) sent from the main control unit 300 via the first sub-control unit 400.

  Referring back to FIG. 24, in step S1404 ′, it is determined whether or not the usual fluctuation display is being performed. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1405 ′, and if not, the process ends. In step S1405 ′, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol determined using the above-mentioned general map determination table is a general map B or a general map C. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1408 ′. If not, the process proceeds to step S1406 ′. In step S1406 ′, the ordinary long open gassing effect lottery process is performed, and in the next step S1407 ′, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step 1406 ′ has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1408 ′, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S1408 ', the ordinary figure long open turning effect execution process is performed. In the next step S1409', the above-described ordinary figure long open turning effect execution flag is set to ON, and then the process ends.

<Pending icon display mode lottery table>
FIGS. 26 to 29 show examples of the hold icon display mode lottery table used in the hold icon change scenario lottery process (step S1203) of the hold icon display control process. FIG. 26 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased fourth hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 3 (when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4). ing. FIG. 27 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased third hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 2 (when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3). ing. FIG. 28 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the second hold increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 1 (when the number of holds increases from 1 to 2). ing. FIG. 29 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the first hold that is increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 0 (when the number of holds is increased from 0 to 1). ing.

  In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, a hold icon change scenario for the hold is determined based on the timer group to which the increased variable timer of hold belongs and the random number value for the hold icon display mode lottery. Is done. The timer group to which the increased variable timer for holding belongs is determined based on a prefetch result information command or the like from the first sub-control unit 400 ′, and the random number value for holding icon display mode lottery is a random number counter provided in the RAM 508 ′. Obtained from. The range that the random number value for holding icon display mode lottery in this example can take is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical value range is 100).

  For example, when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 1 to 5 (timer group 1, immediately off-line), as shown in FIG. In the random number range 0 to 79), a pending icon change scenario of “at the time of winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: white, after 3 change: white” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of the display, and thereafter, white is maintained until the hold is digested and the hold icon is deleted. In the display mode column of the hold icon display mode lottery table, “-” indicates that the display mode set before that is maintained. Further, in the same display mode column, the display mode immediately before digestion of the suspension is shown in gray.

  Also, for example, when the number of holds increases from two to three, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 8 to 10 (timer group 3, expectation small: hit), as shown in FIG. With the probability (random number range 56 to 60), a pending icon change scenario of “when winning: white, after 1 change: blue, after 2 change: red” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of display, changes to blue after 1 change, and changes to red after 2 changes (just before the hold is digested).

  The display mode of the hold icon in this example is “red”, “blue”, “white” from the higher reliability (big hit reliability) in the spherical hold icon display group. In the display group, they are “thousand boxes” and “boxes” in order of reliability. In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the timer groups 3, 5, and 7 selected at the time of winning are more reliable than the timer groups 1, 2, 4, and 6 selected at the time of losing. It is easy to select a high display mode, and it is easy to change to a display mode with high reliability.

<Variable icon display mode lottery table>
FIG. 30 shows an example of a variation icon display mode lottery table used in the variation icon lottery process (step S1303 ′) of the variation icon display control process. In the variation icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 30, the final display mode (holding icon display group) of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started, the variable timer of the special figure variable game, and the fluctuation Based on the random number value for icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon is determined. The random icon value for the variation icon display mode lottery is acquired from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508 ′. The range that can be taken by the random icon for variation icon display mode lottery in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is white (the hold icon display group is a ball system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 9, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “white” is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 0 to 34), “blue” is selected with a probability of 40% (random number range 35 to 74), and a probability of 20% ( “Red” is selected in the random number range 75 to 94), and “gold” is selected with a probability of 5% (random number range 95 to 99). In this example, even if the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red other than white, the display mode (white, blue, red, gold) of the variable icon is selected with the same probability as when the display mode is white. However, when the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be different from the probability. For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon is red, the selection probability of white or blue is lower than the above (including 0%), and the selection probability of red or gold is higher than the above (including 100%). )

  Further, for example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is a box (the hold icon display group is a box system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 14, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “smoke” (for example, a mode in which smoke comes out of the box to indicate that it is an empty box) is selected with a probability of 2% (random range 0 to 1). , “Sake” (for example, a mode in which liquor comes out of the box) is selected with a probability of 33% (random number range 2-34), and “sword” (with a probability of 30% (random number range 35-64)) For example, a mode in which a sword comes out from a box is selected, and a “family crest” (for example, a mode in which a family crest comes out from a box) is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 65 to 99). . Similarly to the case where the hold icon display group is a spherical system, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be varied depending on whether the final display form of the hold icon is a box or a thousand boxes.

  The display mode of the variation icon corresponding to the hold icon of the spherical system is “gold”, “red”, “blue”, and “white” from the higher reliability. The display mode of the fluctuation icon corresponding to the box-type hold icon is “family crest”, “sword”, “sake”, and “smoke” in order of high reliability. It should be noted that the display modes “sword” and “sake” of the fluctuation icon are confronted with the swordsman character and the sword if the specific contents (for example, “sword”) are executed during the fluctuation (for example, “sword”). This suggests a swordsman reach directing, “if you drink”, a drink comparison reach directing by confronting you with a samurai character. The big hit reliability of each display mode shown in FIG. 30 is the reliability in the special figure 1 variable game in the non-electric support state and the non-probability change state. The reliability of each display mode of the variation icon may be different for each gaming state, or may be the same for all gaming states. In addition, the reliability of each display mode may be different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or may be the same between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

  Here, when referring to reliability, general reliability indicates the ratio of occurrence of a target event among multiple occurrences, but reliability in this industry is a big hit. It is an abbreviation for reliability and indicates what percentage of the abbreviation is a big hit when an effect of the same mode is executed. For example, the display mode “red” of the variation icon having a reliability of 30.3% notifies the player that the probability that the success / failure result of the variation is a big hit is 30.3%, The player is informed that the probability that the result will be out of date is 69.7%. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is notifying the jackpot reliability at the same time and notifying the reliability at the same time. In addition, the reliability is not limited to a value of 1, and may have a width, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution of the random number range in the table shown in FIG. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  As described above, there are five display modes of the hold icon in this example: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. There are eight display modes of the fluctuation icon: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, “family crest”. Among these, three types of “white”, “blue”, and “red” are common display modes for the hold icon and the change icon. Two types of “box” and “thousand box” are display modes specific to the hold icon, and five types of “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest” are specific to the change icon It is a display mode. In other words, the hold icon display mode of this example has three types of common display modes and two types of unique display modes, and the display mode of variable icons includes three types of common display modes and five types of unique display modes. There are display modes. In this example, the number of unique display modes of the variable icon (5 in this example) is larger than the number of unique display modes of the hold icon (2 in this example). The display mode of the hold icon may be a common display mode (unique display mode is 0).

<Examples of production>
Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 ′ according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Variable display of decorative design and special figure 1, special figure 2>
In each diagram used in the present embodiment, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′ of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is represented by a thin white arrow pointing downward. The special figure 1 display device 212 ′, the special figure 2 display device 214 ′, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 ′, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 ′ are turned off in white, and the lighted portions are shown in black. ing. In the special figure 1 display device 212 'or the special figure 2 display device 214', the state where the central segment is repeatedly turned on and off indicates that the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is being performed. Show. The number of lighting of the LED in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'or the special figure 2 holding lamp 220' indicates the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game.

<Variable icon display area, hold icon display area>
In this embodiment, an effect display area 208d ′ of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ and other areas are provided with a variable icon display area 800 ′, a hold icon display area 900 ′, and the like. For example, in the effect display shown in FIG. 31, only the hold icon display area 900 ′ is provided in the effect display area 208d ′, and in the effect display shown in FIG. 34, the change icon display area 800 ′ and the hold are held in the effect display area 208d ′. Both icon display areas 900 'are provided.

  In the variation icon display area 800 ′, one variation icon can be displayed, and whether or not the variation is appropriate can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notice) according to the display mode of the variation icon. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 900 ′ described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon. In addition, a frame-like image (indicated by a rectangle in the drawing) indicating the position of the variation icon display region 800 ′ may be displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display region 800 ′. The frame-like image may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 800 ′), or may be displayed constantly. Good.

  In the hold icon display area 900 ′, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 900 ′, the number of hold of the special figure variable game can be notified according to the number of the hold icons, and the success or failure of the hold is notified with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon ( Pre-reading notice) is possible. Note that the number of the hold icon display area 900 ′ is not limited to one. For example, the hold icon display area for special figure 1 for informing the number of hold of special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game hold. Two special icon 2 hold icon display areas for informing the number may be provided (details will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, four hold icons, which are the maximum number of hold of the special figure variable game, can be displayed in one hold icon display area 900 ′. The display area 900 ′ is a first area 900a and a second area. The area is roughly divided into four areas 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. The first area 900a to the fourth area 900d correspond to the first to fourth hold orders of the special figure variable game, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area 900a. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d, 2 to 4 hold icons can be displayed. Each hold icon corresponding to the eye hold can be displayed.

  In this embodiment, a part of the hold icon display area 900 ′ may also serve as the variable icon display area 800 ′. In this case, the hold icon display area 900 ′ includes one or more hold icons. In addition to being able to display icons, one variable icon can be displayed in some display areas. For example, the effect display shown in FIG. 31 is an example in which the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ also serves as the variable icon display area 800 ′.

<Example A>
FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example A in time series in units of one frame. The first state shown in FIG. 31 (a) is a state in which the special figure is stopped. In this variable stop state, the main control unit 300 ′ stops and displays the special figure E (displacement) on the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ and stops displaying the special figure d (detachment) on the special figure 2 display device 214 ′. At the same time, all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 ′ are turned on to notify that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is 4, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 ′ are turned off. Then, it is informed that the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0.

  Further, in the state where the fluctuation is stopped, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the second sub-control unit 500 ′ have a symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 4” in the symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′. -Decoration 3 -decoration 1 ") is stopped, the hold icon PI1 of the display mode" white "is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ', and the display mode" white "is displayed in the second area 900b. Is displayed in the third area 900c, the hold icon PI3 in the display mode “white” is displayed, and the hold icon PI4 in the display mode “white” is displayed in the fourth area 900d. It is informed that the number of floating games held is four. That is, in this state of variable stop, the number of holds (4) indicated by the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'and the number of holds (4) indicated by the hold icons PI1 to PI4 in the hold icon display area 900' match. Yes.

  In this embodiment, the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ also serves as the variable icon display area 800, and the hold icon PI1 displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ is It is configured to change to a change icon VI at the start of the next change.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 31 (b) is a state in which one frame has passed from the fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 31 (a) and the fluctuation display of FIG. In this fluctuation start state, the main control unit 300 ′ starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 using the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ and turns off the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 ′. Then, it is informed that the number of suspension of special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 (one special figure 1 variable game has been suspended). Further, in this variation start state, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the second sub-control unit 500 ′ start the decorative symbol variation display and also display the hold icon display region 900 ′ that also serves as the variation icon display region 800. In the first area 900a, the deletion animation of the changed icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 is started. In this example, as the erasure animation, the fluctuation icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed, and the fluctuation icon VI is gradually framed out from the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ which also serves as the fluctuation icon display area 800 ′. Displays a moving image that disappears.

  In this example, the deletion animation of the change icon VI is started at the same timing as the turning off of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 ′ by the main control unit 300. For example, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 by the main control part 300 is started. The erasing animation of the change icon VI may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after 'is turned off. That is, the timing at which the hold lamp is turned off (the timing at which the light (light) of the hold lamp is extinguished) and the start timing of the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be the same or different (the same applies to the following embodiments). .

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. In this state, the main control unit 300 ′ continues the variable display of the special figure 1 using the special figure 1 display device 212 ′. Further, in this state, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the second sub-control unit 500 ′ continue to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and at the same time the first of the hold icon display region 900 ′ that also serves as the variable icon display region 800 ′. In the area 900a, the erasing animation of the change icon VI is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. In this state, the main control unit 300 ′ continues the variable display of the special figure 1 using the special figure 1 display device 212 ′. Further, in this state, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the second sub-control unit 500 ′ continue to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and at the same time the first of the hold icon display region 900 ′ that also serves as the variable icon display region 800 ′. In the area 900a, the erasing animation of the change icon VI is continued. Furthermore, in this state, the first sub-control unit 400 ′ and the second sub-control unit 500 ′ have started a moving animation that moves the hold icons PI2 to PI4 at a predetermined speed in the hold icon display area 900 ′.

  In this example, the moving animation of the hold icons PI2 to PI4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 4D. However, for example, it may be the same as the start timing of the erasing animation of the variable icon VI, or the erasing animation starts. Thereafter, it may be after a predetermined period has elapsed, may be the same as the timing at which the hold lamp is turned off, or may be after the hold lamp has been turned off and after a predetermined period has passed (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  In this example, as the moving animation, the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c at the first speed, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 is moved from the third area 900c to the second area at the same first speed. A moving image is displayed that moves toward the area 900b and moves the hold icon PI2 from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at a second speed faster than the first speed. Hereinafter, this moving animation will be described in detail.

  The state shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of the moving animation shown in FIG. During one frame of FIGS. 4D to 5E, the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1 at the first speed, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 is set to the same first icon. The distance L1 moves from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b at a speed of Note that the hold icon PI2 is stopped and displayed in the second area 900b without moving at the timing shown in FIG. Note that the movement of the hold icons PI3 and PI4 may be started after the erase animation of the change icon VI has been completed and the change icon VI has completely disappeared from the hold icon display area 900 ′.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 8F is a state in which two frames have elapsed from the start of the moving animation shown in FIG. During one frame of FIG. 5E to FIG. 5F, the hold icon PI4 moves at the first speed from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 is the same. The first region moves from the third region 900c toward the second region 900b by a distance L1. Accordingly, the hold icon PI4 moves from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1 × 2 and the hold icon PI3 is the third between the two frames shown in FIG. It has moved by a distance L1 × 2 from the region 900c toward the second region 900b. At this timing, the moving hold icon PI3 comes into contact with the hold icon PI2 being stopped (for example, the outer edge of the hold icon PI3 and a part of the outer edge of the hold icon PI2 come into contact with each other, and the effect Directing to express contact).

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, a display is started in which the hold icon PI2 is moved from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at a second speed faster than the first speed. Here, the second speed is set to twice the first speed, but it is needless to say that the second speed is not limited to this.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 32 (g) is a state in which three frames have elapsed since the start of the moving animation shown in FIG. 31 (d). During one frame of FIG. 31 (f) to FIG. 32 (g), the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c by the distance L1 at the first speed, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 is the same. The first region moves from the third region 900c toward the second region 900b by a distance L1. Accordingly, between the three frames of FIG. 31D to FIG. 32F, the hold icon PI4 moves by the distance L1 × 3 from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 It has moved by a distance L1 × 3 from the region 900c toward the second region 900b.

  In addition, the hold icon PI2 is moved from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at the second speed by a distance L2 longer than the distance L1 between one frame in FIGS. 31 (f) to 32 (g). doing. In this example, the distance L2 is set to twice the distance L1 (L2 = L1 × 2), but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 32 (h) is a state in which four frames have elapsed since the start of the moving animation shown in FIG. 31 (d). During one frame of FIG. 32 (g) to FIG. 32 (h), the hold icon PI4 moves at the first speed from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 is the same. The first region moves from the third region 900c toward the second region 900b by a distance L1. Therefore, between the four frames of FIG. 31D to FIG. 32H, the hold icon PI4 moves from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1 × 4, and at the same time, the hold icon PI3 It has moved by a distance L1 × 4 from the region 900c toward the second region 900b. As a result, the hold icon PI4 has completed the movement from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c, and the hold icon PI3 has completed the movement from the third area 900c to the second area 900b.

  Also, the hold icon PI2 is moved by the distance L2 from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at the second speed between the frames of FIG. 32 (g) to FIG. 32 (h). Accordingly, the hold icon PI2 moves from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a by a distance L2 × 2 between the two frames of FIG. 31 (f) to FIG. 32 (h). As a result, the hold icon PI2 has been moved from the second area 900b to the first area 900a. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 32 (h), all the movements of the hold icons PI2 to PI4 are completed, and the movement animation of the hold icons PI2 to PI4 is finished.

  As described above, in this example, in the movement animation of the hold icons PI2 to PI4, the movement speed of the hold icon PI2 is different from the movement speed of the hold icons PI3 and PI4.

<Example B>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the effect display according to Example B in time series in units of one frame. In this example, the erasure animation of the variable icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are started at the same time, and both are ended at almost the same timing.

  Specifically, at the variation start timing shown in FIG. 5B, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and in the first area 900a of the suspended icon display area 900 ′ which also serves as the variation icon display area 800 ′, An erasing animation of the changed icon VI changed from the icon PI1 is started. In this example, as the erasure animation, the fluctuation icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed, and the fluctuation icon VI is gradually framed out from the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ which also serves as the fluctuation icon display area 800 ′. Displays a moving image that disappears.

  At this timing, a moving animation for moving the hold icons PI2 to PI4 at a predetermined speed is started in the hold icon display area 900 ′. In this example, as the moving animation, the hold icon PI3 is moved from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b at the first speed, and the hold icon PI4 is moved at the second speed higher than the first speed to the fourth speed. At the same time as moving from the region 900d toward the third region 900c, a moving image is displayed in which the hold icon PI2 is moved from the second region 900b toward the first region 900a at the same second speed. Hereinafter, this moving animation will be described in detail.

  The state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of the erase animation and the movement animation shown in FIG. During one frame from (b) to (c) in the figure, the change icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed to continue the erase animation, and the hold icon PI3 is moved from the third area 900c to the first speed at the first speed. The distance L1 is moved toward the second area 900b. At this timing, the hold icon PI2 is stopped and displayed in the second area 900b without moving, and the hold icon PI4 is stopped and displayed in the fourth area 900d without moving.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which two frames have elapsed from the start of the erase animation and the movement animation shown in FIG. During one frame from (c) to (d) in the same figure, the change icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed to continue the erase animation, and the hold icon PI3 is moved from the third area 900c to the first speed at the first speed. The distance L1 is moved toward the second area 900b. Accordingly, the hold icon PI3 moves from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b by a distance L1 × 2 between the two frames shown in FIG. At this time, there is an effect in which the moving hold icon PI3 makes contact with the stopped hold icon PI2.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5D, the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c at a second speed faster than the first speed, and at the same time, the hold icon PI2 is moved to the same speed. Display that moves from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at the second speed is started. In this example, the second speed is set to twice the first speed, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which three frames have elapsed from the start of the erase animation and the movement animation shown in FIG. During one frame of FIG. 6D to FIG. 8E, the change icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed to continue the erase animation, and the hold icon PI3 is moved to the third area 900c at the first speed. To the second region 900b by a distance L1. Accordingly, the hold icon PI3 is moved from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b by a distance L1 × 3 between the three frames shown in FIG.

  Also, during one frame of FIG. 4D to FIG. 4E, the hold icon PI4 is moved at the second speed from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c by a distance L2 longer than the distance L1. At the same time, the hold icon PI2 is moved by the distance L2 from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at the second speed. In this example, the distance L2 is set to twice the distance L1 (L2 = L1 × 2), but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which four frames have elapsed since the start of the erase animation and the movement animation shown in FIG. Between one frame of FIG. 9E and FIG. 8F, the hold icon PI3 is moved by the distance L1 from the third area 900c to the second area 900b at the first speed. Accordingly, the hold icon PI3 moves from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b by a distance L1 × 4 between the four frames shown in FIG. As a result, the hold icon PI3 has been moved from the third area 900c to the second area 900b.

  In addition, during one frame of FIG. 5E to FIG. 8F, the hold icon PI4 is moved by the distance L2 from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c at the second speed, and at the same time, the hold icon PI2 At a second speed from the second region 900b toward the first region 900a by a distance L2. Therefore, the hold icon PI4 moves by a distance L2 × 2 from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c between the two frames in FIG. 4D to FIG. 5F, and the hold icon PI2 is in the second area. The distance L2 × 2 moves from 900b toward the first region 900a. As a result, the hold icon PI4 has completed the movement from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c, and the hold icon PI2 has completed the movement from the second area 900b to the first area 900a. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5F, all the movements of the hold icons PI2 to PI4 are completed, and the movement animation of the hold icons PI2 to PI4 is finished.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 5F, the variation icon VI is erased by framing out from the first region 900a of the hold icon display region 900 ′ which also serves as the variation icon display region 800 ′. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5F, the movement of the variation icon VI is completed, and the deletion animation of the variation icon VI is finished.

<Example C>
34 and 35 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example C in time series in units of one frame. This example is an example of an effect display that moves three hold icons at different speeds. In this example, the variable icon display area 800 ′ and the hold icon display area 900 ′ are provided in separate areas.

  Specifically, in the variation start state shown in FIG. 34 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the movement animation of the variation icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 is started. In this example, as the moving animation, a moving image in which the variation icon VI is moved at a predetermined speed from the first region 900a of the hold icon display region 900 ′ to the variation icon display region 800 ′ is displayed.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which one frame has elapsed since the start of the moving animation of the variation icon shown in FIG. At this timing, the movement animation of the variation icon VI is continued, and the movement animation for moving the hold icons PI2 to PI4 at a predetermined speed in the hold icon display area 900 ′ is started. In this example, as the moving animation, the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c at the first speed, and the hold icon PI3 is moved at the second speed slower than the first speed. A moving image is displayed that moves from the region 900c toward the second region 900b and moves the hold icon PI2 from the second region 900b toward the first region 900a at a third speed that is slower than the second speed. Hereinafter, this moving animation will be described in detail.

  The state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of the moving animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. During one frame of FIG. 10C to FIG. 10D, the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1 at the first speed, and the hold icon PI3 is moved to the first frame. The second icon 900 moves from the third area 900c to the second area 900b by a distance L2 at a second speed slower than the second speed, and the hold icon PI2 moves from the third area 900c to the second speed at a third speed slower than the second speed. 2 is moved by a distance L3 toward the area 900b.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which two frames have elapsed from the start of the moving animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. During one frame of FIG. 4D to FIG. 4E, the hold icon PI4 is moved at the first speed from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1, and the hold icon PI3 is moved to the first frame. The second icon 900 moves from the third area 900c to the second area 900b by a distance L2 at a second speed slower than the second speed, and the hold icon PI2 moves from the third area 900c to the second speed at a third speed slower than the second speed. 2 is moved by a distance L3 toward the area 900b. Accordingly, the hold icon PI4 moves from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c by a distance L1 × 2 and the hold icon PI3 is in the third area between the two frames in FIG. The hold icon PI2 has moved from the second area 900b to the first area 900a by a distance L3 * 2 from 900c to the second area 900b. At this time, the hold icon P4 has been moved from the fourth area 900d to the third area 900c.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which three frames have elapsed since the start of the moving animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. During one frame of FIG. 5E to FIG. 5G, the hold icon PI3 is moved at the second speed from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b by a distance L2, and the hold icon PI2 is moved to the second frame. The third region 900c moves from the third region 900c toward the second region 900b by a distance L3 at a third speed that is slower than the first speed. Accordingly, the hold icon PI3 moves from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b by a distance L2 × 3 and the hold icon PI2 is in the second area between the three frames in FIG. The distance L3 × 3 is moved from 900b toward the first region 900a. At this time, the hold icon P3 has been moved from the third area 900c to the second area 900d, and the change icon VI also changes from the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ to the change icon display area 800. The movement up to has been completed, and the movement animation of the fluctuation icon has ended.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which four frames have elapsed since the start of the moving animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. Between one frame of FIG. 5F and FIG. 5G, the hold icon PI2 is moved at the third speed from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a by a distance L3. Accordingly, the hold icon PI2 moves from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a by a distance L3 × 4 between the four frames shown in FIG. At this time, the hold icon P2 has been moved from the second area 900b to the first area 900a, and as a result, the movement animation of all the hold icons PI2 to PI4 has been completed.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 11H, the erasure animation of the variation icon VI is started in the variation icon display area 800. In this example, as the erasure animation of the variation icon VI, as shown in FIGS. 34 (h) to 35 (l), the variation icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed, and the variation icon VI is displayed in the variation icon display area. A moving image that gradually goes out (disappears) from 800 'is displayed.

<Example D>
36 and 37 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example D in time series in units of one frame. In this example, a special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ for notifying the number of special figure 1 variable games held using an LED, and the number of special figure 2 variable games held in the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. Two special-purpose hold icon display areas 902 ′ for special figure 2 are provided for notification by image using the display area of the part, and in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′, the time when the hold display changes In the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ', the time during which the hold display changes is lengthened. Note that the time for the hold display to change in the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ may be shorter than the time for the hold display to change in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 901 ′.

  The first state shown in FIG. 36 (a) is a state in which the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped. In this variable stop state, all the LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'are turned on to notify that the number of the special figure 1 variable game hold is 4, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220' Is turned off to notify that the number of suspensions of the special figure 2 variable game is zero. Also, in this variable stop state, all the LEDs in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'are turned on to notify that the special figure 1 variable game has 4 hold and the special figure 2 hold. By not displaying the hold icon in each of the first area 902a to the fourth area 902d of the icon display area 902 ′, it is notified that the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is zero.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 7B is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the stop of the change shown in FIG. At the timing of starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started using the special figure 1 display device 212 ', and the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218' is turned off to hold the special figure 1 It is informing that the number has decreased from 4 to 3. In addition, at the timing of this change start, the decorative symbol change display is started and the rightmost LED in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ is turned off to change the hold number of the special figure 1 from 4 to 3. Informs that it has decreased. That is, in this example, the turn-off timing of the LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'is the same as the turn-off timing of the LED of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901'. The turn-off timing may be different. For example, after the LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'is turned off, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901' may be turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed. It may be the opposite or vice versa (the same applies to the other embodiments).

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 5B, and the state shown in FIG. Two frames have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation shown, and the first hold of the special figure 2 variable game has occurred during the fluctuation display of special figure 1. At this timing, the leftmost LED of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is lit to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1. At this timing, the state where no hold icon is displayed in each of the first area 902a to the fourth area 902d of the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 'is maintained. An increase animation of the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the eye hold is started. In this example, a moving image that gradually increases the size of the hold icon is displayed as an increase animation of the hold icon.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the state in which the first hold of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. During the display, the second hold of the special figure 2 variable game has occurred. At this timing, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 1 to 2. Further, at this timing, the display of the hold icon PI1 is started in the first area 902a of the hold icon display area 902 ′ for the special figure 2 in accordance with the increase animation of the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the first hold. The increasing animation for gradually increasing the size of the hold icon PI1 is continued over a period of 3 frames until the timing shown in FIG.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 8F is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the state in which the second hold of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the hold icon PI2 corresponding to the second hold is started in the second area 902b of the hold icon display area 902 ′ for the special figure 2, and thereafter, until the timing shown in FIG. The increasing animation for gradually increasing the size of the hold icon PI2 is continued over the time of the frame.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 37 (k) is a state in which the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold is started (variation start). At the timing of starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started using the special figure 2 display device 212 ', and the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220' is turned off to turn off the special figure 2 as shown in FIG. It is informed that the number of holds has decreased from 2 to 1 (one special figure 2 variable game hold has been consumed). In addition, at the timing of the start of the change, the decorative symbol change display is started, but the display of the hold icon PI1 displayed in the first area 901a of the special icon 2 hold icon display area 901 'is maintained.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 11L is a state in which one frame has elapsed since the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. At this timing, an erasing animation for gradually erasing the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the first hold is started in the first area 902a of the hold icon display area 902 ′ for the special figure 2, and thereafter (o) in FIG. The erasing animation for gradually erasing the hold icon PI1 is continued over a period of 3 frames until the timing shown in FIG.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 9 (n), a moving animation for moving the hold icon PI2 displayed in the second area 902b of the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ to the first area 902a is started. Thereafter, a moving animation for moving the hold icon PI2 from the second area 902b to the first area 902a is continued over a period of four frames until the state shown in FIG.

  The location of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ is not particularly limited, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ and the special figure 2 hold icon display are displayed. The location of the area 902 ′ may be switched. Further, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'may be arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208' or on the left and right. Further, because of the priority variation of the special figure 2, the special icon 2 holding icon display area 902 'is arranged at a position higher than the special figure 1 holding icon display area 901', but the special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 'is arranged. May be arranged at a position lower than the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 '. Further, the LEDs of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ are arranged in the horizontal direction, but may be arranged in the vertical direction, may be arranged obliquely, or may be arranged along an arbitrary curve. In addition, when the fluctuation time of the variable game such as the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 10 (k) is short, the display of the animation having a relatively long display time such as the erase animation or the movement animation is stopped halfway. It may be replaced with another animation having a short display time.

<Example E>
38 and 39 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example E in time series in units of one frame. In Example D above, the LED of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'is turned off at the timing when the special figure 1 hold lamp 218' is turned off. In this example, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'is turned off. Later, the brightness of the LED in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'is gradually reduced.

  For example, in the fluctuation start state shown in FIG. 38 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 ′ is used to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 ′ is turned on. The light is turned off, and it is informed that the number of holds in FIG. 1 has decreased from 4 to 3. In addition, at the timing of the start of the change, the decorative pattern change display is started, and the rightmost LED of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'is changed from 100% of the maximum brightness to 50% of the maximum brightness. After one frame shown in the figure (c), the brightness of the LED has been lowered from 50% of the maximum brightness to 0% of the maximum brightness, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3. We are reporting.

  Similarly, when the number of holds increases, the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 'is turned on at the timing shown in FIG. It is informed that it has increased. At this timing, the brightness of the rightmost LED in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'is increased from 0% of the maximum brightness to 50% of the maximum brightness, and then one frame shown in FIG. After the elapse of time, the brightness of the LED is increased from 50% of the maximum brightness to 100% of the maximum brightness, and it is informed that the reserved number in FIG. 1 has increased from 3 to 4. Since the subsequent deletion animation and movement animation of the hold icon are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, although the example which changes the brightness | luminance of LED in three steps, 0%, 50%, and 100% of the maximum brightness | luminance was shown here, the brightness | luminance of LED may be changed in four steps or more, and LED blinks The interval time may be changed in a plurality of stages.

<Example F>
40 and 41 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example F in time series in units of one frame. In this example, a special icon 1 hold icon first display area 901 ′ for notifying the number of special figure 1 variable games held using an LED, and a decorative symbol display device 208 ′ for the number of special figure 1 variable games held. 2 is provided as a special icon 1 hold icon second display area 903 'for displaying an image using a part of the display area, and the special icon 1 hold icon first display area 901' is held. And the mode of the hold display in the special icon 1 hold icon second display area 903 'are different.

  The state shown in FIG. 40B is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the stop of the change shown in FIG. At the timing of the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started using the special figure 1 display device 212 ', and the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218' is turned off to turn off the special figure 1 It is informing that the number of holds has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In addition, at the timing of this variation start, the decorative symbol variation display is started, the second LED from the left of the special icon 1 hold icon first display area 901 'is turned off, and the special figure 1 hold number is 2. It is informed that it has decreased from 1 to 1. On the other hand, at this timing, the state where the hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 903b of the hold icon second display area 903 ′ for the special figure 1 is maintained and the first area 903a also serving as the variable icon display area is displayed. The erasing animation for erasing the changed icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 is started. In this example, as the erasure animation of the variable icon VI, an image simulating autumn leaves is moved downward at a predetermined speed over the period shown in FIGS. A moving image to be framed out (erased) is displayed from the display area 901 ′.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F after the ending animation of the change icon VI is finished, a moving animation for moving the hold icon PI2 from the second area 903b to the first area 903a is started. In this example, as the movement animation of the hold icon PI2, the image of the hold icon PI2 that imitates a ginkgo leaf is moved in the horizontal direction while swinging left and right over the period of FIGS. The moving image to be displayed is displayed.

<Example G>
42 to 45 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example G in time series in units of one frame. In this example, it is configured to display only the hold icon corresponding to the hold for performing the pre-reading effect among one or more hold of the special figure variable game. Here, the two hold of the special figure variable game are displayed. An example in which only the hold icon corresponding to the second hold for performing the pre-reading effect will be described.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b), the second LED from the right of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2. In addition, while the second LED from the right of the hold icon first display area 901 'for special figure 1 is turned on to notify that the number of hold in special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2, Since the second hold is a hold for prefetching, an increase animation of the hold icon PI2 corresponding to the second hold is started.

  In this example, as an increase animation of the hold icon PI2, the character image imitating the cactus is moved upward at a predetermined speed over the period of (b) to (g) in FIG. The moving image to be framed in (appears) is displayed in the second area 903b of the second display area 903 ′. Since the first hold in FIG. 1 is not a hold for prefetching, no image is displayed in the first area 903 a of the hold icon second display area 903 ′ for the special figure 1.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (j), a moving animation for moving the hold icon PI2 from the second area 903b to the first area 903a in accordance with the start of the variable display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the first hold. Has started. In this example, as the moving animation of the hold icon PI2, a moving image that moves the character image imitating the cactus and the image of the balloon in the horizontal direction is displayed over the period of (j) to (q). ing. Also, in this example, by displaying the characters “!!!!!!!” in the balloon image of the moving animation, the prefetch result corresponding to the second hold is concealed or the prefetch result is suggested. In this way, the player's expectation is raised.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (n), if a part of the hold icon PI2 in the moving animation covers the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner, the hold icon PI2 can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design. In some cases, information important to the player (prefetching result) can be transmitted reliably. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7 (q), if the decorative symbol that is suspended is displayed on a part of the hold icon PI2, the decorative symbol can be made more conspicuous than the hold icon PI2, which is important for the player. In some cases, it is possible to reliably convey the correct information (a result of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful). In addition, a part of the hold icon PI2 during the movement animation may pass under the decorative design that is being displayed in a variable manner, or a decorative design that has been stopped from changing is displayed under a part of the hold icon PI2. May be. Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (r), the change icon VI changed from the hold icon PI2 is changed from the first area 903a to the change icon at the start of the change display of FIG. 1 corresponding to the second hold. A moving animation for moving to the display area 800 ′ is started. In this example, as a moving animation of the hold icon PI2, a character image imitating a cactus is gradually displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon second display area 903 'over the period of (r) to (w). At the same time, the same character image is gradually enlarged and made to appear in the variable icon display area 800 ′. In addition, in the balloon image of the character image, characters and images (in this example, the result of the variable game is advantageous for the player) suggesting the result of the variable game (in this example, the probable big hit). The word “heat” to suggest) is displayed to increase the player's expectation.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (x), the decorative symbol is set in the reach state, and at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (y), the super reach effect is performed using all the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. Thus, the variable icon display area 800 ′, the special icon 1 hold icon second display area 903 ′, and the decorative symbols are temporarily made invisible. In addition, as shown in the same figure (x), if the decorative design during the change display of the reach state is displayed on a part of the hold icon PI2, the decorative design can be made more conspicuous than the hold icon PI2. In some cases, information important to the player (whether or not it is in a reach state) can be reliably transmitted. In addition, as described above, if a part of the hold icon PI2 in the moving animation covers the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner, the hold icon PI2 can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, so that the player In some cases, important information (look-ahead results) can be communicated reliably. That is, the priority order of the display of the hold icon and the display of the decorative symbol may be changed according to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

  Moreover, the planar view shape of LED used for the hold display of the hold icon 1st display area 901 'for special figure 1 is not limited to a circle, A star may be sufficient and a polygon may be sufficient. Moreover, the shape, size, and emission color of each LED may be different, or all may be in the same mode. Further, a plurality of types of LED emission colors may be provided. For example, the color may be changed for each variable display.

  Similarly, for the hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon may be a number or a simple figure. Further, the shape, size, color, and pattern of each held icon may be different, or all may have the same display mode. In addition, a plurality of types, shapes, sizes, colors, and patterns of hold icons may be provided. For example, the shape may be changed for each variable display.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 9 (z), by ending the super reach effect, the variable icon display area 800 ′, the special icon 1 hold icon second display area 903 ′, and the decorative symbols are displayed again. Thus, the variation icon is displayed in the same manner as the variation icon displayed before the super reach production. Note that the change icon may be deleted without returning the display of the change icon after the super reach effect.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the decorative symbol combination (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) corresponding to the probable big hit is displayed as a result of the variable game. At the timing shown in FIG. (B), the 15R probability variable big hit game is started, and in the effect display after the big hit game shown in FIG. Note that the variation icon VI may not be erased after the big hit game ends, but may be erased at a timing such as when the variation of the special figure thereafter starts.

<Example H>
46 to 47 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example H in time series in units of one frame. In the example described so far, the sizes and intervals of the four areas of the first area 900a, the second area 900b, the third area 900c, and the fourth area 900d in the hold icon display area 900 ′ are set to be substantially the same. In this example, the intervals of the four regions are different. In this example, the speed at which the hold icon is moved is set to be the same.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, the interval between the perpendicular line passing through the center of the first area 900a and the perpendicular line passing through the center of the second area 900b is L3, and the perpendicular line passing through the center of the second area 900b is The interval between perpendicular lines passing through the center of the third region 900c is L4 (L4> L3) longer than L3, and the interval between the perpendicular line passing through the center of the third region 900c and the perpendicular line passing through the center of the fourth region 900d is L3. That is, the interval between the second region 900b and the third region 900c is made wider than the interval between the first region 900a and the second region 900b and the interval between the third region 900c and the fourth region 900d.

  At the timing of the start of variation shown in FIG. 46 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started, and in the first area 900a of the suspended icon display area 900 ′ that also serves as the variation icon display area 800 ′, the display changes from the retained icon PI1. An erase animation of the change icon VI has started. In this example, as the erasure animation, the fluctuation icon VI is moved downward at a predetermined speed, and the fluctuation icon VI is gradually framed out from the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ which also serves as the fluctuation icon display area 800 ′. Displays a moving image that disappears.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 9E, a moving animation is started in which the hold icons PI2 to PI4 are moved at the same speed in the hold icon display area 900 ′. Hereinafter, this moving animation will be described in detail.

  The state shown in FIG. 8F is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of the moving animation shown in FIG. During one frame of FIG. 5E to FIG. 5F, the hold icon PI4 is moved at the first speed from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c by the distance L1, and the hold icon PI3 is moved to the first frame. The hold icon PI2 is moved from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b by the distance L1 at a speed of S1 and the distance icon L2 is moved from the second area 900b toward the first area 900a at the first speed. Thereafter, the hold icons PI2 to PI4 are moved by the distance L1 for each frame at the first speed until the state shown in FIG. 47 (i).

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (j), of the hold icons PI2 to PI4, only the hold icon PI3 is moved by the distance L1 from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b at the first speed. On the other hand, the hold icon PI2 is stopped and displayed in the first area 900a, and the hold icon PI4 is stopped and displayed in the third area 900c. Thereafter, by moving only the hold icon PI3 at the first speed by the distance L1 by the distance L1 until the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the hold icon PI3 is moved to the second area 900b and moved to the area. Stop display. As shown in FIG. 47 (k ′), when the hold icon PI3 is moved by a distance L1 (the same movement distance as the other hold icons PI2 and PI4) for each frame, the hold icon PI3 moves back and forth around the center of the second area 900b. In such a case, for example, the movement distance is changed from L1 to L1 ′ (L1 ′ <L1) in the vicinity of the center of the second area 900b, and the book is aligned so that the hold icon PI3 stops at the center of the second area 900b. May be performed. Alternatively, the movement distance L1 may be changed to L1 ″ (L1 ″> L1), and book alignment may be performed so that the hold icon PI3 stops at the center of the second region 900b.

<Example I>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the effect display according to Example I in time series in units of one frame. In this example, as shown in FIG. 6A, a decoration 904 fixed so as to cover the central portion of the hold icon display area 900 ′ is provided. In addition, the first area 900a and the second area 900b are arranged on the left side of the reserved icon display area 900 ′ so that the visual recognition is not hindered by the decoration 904, and the third area 900c and the fourth area 900d are formed by the decoration 904. It is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area 900 ′ so that the visual recognition is not hindered. As a result, the interval between the second region 900b and the third region 900c is made wider than the interval between the first region 900a and the second region 900b and the interval between the third region 900c and the fourth region 900d.

  At the change start timing shown in FIG. 5B, the decorative symbol change display is started, and the moving animation of the change icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 is started. In this example, the fluctuation icon VI is moved from the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900 ′ to the fluctuation icon display area at a predetermined speed as the movement animation of the fluctuation icon over the period of FIGS. A moving image moving to 800 'is displayed.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, a moving animation is started in which the hold icons PI2 to PI4 are moved at a predetermined speed in the hold icon display area 900 ′. In this example, as the moving animation of the hold icons P2I to PI4, the hold icon PI4 is moved from the fourth area 900d toward the third area 900c at the first speed, and the hold icon PI2 is moved at the same first speed to the second speed. While moving from the area 900b toward the first area 900a, the moving icon moving the hold icon PI3 from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b at a second speed higher than the first speed is displayed. .

  In this example, as described above, the interval between the second region 900b and the third region 900c is set to be larger than the interval between the first region 900a and the second region 900b and the interval between the third region 900c and the fourth region 900d. Wide. However, the reservation icon PI3 reaches the center of the second area 900b by increasing the second speed of the hold icon PI3 moving over a wide interval faster than the first speed of the hold icons PI2 and PI4 moving over a narrow interval. And the timing at which the hold icons PI2 and PI4 reach the centers of the first area 900a and the third area 900c, respectively.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, the hold icon PI3 that is moving from the third area 900c toward the second area 900b passes behind the ornament 904, and the hold icon PI3 is moving during the passage. Most of the parts excluding the upper part are covered with a decorative object 904. In addition, the magnitude | size of the site | part of the holding | maintenance icon covered with a decoration may be larger or smaller than the example shown to the same figure (g). In addition, the period during which the hold icon is covered with the decoration is not limited to one frame, but may be two or more frames. In this case, the size covered with the decoration may be changed for each frame.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing mode of the hold icon. When the hold icon passes behind the decoration object 904 due to the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon draws all parts including the part covered by the decoration object 904 as shown in FIG. In this case, there is no need to change the shape or size of the hold icon, and the display control may be simplified. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a portion that is not covered by the decorative object 904 and a portion that is in the vicinity thereof and that cannot be seen from the front may be drawn. As shown in FIG. 5, only the part not covered with the decorative object 904 may be drawn. In these cases, the amount of information of the image data for displaying the hold icon is limited within a range that does not affect the visibility. There are cases where it can be reduced. Further, not only when the ornament 904 is viewed from the front, but also when viewed from obliquely above, the appearance of the held icon may be changed depending on the viewing direction, and the game may be interesting.

<Example J>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the effect display according to Example J in time series in units of one frame. In this example, as shown in FIG. 6A, as a display for notifying the number of reserved special figure variable games, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218 ′, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220 ′, and a hold icon display area 900 ′. In addition, a special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ for notifying the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game and a special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ for notifying the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game are provided. ing. Note that the information displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ is not limited to numbers, but may be any information as long as each hold number can be grasped. Therefore, for example, kanji (for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, zero, etc.) may be used, and the number of reservations may be expressed by the number of images.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 ′ is turned off, so that the holding number of the special figure 1 is one. It has been informed that the number has decreased, and the reproduction of a moving image in which the number displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'is gradually changed from 4 to 3, has been started. In the display area 901 ′, a state in which the number 4 changes to the number 3 is displayed.

  At this timing, the hold icon PI2 to PI4 displayed in the hold icon display area 900 ′ are moved to the adjacent areas, and the change icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 900. A moving animation for moving from 'to the variation icon display area 800' is started.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which one frame has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. At this timing, the reproduction of the moving image that changes the number displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'from 4 to 3 is finished, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 901' it's shown. Further, in the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 5C to 5G, the movement animations of the hold icons PI2 to PI4 and the movement icon VI started in FIG. 5B are performed.

  That is, in this example, the decrease in the number of holds in the special figure 1 is notified by the hold icon display area 901 'for the special figure 1 rather than the timing at which the reduction in the special figure 1 is informed by the special figure 1 hold lamp 218'. The timing is delayed by one frame.

<Example K>
51 and 52 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example K in time series in units of one frame. In this example, the special icon 1 hold icon first display area 901 ′ for notifying the number of special figure 1 variable games held using a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, and the special figure 1 fluctuation Two special icons 1 second hold icon second display area 903 ′ for notifying the number of games held is provided separately, and the special display 1 hold icon first display area 901 ′ , The hold display mode in the special icon 1 hold icon second display area 903 ′ is different.

  At the timing of the fluctuation start shown in FIG. 51 (b), the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned off to notify that the holding number in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1. . Further, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and at the same time, the erasure animation for erasing the variation icon VI1 displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon first display area 901 ′, and the special figure 1 hold icon No. 1 are displayed. The erasing animation for erasing the variation icon VI2 displayed in the 2 display area 903 ′ is started.

  In this example, as the erasure animation of the variation icon VI1, the size of the variation icon is gradually reduced over the period of FIG. A moving image to be erased from the area 901 ′ is displayed, and an image simulating autumn leaves is moved downward at a predetermined speed over the period shown in FIGS. A moving image to be framed out (erased) from the second display area 903 'for the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, a moving animation for moving the hold icon PI12 displayed in the first display area 901 ′ for the special figure 1 from the second area 901b to the first area 901a, and a special animation. The moving animation for moving the hold icon PI22 displayed in the hold icon second display area 903 ′ for FIG. 1 from the second area 903b to the first area 903a is started.

  In this example, as the movement animation of the hold icon PI12, the image of the hold icon PI11 is moved in the horizontal direction from the second area 901b to the first area 901a over the period of FIGS. 51 (g) to 52 (i). A moving image is displayed, and a second moving animation of the hold icon PI22 is performed while the image of the hold icon PI22 imitating a ginkgo leaf is swayed from side to side over the period of FIGS. 51 (g) to 52 (k). A moving image to be moved in the horizontal direction from the area 903b to the first area 903a is displayed.

  The standby animation repeats three types of display modes: first display mode (for example, large circle) → second display mode (for example, medium circle) → third display mode (for example, small circle). The deletion animation is expressed by the first display mode (for example, a large circle) → the second display mode (for example, a medium circle) → the third display mode (for example, a small circle) → the deletion. If the display timings of the first to third display modes coincide with each other, a part of the standby animation may appear to be a part of the erase animation. May appear as part of the wait animation. For this reason, an illusion can be given to the player and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Example L>
Next, the effect display according to Example L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 (a) shows another example of the usual stop display symbol. There are four types of stoppage display modes of the normal diagram of Example L: “general map C” to “general map E” which are hit symbols, and “general map F” which is an off symbol.

  FIG. 6B is an example of a low-probability common figure determination table used when determining a stop symbol in the above-mentioned common-related lottery process (step S223 ′) at a low probability, and FIG. Is an example of a table for determining a high-probability time chart used for determining a stop symbol in the above-mentioned general-related lottery process (step S223 ′) at a high probability. FIG. 6D is an example of a lottery table used when determining the normal fluctuation time and the opening operation mode of the second special figure starting port (electrical chew) 232 ′.

  In this example, when the usual figure stop symbol is decided to be ordinary figure E at the low probability, 300 ms + 5500 ms opening (long opening) is performed as the opening operation mode of the second special figure starting port (electric Chu) 232 ′. It is configured as follows.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal symbol per effect control process performed in the effect control process described above. This ordinary symbol per effect control process is configured to perform an effect selection process in step S1502 ′ when it is determined in step S1501 ′ that the normal stop symbol is determined to be normal E. In this example, in this effect selection process, preparation for execution of “electricity chance effect” described below is performed.

  FIG. 55 to FIG. 57 are diagrams showing the effect display of the electric chance chance effect in time series in units of one frame. In this example, a special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ for notifying the number of special figure 1 variable games held on an image using a partial display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, and a special figure 2 change There are two special icon 2 hold icon display areas 902 'for notifying the number of games held on the image using a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208'.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 55 (b) to 55 (g), in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′, the moving icon VI1 changed from the hold icon PI11 is animated, and the hold icon PI12 is moved. ing.

  Subsequently, during the period shown in FIG. 55 (h) to FIG. 56 (l), the electric chance chance effect is performed based on the fact that the usual stop symbol is determined as the usual figure E. The mode of the electric chance chance production is not particularly limited. In this example, the character display such as “During electric chance” and an image imitating the second special figure starting port 232 ′ are displayed. The figure starting port 232 'is opened long, which indicates to the player that it is easy to enter the second special figure starting port 232'.

  The state shown in FIG. 56 (i) is a state in which the first suspension of the special figure 2 variable game has occurred during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and during the electric chance chance effect. At this timing, the leftmost LED of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1, and the special icon 2 holding icon display area 902'. In the first area 902a, an increase animation of the hold icon is performed. In this example, a moving image in which the size of the character image of the lord gradually increases is displayed as an increase animation of the hold icon.

  The state shown in FIG. 6 (j) is a state in which the second hold of the special figure 2 variable game has occurred during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and during the electric opportunity chance production. At this timing, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 1 to 2, and the special icon 2 holding icon display area 902 In the second region 902b of ', an increase animation of the hold icon is performed. Further, the increase animation of the hold icon PI21 in the first area 902a started in the state of FIG.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the increase animation of the hold icon PI21 started in the state shown in FIG. 10 (i) is terminated, and the hold icon PI21 is stopped and displayed in the first area 902a. The increase animation of the hold icon PI22 started in the state of j) is continued. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 10L, the increase animation of the hold icon PI22 started in the state shown in FIG. 10J is terminated, and the hold icon PI22 is stopped and displayed in the second area 902b.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state where the variable display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold is started. At this change start timing, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is turned off to notify that the holding number in the special figure 2 has decreased from 2 to 1. At this timing, the change icon VI21 changed from the hold icon PI21 stopped and displayed in the first area 902a is displayed in a stop animation in the second area 902b and a moving animation that moves to the change icon display area 800 ′. A moving animation for moving the hold icon PI22 to the first area 902a is started.

  In this example, it is configured so that pre-reading is performed for the hold in FIG. 2, and the pre-read result can be suggested using the corresponding hold icon for the hold for which the pre-read is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 7 (p), in the moving animation in which the fluctuation icon VI21 is moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800 ′, the result of the fluctuation display is determined by displaying the emoticon with tears in the balloon image. Suggests that the expectation of On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (q) to (t), in the moving animation in which the hold icon PI22 is moved to the first area 902a, the second character is displayed by displaying the character “?” In the balloon image. The success / failure result of the special figure 2 variable game corresponding to the hold is concealed, and the player's expectation is increased.

  As in this embodiment, in the case of an electric opportunity, in addition to the normal hold icon and normal various animations, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a special display mode (character image), or the hold icon By changing the display mode of the increase animation and the movement animation to a special display mode, information advantageous to the player (that it is easy to enter the second special figure starting port 232 ′) can be notified. In some cases, the player's willingness to play can be increased.

<Example M>
58 and 59 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example M in time series in units of one frame. In this example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), a holding icon display area 906 is provided as a display for informing the number of holdings of special figure variable games. In this holding icon display area 906, the special figure 1 and the special figure are displayed. The hold icon (hold) in FIG. 2 can be displayed in the order of winning.

  The state shown in FIG. 58 (a) shows an example in which the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 4, and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 4, and the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 906 in order of winning. It is displayed from the left side to the right side. In this example, the first hold icon PI11 of the special figure 1 variable game → the first hold icon PI21 of the special figure 2 variable game → the second hold icon PI22 of the special figure 2 variable game → special Fig. 1 Floating game second hold icon PI12 → Special figure 1 variable game third hold icon PI13 → Special figure 2 variable game third hold icon PI23 → Special figure 1 variable game fourth hold icon PI14 → The hold icons are displayed in the order of the fourth hold icon PI24 of the special figure 2 variable game.

  The state shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the variable display in FIG. 1 is started. At the timing of this change start, the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned off to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3. Further, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the variation icon VI11 changed from the suspension icon PI11 displayed in the first leftmost region of the suspension icon display region 906 is displayed in the variation icon display region 800. A moving animation that moves to ´ has started.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 8F, the moving animation of the variation icon VI11 started in FIG. 6B ends, and the hold icons PI21, PI22, PI12, PI13 displayed in the hold icon display area 906 are displayed. , PI23, PI14, and PI24 are started to move to the adjacent left region at a first speed or a second speed that is faster than the first speed.

  In this example, among the seven hold icons, the hold icons PI21, PI22, and PI12 having the first to third highest winning rankings are displayed at the first speed, and the four icons shown in FIGS. 58 (f) to 59 (j). It is moving over the time of the frame. On the other hand, hold icons PI13, PI23, PI14, and PI24 with the fourth to seventh fastest winning rankings are displayed at 2 in FIG. 58 (f) to FIG. 58 (h) at the second speed faster than the first speed. It is moving over the time of the frame.

<Example N>
60 to 62 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example N in time series in units of one frame. In this example, a special icon 1 holding icon display area 901 'for informing the number of special figure 1 variable games held is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208', and the number of special figure 2 variable games held is notified. A special icon 2 holding icon display area 902 'for the purpose is provided on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208'. Also, a special icon 1 variable icon display area 801 'is provided below the special figure 1 hold icon display area 901', and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 'is provided below the special figure 1 hold icon display area 901'. A variation icon display area 802 ′ for 2 is provided.

  Note that the placement location of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ may be interchanged. The arrangement location of the variation icon display area 802 ′ for 2 may be switched. Also, one of the special icon 1 holding icon display area 901 'and the special figure 2 holding icon display area 902' is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208 ', and the other is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208'. Also good.

  The state shown in FIG. 60B is a state in which the variable display of FIG. 1 is started. At this change start timing, the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned off to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1. Also, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the variation icon VI11 that has changed from the hold icon PI11 displayed in the first region 901a at the bottom of the special icon 1 hold icon display region 901 ′ is displayed. The moving animation for moving to the fluctuation icon display area 801 ′ is started.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 8C, the moving animation of the variation icon VI11 started in FIG. 9B is terminated and displayed in the second area 901b of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′. The moving animation for moving the held icon PI12 toward the lower first area 901a is started. In this example, while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner over a period of 12 frames (b) to 61 (n), the hold icon PI12 is displayed as the first speed as a moving animation. Thus, a moving image is displayed that moves over the time corresponding to three frames shown in FIGS. 60 (c) to (f). Note that the movement time of the hold icon may be the same 12 frames as the decorative symbol change display time, or may be longer than 12 frames.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the first suspension of the special figure 2 variable game has occurred during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. At this timing, the leftmost LED of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is lit to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1. At this timing, an increase animation of the hold icon PI21 corresponding to the first hold in the special figure 2 is started in the first area 902a at the bottom of the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 '. In this example, as the increasing animation, a moving image in which the hold icon PI21 gradually increases while changing its shape is displayed over the time of four frames in FIGS. 61 (i) to (l).

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which the second suspension of the special figure 2 variable game occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1. At this timing, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is lit to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 1 to 2. At this timing, an increase animation of the hold icon PI22 corresponding to the second hold in the special figure 2 is started in the second area 902 that is the second from the bottom of the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 ′. . In this example, as the increasing animation, a moving image in which the hold icon PI22 gradually increases while changing the shape is displayed over the time corresponding to four frames in FIG.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 10 (o) is a state where the variable display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold is started. At this change start timing, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 'is turned off to notify that the holding number in the special figure 2 has decreased from 2 to 1. Further, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the variation icon VI21 changed from the suspension icon PI21 displayed in the first region 902a at the bottom of the special icon 2 suspension icon display region 902 ′ is displayed. The moving animation to move to the fluctuation icon display area 802 ′ is started.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (r), the moving animation of the variation icon VI21 started in FIG. 61 (o) is finished and displayed in the second area 902b of the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ′. The moving animation for moving the held icon PI22 toward the lower first area 9012 is started. In this example, as the moving animation, a moving image in which the hold icon PI22 is moved at a second speed higher than the first speed over a time period corresponding to two frames of (r) to (s) in the same figure. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the movement direction of the decorative symbol and the movement direction of the hold icon are the same, so even when attention is paid to one of the movements, the movement of the other may be easily grasped.

<Example O>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the effect display according to Example O in time series in units of one frame. In this example, a holding icon display area 900 ′ for informing the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is provided on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′, and a changing icon display area 800 ′ is provided on the lower side thereof. Yes. In this example, a decorative object 908 is provided so as to cover the central portion of the hold icon display area 900 ′. In this example, the first area 900a and the second area 900b are arranged below the hold icon display area 900 ′ so that the visual recognition is not hindered by the decoration 908, and the third area 900c and the fourth area 900d are The decorative icon 908 is arranged above the hold icon display area 900 ′ so that the visual recognition is not hindered. As a result, the interval between the second region 900b and the third region 900c is made wider than the interval between the first region 900a and the second region 900b and the interval between the third region 900c and the fourth region 900d.

  The decorative object 908 has a shape simulating a rabbit, and is configured such that the ear moves up and down when a predetermined condition is satisfied, as shown in FIGS. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5G, the pupil is configured to move when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, when the ear of the decorative object 908 moves downward and hangs down, as shown in FIGS. 5C to 5G, a part of the ear is a part of the hold icon display area 900 ′. The display area is covered, and the display area 900 ′ is prevented from being visually recognized. Here, as the “predetermined condition” for moving the ear or pupil of the decoration 908, there are cases where the pre-read result of the holding is advantageous for the player (for example, big hit), or the result of the special figure changing game being changed. For example, when the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit), or when the moving animation of the change icon or the hold icon starts.

  The state shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the variable display in FIG. 1 is started. At this change start timing, the third LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned off to notify that the holding number in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2. At this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the variation icon VI11 changed from the suspension icon PI11 displayed in the first region 900a at the bottom of the suspension icon display region 900 ′ is displayed as the variation icon display. The movement animation that moves to the area 800 ′, the hold icon PI13 displayed in the third area 900c, the movement animation that moves to the second area 900b, and the hold icon PI12 that is displayed in the second area 900b A moving animation for moving to one area 900a is started.

  In this example, as a moving animation of a holding icon, a moving image that moves the holding icon PI12 at a first speed over the time corresponding to three frames shown in FIGS. A moving image is displayed in which the PI 13 moves at a second speed higher than the first speed over a time period corresponding to three frames shown in FIGS. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the moving animation of the variation icon VI11 started in FIG. 5B is finished and the moving animation of the hold icons PI12 and PI13 is continued, and shown in FIG. At the timing, the moving animation of the hold icons PI12 and PI13 is finished.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing mode of the hold icon. When the hold icon passes behind the decoration 908 due to the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon includes all parts covered by the decoration 908 as shown in FIGS. In this case, it is not necessary to change the shape and size of the hold icon, and the display control may be simplified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4D, a portion that is not covered with the decorative object 908 and a portion that is in the vicinity thereof and that cannot be seen from the front may be drawn. Only the part not covered with the decorative object 908 may be drawn. In these cases, the amount of information of the image data for displaying the hold icon can be reduced within a range that does not affect the visibility. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 5E, the drawing mode may be changed in accordance with the movement of the decorative object 908.

  FIG. 65 is a view showing a modification of Example O. In FIG. In this example, the moving animation for moving the hold icon PI13 displayed in the third area 900c to the second area 900b is changed. Specifically, the hold icon PI13 is moved diagonally to the lower left as shown in (c) of the figure so that the visual recognition of the hold icon PI13 is not hindered by the decoration 908, and then shown in (d) of the figure. As shown in the figure, a moving image is displayed that moves straight down and moves obliquely downward to the right as shown in FIG. That is, the hold icon PI13 moves at a second speed over a distance longer than that of the embodiment O over the time corresponding to three frames shown in FIGS.

<Example P>
66 and 67 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example P in time series in units of one frame. In this example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), as a display for informing the number of special figure variable games held, special figure 1 hold lamp 218 ', special figure 2 hold lamp 220', and hold icon display area 900 ' In addition, a special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ for notifying the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game and a special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ for notifying the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game are provided. ing. The special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902' are separate from the decorative symbol display device 208 '(first liquid crystal display device). 910 is provided. Note that the information displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 ′ is not limited to numbers, but may be any information as long as each hold number can be grasped. Therefore, for example, kanji (for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, zero, etc.) may be used, and the number of reservations may be expressed by the number of images.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 ′ is turned off, whereby the holding number of the special figure 1 is 1. In addition, the reproduction of a moving image in which the number displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′ is gradually changed from 2 to 1 is started. In the state shown in (), a state in which the number 2 changes to the number 1 is displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 ′. At this timing, an erasing animation for erasing the change icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 from the hold icon display area 900 ′ is started.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the reproduction of the moving image that changes the number displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 901 'from 2 to 1 is finished, and the special icon 1 hold icon is displayed. In the display area 901 ′, the number 1 is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the erasing animation for erasing the change icon VI changed from the hold icon PI1 from the hold icon display area 900 ′ ends, and the hold icon PI12 is moved from the second area 900b to the first. A moving animation for moving to the area 900a is started. In this example, as the moving animation of the hold icon PI2, a moving image in which the character image of the samurai is moved from the second area 900b to the first area 900a is displayed.

  In addition, the state shown in FIG. 67 (g) is a state in which the first hold of the special figure 2 variable game has occurred during the variable display of special figure 1. In this state, the leftmost LED of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 ′ is lit to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1, and the special icon 2 holding icon display area 902 ′. Reproduction of a moving image in which the number displayed on the screen is gradually changed from 0 to 1 is started. In the state shown in FIG. 5G, the number 0 is displayed in the special icon 2 hold icon display area 902 ′. The state of changing to the number 1 is displayed.

  In this state, an increase animation of the hold icon PI3 corresponding to the first hold of the special figure 2 variable game is started. In this example, as an increase animation of the hold icon PI3, a moving image in which a princess character image appears in the hold icon display area 900 ′ from below the hold icon display area 900 ′ is displayed. Further, in this example, the princess character image corresponding to the hold icon PI3 in the special figure 2 is displayed on the character image corresponding to the hold icon PI2 in the special figure 1 in an overlapping manner. For this reason, it is possible to make the hold display of special figure 2 of priority change stand out from the hold display of special figure 1, and reliably tell the player that the hold of special figure 2 of priority change has increased. May be possible. It should be noted that the hold display that the player wants to pay attention to may be displayed conspicuously. For example, when the winning of the special figure 1 is given priority over the special figure 2, the special figure is given over the special figure 2 hold display. Display may be performed so that one hold display stands out.

<Example Q>
68 and 69 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example Q in time series in units of one frame. In this example, in addition to the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 ′, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 ′, and the hold icon display area 900, the same information as the hold icon display area 900 is displayed as a display for informing the number of special figure floating games held. A hold icon second display area 900 ′ for displaying information is provided in a second liquid crystal display device 910 separate from the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ (first liquid crystal display device).

  In the state shown in FIG. 68 (b), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned off, so that the holding number of the special figure 1 is one. Informs that it has decreased. Further, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the variation icon VI11 changed from the suspension icon PI11 displayed in the suspension icon display region 900 is moved to the variation icon display region 800 ′. A moving animation is started in which the hold icons PI12 to PI4 displayed in the second area 900b to the fourth area 900d are moved to the adjacent first area 900a to third area 900c. In this example, as the moving animation of the holding icons PI12 to PI14, the moving icons move the holding icons PI12 to PI14 at the first speed over the time corresponding to the four frames shown in FIGS. The image is displayed.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 10C, the change icon VI11 ′ changed from the hold icon PI11 ′ displayed in the hold icon second display area 900 ′ is moved to the change icon second display area 800 ″. The moving animation is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the hold icons PI12 ′ to PI4 ′ displayed in the second area 900b to the fourth area 900d are displayed in the adjacent first area 900a to third area 900c. Has started moving animation to move to. In this example, as the movement animation of the hold icons PI12 ′ to PI14 ′, the hold icons PI12 ′ to PI14 ′ are moved at a second speed faster than the first speed, as shown in FIG. A moving image is displayed that moves over a period of two frames.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (g), an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon VI11 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 ′ and a variation icon VI11 displayed in the variation icon second display area 800 ″. An erasing animation for erasing 'is started simultaneously. In this example, a moving image that erases the variation icon VI11 over the time corresponding to four frames of FIG. 10G to FIG. 10K is displayed as the erasure animation of the variation icon VI11. On the other hand, as a deletion animation of the variation icon VI11 ′, a moving image that deletes the variation icon VI11 ′ over a time longer than four frames is displayed.

<Example R>
70 and 71 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example R in time series in units of one frame. In this example, in addition to the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 ′, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 ′, and the hold icon display area 900 ′, the hold icon display area 900 ′ is displayed as a display for informing the number of hold of the special figure variable game. The second display area 900 ″ for holding icons for displaying the same information as in the second liquid crystal display device 910 separate from the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ (first liquid crystal display device) is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 910 has no variable icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the rightmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 'is turned off, so that the holding number of the special figure 1 is one. Informs that it has decreased. In this variation start state, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the variation icon VI11 changed from the hold icon PI11 displayed in the hold icon display region 900 ′ is moved to the change icon display region 800 ′. A moving animation and an erasing animation to frame out (erase) the change icon VI11 ′ changed from the holding icon PI11 ′ displayed in the holding icon second display area 900 ″ from the holding icon second display area 900 ″ are started. doing.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 5F, the hold icons PI12 to PI4 displayed in the second area 900b to the fourth area 900d of the hold icon display area 900 ′ are adjacent to the first area 900a to the third area. The moving animation that moves to 900c and the holding icons PI12 'to PI4' displayed in the second area 900b to the fourth area 900d of the holding icon second display area 900 'are adjacent to the first area 900a to the third area. The moving animation which moves to 900c is started.

  In this example, as the moving animations of the hold icons PI12 ′ to PI14 ′, the hold icons PI12 ′ to PI14 ′ are subjected to the time of four frames of FIG. Moving images are displayed. On the other hand, as the movement animation of the hold icons PI12 to PI14, the hold icons PI12 and PI14 are moved at the first speed over the time corresponding to the four frames shown in FIGS. A moving image is displayed in which the PI 13 moves at a second speed higher than the first speed over a time period corresponding to two frames shown in FIGS. 71 (h) to (j).

  In this example, since the second liquid crystal display device 910 only displays the hold icon, the number of holds can be accurately grasped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ (first liquid crystal display device). However, since the variable icon is displayed in addition to the display of the hold icon, the player's expectation may be enhanced.

<Example S>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the effect display according to Example S in time series in units of one frame. In this example, after the super reach effect is performed in FIG. 9A, the effect is gradually switched to the decorative symbol variation display over the period of FIGS. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1, and the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the hold is increased in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. The animation has started. In this example, as the increase animation of the hold icon PI1, a moving image is displayed in which the size of the hold icon PI1 is gradually increased in the time corresponding to four frames shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a modification of Example S. In FIG. This example is the same as the example S in that the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1 at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, but without increasing the hold icon PI1. The hold icon PI1 having the same shape and the same size as when the above increase animation is completed is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image layer structure for effect display according to Example S. The effect display according to Example S includes, for example, a layer L1 for displaying a background image, a layer L2 for displaying a decorative design, a layer L3 for displaying a hold icon, and a layer for displaying a super reach effect. The four layers of L4 can be generated by overlapping in this order from bottom to top. Needless to say, the upper and lower relationships of the four layers may be interchanged.

  When the configuration shown in the figure is adopted, for example, the super reach effect control in the layer L4 and the decorative symbol display control in the layer L2 can be performed individually, and the effect is performed during the execution of the super reach effect. The fluctuating display of the decorative symbol that will be resumed later may be continued, or the fluctuating variation of the decorative symbol that is newly started after the effect may be performed. Further, when switching from the super reach effect to the variable display of decorative symbols, the layers L3 to L1 of the lower layers of the layer L4 may be displayed by gradually increasing the transmittance of the layer L4. Moreover, when performing the movement animation of the hold icon of layer L3, you may implement | achieve by changing the relative position of layer L3 with respect to other layers L4, L2, and L1.

<Example T>
75 and 76 are diagrams showing the effect display according to Example T in time series in units of one frame. In this example, a plurality of stages having different background images, appearing character images, hold icon images, variation icon images, and the like are provided. For example, FIGS. 4A to 4D show an example of a heel stage, FIG. 4E shows an example of stage switching, and FIG. 5F and subsequent figures show an example of a princess stage.

  Basically, it is configured to display a character image of a frog as a hold icon at the puppet stage, and to display a character character image of a princess as a hold icon at the princess stage. ) Even after switching from the puppet stage to the princess stage at the timing shown in (), the puppet character image is displayed as the hold icon until the timing shown in FIG. 76 (i).

  The mode of the hold icon may be changed simultaneously with the switching of the stage, and when switching from the first stage to the second stage, the mode of the hold icon is switched after the first time has passed. In the case of switching from the first stage to the first stage, the mode of the hold icon may be switched after elapse of a second time different from the first time.

  Further, in this example, the timing shown in FIG. 5G, that is, the left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ of the shielding device 246 ′ are opened from the closed state shown in FIG. In the middle of changing to a state, the special figure 2 variable game hold increases by one. The left door 246a ′ and the right door 246b ′ of the shielding device 246 ′ are changing from the open state shown in FIG. 5B to the closed state shown in FIG. 5E (for example, FIG. The timing at which the special figure 2 variable game is held may be increased at the timing shown in FIG.

<Example of hold icon display control>
Next, an example of display control of the hold icon will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining a display control example when the hold icon during the movement animation overlaps with the hold icon during the increase animation. FIGS. 77 (a) to (e) show two layers L1 and L2. Are the front views as seen from the front, and FIGS. (A) to (E) are diagrams corresponding to each of (a) to (e) in FIG. It is the perspective view which isolate | separated and was seen from diagonally upward.

  In this example, the display control is performed using the layer L1 that displays the moving image of the moving animation of the hold icon and the layer L2 that displays the increased animation moving image of the hold icon. Specifically, the layer L1 displays a moving image in which the hold icon moves in a predetermined direction (in this example, from left to right) in the hold icon display area. In the layer L2, the hold icon moves in a predetermined direction (from the bottom to the top in this example), and a moving image that gradually appears in the hold icon display area from the hold icon display area is displayed. By performing the effect display by superimposing the layer L1 and the layer 2, it is possible to simultaneously execute the movement animation and the increase animation.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining another display control example in a case where the hold icon during the movement animation overlaps with the hold icon during the increase animation. FIGS. 78 (a) to (e) show a hold icon display area. It is the front view which looked at from the front. In this example, since the layer is a single layer (one), as shown in FIG. 5F, any one of the images where the hold icon during the movement animation overlaps with the hold icon during the increase animation is overlapped. Then, the other is overwritten, or display control is performed to make one of them transparent as shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 79 and 80 are diagrams for explaining display control examples when the hold icon in the first movement animation overlaps with the hold icon in the first movement animation, and FIGS. ) Is a front view of the state in which the two layers L1 and L2 are overlapped, as viewed from the front, and FIGS. (A) to (I) are diagrams corresponding to the respective diagrams (a) to (i). FIG. 3 is a perspective view of two layers L1 and L2 separated and viewed obliquely from above.

  In this example, the display control is performed using the layer L1 for displaying the moving image of the first moving animation of the hold icon and the layer L2 for displaying the second moving animation of the holding icon. ing. Specifically, in the layer L1, a moving image in which the hold icon moves in the first direction (from left to right in this example) in the hold icon display area is displayed. In the layer L2, a moving image in which the hold icon moves in the second direction (from left to right in this example) at a second speed different from the first speed is displayed in the hold icon display area. By performing the effect display by superimposing the layer L1 and the layer 2, it is possible to simultaneously execute two types of movement animations.

<Example U>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the effect display according to Example U in time series. In this example, in addition to the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 '(not shown), the special figure 2 hold lamp 220' (not shown), and the hold icon display area 912 as a display for informing the number of special figure floating games held. A hold icon second display area 914 is provided in the display area in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′.

  The effect display shown to the same figure (a)-(d) has shown an example of the effect display in case the number of holdings of special figure variable game is one, and the number of holdings of special figure variable game increases by one. . The state shown in FIG. 5A is a special figure variable display. By displaying the hold icon PI1 in the first area 912a of the hold icon display area 912, the number of hold of the special figure variable game is one. Notifying that there is. Also, at this timing, the number of hold of the special figure variable game has increased from 1 (hold 1) to 2 (hold 1, hold 2), and the hold icon PI2 corresponding to hold 2 is displayed in the hold icon second display area. A moving animation for moving from 914 to the second area 912b of the hold icon display area 912 is started.

  Here, the hold icon PI2 corresponding to the hold 2 is first displayed in the second display area 914 as shown in FIG. 6B, and then the hold icon second display is shown as shown in FIG. After moving by a distance L1 vertically downward from the area 914 as a base point, as shown in FIG. 4D, the second area 912b of the reserved icon display area 912 is moved to the left in the horizontal direction by a distance L2 as shown in FIG. . Thereby, as the moving animation of the hold icon PI2, a moving image in which the hold icon PI2 is moved from the hold icon second display area 914 to the second area 912b of the hold icon display area 912 by a distance L1 + L2 is displayed.

  On the other hand, the effect displays shown in (e) to (h) of the figure show an example of the effect display when the number of special figure variable games held is three and the number of special figure variable games held is increased by one. ing. The state shown in FIG. 5 (e) is a special-fluctuating variable display, and the hold icons PI1, PI2, and PI3 are respectively displayed in the first area 912a, the second area 912b, and the third area 912c of the hold icon display area 912. By displaying, it is informing that the number of special figure variable games held is three. Also, at this timing, the number of special figure variable games on hold increased from 3 (hold 1, hold 2, hold 3) to 4 (hold 1, hold 2, hold 3, hold 4) and corresponds to hold 4. The moving animation for moving the hold icon PI4 to be moved from the hold icon second display area 914 to the fourth area 912d of the hold icon display area 912 is started.

  Here, after the hold icon PI4 corresponding to the hold 4 is first displayed in the second display area 914 as shown in FIG. 5F, the hold icon second display is shown as shown in FIG. After moving the area 914 downward in the vertical direction by the distance L1, as shown in FIG. 5H, the fourth area 912d of the hold icon display area 912 is located at the left side in the horizontal direction from the distance L2 as the arrival point. Move by a short distance L3 (L3 <L2). Accordingly, a moving image that moves the hold icon PI4 from the hold icon second display area 914 to the fourth area 912d of the hold icon display area 912 by a distance L1 + L3 is displayed as a movement animation of the hold icon PI4.

  That is, in this example, when the number of holds increases when the number of holds is 1, a moving animation for moving the hold icon by the distance L1 + L2 is displayed, and when the number of holds is 3, the number of holds increases. By displaying a moving animation that moves the holding icon by a distance L1 + L3 shorter than the distance L1 + L2, the moving distance of the holding icon (the display time of the moving animation of the holding icon) is varied according to the number of holdings when the holding increases. . On the other hand, in this example, other animations, for example, a deletion icon deletion animation, a variation icon deletion animation, and a variation icon movement animation are made in a common mode regardless of the number of reservations when the number of reservations increases.

  With such a configuration, the mode of the moving animation can be changed depending on the number of holds at the time of the increase in the hold, so the variation of the hold display can be increased, and the player's interest can be enhanced. .

  In addition, when the number of holds when the number of holds increases is relatively small, a moving animation that moves the hold icon by a long distance is displayed. When the number of holds when the number of holds increases is relatively large, the hold icon is displayed only for a long distance. An example of displaying a moving animation to move was shown, but conversely, when the number of holdings when holding increased is relatively large, a moving animation that moves the holding icon by a long distance is displayed, and the number of holdings when holding increases When is relatively small, a moving animation for moving the hold icon by a long distance may be displayed.

  In this example, the movement distance of the hold icon is changed according to the number of holds when the hold is increased. For example, when the hold increases when the number of holds is 1, the hold icon is set to the first speed. When the number of holds increases and the number of holds increases when the number of holds is 3, the hold icon is moved to a second speed distance (or slower than the first speed) that is slower than the first speed. The movement speed of the hold icon may be varied according to the number of holds when the hold is increased by displaying a moving animation that is moved at a third speed).

  Further, the same technical idea may be applied to the above-described increase animation and erase animation instead of the movement animation. For example, when the number of holds increases when the number of holds is 1, the hold icon is set to the first. If an increase animation (or an erasure animation that erases over the first time) is increased over time, and the number of holds increases when the number of holds is 3, the hold icon is displayed from the first time. Display an increasing animation (or erase animation that erases over the second or third time) that also increases over a short second time (or a third time longer than the first time) Thus, the increase or deletion mode of the hold icon may be changed according to the number of holds when the hold is increased.

  Further, in the first state (for example, during power support, the result of the fluctuation display is a big hit), a moving animation for moving the hold icon from the hold icon second display area 914 to the hold icon display area 912 is performed. In the case of a second state different from the first state (for example, during non-electric support, the result of the fluctuation display is out of date), an increase animation that increases (appears) the hold icon in the hold icon display area 912 May be performed.

  In addition, if the movement animation of the hold icon is started simultaneously with the start of fluctuation of the special figure and the fluctuation display time of the special figure is shorter than the display time of the movement animation of the hold icon, the movement animation of the hold icon Even during the display of “”, the display of the moving animation may be stopped somewhere during the period from the stoppage of the special figure to the start of the next special figure.

  FIG. 82 is a view for explaining a modified example of the embodiment U. For example, instead of the movement animation of the embodiment U, the movement animation may be performed using a standby animation hold icon shown in FIG. As described above, the hold icon is displayed so as to always rotate clockwise around the center of the circle. However, when the number of holds when the number of holds increases is relatively small, the hold icon is displayed. A moving animation that rotates only for one period is displayed, and when the number of holds when holding increases is relatively large, a moving animation that rotates the hold icon for a second period shorter than the first period may be performed. Good.

  In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4 (maximum number of holds)), a moving animation that rotates the hold icon for the standby animation is performed, and otherwise (for example, The movement animation of Example U may be performed when the number of holdings increases from 1 to 2. In addition, one rotation of the hold icon for the standby animation is configured in the four types shown in FIG. 4A. However, if the rotation of the hold icon ends in the middle, The moving animation may be stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the hold icon second display area 914 and the hold icon display area 912 may be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of variation of the decorative design). The hold icon may be moved linearly in the horizontal direction from the hold icon second display area 914 to the hold icon display area 912. With such a configuration, since the moving direction of the hold icon is different from the change direction of the decorative symbol, the player pays attention to the hold icon even when the decorative symbol change display is being performed in the symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′. There is a case that can be made.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, the display mode (color) of the display area including the display area where the hold icon second display area 914 and the hold icon display area 912 are arranged, and the symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′. , Patterns, shapes, etc.) may be different. With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the visibility of the hold icon even when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′.

<Animation display time>
Next, the concept of animation display time will be described with reference to FIG. For example, consider a case in which animations such as the above-described movement animation, increase animation, erasure animation, standby animation, and the like are configured using a plurality of still images A, B, and C.

  Assuming that the display time of the still image A is Ta, the display time of the still image B is Tb, and the display time of the still image C is Tc, for example, “Still image A → Still image B → The display time TA of the minimum unit of animation that repeats the display of “still image C” is Ta + Tb + Tc. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the minimum unit display time TB for repeating the display of “still image A → still image B → still image C → still image A → still image B → still image C” is Ta × 2 + Tb × 2 + Tc × 2.

  Therefore, as described above, when the moving distance of the holding icon (the display time of the moving animation of the holding icon) is changed according to the number of holdings when the holding increases, the moving animation with the shorter display time is shown in FIG. ) (N is a positive integer), and the moving animation with the longer display time may be configured with N times the minimum unit of the animation shown in FIG. .

In this example, the structure of the moving animation with the longer display time is limited to repeated display of “still image A → still image B → still image C → still image A → still image B → still image C”. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 6C, the display of “still image A → still image A → still image B → still image B → still image C → still image C” may be repeated. As shown in d), the display of "still image A-> still image B-> still image B-> still image B-> still image C-> still image C" may be repeated, as shown in FIG. The display of "still image A-> still image B-> still image B-> still image B-> still image B-> still image C" may be repeated.

With such a configuration, many types of moving animations can be generated with a small number of still images, so that the production data can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced and stable game control can be performed. There is.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5F, the moving animation is displayed by changing the number of still images to be inserted and displayed between common still images (in this example, still images Z, X, and P). The times may be different from each other. Although not shown, by changing the number of still images to be deleted among the common still images (for example, one moving animation deletes the still image Z and the other moving animation includes the still images Z, X, For example, the display time of the moving animation may be different from each other. When a moving animation is configured by combining a plurality of animations, the display time of the moving animation may be made different by changing the number of animations included in the moving animation. Alternatively, the display time of one moving animation may be set to an arbitrary time other than 0, and the display time of the moving animation may be made different by setting the display time of the other moving animation to 0.

  In addition, one, plural, or all of the display times of a plurality of types of animations may be displayed differently. For example, display of a moving animation and an increasing animation among deletion, movement, increase, fluctuation, and standby animations. The times may be different from each other, or only the display time of the erase animation may be different from the display time of other animations.

  For example, when the display times of the moving animation and the increase animation are different from each other, if the start timings of both are the same (or substantially the same), the end timings of both will be different, and the end timings of both will be different. If it is desired to match, the start timings of both may be different. In addition, a second animation having at least two kinds of a first animation having only an animation for the first display time and an animation having a second display time different from the animation for the first display time and the first display time. An animation may be provided. In the second animation, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, non-electric support), only the animation for the first display time is executed and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, electric support). ) Only for the second display time.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of hold icons, and the animation display time may be changed based on the size of the hold icon. For example, when the hold icon is the first size, the animation display If the time is set to the first display time and the hold icon has a second size larger than the first size, the animation display time is set to the second display time longer than the first display time. (Or a third display time shorter than the first display time) may be set. When the hold icon is the first size and the animation display time is the third display time, the hold icon is more than the case when the hold icon is the second size and the animation display time is the first display time. In some cases, the movement of the camera can be shown relatively quickly.

  Further, when the increase animation includes a first increase animation and a second increase animation with different display times, and the suspension of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 occurs simultaneously (or substantially simultaneously), the special figure 1 The first increase animation may be started at the same time as the on-hold occurrence occurs, and the second increase animation may be started at the same time as the hold on the special figure 2 occurs, so that the end timing may be different between the first and second increase animations. .

  In addition, when one of the hold in the special figure 1 and the hold in the special figure 2 occurs before the other, the end timing of the increase animation that occurs first is higher than the end timing of the increase animation that occurs later. May be earlier, later, or simultaneously (or substantially simultaneously).

  In addition, when the start timing (or end timing) of the animation in the normal state is different from the normal state (for example, when a transition to the above-mentioned electric opportunity occurs, or when the electric occasion closes, It may be different from the start timing (or end timing) of the animation in the case of entering a ball.

  Further, when the increase animation of the special figure 2 is started during the increase animation of the special figure 1, the increase animation of the special figure 1 may be canceled with priority given to the increase animation of the special figure 2. In this case, it may be configured to stop only in the special state.

  After power failure and before power recovery, the display mode of multiple hold icons and the display mode of various animations are different, while the display mode of multiple hold icons and the display mode of various animations are the same after power recovery You may change into an aspect.

  Further, when the suspension increases, the display may be performed in the order of increasing animation → special animation → standby animation. In this case, the special animation may be executed only in the special state.

<Example V>
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display according to Example V. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable icon related information first display area 916 and the variable icon related information second display area 918 can be displayed in the lower left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. Yes. The variation icon related information first display area 916 and the variation icon related information second display area 918 are areas for displaying information regarding the variation icon. The variable icon related information first display area 916 and the variable icon related information second display area 918 may be in the same liquid crystal display area, in different liquid crystal display areas, or in different liquid crystal display apparatuses. There may be two of each. In addition, only when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the total of the suspension of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reaches the maximum value of 8), the variation icon related information first display area 916 or the variation The icon related information second display area 918 may be displayed. Further, the arrangement and number of the variable icon related information first display area 916 and the variable icon related information second display area 918 are not particularly limited.

  For example, in the effect display shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, the change display of the special figure is started at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, and the change icon related information second display area 918 relates to the change icon. Character information of “Development” is displayed as information, and character information of “Intense heat” is displayed as information related to the variation icon in the variation icon related information first display area 916. Here, the character information of “Development” indicates that the variation develops into super reach, and the character information of “Intense heat” indicates that the expectation that the success / failure determination of the variation game is a big hit is high. ing. As the timing for starting display of these character information and the timing for changing the display, for example, when the sum of the suspension of special figure 1 and the suspension of special figure 2 reaches a maximum value of 8, For example, the case of shifting to electric chance. Moreover, when changing these character information, you may change to the display (for example, hot hot-> intense heat-> super intense heat) which a player's expectation gradually increases, for example.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 8C, a moving animation is performed in which the fluctuation icon VI is moved to the fluctuation icon related information second display area 918. In this moving animation, by moving the variation icon VI to the variation icon related information second display area 918 in which character information of “Intense heat” is displayed, it is highly expected that the determination of whether or not the variation game is successful will be a big hit. It suggests.

  As described above, if an area for displaying information on the variation icon is provided, it is possible to display information related to the variation, and the display may increase the player's expectation.

  Further, in the effect display shown in FIGS. 4D and 4E, specific information determined by lottery from a plurality of pieces of information related to the variation icon is displayed in the variation icon related information first display area 916, and the variation is displayed. The icon related information second display area 918 is not displayed.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (c), the fluctuation display of the special figure is started, and the fluctuation icon related information first display area 916 displays “↓ (during fluctuation) as information regarding the fluctuation icon determined by lottery. Is displayed), and the variable icon related information second display area 918 is not displayed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the character information of “hot” is displayed in the variable icon related information first display area 916 as information regarding the variable icon determined by lottery, and the variable icon related information second display. The area 918 is not displayed.

  The variation icon related information second display area 918 may be always displayed, may be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied, or may not be displayed. Here, as the “specific condition” for starting the display of the variation icon related information second display area 918, for example, when the number of holdings increases or decreases, when the variation of the special figure is started, The game state has changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a hold with a high expectation level that is a big hit is exhausted, when the production mode or stage is changed, or when a predetermined operation means is operated If a variable game with a high expectation that the success / failure determination becomes a big hit is put on hold, if a change animation is executed after the hold, if the expectation that the success / failure is a big hit is low but wins a predetermined lottery, An example is when a change animation is executed after the selection. Also, the normal variation icon display area may be always displayed, may be displayed when the specific condition is satisfied, or may not be displayed.

  85 and 86 are diagrams showing a modification of Example V. FIG. In this example, the variable icon related information display area 922 and the variable icon history information display area 924 can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′. The fluctuation icon related information display area 922 is an area for displaying information on the fluctuation icon, and the fluctuation icon history information display area 924 is an area for displaying the history of the fluctuation icon.

  In addition, the information regarding the variation icon displayed in the variation icon related information display area 922 can be displayed from the variation until before the next variation start, and the history of the variation icon displayed in the variation icon history information display region 924 is the next time. It is possible to display after the start of fluctuation. In this example, the fluctuation icon related information display area 922 and the fluctuation icon history information display area 924 are separate areas, but the information of both may be displayed in the same area. You may provide the above display area and display both information in either display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the production mode is changed from the first production mode (in this example, the normal mode) to the second production mode (in this example, the slot chance mode) as the special figure starts to change. doing. At this timing, the character information of “slot chance” is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ to notify the player that the effect mode has shifted to the slot chance mode.

  Further, at this timing, in addition to the variable icon related information display area 922 displayed from the timing of FIG. 5A, a variable icon history information display area 924 is newly displayed and images of the hold icons PI1 to PI3 are displayed. Is changed from a general circular image to an image imitating a medal. Further, an image imitating a slot machine is displayed in the variation icon related information display area 922 as information regarding the variation icon.

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the character information (in this example, “replay symbol × 3 consecutive big hits, replay symbol × 2 consecutive SPs”) suggesting a privilege during the slot chance mode is displayed. To inform. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold 1 is started, and the change icon VI1 changed from the hold icon PI1 of the hold 1 is displayed up to the change icon related information display area 922. A moving animation is performed (moving a medal (hold icon) into the slot machine displayed in the variable icon related information display area 922).

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, an image representing the change of symbols in the slot machine displayed in the fluctuation icon related information display area 922 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. In the slot machine displayed in the variation icon related information display area 922, an image showing a state in which the replay symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, the same symbol as the replay symbol displayed in the variation icon related information display region 922 is displayed in the variation icon history information display region 924 as the history information of the variation icon.

  Thereafter, the same processing is repeated for the hold 2 and hold 3, and at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (r), three replay symbols are displayed side by side in the variable icon history information display area 924, and the replay symbols are displayed three times in succession. It is informed that the display is stopped (a specific condition is satisfied in the slot chance mode). Further, at the next timing (s) in the figure, the central display of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ is based on the fact that the result of the fluctuation is a big hit and that a specific condition is established in the slot chance mode. Character information “BIG Get!” Is displayed in the area.

  Note that the slot chance in the present embodiment may be replaced with the above-mentioned electric opportunity. In this case, the player's expectation may be enhanced by changing the type of symbols displayed on the image imitating the slot machine in accordance with the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 during the electric chance. . The size of the image displayed in the variation icon related information display area 922 and the size of the image displayed in the variation icon history information display area 924 may be the same or different.

  Also, in this example, an example of a replay symbol is shown. However, a symbol combination corresponding to a symbol (for example, bonus, cherry, etc.) provided in a conventionally known slot machine can be stopped and displayed, and the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed The privilege granted to the player may be changed according to the situation. In addition, although an example in which one hold icon is changed to one medal is shown, the number of medals may be changed according to the expectation degree of the hold corresponding to the hold icon. In the case of, one corresponding hold icon may be changed to three medals.

  In addition, when a medal remains when a privilege is given by a slot chance, the medal can be held and can be used at the next slot chance, or instead of holding a medal. Other benefits may be granted. In addition, an effect of notifying the grant of a privilege at a slot chance (for example, an effect performed when two replay symbols are arranged when a privilege is granted when three replay symbols are collected) may be performed. .

  Further, a movable body that can cover a part or all of the variation icon related information display area 922 and the variation icon history information display area 924 may be provided. In this case, the player is provided in the display area covered by the movable body. Information that is advantageous to the user may be displayed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable body may be moved to change the advantageous information from the invisible state to the visible state.

  Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol during the slot chance and the variation display of the symbol displayed in the image imitating the slot machine may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. Further, in the case of not synchronizing, during the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation display of the symbol displayed in the image imitating the slot machine is performed a plurality of times (for example, three times), and a plurality of variations are displayed in the variation icon history information display area 924. A batch of symbols (eg, three replay symbols) may be displayed. Further, when a power interruption occurs during a slot chance, the slot chance may be terminated by power recovery after the power interruption.

<Example W>
FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing an example of effect display according to Example W. In this example, a hold icon display area 926 is provided in the lower half display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 ′ as shown in FIG. 5A, and a hold icon as shown in FIG. It is configured to display a special figure on hold using PI.

  The image of the hold icon PI is composed of two parts: a main part PIm (in this example, a character image) and an auxiliary part PIs (in this example, a pedestal image) that at least partially overlaps the main part PIm. It is also used for the movement animation, increase animation, and deletion animation of the hold icon. Taking the increase animation of the hold icon performed when the number of hold of the special figure variable game increases as an example, in the increase animation shown in FIG. 5C, the images of the scenes S1 to S3 are displayed before the hold icon PI is displayed. Display moving images. In these scenes S1 to S3, a moving image expressing a state in which a circular plate covering a hole dug in the ground gradually opens and the inside of the hole gradually appears is displayed. The main part PIm and the auxiliary part PIs are not limited to this example, and may be, for example, numbers (1, 2, 3, 4,.

  Next, in this increase animation, a moving image including scenes S4 to S8 shown in FIG. First, in the scene S4, when the hold icon PI appears from the hole in the ground, a part of the main part PIm of the hold icon PI is displayed. Note that the auxiliary part PIs of the hold icon PI is not displayed at the timing of the scene S4.

  Subsequently, in the scene S5, the hold icon PI further rises above the position of the scene S4, thereby displaying all the main parts PIm and a part of the auxiliary part PIs of the hold icon PI. Subsequently, in the scene S6, the hold icon PI further rises above the position of the scene S5, thereby displaying all the main parts PIm and all the auxiliary parts PIs of the hold icon PI. In the subsequent scenes S7 and S8, a moving image that changes only the mode of the main part PIm is displayed in a state where all of the main part PIm and the auxiliary part PIs of the hold icon PI are displayed.

  Thus, in the increase animation, if the auxiliary part is displayed after the main part of the hold icon is displayed, the player's interest can be attracted and the player's willingness to play can be increased. is there.

  The main part PIm of the hold icon PI may be displayed near the center of the display area, and the auxiliary part PIs may be displayed near the end of the display area. The widths of the main part PIm and the auxiliary part PIs may be different.

  Next, another example of the hold icon movement animation will be described. The animation shown in FIG. 88 is an example of a moving animation that is performed when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 2 to 1.

  87A shows that the hold icon PI1 for the hold 1 and the hold icon PI2 for the hold 2 are displayed by the increasing animation shown in FIG. 87C, and the number of hold of the special figure variable game is 2. The state which is alerting | reporting is shown. In the display area where the hold icons corresponding to hold 3 and hold 4 are displayed, a still image representing a state in which a hole in the ground is closed with a plate is displayed.

  During the period shown in FIG. 6A to FIG. 10B, a moving image that rotates only the main parts PIm1 and PIm2 of the hold icons PI1 and PI2 clockwise is displayed, and the following FIG. In the period shown in f), without moving the auxiliary parts PIs1 and PIs2, only the main parts PIm1 and PIm2 are moved to the left side of the figure, and the auxiliary part PIs1 on which the main part PIm1 of the holding icon PI1 is placed is reserved. A moving image representing a state where the main part PIm2 of the icon PI2 is mounted is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to synchronize the movement of the main part PIm1 of the hold icon PI1 and the movement of the main part PIm2 of the hold icon PI2.

  Also, during the period shown in FIG. 5 (f) to FIG. 10 (g), a moving image that rotates only the main part PIm2 of the hold icon PI2 counterclockwise is displayed, and the next figure (g) to FIG. In the period shown in FIG. 8, after the auxiliary part PIs2 on which the hold icon PI2 is placed is moved into the hole in the ground, a still image showing a state in which the hole in the ground is closed with a plate is displayed.

  This moving animation expresses that the number of reserved special figure games has been reduced from 2 to 1 by the series of moving images shown in FIGS. In addition, in this example, the example which moves auxiliary | assistant part PIs2 at the timing shown to the figure (h) was shown, but as shown to the same figure (d), main part PIm2 currently mounted on auxiliary | assistant part PIs2 is shown, for example. The auxiliary part PIs2 may be moved downward at the timing of descending from the auxiliary part PIs2, and as shown in FIG. 5E, the main part PIm2 placed on the auxiliary part PIs2 descends from the auxiliary part PIs2, You may move auxiliary | assistant part PIs2 below at the timing mounted on auxiliary | assistant part PIs1.

  FIG. 89A shows an example in which the image displayed when there is no hold and the image of the auxiliary portion of the hold icon displayed after the hold is generated are the same. In this example, when there is no hold, the image 903 shown at the leftmost part of FIG. 9A is displayed. On the other hand, when the hold occurs, the moving image is displayed in the order of the arrows shown in FIG. After the image is displayed, a hold icon including the image 903 as an auxiliary unit is displayed as shown in the rightmost part of FIG.

  FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an example of a variation of the auxiliary part of the hold icon. As described above, various images can be adopted as the auxiliary part of the hold icon. For example, by changing the size, shape, color, pattern, etc. of the auxiliary part, the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon The degree of expectation can be expressed. Also, the combination of the auxiliary part and the main part may be different. For example, when an auxiliary part with a high selection probability is combined with the same main part, the degree of expectation is low, and the auxiliary part with a low selection probability When these are combined, the degree of expectation may be increased. Moreover, you may determine the combination of an auxiliary | assistant part and a principal part at random by lottery etc.

  Moreover, the figure (c), (d) is the figure which showed the example which controls a principal part and an auxiliary | assistant part in a different aspect. In the example shown in (c) of the figure, both the main part and the auxiliary part rotate with t1 to t4 as one cycle, while in the example shown in (d), the main part has t1 to t5 as one cycle. It rotates and the auxiliary | assistant part is rotating by making t1-t4 into 1 period.

  With such a configuration, while using the same image as the auxiliary part and the main part, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display, reduce the effect data, and increase the player's willingness to play There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating another example of the increase animation and the movement animation. In this example, an image 932 that is used as an auxiliary part for the hold icon in the increase animation and an image 932 that is used as the auxiliary part for the hold icon in the moving animation are shared, while an image 934 that is used as the main part of the hold icon in the increase animation. The image 936 used as the main part of the hold icon in the movement animation is different. Further, in the increase animation, only the auxiliary portion image 932 of the hold icon is displayed first, and then the auxiliary portion image 932 and the main portion image 934 are displayed in combination.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to perform highly-relevant effect display in the increase animation and the movement animation, simplify the effect control, and increase the player's willingness to play. .

  91A and 91B are examples of an increase animation in which only the main part of the hold icon is changed. In the moving animations shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the moving images that express the state in which the circular plate covering the hole dug in the ground gradually opens and the inside of the hole gradually appears are common. However, the character images constituting the main part of the hold icon appearing from the hole after that are different between the movement animation shown in FIG. 5A and the movement animation shown in FIG. In addition, the character image of each moving animation is configured to be selected according to a corresponding expected expectation level.

  With such a configuration, during a period when a common moving image is displayed in the moving animation, a sense of expectation such as whether a character image with a high expectation level appears or a character image with a low expectation level appears thereafter. Can be held by the player, and the motivation for playing may be increased.

  In this example, the shape of the hole image is circular. However, for example, the shape, color, size, pattern, and the like of the hole image may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the corresponding hold. Further, the character image and the hole image may be related to each other. For example, in the animation using the first character image shown in FIG. In the animation using the second character image shown in), if the shape of the hole image is a star shape, it is possible to infer the character image to be displayed later based on the hole image displayed first In some cases, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, with such a relationship, the first character image is displayed after the second character image is temporarily displayed even though the hole image displayed previously is circular. If displayed, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIGS. 10C to 10E show examples in which an effect image (aura in this example) is added to the moving animation shown in FIG. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5C, an effect image is added to the entire holding icon before the character image that is the main part appears, and in the example shown in FIG. At the same time, the effect image is added to the entire hold icon. In the example shown in FIG. 5E, the effect image is added to the entire hold icon after the main character image appears.

  In this way, if an image is added to the hold icon at different timings, it is possible to change the impression of the entire moving animation while sharing the basic part of the moving animation, and to increase the player's expectation. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 8F shows the appearance of the character image delayed in the moving animation shown in FIG. In this way, if the hold icon appears at different timings, the impression of the entire moving animation can be changed while the basic portion of the moving animation is made common, and the player's expectation may be enhanced. .

  FIG. 6G shows an effect image different in the moving animation shown in FIG. 4D. In this example, the character image which is the main part of the hold icon, not the entire hold icon. Only the effect image is given. As described above, if the target to which the effect image is applied is different, the impression of the entire moving animation can be changed while the basic portion of the moving animation is made common, and the player's expectation may be increased. . In this example, the effect image is given only to the main part of the hold icon, but the effect image may be given to a part of the auxiliary part. In addition, the time for applying the effect image may be shortened in accordance with the display time of the animation. For example, in the case of an animation performed in a period in which the fluctuation time is short, the display time is reduced by reducing the time for applying the effect image. You may match the bottom of the book.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 ′) according to the present embodiment has the symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display) capable of executing at least the symbol variation display. Device 214), and a hold display means (for example, a hold icon display area 912 shown in FIG. 81) capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of operation hold balls that will activate the symbol display means by a hold icon; The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a hold animation indicating a change in the hold icon, and the hold display means has a first condition that is satisfied ( For example, when the second hold occurs, the hold animation (for example, as shown in FIG. 81, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon second display area 914). The animation to move to the hold icon display area 912) can be displayed at least over the first period, and the hold display means has a second condition (for example, the fourth hold) The hold animation can be displayed at least over the second period, and the length of the first period and the length of the second period are different from each other. It is a game stand characterized by. Here, the “number of operation suspending balls” according to the present invention refers to “the number of game balls for operating the symbol display means” (hereinafter the same).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the occurrence of the hold can be notified by a special effect, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Further, when the first condition is satisfied, the hold display means displays a hold icon from the hold icon second display area 914 as shown in FIG. Animation that moves to the second area 912b of the area 912) can be displayed at least over the first period, and the hold display means can display the second condition when the second condition is satisfied. Is displayed at least over the second period (for example, an animation for moving the hold icon from the hold icon second display area 914 to the fourth area 912d of the hold icon display area 912 as shown in FIG. 81). It may be possible.

  With such a configuration, a change in the number of holds can be notified by a special effect, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In addition, the first condition includes a case where the first condition is satisfied (for example, when there is one hold), and the second condition is the second state ( For example, it may include a case in which three holds are established.

  With such a configuration, a change in the number of holds can be notified by a special effect, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 ′) according to the present embodiment includes a symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display. And a display device capable of executing at least display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 ′), wherein the display device is configured to display the symbol when the first display condition is satisfied. It is possible to display at least a variation icon corresponding to the variation display (for example, variation icon VI shown in FIG. 84), and the display means relates to the variation icon when a second display condition is satisfied. The game table is characterized in that it can display at least information (for example, character information of “development” and “extreme heat” shown in FIG. 84).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation icon, information related to the fluctuation icon can be notified, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Further, the hold display means has at least a first display area and a second display area, and the first display area (for example, the change icon related information first display area 916 and the change shown in FIG. 84). In the display area other than the icon related information second display area 918, at least the variable icon is displayed, and the second display area (for example, the variable icon related information first display area 916 shown in FIG. The icon related information second display area 918) may display information related to the variable icon.

  With such a configuration, even when notifying information related to the variation icon in addition to the variation icon, the information related to the variation icon can be easily recognized, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is a case.

  The hold display means can display the change icon (for example, change icons VI1 and VI2 imitating medals shown in FIG. 85) over a first period, and the hold display means. Is capable of displaying at least information related to the variation icon displayed over the first period (for example, an image simulating a slot machine shown in FIG. 85) over the second period. The end of the first period and the end of the second period may arrive at different times.

  With such a configuration, even when notifying information related to the variation icon in addition to the variation icon, the information related to the variation icon can be easily recognized, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is a case.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 ′) according to the present embodiment includes a symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display. And a holding display means capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of the operation holding balls that will operate the symbol display means by a holding icon, wherein the holding icon is a first icon It is a gaming machine characterized by including at least a display (for example, the main part PIm shown in FIG. 87) and a second display (for example, the auxiliary part PIs shown in FIG. 87).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the occurrence of the hold can be notified by a special effect, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  The first display occupies a first ratio of the hold icons (for example, the character image shown in FIG. 87), and the second display is the first of the hold icons. The first ratio and the second ratio may be different from each other (for example, an image of a pedestal on which a character image is placed). With such a configuration, the occurrence of the hold can be notified by a special effect, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  The hold display means includes a first hold icon (for example, an image of the character shown in FIG. 91A and an image of a pedestal on which the character is placed) and a second hold icon (for example, FIG. 91 ( the image of the character shown in b) and the image of the pedestal on which the character is placed), and the first hold icon includes at least the first display and the second display. The second hold icon includes at least a third display and a fourth display, and the first display displays the first ratio of the first hold icons. The third display may occupy a third ratio of the second hold icon, and the first ratio and the third ratio may be different ratios. .

  With such a configuration, the occurrence of the hold can be notified by a special effect, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the present embodiment. For example, when there are a plurality of prefetch hold, the hold icon corresponding to the first prefetch hold is displayed. The time for completing the change of the display mode (shape change, size change, color change, movement, rotation, etc.) and the time for completing the change of the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the second prefetch hold are different. It may be allowed. In addition, the time for completing the change in the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold of the advantageous result is set longer than the time for completing the change in the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold of the unfavorable result. Thus, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold of an advantageous result may be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold of the advantageous result is more conspicuous by superimposing the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold of the advantageous result on the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold of the adverse result. It may be. In addition, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold to be digested first is superimposed on the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold to be digested later, so that the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold to be digested first is better. You may make it stand out. On the other hand, by superimposing a hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold to be digested later on the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold to be digested first, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch hold to be digested later is displayed. You may make it stand out.

  In addition, by placing a hold icon corresponding to a hold with low reliability on a hold icon corresponding to a hold with high reliability, the hold icon corresponding to a hold with low reliability is made more conspicuous. Good. On the other hand, by placing a hold icon corresponding to a hold with high reliability on a hold icon corresponding to a hold with low reliability, the hold icon corresponding to a hold with high reliability is more conspicuous. It may be.

  Here, the “reliability” is an abbreviation for big hit reliability, and indicates what percentage of the big hit is a big hit when an effect of the same mode is executed. For example, the reliability of the holding X can be expressed as “(probability of jackpot × selection rate of holding X) / (probability of jackpot × selection rate of holding X + probability of losing × selection rate of holding X)”. .

  Specifically, the display mode “red” of the variation icon having a reliability of 30.3% informs the player that the probability that the success / failure result of the variation is a big hit is 30.3%, The player is informed that the probability that the result of the change is wrong is 69.7%. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is notifying the jackpot reliability at the same time and notifying the reliability at the same time. In addition, the reliability is not limited to a value of 1, and may have a width, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution of the random number range in the variation icon display table. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  In addition, by placing a hold icon corresponding to a hold with a low appearance rate on a hold icon corresponding to a hold with a high appearance rate, the hold icon corresponding to a hold with a low appearance rate is made more conspicuous. Good. On the other hand, by placing a hold icon corresponding to a hold with a high appearance rate on a hold icon corresponding to a hold with a low appearance rate, the hold icon corresponding to a hold with a high appearance rate is more conspicuous. It may be.

  Here, the “appearance rate” is the sum of the probability of being selected when a certain performance is a big hit and the probability of being selected when it is lost. For example, the appearance rate of hold X can be expressed as “probability of jackpot × selection rate of hold X + probability of loss × selection rate of hold X”.

  Also, depending on the difference in gaming status (for example, non-electric support and electric support, special figure high probability state and special figure low probability state, probability change and short time, short time and normal game, probability change and normal game) Thus, the time when the change in the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the first hold is completed may be different from the time when the change in the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the second hold is completed.

  Further, the present invention starts the animation for deleting the variable icon after the hold lamp is turned off, starts the animation for moving the hold icon after the lamp is turned off, and after the animation for deleting the variable icon is completed. The movement of the hold icon is started.The movement of the hold icon is started during the animation for deleting the floating icon.The animation for deleting the floating icon and the movement of the hold icon are performed simultaneously. The movement lamp is started, the animation of the change icon and the hold icon is started, the hold lamp is turned off, the hold lamp is turned off at the same time as the change starts, the hold lamp is turned off after the change starts, And other technical ideas.

In addition, the icons that can be displayed in the variable icon display area are not limited to the variable icons that have changed from the hold icon, and may change from one or more of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area. A variation icon (for example, an icon selected based on the prefetch result of the third hold instead of the first hold) is also included.
[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 164. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 92 to 164 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment 92 to 164 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Back>
FIG. 93 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 92 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 94 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  Although details will be described later, a decorative design display device 208, a first effect movable body 224 that imitates a human arm, and a second effect movable body 225 with a general character are provided at the approximate center of the game area 124. An effect device 206 having the above is arranged. In the lower right of the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, in a lower area of the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, A first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged below the center part of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 have the same structure, and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device wins the special figure display game and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Opening and closing at the number of times (for example, 15 times).

  In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special figure 2 variable game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, the first effect movable body 224, and the second effect movable body 225.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the first effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow is provided. The first effect movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. The second effect movable body 225 includes a motor (not shown), and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234, and a second variable winning port. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 235a of 235 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 also includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the first effect movable body 224 and the second effect movable body 225, and the current positions of the first effect movable body 224 and the second effect movable body 225. An effect movable body sensor 424 to detect, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, A gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the gaming table frame lamp 542, and a serial for performing lighting control by serial communication between the gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 and the gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 The communication control circuit 520 is connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 96A to 96C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. 12A shows 12 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure L” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R special jackpot A or 16R probability variation A), and “Special Figure B” is a 16R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 16R special jackpot B or 16R). "Special figure C" is a 16R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R jackpot or 16R normal). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

  In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game ends and after the 16R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the short time state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is called the normal high probability state (or electric support state), and the state that does not enter the time reduction state is the normal low probability state (or non-electrical state). It is called a support state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 16R special jackpot symbols, are in a high probability state of special figure high probability, and “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability normal figure height. Probability state. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustration C” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  "Special Figure D" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot A or 4R probability variation A), and "Special Figure E" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot B or 4R probability variation B). Compared with “Special Drawing A” to “Special Drawing C” which is 16R, “Special Drawing D” and “Special Drawing E” are different in that they are 4R. "Special Figure F" is a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot A or 2R probability variation A), and "Special Figure G" is also referred to as a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 2R special jackpot B or 2R probability variation B). "Special figure H" is a 2R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R jackpot or 2R normal), compared to "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure C" which is 16R, "Special Figure F" ~ "Special Figure H" is different in that it is 2R. “Special Figure I” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit”), and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Also, “Special Figure J” is the off symbol 1, “Special Figure K” is the off symbol 2, and “Special L” is the off symbol 3, both of which are the profits to be given to the player. Is a symbol that has a relatively small profit amount.

  FIG. 96 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal variation, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, 2R probability variation B, or 2R normal variation is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) arranged in a row is stopped and displayed. Further, when reporting 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation B, or 2R probability variation A or 2R probability variation B, three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying, the symbol combination shown in FIG. Stops symbol combinations other than.

  FIG. 96 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, the stoppage display mode of the common figure is “common figure A” which is a winning symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as “1” per universal symbol) and a winning symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as “2 per universal symbol”). There are three types: “general map B” and “general map C”, which is an outlier design. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Data table of main control unit>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Win / fail judgment table>
FIG. 97 (a) shows an example of the high probability state table for determination of success / failure (see FIG. 1), and FIG. Is. FIG. 4C shows an example of the high probability state table for success / failure determination (special figure 2), and FIG. 4D shows an example of the low probability state table for the success / failure determination (special figure 2). It is shown.

  These success / failure determination tables correlate presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), special figure big hit judgment lottery value data, and special figure variable game success / failure results. Has been remembered. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the winning / non-winning determination table, presence / absence of special figure probability change, and that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects, a big hit determination is performed to determine the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game).

<Win / fail judgment table / special figure 1 variable game jackpot judgment>
In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 1 variable game winning (big hit) ) Is set and information indicating that a big hit flag is provided in the storage area for the big hit flag provided in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is set to “turn on the big hit flag on”) "). Further, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), when the obtained special figure winning random number value is 12186-12373, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the storage area for the small hit flag is set (hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag to ON”).

  On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), if the acquired special figure winning random number value is a numerical value of 0-10000 or 11858-65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of the above-mentioned range. Information indicating that there is a loss is set in the storage area of the big hit flag and the small hit flag (hereinafter, setting the information of the loss in the storage area of the big hit flag is referred to as “setting the big hit flag off”) The setting of the out-of-order information in the storage area for the small hit flag is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”). If the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value between 10220 and 12185, it is determined whether the special figure is a high probability state or a special figure low probability state. When the special figure low probability state is set, the off flag is set to ON (this result may be referred to as “high accuracy time big hit low accuracy loss”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219) + 10220-12185 (the size of the numerical range is 1966), so the probability of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). Since the numerical range of the lottery value data per small lot in the special figure high probability state is 12186 to 12373 (the numerical range is 188), the winning of the small hit per special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state The probability is about 1/399 (= 188/65536). On the other hand, the probability of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536). This is approximately 1/399 (= 188/65536), which is the same as the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state.

<Win / fail judgment table / special figure 2 variable game jackpot judgment>
In the special figure 2 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 2 variable game winning (big hit) ) And the big hit flag is set to ON. The special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit. Also, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), if the acquired special figure winning random number value is a value of 0 to 10000 or 12185 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of play and the jackpot flag And set the small hit flag off. Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 10220-12185, it is determined whether the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state. When it is set and the special figure low probability state is set, the off-going flag is set to ON (this result may be referred to as “high accuracy time big hit low accuracy time loss”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219) + 10220-12185 (the numerical range is 1966), so the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). It is set to be the same as the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure high probability state. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), They are set the same.

<Special figure determination table>
FIG. 98 (a) is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, and FIG. 98 (b) is a special figure used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. It is an example of the table for determination. In these special figure determination tables, the success / failure determination result (win / failure result) of special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game), lottery value data, and types of stop symbols are stored in association with each other. Yes.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol 1 stop symbol (or the special symbol 2 stop symbol) based on the special symbol determination determination table and the acquired symbol random number value. Do. When the big hit flag is on, the big hit symbol random number value generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used as the symbol lottery random value, and when the big hit flag is on, the above special figure winning random number is used. When the small-hit symbol random number value generated from the random number value is used as the random lottery value for symbol lottery, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are off), the above-mentioned special The symbol random number value for loss generated from the symbol winning random value is used as the symbol random number value.

<Special figure determination table / Special figure 1 stop symbol>
For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value from 0 to 24, the special figure A is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery random value is 25 If it is a value of ~ 49, select special figure B as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and if the random number value of symbol lottery is 50-74, select special figure C as the special symbol 1 stop symbol, When the random number is a numerical value of 75 to 84, special figure D is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and when the random number value of the symbol lottery is 85 to 99, special figure F is selected as the special symbol 1 stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 floating game is successful is a small hit, the special figure 1 is stopped with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol random number value (the symbol random number value for the small hit). When Special Figure I is selected as the symbol, and the result of determining whether or not Special Figure 1 Floating Game is correct, the special drawing J is selected as the Special Figure 1 stop symbol when the symbol lottery random number is a value from 0 to 49. When the symbol lottery random value is a value of 51 to 89, the special symbol K is selected as the special symbol 1 stop symbol, and when the symbol lottery random value is the numerical value of 90 to 99, the symbol special symbol 1 is stopped. Select FIG.

<Special Figure Determination Table / Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern>
For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value from 0 to 49, the special symbol A is selected as the special symbol 2 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery random value is 50 If it is a value of ~ 62, special figure E is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol, and if the random number value of symbol lottery is 63-74, special figure G is selected as the special symbol 2 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery When the random number is a numerical value of 75 to 99, the special figure H is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful, the special figure 2 stop symbol is used regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss), that is, with a probability of 100% at the time of loss. Select Special Figure J.

<Variable prize opening abnormality judgment value table>
FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable prize opening abnormality determination value table for determining abnormality in the number of balls entered into the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235. FIG. In this variable prize opening abnormality determination value table, a special figure hit type (synonymous with a stop symbol), a variable winning opening opening pattern, a variable winning opening to be opened, and an abnormality determination value for a variable winning opening. The number of abnormality determinations shown is stored in association with each other. Note that a calculation formula for calculating the number of abnormality determinations is shown on the right side of the number of abnormality determinations for reference.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires an abnormality determination value for a variable winning opening used in a winning opening counter updating process to be described later, based on the variable winning opening abnormality determination table and the winning type. For example, when the winning type is 16R probability variation A (special figure A), 208 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening, and when the winning type is 16R probability variation B (special figure B), the variable prize is obtained. 112 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the mouth, and when the hit type is 16R normal, 100 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening.

  In the present embodiment, when the hit type is 16R probability variation A (special drawing A), a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. A game whose end condition is either when it has elapsed, or when a predetermined maximum number of balls (10 in this example) has entered since the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 has been opened. Is configured to perform a big hit game in which 1 to 16R is performed a total of 16 times. Therefore, for example, if the maximum number of balls for each of 1 to 16R (maximum opening time 30 seconds) is set to 10 balls and the abnormality determining constant per 1R is set to 3, the second variable prize opening for each of 1 to 16R Since the upper limit value of game balls that can enter 235 is (10 + 3), the lower limit value for determining that the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game of 16R probability variation A is abnormal. (10 + 3) × 16 = 208.

  In addition, when the hit type is 16R probability variation B (special drawing B), when a predetermined maximum opening time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. Or, when the predetermined maximum number of balls entered (10 in this example) has entered after opening the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235, a game with one of the end conditions as 1 to After a total of four times of 4R, when a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 was opened, or the second variable winning prize When the predetermined maximum number of balls entered (2 in this example) after the door member 235a of the mouth 235 is opened, a big hit is performed for a total of 12 games of 5 to 16R. It is configured to play a game. Therefore, for example, the maximum number of entrances for each of 1 to 4R (maximum opening time 30 seconds) is 10, and the maximum number of entrances for each of 5 to 16R (maximum opening time 0.1 seconds) is 2 per 1R. When the abnormality determination constant is set to 3, the upper limit value of the game balls that can enter the second variable winning opening 235 in each of 1 to 4R is (10 + 3), and the second variable in each of 5 to 16R. Since the upper limit value of game balls that can enter the winning opening 235 is (2 + 3), the lower limit for determining that the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game of 16R probability variation B is abnormal. The value is (10 + 3) × 4 + (2 + 3) × 12 = 112.

  When the hit type is 16R normal, when a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 was opened, or the first variable When a predetermined maximum number of balls entered (10 in this example) is entered after the door member 234a of the winning opening 234 is opened, a game with any one of the finishing conditions as 1 to 4R is performed four times in total. After a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 was opened, or the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 When a predetermined maximum number of balls entered (2 in this example) after entering the game, the game is played with a big hit game in which any one of 5 to 16R is played a total of 12 times. Has been. Thus, for example, the maximum number of entrances for each of 1 to 4R (maximum opening time 30 seconds) is 10, and the maximum number of entrances for each of 5 to 16R (maximum opening time 0.1 seconds) is 1 per 1R. When the abnormality determination constant is set to 3, the upper limit value of the game balls that can enter the first variable winning opening 234 in each of 1 to 4R is (10 + 3), and the first variable in each of 5 to 16R Since the upper limit value of game balls that can enter the winning opening 234 is (1 + 3), the lower limit value for determining that the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 during the 16R normal big hit game is abnormal. Becomes (10 + 3) × 4 + (1 + 3) × 12 = 100. Since the other hit types differ only in the number of rounds, detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 is arranged at a position where the game ball is harder to enter than the second variable winning opening 235 (below the central portion of the game board 200). The maximum number of game balls that can enter the first variable winning opening 234 in a round of 1 second is set to one less than two of the second variable winning opening 235. In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) has reached a predetermined maximum number of balls (10), Even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235) is forcibly closed.

<Special figure start port abnormality judgment value table>
FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure start port abnormality determination value table for performing abnormality determination of the number of balls entering the second special figure start port 232. In this special figure starting port abnormality determination value table, the hit type of the normal map, the opening pattern of the second starting port 232, and the abnormality determination value indicating the number of abnormality determinations for the special figure starting port are stored in association with each other. Has been. Note that a calculation formula for calculating the number of abnormality determinations is shown on the right side of the number of abnormality determinations for reference.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires an abnormality determination value for a special figure starting port used in a prize opening counter updating process to be described later, based on the special figure starting port abnormality determination table and the hit type. For example, when the hit type is 1 per normal map, 12 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the start port, and when the hit type is 2 per normal map, 12 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the start port. To do.

  Here, when the hit type is 1 per normal figure, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened and closed once with a maximum opening time of 0.9 seconds, and the hit type is 2 per normal figure. Is configured to open and close the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 three times with a maximum opening time of 1.7 seconds. Also, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the number of game balls that have entered the second special figure starting port 232 has reached the maximum number of winnings (eight), the feathers obtained by winning one regular figure variable game Even before the opening / closing operation of the member 232a is completed, the blade member 232a is forcibly closed. Therefore, for example, if the abnormality determining constant for the opening / closing operation of the blade member 232a due to the winning of the one-time variable game is set to 3, the opening / closing operation of the blade member 232a due to the winning of the one-time variable game is input. The lower limit value for determining that the number of game balls played is abnormal is (8 + 4).

<Table selection table>
FIG. 100A shows an example of a table selection table for determining a variation type determination table to be described later. FIG. 100B shows a table selection opportunity table for determining No in the table selection table. It is the figure which showed an example. In the table selection table shown in FIG. 11A, No, a change type determination table, a production mode, the number of changes, and a transfer destination No are stored in association with each other, and the table selection shown in FIG. In the opportunity table, a table selection opportunity and No in the table selection table are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, when the table selection opportunity shown in FIG. To get. For example, when power-on to the pachinko machine 100 is detected, No0 is acquired, and the special symbol F, special symbol H, or special symbol I is selected in the above-described symbol lottery, When the game (big hit game or small hit game) is finished, No1 is acquired and the special drawing A, special figure B, special figure C, special figure D, special figure E, special figure G are obtained by the above-mentioned symbol lottery. If any one is won and the winning game based on the special figure (big hit game) is completed, No5 is acquired. Next, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires the variation type determination table, the rendering mode, the number of variations, and the transition destination No based on the table selection table and the No acquired based on the table selection trigger table.

<Table selection table / No0>
For example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No0, that is, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, Table 1 is used as the variation type determination table, Mode A (Dono mode) is used as the production mode, and the number of changes No0 is acquired as the migration destination number 30 times.

  In this case, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the effect mode to mode A, performs a variation type lottery described later based on Table 1, and displays the special drawing according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing the floating game 30 times, the process shifts to No0 indicated by the transfer destination No. In this example, when the No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No0, that is, when the power-on of the pachinko machine 100 is a table selection opportunity, the effect mode is mode A (donor mode). The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to repeat the state, but the first sub-control unit 400 changes the rendering mode from mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode) → mode C (爺 mode) → mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode)... May be switched, and mode A (dono mode), mode B (princess mode), and mode C (claw mode) may be repeated in this order.

<Table selection table / No1>
In addition, for example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No1, that is, in the above-described symbol lottery, either special figure F, special figure H or special figure I will be won, and based on the special figure When the game (big hit game or small hit game) is finished, table 1 is used as the variation type determination table, mode A (donor mode) is used as the production mode, 30 times is used as the number of changes, and No2 is set as the transition destination number. get.

  In this case, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the effect mode to mode A, performs a variation type lottery described later based on Table 1, and displays the special drawing according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing the variable game 30 times, the process proceeds to No 2 indicated by the transfer destination No. When the transition to No. 2 is made, the production mode is set to mode B, and the variation type lottery described later is performed based on Table 2, and the special game variation game is performed 30 times according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing, it transfers to No3 which transfer destination No shows. In the case of shifting to No3, the production mode is set to mode A, and the variation type lottery described later is performed based on Table 1, and the special variation game is performed 30 times according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing, it transfers to No4 which transfer destination No shows. In the case of shifting to No4, the production mode is set to mode C, and the variation type lottery described later is performed based on Table 3, and the special variation game is performed 30 times according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing, it transfers to No1 which transfer destination No shows.

  Therefore, the table selection trigger is that one of the special figure F, special figure H, and special figure I is won in the above-described symbol lottery and the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the special figure is completed. In this case, the production mode is: mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode) → mode A (dono mode) → mode C (Ｃ mode) → mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode) Switch to mode A (dono mode) → mode C (爺 mode) ... and change mode A (dono mode), mode B (princess mode), mode A (dono mode), mode C (爺 mode) Repeat in this order.

<Table selection table / No5>
In addition, for example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No5, that is, the special drawing A, special drawing B, special drawing C, special drawing D, special drawing E, special drawing G in the above-described symbol lottery. When one of the winning games is won and the winning game based on the special figure (big hit game) is finished, the table 4 is set as the change type determination table, the mode D (electric support effect mode) is set as the change mode, and the change count is set as 100. No1 is acquired as the migration destination number.

  In this case, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the effect mode to mode D, performs a variation type lottery described later based on the table 4, and displays the special drawing according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing the variable game 100 times, the process shifts to No1 indicated by the transfer destination No. After the transition to No.1, the winner of either the special drawing F, special drawing H or special drawing I was won in the above-mentioned symbol lottery, and the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the special drawing was completed. As in the case of the table selection opportunity, mode A (dono mode), mode B (princess mode), mode A (dono mode), and mode C (coffin mode) are repeated in this order.

<Variation type A determination table>
FIG. 101A shows an example of the variation type A determination table for determining the variation type A. FIG. In the variation type A determination table, the stop symbol of the special figure, the random number range for determining the variation type A, and the content of the variation type A are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the variation type A determination table, the special symbol stop symbol determined by the symbol lottery described above, the special figure 1 variable game hold number, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number. A variation type A lottery for determining the content of the variation type A is performed based on the total and the obtained random number for determining the variation type A. For example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 determined by the above-described symbol lottery is the special figure J, and the total number of the special figure 1 variable game hold and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 1 (for example, the special figure 1 variable game When the number of holdings is 0 and the holding number of the special figure 2 variable game is 1), when the obtained random number for determining the changing type A is in the numerical range of 0 to 29931, the changing type 3 is selected as the changing type. .

  Further, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 determined by the above-described symbol lottery is the special figure K, and the total number of the special figure 1 variable game hold and the special figure 2 variable game hold is 7 (for example, the special figure 1 change) In the case where the number of held games is 4 and the number of held special games 2 is 3), when the obtained variation type A determination random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9999, the variation type 1 is set as the variation type. select. Also, for example, if the stop symbol of special figure 1 determined in the above-mentioned symbol lottery is special figure A, it is acquired regardless of the total number of special figure 1 variable games and special figure 2 variable games held. When the random number for determining the variation type A is in the numerical range of 0 to 3919, the variation type 8 is selected as the variation type.

<Variation type B determination table>
FIG. 101 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type B determination table for determining the variation type B. In this variation type B determination table, the random number range for determining the variation type B defined for each variation type determination table and the contents of the variation type B are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation type (for example, any one of the variation types 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10) as the variation type A by the variation type A lottery described above. In addition, the variation type B lottery for determining the content of the variation type B is performed based on the variation type B determination table, the current variation type determination table (tables 1 to 4), and the obtained random number for determining the variation type B. . If a variation type other than a specific variation type is selected as variation type A by the variation type A lottery described above, a variation type B (for example, variation) is selected without variation type B lottery. Type 101) is selected.

  Of the variation types B in the variation type B determination table, the variation type 101 has no pseudo-series, the variation type 102 has one pseudo-series and 5 seconds of special figure variation, and the variation type 103 has two pseudo-series. This means that the special figure fluctuation display for 10 seconds is performed. Here, “pseudo” refers to a pseudo variation (so-called “pseudo”) that makes it appear that a symbol combination corresponding to a deviation is stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 a plurality of times during one special symbol variation display. Ream ”),“ pseudo-ream 1 time ”means to perform one pseudo-variation during the display of the fluctuation of one special figure, and“ pseudo-ream 2 times ” This is to perform two pseudo fluctuations during the special figure fluctuation display.

  For example, when the variation type determination table is table 1 (= mode A (donor mode)), the variation type 101 is set as the variation type when the obtained variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 21844. When the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 21845-43689, the variation type 102 is selected as the variation type, and when the variation type B determination random number value is in the range of 43690-65535, the variation type The variation type 103 is selected as the type. In the case of mode A (donor mode), the probability that the variation type 101 is selected is 21845/65536, the probability that the variation type 102 is selected is 21845/65536, and the probability that the variation type 103 is selected is 21845 / 65536 and the three probabilities are almost identical.

  When the variation type determination table is Table 2 (= mode B (Ｂ mode)), the variation type 101 is set as the variation type when the obtained random number for variation type B determination is in the numerical range of 0 to 6552. When the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 6553 to 39319, the variation type 102 is selected as the variation type, and when the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 39320 to 65535, the variation The variation type 103 is selected as the type. In the case of mode B (爺 mode), the probability that the variation type 101 is selected is 6553/65536, the probability that the variation type 102 is selected is 32768/65536, and the probability that the variation type 103 is selected is 26214 / 65536, which is easier to connect in a pseudo manner than mode A (dono mode).

  When the variation type determination table is table 3 (= mode C (princess mode)), the variation type 101 is set as the variation type when the obtained variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 52429. When the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 52430 to 58982, the variation type 102 is selected as the variation type, and when the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 58983 to 65535, the variation type is selected. The variation type 103 is selected as the type. In the case of mode C (princess mode), the probability that the variation type 101 is selected is 52430/65536, the probability that the variation type 102 is selected is 6553/65536, and the probability that the variation type 103 is selected is 6553 / 65536, which is less likely to be pseudo-connected than mode A (dono mode).

<Timer number determination table>
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a timer number determination table for determining a timer number. In this timer number determination table, variation type A, variation type B, timer number, and variation time are stored in association with each other. In addition, on the right side of the variation time, the type of effect corresponding to the variation time is described for reference.

  Based on the timer number determination table, the variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery, and the variation type B selected by the above variation type B lottery, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 A lottery for timer numbers is determined. For example, if the variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery is variation type 1, and the variation type B selected by the above variation type B lottery is variation type 101, timer 1 (variation) When the variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery is the variation type 2 and the variation type B selected by the above variation type B lottery is the variation type 101 Selects timer 2 (variation time 3000 ms, shortened variation) as the timer number, variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery is variation type 3, and variation type selected by the above variation type B lottery When B is the variation type 101, timer 3 (variation time 5000 ms, short variation) is selected as the timer number.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed. In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 95 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter updating processing (details will be described later) is performed. In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. (Special figure winning random number value used for jackpot determination in special figure 1), obtaining a lottery value for symbol lottery as a random figure value for lottery figure per special figure, and It is acquired as a numerical value, a random number value for determining variation type A is acquired as random number value 1 for special figure 1 variable time lottery, and a random number value for determining variation type B is acquired as random number value 2 for special figure 1 variable time lottery. These random number values are stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (see FIG. 107 (a)) provided in the RAM 308 in association with the current pending number in FIG. Will be described later.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random value (special figure winning random value used for jackpot determination in special figure 2), obtaining a symbol lottery random value as a symbol lottery random value per special figure 2, Random number value for determining variation type A is acquired as random number value 1 for special figure 2 variable time lottery, and random number value for determining variable type A is acquired as random number value 1 for special figure 2 variable time lottery. Then, the random number value for determining the variation type B is acquired as the random number value 2 for the special figure 2 variable time lottery. These random numbers are stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (see FIG. 107 (a)) provided in the RAM 308 in association with the current number of pendings in the special figure 2 and then prefetched (details). Will be described later.

  Further, when a winning is made at the usual figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a usual figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the usual figure winning random number value. And stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. In addition, when a winning is made to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a ball is placed in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Stores information indicating that a ball has been entered.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 96 (d)) and the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 96 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).
In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure A shown in FIG. ~ Confirmed display of any one of the special figures L. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected until a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) is detected in the second variable prize opening 235 (see FIG. 1 is the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the door member 235a (the door member 234a in FIG. 1) in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234. The information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a) is provided to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times, the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). In order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the image is displayed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, the number of hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the jackpot game. Turn on the short time flag. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the second number of game balls before the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 during the jackpot game. To solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter the special figure starting port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. It is.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 (or Including the presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

<Winning mouth counter update process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the winning opening counter updating process (step S215) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of winning prize counter update processing.

  In step S301, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, any of the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, and the general figure starting opening 228 is selected. When there is a crab winning, the value of the winning number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is read into the RAM 308, 1 is added, and the original winning number storage area is set.

  In step S302, whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening 226 is smaller than the predetermined general winning opening winning number comparison data (in this embodiment, the number of winnings per unit time (for example, 1 minute) is the prescribed number ( For example, if it is smaller than 15), the process proceeds to step S303 if applicable, and proceeds to step S306 if not applicable (when abnormality is detected). In step S303, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings in the second special figure starting port 232 is smaller than the abnormality determination value for the special figure starting port acquired using the above-described special figure starting port abnormality determination value table, If applicable, the process proceeds to step S304, and if not applicable (when an abnormality is detected), the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S304, an abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening is acquired based on the variable prize opening abnormality determination table and the hit type. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings in the first variable winning port 234 (or the second variable winning port 235) is smaller than the abnormality determination value for the variable winning port acquired in step S304. If not, the process ends. If not applicable (when an abnormality is detected), the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S306, a winning abnormality handling process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this prize abnormality handling process, a setting for outputting an abnormality detection signal indicating that a prize abnormality has occurred outside the pachinko machine 100 (eg, hall computer) for a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds). I do. Although the abnormality detection signal is output in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the abnormality detection signal may be output in step S306. Also, predetermined notification means (for example, a lamp, a speaker, various display devices, various movable objects (second special figure starting port 232, first variable winning port 234, second variable winning port) controlled by the main control unit 300. 235)))) may be notified, and notification (light output, sound output, image or character display, movement or rotation of movable objects) by predetermined notification means is interrupted or terminated. By doing so, you may make it alert | report the generation | occurrence | production of winning abnormality. In addition, setting for outputting a signal notifying the first sub-control unit 400 that a winning abnormality has occurred may be performed, or processing for outputting the signal may be performed.

<Prefetch process>
Next, referring to FIG. 106, the prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) in the main control unit timer interruption process described above will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of prefetching processing.

  In step S401, the start information of the special figure 2 (in this embodiment, the special figure 2 winning random number value) is obtained based on the detection of the predetermined ball detection sensor that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232. It is determined whether or not the number has increased. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S402, pre-reading is performed with reference to the starting information increased by winning the second special figure starting port 232. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot determination, symbol lottery, variation type A lottery, variation type B lottery, timer number lottery are performed, and the success / failure type information determined by these lotteries, the winning symbol type, the off symbol type, and the variation type A (variation type determined by variation type A lottery) is prefetched (acquired) as prefetch information.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the contents of the prefetch information. For the success / failure type of special figure 1 (or special figure 2), the “out of”, “big hit”, “high precision time big hit low probability time deviation”, “small hit (special figure I) explained using FIG. 97 above. In addition to the four types of " Further, the hit symbol type of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) includes 16R probability variation A (special diagram A), 16R probability variation B (special diagram B), and 16R normal described with reference to FIG. 96 (a). (Special Figure C) 4R Probability A (Special Figure D), 4R Probability B (Special Figure E), 2R Probability A (Special Figure F), 2R Probability Change B (Special Figure G), 2R Normal (Special Figure H) In addition to the eight types, there is “undecided” indicating that the symbol lottery has not ended.

  Also, for the detachment symbol type of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2), the detachment 1 (special figure J), the detachment 2 (special figure K), and the detachment 3 (special figure) described with reference to FIG. In addition to the three types of FIG. L), there is “Undetermined” indicating that the symbol lottery has not ended. In addition, the variation type A of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) indicates that the variation type A lottery has not ended in addition to the 22 types of the fluctuation types 1 to 22 described with reference to FIG. There is “Undetermined”.

  Returning to FIG. 106, in step S403, the prefetch information prefetched in step S402 and the current special figure 2 variable game hold count are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch information storage area provided in the RAM 308 (see FIG. 107 (b)). ). In this example, when the start information of special figure 2 increases, it is configured to read ahead unconditionally. For example, in the non-electric support state, the start information of special figure 2 is Without reference, information indicating “undecided” may be stored in the pre-read information storage area for special figure 2 (that is, processing corresponding to steps S405 and S408 described later may be applied to special figure 2). ). Also, in step S403, preparation is made to transmit the prefetch information stored in the special figure 2 prefetch information storage area shown in FIG. 107 (b) to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command.

  In step S404, the start information of the special figure 1 (in this embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number value) is obtained based on the detection of the predetermined ball detection sensor that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230. It is determined whether or not the number has increased. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S405, and if not, the process ends. In step S405, it is determined whether or not power support is in progress. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S406, the above-described prefetching is performed with reference to the starting information increased by winning the first special figure starting port 230. In step S407, the prefetched information prefetched in step S406 and the current special figure 1 variable game hold count are stored in the special figure 1 prefetched information storage area (see FIG. 107 (b)) provided in the RAM 308. In addition, preparation is made to transmit the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. In step S408, without referring to the start information in FIG. 1, the information indicating “undecided” is stored in the pre-read information storage area for special figure 1, and the process is terminated.

<Hold increase command>
109 (a) to 109 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a pending increase command that is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 after pre-reading by winning at the first special figure starting port 230. FIG.

  In FIG. 6A, the number of suspensions of special figure 1 variable game is 3, and as a result of the jackpot determination of special figure 1 by prefetching, the big hit is stored in the prefetched information storage area for special figure 1 as the success / failure type information of special figure 1 As a result of symbol lottery by prefetching, 16R probability variation A is stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 as a winning symbol type, and as a result of variation type A lottery by prefetching, variation type 18 is special symbol 1 It is the example memorize | stored in the prefetch information storage area for use. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area, since the variation type A is the variation type 18, the pseudo-continuous twice + super reach It can be grasped that it is A (big hit).

  FIG. 4B shows that the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is 2, and as a result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 by the prefetching, as the success / failure type information of the special figure 1, the outage is the prefetched information storage area for the special figure 1 As a result of symbol lottery by prefetching, the outlier 3 is stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 as the outlier symbol type, and as a result of variation type A lottery by prefetching, variation type 6 is the special symbol. It is an example stored in the prefetch information storage area for 1. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area is normal reach (displacement) because the variation type A is the variation type 6. Can be grasped.

  FIG. 4C shows that the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 1, and as a result of the big hit determination of special figure 1 by prefetching, the small hit is special figure 1 prefetch information storage area as the success / failure type information of special figure 1 As a result of the variation type A lottery by prefetching, the variation type 10 is stored as the variation type A in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area has a long reach (small hit) since the variation type A is the variation type 10. I can understand that there is.

  FIG. 4D shows that the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is 4, and as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 by the prefetching, as the success / failure type information of the special figure 1, the high accuracy time big hit low deviation time special figure is specially shown. As a result of symbol lottery by prefetching, 16R probability variation A as a winning symbol type is stored in the prefetching information storage region for special figure 1, and outage 2 is stored in the prefetching information storage region for special figure 1 as a result of prefetching. As a result of the variation type A lottery, the variation type 15 is stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 as the variation type A. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area, since the variation type A is the variation type 15, the pseudo-continuous once + super reach In addition to being able to grasp A (big hit), in the special figure low probability state, it is possible to perform a notice effect based on the off symbol type = out of 2. In the present embodiment, the hold increase command shown in FIG. 4D is transmitted only when the high probability time big hit is stored as the success / failure type information in FIG. However, this command only when the low-accuracy time deviation is stored as the success / failure type information in FIG. 1 or when either the high-accuracy time big hit or the low-accuracy time deviation is stored as the success / failure type information in FIG. May be configured to transmit.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S501 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S509, an effect control process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data needs to be updated. In such a case, the effect data is updated.

  If it is detected in step S511 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S509 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S513, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S515, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S517, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S519, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S521, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S503.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S701 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S703 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S519, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S513 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S801, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S803, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S807, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S809, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S611. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production control processing>
Next, the effect control process (step S509) in the first sub control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of an effect control process.

  In step S901, a hold icon display control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S902, a variable icon display control process (details will be described later). In step S903, a winning notification control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S904, after other effect control processes are performed, the process ends.

<Production control process / hold icon display control process>
Next, the hold icon display control process (step S901) in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the hold icon display control process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of special figure variable games has increased (whether or not a hold increase command has been received from the main control unit 300). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, Then, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1002, a hold icon change scenario lottery process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the display mode of the hold icon according to the scenario, etc.) is performed. Store in the storage area. In step S <b> 1004, processing such as reading effect data of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold from the ROM 406 is performed. As a result, the hold icon image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the VDP 434.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the hold icon change condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, whether or not the special map variable display start condition is satisfied in a state where the special figure is held). If YES in step S1006, the process advances to step S1006; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007. In step S1006, a hold icon change process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the display mode of the hold icon according to a scenario, etc.) is performed. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if not, the process ends. In step S1008, after the hold icon display position change process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the hold icon display position), the process ends.

<Production control processing / variable icon display control processing>
Next, the variation icon display control process (step S902) in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the change icon display control process.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special figure variation display is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1102, a variation icon lottery process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S11003, a variation icon effect data corresponding to the lottery result in step S1102 is read from the ROM 406. As a result, the image of the variation icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the VDP 434.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display is in progress. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process ends. In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not a power interruption has occurred). If not, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1106, after a variable icon display interruption process (details will be described later, for example, a process of deleting the variable icon, etc.), the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display is being interrupted. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display resumption condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not the power has been restored). If not, the process proceeds to step S1112. In step S1109, after a variable icon display restart process (details will be described later, for example, a process of displaying the variable icon again), the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the change icon change condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not the special figure change is stopped). If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111. If not, the process proceeds to step S1112. In step S1111, the process proceeds to step S1112 after performing a change icon change process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the display mode of the change icon).

  In step S1112, it is determined whether or not the change icon change end condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after stopping the change of the special figure). In step S1113, if not established, the process ends. In step S1113, the process proceeds to step S1112 after performing a change icon display end process (details will be described later, for example, a process of performing an erase animation for deleting the change icon).

<Production control process / winning notification control process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111C, the winning notification control process (step S903) in the effect control process will be described. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize alerting | reporting control process.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether or not a winning notification condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not, the process ends. In step S1202, after the winning notification process is performed, the process ends.

  Here, when the winning notification condition of step S1201 is satisfied, for example, (A1) When there is a ball exceeding the maximum number of balls stipulated as the end condition of one round (for example, the end of the first round) When the maximum number of balls specified as a condition is 10 and the number of balls in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) in the first round exceeds 10), (A2) When there is a ball exceeding the maximum number of balls specified for each round as the end condition of the round (for example, the maximum number of balls specified as the end condition of the first to seventh rounds is 10 and 8 to 15 The maximum number of balls specified as the end condition of the round is 11, and the number of balls in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) in the first and third rounds exceeds 10 Case), ( 3) The condition (A1) or (A2) is satisfied, and an effective period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed that the entrance sensors of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 detect the entry. The case includes (A4) a case where a plurality or all of the conditions (A1) to (A3) are satisfied.

  The winning notification process performed in step S1202 includes (B1) notification performed every time the number of balls entered exceeds a predetermined number (for example, notification when there is a ball exceeding the predetermined number in the first round), (B2 ) Notification to be performed when the number of entrances exceeds a predetermined number in a plurality of rounds (for example, notification when there are more than a predetermined number in both the first round and the third round), (B3) (B1 ) Or (B2), and includes a pre-read notification within the hold, and (B4) includes a plurality or all of the notifications (B1) to (B3).

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S1301 in FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S1301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S1307, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S1309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 1307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S1311, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S1313, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S1303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S1501 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1303 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S1303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1503 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Pending icon change scenario lottery process>
Next, the hold icon change scenario lottery process executed in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process described above will be described.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table. In the hold icon display mode lottery table, the display mode of the hold icon, the lottery value specified for each variation type A, and the lottery value specified for each off-symbol type are stored in association with each other. Yes. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 includes the hold icon display mode lottery table, the prefetch information included in the hold increase command received from the main control unit 300, and the acquired first lottery value and second lottery value. Based on the above, a hold icon change scenario lottery for determining the display mode of the hold icon is performed. In the case of the special figure low probability state and the success / failure type information included in the pre-reading information is out of the high-accuracy big hit / low-probability time, the lost symbol type included in the pre-reading information, the acquired first lottery value, and A holding icon change scenario lottery is performed based on the second lottery value, and otherwise, the holding icon change scenario lottery is determined based on the variation type A included in the prefetch information, the first lottery value, and the second lottery value. Do.

  For example, when the special figure low probability state and the winning / missing type information included in the prefetch information is a high probability time big hit and a low probability time deviation, and the outlier symbol type is a deviation 2, the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is When 0 to 49, the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and when the numerical range of the acquired lottery value is 50 to 59, the display mode of the hold icon When the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → umbrella” is selected, and the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 60-74, the display mode of the hold icon is “small → umbrella → umbrella → umbrella → umbrella”. When the obtained lottery value is in the range of 75 to 79, the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → umbrella → snow” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the following is shown in FIG. Street.

  In addition, for example, when the special figure low probability state and the success / failure type information included in the look-ahead information is other than the high-accuracy time big hit low-accuracy time deviation and the fluctuation type A is the fluctuation types 11 to 13, the acquired When the numerical value range of the lottery value is 0 to 29, the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and when the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 30 to 34 When the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → umbrella” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 35 to 39, the display mode of the hold icon is “umbrella → umbrella → When the scenario of “Umbrella → Umbrella → Umbrella” is selected and the acquired lottery value is in the range of 40 to 44, select the scenario of “Har → Sunny → Sunny → Umbrella → Snow” as the display mode of the hold icon, The subsequent steps are as shown in FIG.

<Scenario>
Next, the scenario will be described. For example, the scenario “sunny → umbrella → snow → thunder → dedicated” is “sunny” when the change display of the special figure four times before the special figure corresponding to the hold is displayed. ”Is displayed, and the image corresponding to“ Clear ”is changed to the image corresponding to“ Umbrella ”at the time of fluctuation display of the special figure three times before the special figure corresponding to the hold. At the time of the fluctuation display of the special figure two times before the special figure corresponding to the hold, the image corresponding to the “umbrella” is changed to the image corresponding to the “snow”, and the special figure corresponding to the hold is displayed. Change the image corresponding to “Snow” to the image corresponding to “Thunder” when displaying the variation of the special figure immediately before the fluctuation display of “”, and change it to “Thunder” when displaying the fluctuation of the special figure corresponding to the hold. This shows that the corresponding image is changed to an image corresponding to “dedicated”.

<Icon>
FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of icons displayed as hold icons 1 to 4 and variable icons described later.

  In this example, an image imitating the sun is associated as an image corresponding to “sunny”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that the degree of expectation of the profit given to the player is low. In addition, an image imitating an umbrella is associated as an image corresponding to “umbrella”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that the expectation of profits given to the player is medium . Further, an image simulating a snowman is associated as an image corresponding to “snow”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that the expectation of the profit given to the player is high. Further, an image imitating lightning is associated as an image corresponding to “lightning”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that a big hit has been confirmed. The icons corresponding to these “sunny”, “umbrella”, “snow”, and “thunder” are icons for suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot for holding.

  In addition, in this example, three types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared, and images corresponding to “dedicated 1” and “dedicated 2” are supported as an image corresponding to “dedicated 1”. An image with the characters “SP reach B” as an image to be associated with an image with characters “full rotation” as an image corresponding to “dedicated 3”. An image including the characters “SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 1” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 11 to 15 and 18. An image including the characters “SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 2” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 16-17 and 19-21. An image including the characters “full rotation” corresponding to “dedicated 3” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation type 22. The icons corresponding to these “dedicated 1”, “dedicated 2”, and “dedicated 3” are icons for suggesting at least a part (such as the type of reach) of the pending fluctuation content.

<Other examples of icons>
115B to 115D are diagrams showing other examples of icons. In the example shown in FIG. 6B, three types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared. As an image corresponding to “dedicated 4”, an image given the character “1” and “dedicated 5” are prepared. The image corresponding to “2” is associated with the image corresponding to “2”, and the image corresponding to “exclusive 6” is associated with the image corresponding to “3”. An image including the character “1” corresponding to “dedicated 4” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 12 and 15. An image including the character “2” corresponding to “dedicated 5” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 13, 17, 18, and 20. An image including the character “3” corresponding to “dedicated 6” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation type 21. The icons corresponding to “dedicated 4”, “dedicated 5”, and “dedicated 6” are icons for suggesting at least a part of the pending change contents (in this example, the number of pseudo-continuations).

  In the example shown in FIG. 5C, four types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared. As an image corresponding to “dedicated 7”, an image given “1 + SP reach A” and “ As an image corresponding to “Dedicated 8”, an image given the character “2 + SP reach A”, as an image corresponding to “Dedicated 9”, an image given the character “2 + SP reach B”, and “Dedicated 10” As the corresponding images, the images with the letters “3 + SP reach B” are associated with each other. An image including the characters “1 + SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 7” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 12 and 15. An image including the characters “2 + SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 8” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 13 and 18. An image including the characters “2 + SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 9” is an icon selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 17 and 20. An image including the characters “3 + SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 10” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation type 21. The icons corresponding to “exclusive 7” to “exclusive 10” are icons for suggesting at least a part of the pending change contents (in this example, the number of pseudo-continuations and the type of reach).

  In the example shown in FIG. 6D, two types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared. As an image corresponding to “dedicated 11”, an image given the characters “0 + SP reach A” and “ As an image corresponding to “dedicated 12”, an image given the characters “0 + SP reach B” is associated with each other. An image including the characters “0 + SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 11” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 11 and 14. An image including the characters “0 + SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 12” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 16 and 19. The icons corresponding to these “dedicated 11” and “dedicated 12” are icons for suggesting at least a part of the suspended variation contents (in this example, not pseudo-continuous).

<Special A map display area in Mode A (Tono Mode)>
FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram for explaining the special figure hold display area when the effect mode is mode A (donor mode). As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 has the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c (the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c) for displaying the decorative symbols. And an effect display area 208d for displaying images to be used. The decorative symbol variation display is performed within the display range of each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stop display of pseudo-continuous), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The decorative design is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of each display range.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are displayed. It has a special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area 208f for suggesting the success / failure result, and a special symbol decorative symbol display region 208g for suggesting the success / failure result of the common figure variable game.

  In mode A (dono mode), the special figure hold display area 208h is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (display area not overlapping with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). The special figure hold display area 208h includes a first special figure hold display area 208h1 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 1 and a second special figure hold display area 208h2 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 2. And a third special figure hold display area 208h3 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 3, and a fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 4. It is configured so as to suggest the number of special figure variable games held (4 in this example) by conventionally known held images 1 to 4.

  Hereinafter, like this special figure hold display area 208h, a special figure hold display area for displaying only a conventionally known hold image (in this example, a circle image filled with a single color), or a pattern for displaying a decorative pattern A special figure hold display area that does not overlap the display area may be referred to as a “normal hold display area”.

<Special B pending display area in Mode B (Princess Mode)>
FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram for explaining the special figure hold display area when the effect mode is mode B (princess mode). In mode B (princess mode), a special figure hold display area 208j is arranged in a display area overlapping with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure hold display area 208j displays a special figure changing display area 208j0 for displaying a change icon, a first special figure hold display area 208j1 for displaying the hold icon 1, and a hold icon 2. The second special figure hold display area 208j2, the third special figure hold display area 208j3 for displaying the hold icon 3, and the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 for displaying the hold icon 4. The hold icons 1 to 4 indicate the number of hold of the special figure variable game (4 in this example).

  Here, the hold icon 4 means that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 3, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port) during the special figure change. 232) is an icon displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 4 when a ball wins. Further, the hold icon 3 means that the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 2, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232 is in the special figure change state). ) Is an icon displayed in the third special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 3 when a ball wins.

  Further, the hold icon 2 means that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 1, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232 is in the special figure change state). ) Is an icon displayed in the second special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 2 when a ball wins. Further, the hold icon 1 means that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 0, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232 is in the special figure change state). ) Is an icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 1 when a ball wins. In addition, the fluctuation icon is displayed when the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games (or special figure 2 variable games) is 0 and the special figure non-fluctuation is 1st special figure start port 230 (or second special figure start port 232). This icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area when a ball is won.

  Hereinafter, as in the special figure hold display area 208j, a special figure hold display area for displaying at least one hold icon or a variation icon according to the present invention, or a special display area for displaying at least a part overlaps with a special symbol display area for displaying a decorative design. The figure hold display area may be referred to as a “special hold display area” with respect to the above “normal hold display area”.

  In this example, the four first special figure hold display areas 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 are arranged so that the display areas do not overlap each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, The display areas may be partially overlapped with each other, and part of the four first special figure hold display areas 208j1 to 4th special figure hold display areas 208j4 protrudes from the special figure hold display area 208j. May be. That is, it is only necessary to identify which display mode of the display mode illustrated in FIG. 115 is the hold image displayed in the special figure hold display area 208j. In this example, a plurality of special figure hold display areas are arranged in the horizontal direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure hold display areas may be arranged vertically or obliquely. The arrangement direction is not particularly limited.

  In this example, the special figure hold display area is placed above the symbol display area, and the two are superimposed. However, the special figure hold display area is placed below the symbol display area. May be. In addition, at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the special symbol is changed and displayed in the symbol display area), the special symbol hold display area is set below (or above) the symbol display area so that both are superimposed. In the second timing (for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area), the special symbol hold display area is set above (or below) the symbol display area so that both are superimposed. Also good. In addition, the first part of the special figure hold display area (for example, the special figure changing display area) is placed above (or below) the symbol display area, and the two parts are overlapped, and the second part of the special figure hold display area (For example, the first special figure hold display area to the fourth special figure hold display area) may be configured to overlap each other under (or above) the symbol display area.

<Special drawing hold display area in mode C (爺 mode)>
FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram for explaining the special figure hold display area when the effect mode is mode C (爺 mode). In mode C (爺 mode), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h in mode A (dono mode) and a special figure hold display in mode B (princess mode). Both areas (special hold display areas) 208j are arranged. As shown well in the figure, the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is closer to the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c than the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. And the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is larger than the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. It is an area. The size of each of the four first special figure hold display areas 208j1 to fourth special figure hold display areas 208j4 constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is also set as the special figure hold display area. (Normal hold display area) Each of the four first special figure hold display areas 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 constituting the 208h is larger than each display area.

<Transition of production mode>
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect mode, and FIG. 117A is an example when the effect mode transitions from mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode). (B) is the figure which showed an example at the time of production mode changing from mode B (princess mode) to mode A (dono mode).

  When the production mode is shifted from mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the mode (for example, white) to the background color for the princess mode (for example, white). For example, the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is deleted and the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is displayed. On the other hand, when the production mode is shifted from mode B (princess mode) to mode A (dono mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the princess mode (for example, pink) to the palace mode. While changing to a background color (for example, white), the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is deleted, and the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed.

  FIG. 6C shows an example in which the effect mode is changed from mode A (dono mode) to mode C (Ｃ mode), and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example at the time of transfering to (dono mode).

  When the effect mode is shifted from mode A (dono mode) to mode C (爺 mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the ornament mode (for example, white) to the background color for the eaves mode (for example, white). For example, the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is displayed without deleting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. On the other hand, when the effect mode is shifted from mode C (爺 mode) to mode A (dono mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the eaves mode (for example, brown) to the 殿 mode. While changing to a background color (for example, white), only the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is deleted, and only the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed.

<Modification of special hold display area>
Next, a modification of the above-described special hold display area will be described. FIG. 118A is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the first modification. In the first modification, the special hold display area 208j is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (a display area that does not overlap the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). Further, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is larger than the entire display area of the above-described special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. The size of each display area of the four display areas (the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4) constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is also set. Each of the four display areas (the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4) constituting the figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is wider than each display area. ing.

  As described above, the special reserved display area is a display area that does not overlap the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the entire display area is larger than the entire normal display area. Good.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the second modification. In the second modification, the special hold display area 208k is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (display area that does not overlap with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). Also, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208k is larger than the overall display area of the above-described special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. Of the five display areas (special figure changing display area 208k0, first special figure hold display area 208k1 to fourth special figure hold display area 208k4) constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208k. The size of one display area (special figure changing display area 208k0) is four display areas (first special figure hold display area 208h1 to fourth) constituting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. The special figure hold display area 208h4) is wider than each display area.

  As described above, the special reserved display area is a display area including a display area having the same size as the display area constituting the normal reserved display area, and at least one display area constituting the special reserved display area is normally The display area may be wider than the size of the display area constituting the hold display area.

  FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the third modification. In the third modification, a special reserved display area 208l is arranged in a display area overlapping with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208l is larger than the entire display area of the above-described special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. On the other hand, the size of each of the four display areas (the first special figure hold display area 20811 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208l4) constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208l is: An area having the same size as each of the four display areas (first special figure hold display area 208h1 to fourth special figure hold display area 208h4) constituting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h Has been.

  In this way, the special reserved display area is a display area in which each of the display areas constituting the special reserved display area is the same size as each of the display areas constituting the normal reserved display area, and displays a decorative pattern. It may be a display area at least partially overlapping the symbol display area.

  FIG. 6D is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the fourth modification. In the fourth modification, the special reserved display area 208m is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (display area that does not overlap with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). In addition, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208m is smaller than the overall display area of the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. On the other hand, the size of the display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208m is four display areas (first special figure hold display area 208h1) constituting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. To a fourth special figure hold display area 208h4) that are wider than the respective display areas. In the fourth modification, a hold icon suggesting the number of holds with a number (4 in this example) is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208m.

  In this way, the special reserved display area is a display area in which the entire special reserved display area is larger than the size of each of the display areas constituting the normal reserved display area. It may be suggested by letters.

<Other examples of hold icons>
FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the hold icon in the special figure hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 116 (b). In this example, in the third special figure hold display area 208j3 of the special figure hold display area 208j, an image simulating a snowman, that is, a hold icon that suggests that the expectation of the profit given to the player is high is displayed. ing. As a result, the expectation of profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to the third hold (the special figure variable game three times ahead of the current special figure variable game) is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variable A) Can be suggested to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. Here, as in this example, a special hold display capable of specifying a hold number (digestion order) of a special figure variable game with high expectation may be referred to as a “special specific hold display”.

  FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the hold icon in the special figure hold display area 208m shown in FIG. 118 (d). In this example, in the special figure hold display area 208m, on the image imitating a snowman, that is, on the hold icon that suggests that the expectation of the profit given to the player is high, the number of special figure variable games held is displayed. A hold icon is displayed in which numbers (4 in this example) are superimposed. As a result, the player expects that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the four hold numbers is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. Here, as in this example, a special hold display in which it is impossible to specify a hold number (digestion order) of a special figure variable game with high expectation may be referred to as a “special unspecified hold display”. Note that the display mode of the hold icon is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (b-1), instead of a number suggesting the number of hold of the special figure variable game, a Chinese numeral (in this example, 3) may be applied, or the number of holds may be suggested by displaying the same type of characters (in this example, wood) or the same type of figure (in this example, an asterisk) for the number of holds. Good.

  FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing another example of the hold icon in the special figure hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 116 (b). In this example, whenever the number of special figure variable games held increases, the same image (in this example, an umbrella in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 of the special figure hold display area 208j). , That is, a hold icon indicating that the expected degree of profit given to the player is medium. As a result, the expectation level of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, a plurality, or all of the four holdings is medium (for example, winning 4R probability variation A). Can be suggested to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In this example, every time the number of holds increases, a hold icon corresponding to the hold is displayed in all of the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a hold icon different from the hold icon corresponding to the hold may be displayed in all of the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4.

<Transition example of power interruption / recovery during Mode B (Princess Mode) or Mode C (Tsubaki Mode)>
FIG. 120 (a) is an example when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is shut off when the production mode is mode B (princess mode) and the mode is changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power is restored. (B) is a case where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power cut off) when the production mode is mode C (爺 mode), and the mode is changed to mode A (female mode) after the power is restored (after power recovery). It is an example.

  In this example, when the pachinko machine 100 is cut off and restored, mode A (only the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed, regardless of the type of effect mode before the power cut. (Mr. mode). In this way, in the case of a power interruption / recovery, giving the player a false expectation that it may be possible to gain some benefit if the mode is shifted to the most disadvantageous performance mode for the player. And will not diminish gaming motivation.

<Migration example of special specific hold display and special non-specific hold display>
FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the special specific hold display exemplified in FIG. 119 (a) to the special unspecified hold display exemplified in FIG. 119 (b) at the start of reach production. is there. In this example, the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to the third hold (the special figure variable game three times ahead of the current special figure variable game) by the special specific hold display until just before the start of the reach effect. After suggesting to the player that the expectation level of the player is high (for example, winning 16R probability variation A), at the same time as the start of reach production, one or more of the three hold numbers, Or, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to all the holdings is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 119 (b) to the special specific hold display illustrated in FIG. 119 (a) at the end of the reach effect. is there. In this example, until the end of the reach production, the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the three holdings by the special unspecified holding display is high. After suggesting to the player (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A), immediately after the end of the reach production, the special specific variable display (current special variable game) This indicates to the player that the degree of expectation of the profit given by the second special figure fluctuation game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  As described above, during the reach effect, the special specific hold display may be switched to the special non-specific hold display, so that the player may be focused on the reach effect while suggesting the hold state of the special figure.

  FIG. 121 (c) is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the special specific hold display exemplified in FIG. 119 (a) to the special unspecified hold display exemplified in FIG. 119 (b) at the start of the big hit game. is there. In this example, the profit given by the special figure change game corresponding to the second hold (the special figure change game two times ahead of the current special figure change game) by the special specific hold display until just before the start of the big hit game After suggesting that the player has high expectation (for example, winning 16R probability variation A), at the same time as the jackpot game starts, a special unspecified hold display indicates one or more of the three hold numbers, Or, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to all the holdings is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  FIG. 121 (d) is a diagram showing an example of transition from the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 119 (b) to the special specific hold display illustrated in FIG. 119 (a) at the end of the big hit game. is there. In this example, until the end of the jackpot game, the special unspecified hold display shows that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, multiple, or all of the three hold numbers is high After suggesting to the player (for example, winning 16R probability change A), immediately after the end of the big hit game, the special special variable display corresponding to the first special hold display (current special map variable game) This indicates to the player that the degree of expectation of the profit given by the first special figure fluctuation game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  In this way, in the big hit game, by switching the special specific hold display to the special non-specific hold display, the player may be able to concentrate on the big hit game while suggesting the hold state of the special figure.

<Example of power interruption / recovery transition during special unspecified hold display>
FIG. 122 shows an example in which the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off when the production mode is mode B (princess mode) and the special unspecified hold display is performed, and the mode is changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power is restored. FIG.

  In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off / restored, mode A (only the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed regardless of the effect mode before the power is cut off. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 does not back up the prefetch information (because the prefetch information disappears due to power interruption), so it is displayed in the special special figure hold display area 208m before the power is cut off. Instead of the special unspecified hold display, the normal hold display area 208h is configured to perform normal hold display. In this way, in the case of a power interruption / recovery, giving the player a false expectation that it may be possible to gain some benefit if it is configured to display normal hold instead of special hold display. And will not diminish the willingness to play.

<Example of special unspecified hold display triggered by increase in hold>
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example in which the special unspecified hold display exemplified in FIG. 119 (b) is performed in response to an increase in hold of the special figure variable game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), after the hold icon is displayed in the special special figure hold display area 208j until immediately before the start of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the start of the reach effect is started. At the same time, a number (in this example, 2) indicating the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208m.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4C, the number of special figure 1 variable games held increased by 1 and changed from 2 to 3 due to winning at the first special figure start opening 230 during the reach production. As an opportunity, special unspecified display shown in FIG. Here, due to the special unspecified display, the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the three holding numbers is high (for example, winning 16R probability variation A is won) To the player).

  Also, as shown in (f-1) to (f-3) in the figure, the hold icon is displayed in the special hold display area 208j at the same time that the variable display of the special figure in the reach state is stopped. . Specifically, in the example shown in (f-1) of the figure, in the third special figure hold display area 208h3, the special figure change corresponding to the hold (third hold) won at the timing shown in (c) of the figure. A special special figure hold display is provided to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-2) of the figure, the second special figure hold display area 208h2 corresponds to a hold (second hold) other than the hold (third hold) won at the timing shown in (c) of FIG. A special special figure hold display is made to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-3) of the figure, in the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the third special figure hold display area 208h3, the special figure corresponding to one, plural, or all of the three hold numbers. A special special figure hold display is provided that suggests to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the figure variation game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example in which the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 119 (b) is performed in response to a plurality of hold increases in the special figure variable game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124A, after the hold icon is displayed in the special hold display area 208j until immediately before the start of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. In the special figure hold display area 208m, a number (2 in this example) suggesting the number of holds is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5C, the number of special figure 1 variable games held is two due to winning a plurality of times (in this example, twice) to the first special figure starting port 230 during reach production. The special unspecified display shown in (d) of FIG. 11 is performed with the change from 2 to 4 as an opportunity. Here, due to the special unspecified display, the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the four holding numbers is high (for example, winning 16R probability variation A is won) To the player).

  Also, as shown in (f-1) to (f-3) in the figure, the hold icon is displayed in the special hold display area 208j at the same time that the variable display of the special figure in the reach state is stopped. . Specifically, in the example shown in (f-1) in the figure, in the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4, the special figure change corresponding to the hold (fourth hold) won at the timing shown in FIG. A special special figure hold display is provided to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-2) of the figure, in the third special figure hold display area 208h3, it corresponds to a hold (third hold) other than the hold (fourth hold) won in the timing of (c) in the same figure. A special special figure hold display is made to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-3) in the figure, in the third special figure hold display area 208h3 and the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4, the pay hold (fourth hold) at the timing shown in FIG. The expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to any of the holds (third hold) other than the hold (fourth hold) is high (for example, winning 16R probability change A) Special special figure hold display to suggest to the player.

<Moving object / second effect moving body 225>
FIG. 125A is a diagram illustrating an example in which a part of the special special figure holding display area 208j is covered with the second effect movable body 225 which is one of the movable objects. As described above, the second effect movable body 225 can move in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the vertical direction, and the first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, FIG. 1), a part of the symbol display area (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a part of the special reserved display area 208j. It can move between the second positions to be covered (for example, the positions shown in FIG. 2A-2). Therefore, when the second effect movable body 225 moves from the first position to the second position, the symbol display area (left symbol display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as shown in FIG. At least a part of the area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c) and at least a part of the special reserved display area 208j are invisible or difficult to see from the front. Thus, if at least a part of the hold icon and the variable icon is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

<Moving object / shielding device 246>
FIG. 125B is a diagram illustrating an example in which a special special figure holding display area 208j is partially covered by the shielding device 246 that is one of the movable objects. As described above, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 are movable in the left-right direction, and are shown in a first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, shown in FIG. Position), a part of the symbol display area (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a part of the special reserved display area 208j. It can move between positions (for example, the positions shown in FIG. 2B-2). Therefore, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 are moved from the first position to the second position, the symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed as shown in FIG. At least a part of the areas (the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c) and at least a part of the special reserved display area 208j are invisible or difficult to see from the front. Thus, if at least a part of the hold icon and the variable icon is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

<Moving object / first effect moving body 224>
126 (a) to 126 (c) are diagrams showing examples in which a display relating to the big hit game and a part of the special special figure hold display are covered by the effect movable body 224 which is one of the movable objects. As described above, the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224 can be moved in an arc shape in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is , Movable between a second position that covers a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, the positions shown in (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2)). It is. Therefore, when the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224 are moved from the first position to the second position, (a-2), (b-2), (c- As shown in 2), at least a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes invisible or difficult to view from the front.

  In the same figure (a-1), the number of balls won by the jackpot game (12680 balls in this example) is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special reserved display area 208m of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. An on-hold icon indicating the number of figure-changed games held (3 in this example) is displayed, and in the display area adjacent to the special holding display area 208m, an acquired number-of-balls image corresponding to the number of acquired balls in the big hit game (in this example) 1 large thousand box corresponding to 10,000 balls, two medium size thousand boxes corresponding to 1000 balls, and six small thousand boxes corresponding to 100 balls). And in the same figure (a-2), the forearm part 224b of the 1st production movable body 224 is moved to the 2nd position, and special special figure reservation display area 208m and a part of display area adjacent to this are covered. Thus, at least a part of the hold icon and the acquired number-of-balls image is invisible or difficult to view from the front. In this way, if at least a part of the hold icon and the acquired number-of-balls image is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In the same figure (b-1), the number of consecutive hits of the big hit game (15 in this example) is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the special reserved display area 208m of the decorative symbol display device 208, A suspension icon indicating the number of suspensions of the special figure variable game (in this example, 3) is displayed, and in the display area adjacent to the special suspension display area 208m, the number of consecutive games corresponding to the number of consecutive games of the big hit game (this example In this example, one medium-sized thousand-thousand box corresponding to ten consecutive villas and five small one-thousand boxes corresponding to one consecutive villa are displayed. And in the same figure (b-2), the forearm part 224b of the 1st production movable body 224 is moved to the 2nd position, and the special reservation display area 208m and a part of display area adjacent to this are covered. In addition, at least a part of the hold icon and the consecutive resort count image is invisible or difficult to view from the front. In this way, if at least a part of the hold icon and the consecutive house count image is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In the same figure (c-1), the number of rounds of the big hit game (1R (1st round) in this example) is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special reserved display area 208m of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. On the other hand, a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special figure variable game (3 in this example) is displayed, and a round number image corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit game (in this example) is displayed in the display area adjacent to the special hold display area 208m. In this case, one small thousand car box corresponding to 1R) is displayed. And in the same figure (c-2), the forearm part 224b of the 1st production movable body 224 is moved to the 2nd position, and the special reservation display area 208m and a part of display area adjacent to this are covered. In addition, at least a part of the hold icon and all the round number images are invisible or difficult to view from the front. In this way, if at least a part of the hold icon and all of the number of round images are made invisible or difficult to see from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

<Display mode of special special figure hold display and normal special figure hold display>
FIG. 127 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are deleted (or displayed) in the same direction when the number of special figure floating games held decreases (or increases). is there. In this example, as shown in (a-1) in the figure, the special pending display area 208j0 of the special reserved display area 208j, the first special figure reserved display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure reserved display area 208j4, The display area is arranged from left to right in ascending order of the number of holds, and the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 of the normal hold display area 208h are arranged from left to right. Arranged in ascending order of the number of holds.

  Thus, for example, when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 4 to 3, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The hold icon displayed in the special figure changing display area 208j0 and displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1, and displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. The held hold icon is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2, and the hold icon displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from right to left.

  On the other hand, in the normal special figure hold display, the image displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208h1, and the image displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208h2, and the image displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. As a result, the normal special figure hold display is erased from right to left, and the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are erased in the same direction (in this example, from right to left). Although not shown, the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are displayed in the same direction (in this example, from the left to the right) even when the number of special figure variable games held increases.

  On the other hand, FIG. 5B shows an example in which the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are erased (or displayed) in the opposite direction when the number of special figure variable games held decreases (or increases). FIG. In this example, as shown in (b-1) in the figure, there are five special hold display areas 208j0 of the special hold display area 208j, the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4. The display area is arranged from left to right in descending order of the number of holds, and the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 of the normal hold display area 208h are arranged from left to right. Arranged in ascending order of the number of holds.

  Therefore, for example, when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 4 to 3, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The hold icon displayed in the special figure changing display area 208j0 and displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1, and displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. The held hold icon is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2, and the hold icon displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from left to right.

  On the other hand, in the normal special figure hold display, the image displayed in the second special figure hold display area 20hj2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208h1, and the image displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208h2, and the image displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from right to left, and the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are in opposite directions (in this example, the special special figure hold display is from left to right, The figure hold display is erased from right to left. Although not shown, the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are in the opposite direction even when the number of special figure floating games held increases (in this example, the special special figure hold display moves from right to left. The normal special figure hold display is displayed from the left to the right).

  FIG. 128 is a schematic front view of a game board 260 according to a modification as viewed from the front. In this example, a special hold display area 208j is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a normal hold display area formed by a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs on the lower left side of the game board 260. 208n are arranged. The special hold display area 208j is composed of five display areas, a special figure changing display area 208j0 and a first special figure hold display area 208j1 to a fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Yes. The normal hold display area 208n is composed of four display areas, a first special figure hold display area 208n1 to a fourth special figure hold display area 208n4, which are arranged in a straight line in the diagonally downward direction.

  In this example, the virtual line L1 in which the five display areas 208j0 to 208j4 of the special hold display area 208j are arranged and the virtual line L2 in which the four display areas (LEDs) 208n1 to 208n4 of the normal hold display area 208n are arranged are the game board 260. The upper virtual point VP is intersected. Thus, for example, when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 4 to 3, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208j0, The hold icon displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1, and the hold icon displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3 is displayed in the second special figure hold display area. The hold icon displayed in 208j2 and displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from right to left.

  On the other hand, in the normal special figure hold display, the image displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208n2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208n1, and the image displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208n3. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208n2, and the image displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208n4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208n3. As a result, the normal special figure hold display is erased from the lower left to the upper left, and both the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are erased in a direction approaching the virtual point VP. Although not shown, when the number of special figure variable games held increases, both the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are displayed in a direction away from the virtual point VP. The special special figure hold display may be displayed in a direction away from the virtual point VP, and the normal special figure hold display may be displayed in a direction approaching the virtual point VP, or the special special figure hold display may be virtual. You may comprise so that it may be displayed in the direction which approaches the point VP, and a normal special figure hold display is displayed in the direction which leaves | separates from the virtual point VP.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram in which a part of the game board 260 shown in FIG. 128 is extracted. In this example, the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224 is moved to the above-described second position, and at least a part of the special reserved display area 208j is made invisible or difficult to view from the front. Since the four display areas (LEDs) 208n1 to 208n4 of the figure hold display area 208n are arranged at positions not covered by the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224, the normal special figure hold display is the first effect movable. The body 224 does not hinder visual recognition from the front.

  However, as shown in FIG. 130, since the four display areas (LEDs) 208n1 to 208n4 of the normal special figure hold display area 208n are arranged at positions where the game ball B can pass, the four display areas (LED) When a game ball passes at least a part of 208n1 to 208n4, a part of the display area is temporarily covered with the ball game ball B, and the normal special figure hold display is temporarily invisible or difficult to see from the front. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, the ratio of making the special special figure hold display invisible or difficult to view by the effect movable body 224 (for example, when the 1000 game balls are launched on the game board surface, the effect movable body 224 is moved once. The special special figure hold display is made invisible or difficult to see, or the special movable figure 224 is moved once every time the special figure fluctuation display is performed 80 times to make the special special figure hold display invisible or difficult to see. The ratio of the normal special figure hold display area to be invisible or difficult to see with the game ball B (for example, when 2500 game balls are launched on the game board surface, one of the 2500 games) Sphere B is set to be higher than the ratio of the normal special figure holding display area invisible or difficult to view.

<Special Figure 1 Hold Display Area and Special Figure 2 Hold Display Area>
FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of special figure 1 variable games held and the number of special figure 2 variable games held are separately displayed, and the number of special figure 2 variable games held is covered by a movable body. In the example shown in FIG. 6A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a special figure 2 hold display area 208p for indicating the number of special figure 2 variable games on hold and a special figure 1 variable game hold on the display. A special figure 1 hold display area 208q and a change display area 208r for displaying information related to the changing special figure change game are provided, and the special figure 2 hold display area 208p is replaced with the special figure 1 hold display area 208q. Arranged above.

  In this example, the second effect movable body 225 has a first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a second position that covers a part of the special figure 2 reserved display area 208p (for example, FIG. It is possible to move between the positions shown in a-2). Therefore, when the second effect movable body 225 moves from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. It becomes invisible or difficult to see from the front.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 holding display area 208p and the special figure 1 holding display area 208q are arranged on both sides in the horizontal direction with the variation display area 208r used in common. In addition, the hold display in the special figure 2 hold display area 208p disappears from the right to the left, and the hold display in the special figure 1 hold display area 208q disappears from the left to the right.

  In this example, the first effect movable body 224 is a second position that covers the first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 reserved display area 208p, and a part of the change display area 208r. It can move between positions (for example, the positions shown in FIG. 2B-2). Therefore, when the first effect movable body 224 moves from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 4B-2, the special figure 2 hold display area 208p and the change display area 208r. At least a part of is invisible or difficult to see from the front.

<Over winning notice>
Next, over-winning notification will be described. Here, the over winning is the number of balls that exceed the above maximum number of balls per 1R (for example, 10 when the opening time of the door member is 30 seconds), and the maximum number of balls is exceeded. In this embodiment, up to two over winnings are recognized.

<Over-winning notification / In case of one over-winning after maximum number of balls>
FIG. 132 (a) is a view showing the execution timing of winning notification when one over winning is detected after the maximum winning, and FIG. 132 (b) shows an example of a display mode of over winning. FIG. Here, “door open” in the figure indicates that the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235) is in an open state, and “door closed” indicates the first. It shows that the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235) is in a closed state. “Detection valid” is a period during which the ball detection sensor is permitted to detect a ball that has entered the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235). (Period in which detection is valid), and “invalid detection” indicates a period in which the detection is prohibited (period in which detection is invalid). Further, “winning” indicates that the ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning), and “non-winning” indicates that the winning (winning) is not detected. Further, “winning notification” indicates that over-winning notification is performed, and “no winning notification” indicates that the notification is not performed.

  In this example, the 1R game is terminated when the maximum number (10) of balls (winning) is detected during the opening of the 1R door member of the jackpot game. Since one over-winning (11th pitch) was detected in the game, an over-winning notification as shown in FIG. 5B (in this example, display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208, and a speaker 120), and the over-winning notification is finished simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game.

  In this example, the over-winning notification is ended simultaneously with the start of the next round, but may be continued after the next round. Further, the over-winning notification is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 5B, for example, notification may be performed by moving the above-described movable body, and the liquid crystal display device, the speaker, and the movable body 1, Multiple or all may be used. Further, when it is determined in the prefetch process that the special figure variable game suspension includes a big hit game, an over-winning special notification (in this example, a decorative symbol display device) as shown in FIG. An image 208 (a special image different from the normal over-winning notification) and characters may be displayed, and a sound output from the speaker 120 (a special sound different from the normal over-winning notification) may be performed.

  Further, in this example, there are two balls (the eleventh ball and the twelfth ball) after the 1R door member is closed, but the 12th ball is “detection invalid”. During the period, the ball detection sensor detects the winning (winning), but actually does not count as winning and does not perform the corresponding over winning notification.

<Over-winning notification / In case of two over-winnings after maximum pitch>
FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of winning notification when two over winnings after maximum winning are detected. FIGS. 133 (b) to (d) are display modes of over winning. It is the figure which showed an example.

In this example, the game of the 1R is terminated when 10 balls (winning) are detected during the opening period of the door member of the 1R of the big hit game. Since a winning (11th and 12th balls) was detected, the first over-winning was triggered by the first over-winning and the second over The second winning notification corresponding to the second over-winning is started upon winning, the first winning notification is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game, and the second winning notification is changed to the first winning notification. The second prize notification is ended after the same period.

During the period in which only the first winning notification is performed, an over winning notification (in this example, display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208 and output of sound by the speaker 120) as shown in FIG. During the period in which both the first winning notification and the second winning notification are performed, an over winning notification (in this example, an image by the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same image as the previous over winning notification is displayed) as shown in FIG. 2) and the display of characters and the sound of the speaker 120 (output the same sound as the previous over-winning notification twice) and only the second winning notification is performed, as shown in FIG. An over-winning notification has started. In this example, the second winning notification is performed for the same period as the first winning notification, but may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game in the same manner as the first winning notification. In addition, in a period in which both the first prize notification and the second prize notification are performed, two images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, or two sounds may be output in a superimposed manner.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of other winning notifications when two over winnings are detected. FIGS. 134 (b) to (c) are examples of over winning display modes. FIG.

  In this example, the game of the 1R is terminated when 10 balls (winning) are detected during the opening period of the door member of the 1R of the jackpot game. Since a winning (11th and 12th balls) was detected, the first over-winning was triggered by the first over-winning and the second over At the same time as the winning, the first winning notification is terminated, and simultaneously, the second winning notification corresponding to the second over winning is started, and the second winning notification is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game.

  During the period in which the first winning notification is performed, an over winning notification as shown in FIG. 5B is performed (in this example, the display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the output of sound by the speaker 120). During the period of performing the two-winning notification, an over-winning notification (in this example, an image (an image different from the first winning notification) by the decorative symbol display device 208) and characters (first winning notification and Display of a different character) and output of a sound from the speaker 120 (a sound different from the first prize notification). In this example, the first prize notification is started at the same time as the second overwinning is triggered, but the second prize notification is started at the same time, but the first prize notification is terminated when the detection is changed from valid to invalid. In addition, the second winning notification may be started, or the number of over winnings may be counted in response to the change from the detection valid to the detection invalid, and the over winning notification according to the count value may be performed.

<Over-winning notification / one over-winning after closing door>
FIG. 135 (a) is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of winning notification when one over winning is detected after the door member is closed. In this example, the 1R game is terminated when the maximum opening time (30 seconds in this example) of the 1R door member of the jackpot game has elapsed. Since (the winning of the maximum open time has elapsed) is detected, the winning notification corresponding to the over winning is started after the over winning, and then the winning notification is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game.

<Over-winning notification / one over-winning before closing door>
FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing the execution of a winning notification when one over winning is detected before the door member is closed. In this example, the 1R game is terminated when the maximum opening time of the 1R door member of the jackpot game (in this example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. Since one over-winning (a win exceeding the maximum number of balls) was detected during the opening, the winning notification corresponding to the over-winning was started when the over-winning was triggered, and then the winning notification was terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time. ing.

<Abnormality notification>
Next, an abnormality occurrence notification, which is an example of a winning abnormality handling process (step S306) in the winning opening counter updating process described above, will be described. FIG. 136 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of the abnormality occurrence notification performed in the winning abnormality handling process, and FIG. 136 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the abnormality occurrence notification mode.

  As described above, in step S304 of the winning prize counter updating process, the abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening is acquired based on the abnormality determination table for variable prize opening shown in FIG. 99 (a) and the hit type. For example, when the winning type is 4R probability variation A or 4R probability variation B, 52 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening.

  Subsequently, in step S305 of the winning opening counter updating process, the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) is determined as the abnormality determination value for the variable winning opening acquired in step S304 (in this example, 52), and if it is greater than or equal to the abnormality determination value (52 in this example), a winning abnormality handling process is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. In the fourth round, if it is determined that the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination value (52 in this example), the winning abnormality handling process is performed. Do.

  In this example, as the winning abnormality handling process, an abnormality occurrence signal is output from the information output circuit 336 controlled by the main control unit 300 to the outside (for example, a hall computer) for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example). Anomaly occurrence notification (in this example, the display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the output of sound by the speaker 120) as shown in FIG. 5B continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) or more. And do it. Note that the abnormality occurrence notification mode is not limited to this example. For example, the abnormality occurrence notification duration may be less than a predetermined period or the same period as the predetermined period. Moreover, although the example which performs both the output of an abnormality occurrence signal and abnormality notification is shown, you may comprise so that only either may be performed.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an abnormality occurrence signal is output based on a plurality of types of factors. In this example, whether or not the level of the ball detection sensor is abnormal (detection or cancellation of sensor level abnormality), whether or not abnormality is detected in winning (detection or cancellation of winning abnormality), and abnormality is detected in the magnetic field Whether or not (detection or cancellation of magnetic field abnormality) is detected, and when any abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence signal is output from the information output circuit 336 controlled by the main control unit 300 as the above-described winning abnormality handling process. It is configured to output to the outside for a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds).

<Over-winning notification and abnormal occurrence notification>
FIG. 138 (a) is a time chart showing an example of performing an abnormality occurrence notification during over-winning notification. In this example, the 4R game is terminated when the maximum number (10) of balls (winning) is detected during the opening period of the 4R door member of the jackpot game. Since the maximum number of balls entered +3 is detected in the game, the over-winning notification is started simultaneously with the detection of the first over-winning. In addition, during the over-winning notification, it is determined that the number of winnings in the variable winning opening is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination value (52 in this example) by detecting one additional ball, and the abnormality occurrence signal Both output and abnormality notification are performed. That is, in this example, during the over-winning notification, the output of the abnormality occurrence signal and the abnormality occurrence notification are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 5B is a time chart showing an example in which the abnormality occurrence notification is performed simultaneously with the over winning notification. In this example, the 4R game is terminated when the maximum number (10) of balls (winning) is detected during the opening period of the 4R door member of the jackpot game. Since one over winning is detected in the game, the over winning notification is started simultaneously with the detection of the over winning. In addition, it is determined that the number of winnings in the variable winning opening is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination value (52 in this example) due to this one over-winning, and both an abnormality occurrence signal output and an abnormality occurrence notification are performed. . That is, in this example, the over winning notification, the output of the abnormality occurrence signal, and the abnormality occurrence notification are started simultaneously. FIGS. 2A and 2B show an example in which an abnormality occurrence signal is output and an abnormality notification is made after the final round of the big hit game. Occurrence notification may be performed.

<Other embodiments>
Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a part of the prefetch information according to another embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the other embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 107, the variation type A is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch information. In the pachinko machine according to the other embodiment, the timer group information shown in the figure is configured to be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch information.

  Here, the timer group is obtained by classifying the variation type 1 (timer 1) to the variation type 22 (timer 22) of the variation type A into a plurality of groups (seven in this example). In this example, variation type 1 (timer 1) to variation type 5 (timer 5) are classified into a timer group (immediately out of sync), and variation type 6 (timer 6) to variation type 7 (timer 7) are timers. It is classified into a group (low expectation: loss), and the variation type 8 (timer 8) to the variation type 10 (timer 10) are classified into a timer group (small expectation: hit), and the variation type 11 (timer 11) to variation type. 13 (timer 13) is classified into a timer group (expected: hit), and variation type 14 (timer 14) to variation type 15 (timer 15) are classified into a timer group (expected: out of date). 16 (timer 16) to variation type 17 (timer 17) are classified into timer groups (large expectation: disappointment), and variation type 18 (timer 18) to variation type 22 (timer 22) are classified into timer groups. -Loop: have been classified into (expected large out).

  In addition, FIGS. 140 to 143 are diagrams illustrating an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table according to another embodiment. In this hold icon display mode lottery table, the display mode of the hold icon and the lottery value defined for each timer group are stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the hold icon display mode lottery table, the prefetch information (timer group) included in the hold increase command received from the main control unit 300, and the acquired lottery value. The holding icon change scenario lottery for determining the display mode of the holding icon is performed. When the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 3, refer to the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 140 (the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning 3), and the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 2. 141, refer to the table for holding icon display mode lottery shown in FIG. 141 (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning 2), and when the number of remaining holds at the time of winning is 1, the holding icon display mode shown in FIG. Referring to the lottery table (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning 1), if the number of remaining holds at the time of winning is 0, the holding icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 143 (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning 0) ).

  For example, when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 3, refer to the table shown in FIG. 140, and when the timer group information included in the prefetch information is 1, the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 0-79. When the scenario of “white → − → − → −” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 80 to 82, the display mode of the hold icon is “white → blue → When the scenario of “-→-” is selected and the acquired lottery value is in the range of 83 to 84, the scenario of “white → − → blue → −” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the acquired lottery value When the numerical value range of 85 to 87 is selected, the scenario of “white → − → − → blue” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and when the acquired lottery value ranges from 88 to 89, the hold icon The display mode is “blue → − → − → −”. Select the Rio, when the numerical range of the acquired lottery value of 90 to 99, "box → - → - → -" as a display aspect of the pending icon to select a scenario of.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of a variation icon display mode lottery table according to another embodiment. In the variation icon display mode lottery table, a hold icon display group, a variation icon display mode, and a lottery value defined for each timer number are stored in association with each other. The “big hit reliability” shown in the figure is an example of the big hit reliability of the variation icon in the non-electric support state and the non-probability variable state in the special figure 1 variable game, and other game states (electric support state) Or the same big hit reliability may be set in different probability states), or different big hit reliability may be set for each state.

In addition, the display mode of the variable icon includes a common display mode (for example, white, blue, and red belonging to the sphere system) common to the display mode of the hold icon, and a unique display mode (for example, a sphere system) that is different from the display mode of the hold icon. And smoke belonging to the box system, smoke, liquor, sword, family crest). In addition, although the display mode of the hold icon may have a unique display mode different from the display mode of the variable icon, in this case, the type of the specific display mode of the hold icon is more than the type of the unique display mode of the variable icon. It is preferable to reduce it.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 includes the variation icon display mode lottery table, the hold icon display group to which the display mode of the hold icon selected in the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery belongs, and the main control unit 300. Based on the pre-read information (timer number) included in the received hold increase command and the acquired lottery value, a variation icon lottery that determines the display mode of the variation icon is performed.

  For example, when the display mode of the hold icon selected in the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery is “white”, the table of the hold icon display group “sphere system” to which the display mode belongs is referred to and included in the prefetch information. When the timer number information is 4, when the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 0 to 96, “white” is selected as the display mode of the variable icon, and when the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 97 to 99 Selects “blue” as the display mode of the variation icon. For example, when the display mode of the hold icon selected in the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery is “box”, the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the display mode belongs is referred to and the prefetch information is displayed. When the information of the timer number included is 8, and the numerical range of the acquired lottery value is 0 to 69, “smoke” is selected as the display mode of the variation icon, and the numerical range of the acquired lottery value is 70 to 99. In this case, “sword” is selected as the display mode of the variation icon.

<Display example 1 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
Next, display examples of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a display example 1 of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  In a pachinko machine according to another embodiment, in addition to a symbol display area for displaying a decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, a special-fluctuating display region 208s0 for displaying a variable icon, a hold icon 1 The first special figure hold display area 208s1 for displaying the hold icon 2, the second special figure hold display area 208s2 for displaying the hold icon 2, and the third special figure hold display area 208s3 for displaying the hold icon 3 A fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 for displaying the hold icon 4 is arranged.

  In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 1 and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, the "white" hold icon 1 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and the special figure 1 is displayed. In accordance with the change display, the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In this state, for example, when a winning is made to the first special figure starting port 230, the main control unit 300 performs the above-described prefetching process (see FIG. 106) to obtain prefetching information including timer group information. The prefetch information is acquired and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. Here, a case is considered in which a pending increase command including at least the retained ball count information 1 at the time of winning, the timer number 21, and the pre-read information of the timer group 7 is transmitted.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the hold increase command performs the hold icon change scenario lottery process in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process (see FIG. 111B) described above. Since the number of remaining holds at the time of winning a prize is 1 and the timer group 7, a holding icon change scenario using the lottery value of timer group 7 in the holding icon display mode lottery table (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning 1) shown in FIG. Make a lottery. Here, a case is considered in which a scenario of “box → thousand boxes” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon by the hold icon change scenario lottery.

  Subsequently, when the number of holds increases, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in step S1004 of the hold icon display control process described above. Since the number of holds increased from 1 to 2, the hold icon 2 corresponding to the “box” that is the hold icon at the time of winning in the scenario “box → thousand boxes” is shown in FIG. 2 is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208s2.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a variation icon lottery process in step S1102 of the above-described variation icon display control process (see FIG. 112). The variable icon lottery process is performed using the lottery value of the timer number 21 included in the prefetch information with reference to the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the “box” which is the display mode of the hold icon belongs. Here, the case where “family crest” is selected as the display mode of the change icon by the change icon lottery is considered.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 3C to 3D, the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the symbol display. The decorative symbol is stopped in the area, and the erased animation for gradually erasing the “white” fluctuation icon is displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208 s 0 in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 5E to 5G, the main control unit 300 in the first special figure display device 212 corresponds to the hold 1 at the time of winning in FIG. The variable display is performed, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 2 to 1, so that the first special figure hold display area 208s1 is displayed. The displayed “white” hold icon 1 that has been displayed is gradually enlarged while being moved to the special figure changing display area 208s0. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the “box” hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2 as the hold icon after one change according to the scenario “box → thousand boxes”. While being gradually changed to the image of “Thousand boxes”, the hold icon 2 corresponding to “Thousand boxes” is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s1. In this example, the hold icon is gradually enlarged and changed to the change icon. However, the hold icon may be displayed as a change icon without being enlarged, and the change icon larger than the hold icon may be displayed. May be prepared in advance and the variation icon may be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11H, the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. In accordance with the stop display in FIG. 1, an erase animation for gradually erasing the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) to (l) of the figure, the main control unit 300 of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 2 at the time of winning in the figure (b) in the first special figure display device 212. The variable display is performed, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the variable display of the decoration symbol in the symbol display area, and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 1 to 0, so that the first special figure hold display area 208s1 is displayed. The displayed hold icon 1 of the “thousand box” is moved in the direction of the special area changing display area 208s0, and at a predetermined timing, the “thousand box” is changed to the “family crest” selected by the variable icon lottery. Then, the “family crest” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In this way, by displaying “family crest” that is not included in the hold icon (not used for notifying the number of holds) as a change icon in the special figure changing display area 208s0, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. Compared with the case where the special figure changing display area 208s0 is displayed as it is without changing, it is possible to surely notify the player that the number of holdings has been reduced and the special figure has started to change. Will not diminish motivation.

  In addition, when moving the hold icon 1 of “Thousand boxes” in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0, the movement of the hold icon 1 is made conspicuous by passing over the decorative pattern being changed and displayed. You may comprise so that it may emphasize that the number decreased (a player is made aware). Further, the animation mode for changing the display mode of the hold icon (in this example, a thousand boxes) and the animation mode for changing the display mode of the change icon (in this example, a family crest) may be different from each other. Also, in FIG. 5 (k), the hold icon and the change icon are displayed at the same time. However, in order to emphasize that the number of holds has decreased (to make the player notice), the display of the hold icon is changed to the display of the change icon. It may be configured so that both are not displayed at the same time.

<Display example 2 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a display example 2 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols on the symbol display area. Since the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0 and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, the change icon is not displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0, and the first special figure hold display area No hold icon is displayed in 208s1 to 4th special figure hold display area 208s4. Note that the change icon is not displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the hold icon is not displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4. A frame line and a number indicating are displayed. Thereby, the player can know that some information is provided during the game even when the hold icon or the change icon is not displayed, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  In this state, for example, when a winning is made to the first special figure starting port 230, the main control unit 300 performs the above-described prefetching process (see FIG. 106) to obtain prefetching information including timer group information. The prefetch information is acquired and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. Here, a case is considered in which a hold increase command including at least the remaining ball number information 0 at the time of winning, the timer number 21, and the pre-read information of the timer group 7 is transmitted.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the hold increase command performs the hold icon change scenario lottery process in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process (see FIG. 111B) described above. Since the number of remaining holds at the time of winning a prize is 0 and the timer group 7, a holding icon change scenario using the lottery value of the timer group 7 in the holding icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. Make a lottery. Here, a case is considered where the scenario of “thousand boxes” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon by the hold icon change scenario lottery.

  Subsequently, when the number of holds increases, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in step S1004 of the hold icon display control process described above. Then, since the number of holds has not increased, no hold icon is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a variation icon lottery process in step S1102 of the above-described variation icon display control process (see FIG. 112). The variable icon lottery process is performed using the lottery value of the timer number 21 included in the prefetch information with reference to the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the “thousand boxes” as the hold icon display mode belongs. Here, a case where “sword” is selected as the display mode of the variation icon by variation icon lottery is considered.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5B, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The “sword” selected by the variation icon lottery is displayed in the special figure variation display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 7C, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. After the reach display is performed, as shown in FIG. 4D, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a whitish color (white background) before the start of super reach production. As shown to (e), while starting the production of a super reach, the fluctuation icon currently displayed on the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0, the 1st special figure hold display area 208s1-the 4th special figure hold display area 208s4. Delete all the hold icons displayed in.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5F, the main control unit 300 displays the stop of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5G, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation changing display area 208s0 while performing “swing fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. As shown in (h) to (j) of FIG. 5, after all the change icons and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed. , An erasing animation for gradually erasing the fluctuation icon of “sword” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. Note that the mode of the erase animation may be changed depending on the jackpot reliability, or may be a common mode regardless of the jackpot reliability.

  In this way, even if there is no special figure variable game hold, if the change icon is displayed after the special figure change display, it is possible to make it seem that the special figure change game will be performed again. In some cases, it may be difficult to identify and prevent the game ball from being stopped.

<Display example 3 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating a display example 3 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 1 and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “Thousand boxes” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1. In accordance with the change display, the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. Here, a case where the scenario of “box → thousand box” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon by the lottery of the hold icon change scenario, and “family crest” is selected as the display mode of the change icon by the variation icon lottery. Think.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C, the main control unit 300 performs stop display from the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub control unit 400 displays the symbol display. In the region, the stop display is performed from the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the erase animation for gradually erasing the “white” variation icon is displayed in the special-in-fluctuation display region 208s0 in accordance with the stop display of the special diagram 1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 9D to 9G, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the first special figure display device 212, and performs the first sub-control. The part 400 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, and the number of reserved special figure 1 games has decreased from 1 to 0, so that the “thousand boxes” held in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 is held. The icon 1 is moved in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0, and at a predetermined timing, the “thousand box” is changed to the “family crest” selected by the fluctuation icon lottery, and the “family crest” is specially shown. Displayed in the changing display area 208s0.

  Further, in addition to the display control of the hold icon and the change icon, the first sub control unit 400 performs reach display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area as shown in FIG. ), The entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a whitish color (white back) before the start of the super reach effect. As shown in FIG. , And all the hold icons displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5 (i), the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10J, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0 while performing “fluctuation fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. Except the change icon (family crest in this example), the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed.

  As described above, when it is determined that there is no special figure variable game hold and the result of the special figure variable game is wrong, the display area 208s0 is deleted after the special figure variable display area 208s0 is deleted. If the change icon displayed on the screen is left erased, the player does not feel uncomfortable and the game motivation is not reduced.

<Display example 4 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating a display example 4 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 1 and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “box” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and the special figure 1 is displayed. In accordance with the change display, the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In this state, for example, when there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the main control unit 300 performs the above-described prefetching process (see FIG. 106) and obtains prefetching information including timer group information. The prefetch information is acquired and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. Here, a case is considered in which a pending increase command including at least the retained ball count information 1 at the time of winning, the timer number 21, and the pre-read information of the timer group 7 is transmitted.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the hold increase command performs the hold icon change scenario lottery process and the display of the hold icon in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process (see FIG. 111B). In this example, the suspension icon change scenario lottery and the display of the suspension icon are performed only when the special figure 1 variable game is suspended. Here, the special figure 2 variable game is suspended. In this case, the hold icon change scenario lottery and the hold icon are not displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a variation icon lottery process in step S1102 of the above-described variation icon display control process (see FIG. 112). The variable icon lottery process is performed using the lottery value of the timer number 21 included in the prefetch information with reference to the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the “box” which is the display mode of the hold icon belongs. Here, a case is considered in which “blue” of the spherical system is selected as the display mode of the change icon by the change icon lottery.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5C, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 stop on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. In accordance with the stop display in FIG. 1, an erase animation for gradually erasing the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 4D to 4E, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the suspension of the special figure 2 variable game on the second special figure display device 214. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and displays the “blue” variation icon selected in the variation icon lottery in the special-fluctuation display region 208s0. At this time, the moving animation representing the movement mode from the holding icon to the fluctuation icon is not performed, and the holding icon 1 of “box” displayed in the first special figure holding display area 208s1. However, it is configured not to change the display mode triggered by the variable display of the special figure 2 (so as to change the display mode triggered only by the variable display of the special figure 1). In this example, the special figure changing display area 208s0 is used for two purposes: an area for displaying the fluctuation icon of the special figure 1 variable game and an area for displaying the fluctuation icon of the special figure 2 variable game. I use it.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 5F to 5H, the main control unit 300 performs stop display of the special figure 2 on the second special figure display device 214, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the symbol. The decorative symbol is stopped in the area, and the erased animation for gradually erasing the “blue” fluctuation icon is displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208 s 0 in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 2. Note that the mode of the erased animation corresponding to the special figure 2 may be different from the mode of the erased animation corresponding to the special figure 1, and the type of the erased animation is based on the result of the special figure variation game and the pre-read information. It may be changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) to (k) of the figure, the main control unit 300, in the first special figure display device 212, special figure corresponding to the hold 1 of special figure 1 interrupted in special figure 2. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 2 to 1, so that the first special diagram hold display area The hold icon 1 of “box” displayed in 208s1 is displayed to move in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0. The “thousand boxes” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a display for moving the “white” hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2 in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and performs a predetermined operation. At the timing, the “white” is changed to “red” according to the scenario, and the “red” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

<Display example 5 of change icon and hold icon>
FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a display example 5 of the change icon and the hold icon. In this example, the main control unit 300 performs stop display of the special figure 1 variable game at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the first sub-control unit 400 corresponds to the hold 1 of the special figure 1 variable game. Fluctuation display has started. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the “blue” hold icon 1 displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 as the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game decreases from 1 to 0. It is changed to the “red” fluctuation icon and displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0, except for the fourth symbol display area indicating that the special figure is fluctuating as shown in FIG. A darkening effect that changes the display area to black is performed, and the “red” fluctuation icon that is to be displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0 is temporarily erased (the first elimination of the fluctuation icon).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10C, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the darkening effect, and the decorative symbol, the variation icon displayed in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0, and the first special control unit 400 are displayed. All the hold icons displayed in the figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed (the second display of the fluctuation icon).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the reach of the super reach as shown in FIG. 5E after performing the reach display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display area. Previously, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a whitish color (white back), and as shown in FIG. All the change icons displayed in 208s0 and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are deleted (the second deletion of the change icon).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5G, the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 9H, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0 while performing “sway fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. All the change icons that have been displayed and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed (third display of the change icon). In the third display of the variation icon, the mode (for example, color and pattern) is different from that of the second display. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player has some chance, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) to (j) in the figure, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the super reach. In addition, the change icon displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are all erased. To do.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the main control unit 300 performs stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6 (k), the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0 while performing “fluctuation fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. All the change icons that have been displayed and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed. The display of the variation icon is different from the previous display. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player has some chance, and the player's willingness to play may be increased. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 erases the variation icon based on the variation stop command received from the main control unit 300.

  Thus, in this example, one special figure variable game (in this example, the special figure variable game started immediately after the timing shown in FIG. 1A and stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 1G). ), The change icon is erased a plurality of times (in this example, the timing shown in FIG. 2B and the timing shown in FIG. 2G), but it is erased once. The period during which the fluctuation icon is displayed is longer than that in the case where the fluctuation icon is erased by a smaller number of times than the number of times per one special figure fluctuation game. Thereby, although the number of times of erasure of the variation icon is large, the total display period can be lengthened, and the player can be aware of the variation of the variation icon.

<Display example 6 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a display example 6 of the change icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols on the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 2 and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “white” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 and “blue” is displayed. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2, and the special figure changing display area 208s0 is not displayed. In this example, the “white” hold icon has an initial value (default value), and the special map is changing only when the hold icon is a hold icon other than the initial value (in this example, a hold icon other than “white”). A corresponding variation icon is displayed in the display area 208s0.

  As shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 Since the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display area and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held is reduced from 2 to 1, the “blue” hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208s1 and an erase animation that gradually deletes the “white” hold icon 1 displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, The moving animation for moving the holding icon 1 of “white” to the special figure changing display area 208s0 is not performed. As shown in FIG. 10C, the moving animation of the “blue” hold icon 2 and the erase animation of the “white” hold icon 1 may be overlapped before and after the same display area.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5E, the main control unit 300 displays the stop of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. Stop display of. Further, as shown in FIGS. 5F to 5I, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display area and displays them in the first special figure hold display area 208s1. After performing the moving animation for moving the “blue” hold icon 1 to the special-fluctuating display area 208s0, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area as shown in FIGS. At the same time, an erasing animation for gradually erasing the “blue” fluctuation icon displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0 is performed.

  It should be noted that the time for the erased animation of the fluctuation icon (the time for erasing the fluctuation icon shown in (i) to (l) in the figure) is the duration of the erased animation for the initial hold icon (a (a) to (c) in the figure. ) Is set longer than the time for deleting the hold icon shown in FIG. Further, in this example, only when the hold icon is a hold icon other than the initial value, the corresponding change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The change icon is displayed only when the hold icon changes (for example, when it changes from “white” to “blue”), or the change icon is also displayed when the hold icon does not change. The display time of the variable icon may be shortened compared to the case where the hold icon changes. That is, the first hold icon (for example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold 1) and the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold 2) are compared, and when both are different, What is necessary is just to change the display time, display mode, etc. of the fluctuation | variation icon corresponding to a 1st pending | holding icon.

<Display example 7 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a display example 7 of the change icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols on the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 3, and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “white” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and “white” is displayed. Hold icon 2 is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2, “blue” hold icon 3 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208 s 3, and a change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208 s 0. It is not in the state. In this example, the display positions of the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are changed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure is in a probable state based on the pre-read information received from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts a pre-read notice effect based on the pre-read. At the same time, the symbol display area is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol changing display region 208s0 and the first special symbol hold display region 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display region 208s4 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to the lower right. In this example, the special figure changing display area 208s0 is moved to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first special figure reservation display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure reservation display area 208s4 are moved downward in this order in the vertical direction. They are arranged side by side on top. In addition, the display areas of the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are made smaller than before the movement. That is, the position and size of the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are changed, and the moving direction of the hold icon is changed from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. I am letting.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub control part 400 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and since the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has decreased from 2 to 1, the “white” hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 1 is performed to move to the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In addition, after completing the pre-reading notice effect in FIG. 6I, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. The fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 is moved to the original position (position shown in FIG. 4A) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display of the change icon and the erase animation are continued.

<Display of change icon and hold icon 8>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a display example 8 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 2 and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, the “white” hold icon 1 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and “thousand boxes” The hold icon 2 is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2, and the change icon is not displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. In this example, when a power interruption / recovery occurs, the hold icon is changed to a display mode different from that before power interruption / recovery.

  In FIG. 5B, power interruption occurs and power is restored in FIG. 4C. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image after power is supplied. Since a predetermined activation time is required until it becomes possible, the first sub-control unit 400 waits for activation of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power is supplied until the production control can be started. Time is required, and characters such as “Please wait for a while during recovery” are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the preparation time elapses.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 300 has a shorter preparation time until the game control can be started after the power is supplied than the first sub control unit 400 that controls the decorative symbol display device 208. The game control is started before the control unit 400 starts the production control. In this example, as shown in FIG. 4C, the first special control is started during the preparation time by the first sub control unit 400. The winning of the mouth 230 is detected, and the suspension of the special figure 1 variable game is increased from 2 to 3.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 starts production control after the preparatory period has elapsed, but does not hold the result of special figure 1 variable game at the time of power interruption, so as shown in FIG. In the symbol display area, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation (in this example, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” set as an initial value) is displayed. Also, even if a moving animation or an erasing animation of a hold icon or a variable icon is performed before power interruption / recovery, any animation is not performed because the situation is not maintained at the time of power interruption.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5E, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 In the symbol display area, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 does not hold the information on the hold icon or the variable icon at the time of the power interruption, the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the information on the number of holds (3 in this example) received from the main control unit 300. Predetermined display in the 1 special figure hold display area 208s1 to 3rd special figure hold display area 208s3 (in this example, "?" Display. Although the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 3, it corresponds to each hold Display that the display mode of the hold icon to be determined is unconfirmed).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5F, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the third special figure hold display area 208s3 to be triggered by the decrease in the number of special figure 1 variable games held from 3 to 2. A moving animation for moving the displayed “?” Hold icon 2 in the direction of the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2 and a “?” Hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2 are displayed. A moving animation that moves in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208s1 and a moving animation that moves the hold icon 1 of “?” Displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the special figure changing display area 208s0. And the “?” Hold icon 1 is deleted, and at the same time the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 11H to 11I, the first sub-control unit 400 holds the second special figure hold in response to the decrease in the number of special figure 1 variable games held from 2 to 1. A moving animation for moving the hold icon 2 of “?” Displayed in the display area 208 s 2 in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208 s 1 and “?” Displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208 s 1. A moving animation for moving the hold icon 1 to the special figure changing display area 208s0 is performed, and the “?” Hold icon 1 is deleted, and at the same time, a “blue” changing icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. In this example, since the first sub-control unit 400 does not hold the information on the scenario of the hold icon at the time of power failure, the display mode of the variable icon is determined according to the scenario having the information with the lowest reliability of the big hit among the scenarios. It is configured to do.

<Display of change icon and hold icon 9>
FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating a display example 9 of the change icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the stop of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the “swing” of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. "Change" is performed, and after waiting for a change stop command from the main control unit 300, execution of the decorative symbol stop display and change icon deletion animation is started. In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 cannot receive the change stop command from the main control unit 300 for some reason, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the change icon erase animation after a predetermined time. Configured to start execution.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 starts a timer set at a predetermined time at the timing shown in FIG. 5A and the timer times out, as shown in FIGS. Without waiting for the reception of the change stop command from the control unit 300, the change icon is erased. Note that “fluctuation fluctuation” continues to be executed because no fluctuation stop command has been received.

  With such a configuration, even when the first sub-control unit 400 misses the variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is understood that the variation of the special figure is stopped by deleting the variation icon. In addition, it is disadvantageous that the player progresses the game with some troubles by giving the player a sense of incongruity by continuing to display “fluctuation fluctuation” even after the fluctuation icon is deleted. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation.

<Display of change icon and hold icon 10>
FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating a display example 10 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a display area 208s0, a first special figure hold display area 208s1 to a fourth special figure hold in the display area. When a predetermined condition is satisfied without displaying the display area 208s4, the display area is entirely displayed as shown in FIGS.

  Here, when a specific lottery result is derived by pre-reading or jackpot determination, or when the production mode is changed based on the player's operation, the number of fluctuations of the special figure reaches the predetermined number. In such a case, a case where the production mode is selected by lottery and a specific production mode is won by the lottery is included.

<Displaying the change icon while the decorative design is stopped>
Next, an example will be described in which the display of the variation icon is ended while the decoration symbol is stopped. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display period of the variation icon.

  “Fluctuation n” shown in the same figure indicates the nth (n is a positive integer) decorative symbol variation display, and this figure shows an example of decorative symbol display control performed during the period of variation n. Is described. In this example, when the variation start condition of variation n is satisfied, display control of pseudo variation 1 is first performed, and thereafter, temporary stop → pseudo variation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo variation 3 → temporary stop → main variation → reach Display control is performed in the order of variation 1 → reach variation 2, and finally the display control of the actual stop is performed to complete the variation stop indication of variation n. Note that “variation n + 1” indicates the next variation after “variation n”, “variation n + 2” indicates the next variation after “variation n”, and “variation n + 3” indicates “variation n”. The next fluctuation after "n" is shown.

  In this example, 26 types of periods from period 1 to period 26 can be set as the display period of the variable icon. For example, period 1 is set as a display period of the fluctuation icon, and a period from the start of fluctuation n of fluctuation n to execution of display control of pseudo fluctuation 1 (during pseudo fluctuation 1) is set, and period 19 is a display period of fluctuation icons. Is set to the period from the start of the fluctuation n to the time when the display control for the actual stop is being executed (during the actual stop), and the period 26 is the period for displaying the fluctuation icon from the fluctuation start of the fluctuation n to the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation n + 3. It means to set the period until. In addition, when the pseudo fluctuation or the reach fluctuation is not performed during the fluctuation or when the number of the fluctuations is small, the display period corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation or the reach fluctuation may be omitted from the display periods defined in the periods 1 to 26. . Moreover, the period of this variation may be further subdivided into a period in which the left middle right symbol of the decorative symbol is varying and a period in which any one of the left middle right is stopped. The display of the fluctuation icon may be terminated during the period.

  In the case of displaying the variation icon in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the plurality of types based on predetermined conditions (for example, variation n variation time, gaming state, determination result of variation variation, etc.). A specific display period is selected and set from among the display periods. In addition, you may comprise so that a specific display period may be selected by lottery from these multiple types of display periods. In addition, when performing continuous notice, a display period exceeding the variable period may be set, or even when no continuous notice is given, a display period exceeding the variable period may be set. Further, even during the display period of the variable icon, at least during the predetermined period of the period (for example, blackout or whiteout of scene change, moving display of a character image, or movement of a movable object) You may comprise so that a part may not be displayed.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the effect display in time series when the display of the variation icon is ended during the main stop of the decorative symbol. The special figure 1 normal hold display area 208v shown in the figure is a display area for informing the numerical value of the special figure 1 variable game hold number, and the special figure 2 normal hold display area 208w is a special figure 2 variable. This is a display area for notifying the number of held games numerically, and the general figure hold display area 208x is a display area for notifying numerically the number of hold of the common figure variable game. 208y is a display area for informing the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game as an image, and the fluctuation icon display area 208z is a display area for displaying a fluctuation icon. For example, the state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 3, the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, and the number of hold of the normal figure variable game is 0.

  Here, the first sub-control unit 400 selects the icon corresponding to the above-described “clear” as the variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display, and the period 1 to the period 1 shown in FIG. 155 as the variation icon display period. An example will be described in which the period 19 (the period from the start of the change of the change n to the execution of the display control of the actual stop (during the actual stop)) is selected from the period 26.

  The state shown in FIG. 9A is the timing when the variable display of FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. Display of the fluctuation icon VI is started. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the period 19 selected as the display period of the variable icon is started.

  Next, the states shown in (b) and (c) of the figure are the pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary after the start of the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. This is a state in which reach variation 2 is performed after stop → main variation → reach variation 1. Next, the state shown in FIG. 4D is the timing when the decorative symbol main stop is started after the reach fluctuation 2 shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI corresponding to the symbol variation display is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in FIG. In this state, it is determined that the time corresponding to the period 19 that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 9A has elapsed, and the process of deleting the variation icon VI from the variation icon display area 208z is performed. In this example, the variation icon VI is configured to be erased at once in one frame during the actual stop. However, for example, the variation icon VI is gradually erased over a plurality of frames during the main stop. Animation may be performed (the same applies to other embodiments).

  Thus, if the display of the fluctuation icon is continued even after the main stop of the fluctuation display starts and the display of the fluctuation icon is erased during the main stop, the player's interest can be directed to the fluctuation icon. In some cases, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

<When the display periods of multiple variable icons overlap>
Next, a case where display periods of a plurality of variable icons overlap will be described. FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display period of the variation icon.

  In this example, the display period of the fluctuation n icon is set to a period (a period corresponding to the period 25 shown in FIG. 155 above) from the start of fluctuation n to the fluctuation stop of fluctuation n + 3, and the display period of the fluctuation n + 1 icon. Is set to a period from the start of change of change n + 1 to the stop of change of change n + 3 (a period corresponding to the period 23 shown in FIG. 155), and the display period of the change n + 2 icon is from change start of change n + 2 to change n + 3. The period until the fluctuation is stopped (a period corresponding to the period 21 shown in FIG. 155), and the display period of the fluctuation n + 3 icon is the period from the start of the fluctuation n + 3 to the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation n + 3 (the above figure). 155) (period corresponding to the period 19 shown in FIG. 155).

  FIG. 158 and FIG. 159 are diagrams showing the effect display in time series when the display periods of a plurality of variation icons overlap. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 selects the icon corresponding to the above-described “clear” as the variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display, and the period 1 to the period 1 shown in FIG. 155 as the variation icon display period. Regarding the example in which the variation n icon display period, the variation n + 1 icon display period, the variation n + 2 icon display period, and the variation n + 3 icon display period shown in FIG. 157 are selected after the period 19 is selected from the period 26. explain.

  The state shown in FIG. 9A is the timing when the variable display of FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. Display of the fluctuation icon VI is started. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the period 19 selected as the display period of the variable icon is started.

  Next, the state shown in (b) of the figure shows that after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (a) of the figure starts, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation. → Reach fluctuation 1 → Reach fluctuation 2 is the timing at which the decorative symbol main stop is started. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI corresponding to the symbol variation display is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in FIG. In this state, it is determined that the time corresponding to the period 19 that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 9A has elapsed, and the process of deleting the variation icon VI from the variation icon display area 208z is performed.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 4D is the timing when the fluctuation display (fluctuation n) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. Display of the fluctuation icon VIn is started. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the variation n icon display period selected as the display period of the variation icon VIn is started.

  Next, the state shown in (e) of the figure shows that after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (d) of the figure starts, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation. → Reach fluctuation 1 → Reach fluctuation 2 is the timing at which the decorative symbol main stop is started. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VIn corresponding to the variation n is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in FIG. In this state, the time corresponding to the fluctuation n icon display period that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 4D has not elapsed, but at the same time the fluctuation icon VIn is erased from the fluctuation icon display area 208z, the fluctuation icon A process of displaying VIn in a second variable icon display area 208t provided separately from the variable icon display area 208z is performed. That is, the display of the variation icon VIn on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Note that the display mode of the variation icon VIn may be changed when the variation icon VIn is displayed in the second variation icon display area 208t. Further, a moving animation for moving the fluctuation icon VIn from the fluctuation icon display area 208z to the second fluctuation icon display area 208t may be performed. Further, when the fluctuation icon VIn moves, at least a part of other displays (holding icon, other fluctuation icons, decorative symbols, special drawing effects, general drawing effects, notice effects, character effects) may be hidden, At least a part of the variation icon VIn may be hidden in another display.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6G is the timing when the fluctuation display (fluctuation n + 1) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. The display of the variation icon VIn + 1 is started, and the display of the variation icon VIn corresponding to the variation n is continued in the second variation icon display area 208t. At the same time, the counting of the time corresponding to the variation n + 1 icon display period selected as the variation icon VIn + 1 display period is started.

  Next, the state shown in (h) of the figure shows that after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (g) of the figure starts, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation. → Reach fluctuation 1 → Reach fluctuation 2 is the timing at which the decorative symbol main stop is started. At this timing, the display of the fluctuation icon VIn + 1 corresponding to the fluctuation n + 1 is continued in the fluctuation icon display area 208z, and the display of the fluctuation icon VIn corresponding to the fluctuation n is continued in the second fluctuation icon display area 208t. .

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 159 (i) is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in FIG. 158 (h). In this state, the time corresponding to the variation n + 1 icon display period, which starts counting at the timing of FIG. 5G, has not elapsed, but at the same time the variation icon VIn + 1 is erased from the variation icon display area 208z, the variation icon A process of displaying VIn + 1 in the second variation icon display area 208t is performed. That is, the display of the variation icons VIn and VIn + 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6J is the timing at which the fluctuation display (fluctuation n + 2) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. While the display of the variation icon VIn + 2 is started, the display of the variation icon VIn corresponding to the variation n and the display of the variation icon VIn + 1 corresponding to the variation n + 1 are continued in the second variation icon display area 208t. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the variation n + 2 icon display period selected as the display period of the variation icon VIn + 2 is started.

  Next, the state shown in (k) of the figure shows that after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (i) of the figure starts, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation. → Reach fluctuation 1 → Reach fluctuation 2 is the timing at which the decorative symbol main stop is started. At this timing, the display of the fluctuation icon VIn + 2 corresponding to the fluctuation n + 2 is continued in the fluctuation icon display area 208z, and the display of the fluctuation icon VIn corresponding to the fluctuation n and the fluctuation n + 1 are supported in the second fluctuation icon display area 208t. The display of the fluctuation icon VIn + 1 to be continued is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 10L is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in FIG. In this state, the time corresponding to the variation n + 2 icon display period that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 10J has not elapsed, but at the same time the variation icon VIn + 2 is erased from the variation icon display area 208z, the variation icon A process of displaying VIn + 2 in the second variation icon display area 208t is performed. That is, the display of the variation icons VIn, VIn + 1, and VIn + 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6 (m) is the timing when the fluctuation display (fluctuation n + 3) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. The display of the variation icon VIn + 3 is started, and in the second variation icon display area 208t, the variation icon VIn corresponding to the variation n, the variation icon VIn + 1 corresponding to the variation n + 1, and the variation icon corresponding to the variation n + 2 are displayed. The display of VIn + 2 is continued. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the variation n + 3 icon display period selected as the variation icon VIn + 3 display period is started.

  Next, the state shown in (n) of the figure is the following: after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (m) of the figure is started, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation → Reach fluctuation 1 → Reach fluctuation 2 is the timing at which the decorative symbol main stop is started. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VIn + 3 corresponding to the variation n + 3 is continued in the variation icon display region 208z, and the display of the variation icon VIn corresponding to the variation n and the variation n + 1 are displayed in the second variation icon display region 208t. The display of the corresponding variation icon VIn + 1 and the display of the variation icon VIn + 2 corresponding to the variation n + 2 are continued.

  Next, the state shown in (o) of the figure is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in (n) of the figure. In this state, it is determined that the time corresponding to the variation n + 3 icon display period that has started counting at the timing shown in FIG. 5M has elapsed, and at the same time the variation icon VIn + 3 is erased from the variation icon display area 208z, It is determined that the time corresponding to the display period, the fluctuation n + 1 icon display period, and the fluctuation n + 2 icon display period has elapsed, and the process of deleting the fluctuation icons VIn, VIn + 1, and VIn + 2 from the second fluctuation icon display area 208t is performed.

  In this way, if the display of the variation icon is continued even after the start of the main display of the variation display, and the display of the variation icon is deleted when each predetermined display period has elapsed, the player's interest May be directed to the variation icon, which may increase the player's expectation.

  In this example, all the variation icons are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (o). However, each variation icon may be erased at a different timing, or the variation icon (older) whose display start timing is earlier. It may be deleted sequentially from the variation icon. Further, the variation icon VIn + 3 may be displayed in the second variation icon display area 208t at the timing shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 160, the variation icons VIn, VIn + 1, VIn + 2, and VIn + 3 may be displayed so as to overlap the same variation icon display area 208z. In this case, the display position of each variation icon is shifted and each variation icon is displayed. It is preferable to make the type of the variable icon visible. Further, the variation icons may be stacked in the order of variation start from the variation icon VIn → the variation icon VIn + 1 → the variation icon VIn + 2 → the variation icon VIn + 3, or in the reverse order. With such a configuration, it is possible to use other display areas for other displays, and the limited display areas may be used effectively.

<When displaying multiple variation icons in one variation>
Next, a case where a plurality of variation icons are displayed by one variation will be described. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display period of the variation icon.

  In this example, the pseudo 1 variation icon display period is set to a period from the start of the variation of the pseudo variation 1 in the variation n to the current stop, and the pseudo 2 variation icon display period is from the start of the variation of the pseudo variation 2 in the variation n. The pseudo three-variation icon display period is set to the period until the actual stop, and the pseudo three-variation icon display period is set to the period from the start of the fluctuation of the pseudo-variation 3 for the fluctuation n to the main stop. It is set to the period from the start of fluctuation to the actual stop.

  FIG. 162 and FIG. 163 are diagrams showing the effect display in time series when a plurality of variation icons are displayed by one variation. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 selects the icon corresponding to the above-described “clear” as the variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display, and the period 1 to the period 1 shown in FIG. 155 as the variation icon display period. After selecting the above-described period 19 from the period 26, the icon corresponding to the above-mentioned “snow” is selected as the variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display, and the pseudo-one variation icon display period shown in FIG. An example in which the pseudo 2 variation icon display period, the pseudo 3 variation icon display period, and the main variation icon display period are selected will be described.

  The state shown in FIG. 9A is the timing when the variable display of FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. Display of the fluctuation icon VI is started. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the period 19 selected as the display period of the variable icon is started.

  Next, the state shown in (b) of the figure shows that after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (a) of the figure starts, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation. → Reach fluctuation 1 → Reach fluctuation 2 is the timing at which the decorative symbol main stop is started. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI corresponding to the symbol variation display is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in FIG. In this state, it is determined that the time corresponding to the period 19 that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 9A has elapsed, and the process of deleting the variation icon VI from the variation icon display area 208z is performed.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 4D is the timing when the pseudo variation 1 in the variation display (variation n) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212 and the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the fluctuation corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation 1 in the fluctuation icon display area 208z. Display of icon VI1 has started. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the pseudo 1 variation icon display period selected as the display period of the variation icon VI1 is started.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 9E is the timing at which the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation 1 is started after the pseudo fluctuation 1 shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI1 corresponding to the pseudo variation 1 is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation 1 shown in FIG. In this state, although the time corresponding to the pseudo 1 variation icon display period which has started counting at the timing of FIG. 4D has not elapsed, the variation icon VI1 is erased from the variation icon display area 208z and at the same time, the variation Processing for displaying the icon VI1 in the second variation icon display area 208t is performed. That is, the display of the variation icon VI1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Note that the display mode of the variation icon VI1 may be further changed when the variation icon VI1 is displayed in the second variation icon display area 208t. Further, a moving animation for moving the fluctuation icon VI1 from the fluctuation icon display area 208z to the second fluctuation icon display area 208t may be performed. Further, when the change icon VI1 moves, at least a part of other displays (holding icon, other change icons, decorative symbols, special drawing effects, general drawing effects, notice effects, character effects) may be hidden, At least a part of the variation icon VI1 may be hidden in another display.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5G is the timing when the pseudo fluctuation 2 in the fluctuation display (fluctuation n) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the pseudo variation 2 of the decorative symbol is started, and at the same time, the display of the variation icon VI2 corresponding to the pseudo variation 2 is started in the variation icon display region 208z, and the pseudo variation 1 is displayed in the second variation icon display region 208t. The change icon V1 corresponding to is continuously displayed. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the pseudo variation 2 icon display period selected as the display period of the variation icon V2 is started.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 11H is the timing at which the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation 2 is started after the pseudo fluctuation 2 shown in FIG. At this timing, the variation icon VI2 corresponding to the pseudo variation 2 is continuously displayed in the variation icon display region 208z, and the variation icon VI1 corresponding to the variation 1 is continuously displayed in the second variation icon display region 208t. Yes.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 163 (i) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation 2 shown in FIG. 162 (h). In this state, although the time corresponding to the pseudo two-variable icon display period that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 5G has not elapsed, the variation icon VI2 is erased from the variation icon display area 208z and the variation is simultaneously performed. Processing for displaying the icon VI2 in the second variation icon display area 208t is performed. That is, the display of the change icons VI1 and VI2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6J is the timing when the pseudo variation 3 in the variation display (variation n) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the pseudo variation 3 of the decorative symbol is started, and simultaneously, the variation icon VI3 corresponding to the pseudo variation 3 is started in the variation icon display region 208z, and the pseudo variation 1 is displayed in the second variation icon display region 208t. The display of the variation icon VI1 corresponding to the above and the display of the variation icon VI2 corresponding to the pseudo variation 2 are continued. At the same time, the counting of the time corresponding to the pseudo three variation icon display period selected as the display period of the variation icon VI3 is started.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 10 (k) is the timing at which the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation 3 is started after the pseudo fluctuation 3 shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI3 corresponding to the pseudo variation 3 is continued in the variation icon display region 208z, and the display of the variation icon VI1 corresponding to the pseudo variation 1 and the pseudo variation are displayed in the second variation icon display region 208t. The display of the variation icon VI2 corresponding to 2 is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 10L is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation 3 shown in FIG. In this state, although the time corresponding to the pseudo three variation icon display period that has started counting at the timing of FIG. 10J has not elapsed, the variation icon VI3 is erased from the variation icon display area 208z and at the same time, the variation Processing for displaying the icon VI3 in the second variation icon display area 208t is performed. That is, the display of the variation icons VI1, VI2, and VI3 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6 (m) is the timing at which the main variation in the variation display (variation n) in FIG. 1 is started. At this timing, the main variation of the decorative symbol is started, and at the same time, display of the variation icon VI4 corresponding to the main variation is started in the variation icon display region 208z, and the pseudo variation 1 is set in the second variation icon display region 208t. The display of the corresponding variation icon VI1, the display of the variation icon VI2 corresponding to the pseudo variation 2, and the display of the variation icon VI3 corresponding to the pseudo variation 3 are continued. At the same time, the counting of the time corresponding to the present fluctuation icon display period selected as the display period of the fluctuation icon VI4 is started.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 11 (n) is the timing at which the main stop of the decorative symbol is started through reach change 1 → reach change 2 after the start of the main change shown in FIG. At this timing, the variation icon VI4 corresponding to the main variation is continuously displayed in the variation icon display region 208z, and the variation icon VI1 corresponding to the pseudo variation 1 is displayed in the second variation icon display region 208t. The display of the variation icon VI2 corresponding to 2 and the display of the variation icon VI3 corresponding to the pseudo variation 3 are continued.

  Next, the state shown in (o) of the figure is a state in which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the main stop shown in (n) of the figure. In this state, it is determined that the time corresponding to the present fluctuation icon display period has started counting at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (m), and the fluctuation icon VI4 is erased from the fluctuation icon display area 208z, and at the same time, pseudo one fluctuation. It is determined that the time corresponding to the icon display period, the pseudo 2 change icon display period, and the pseudo 3 change icon display period has elapsed, and the process of deleting the change icons VI1, VI2, and VI3 from the second change icon display area 208t is performed. ing.

  Thus, if the display of the variation icon is continued even after the temporary stop in the variation display, and the display of the variation icon is erased when each predetermined display period has elapsed, the player's interest will be increased. In some cases, the icon can be directed to a variable icon, and the player's expectation can be enhanced.

<When displaying a variation icon for symbol variation without hold>
Next, a case where a variation icon is displayed with a symbol variation with no hold will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the effect display in time series when the variation icon is displayed with the symbol variation without hold.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 0, the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, and the number of hold of the normal figure variable game is 0. At this timing, the variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started, and at the same time, the symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display in the variation icon display area 208z. Display of the fluctuation icon VI is started. At the same time, counting of the time corresponding to the period selected as the display period of the change icon (in this example, the period until the predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the change stop display) is started. .

  Next, the state shown in (b) of the figure shows that after the symbol fluctuation display shown in (a) of the figure starts, pseudo fluctuation 1 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 2 → temporary stop → pseudo fluctuation 3 → temporary stop → main fluctuation. → Reach change 1 → Reach change 2 is the state in which the change is stopped. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI corresponding to the symbol variation display is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 7C is a state before the elapse of the display period of the variable icon via the count in FIG. 9A after the stop display shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the variation icon VI corresponding to the symbol variation display is continued in the variation icon display area 208z.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which a demonstration effect is started simultaneously with the elapse of the display period of the variable icon via the count in FIG. At this timing, the variation icon display area 208z is covered with the demonstration effect, and the display of the variation icon VI is not visible. In this example, the demonstration effect is started simultaneously with the elapse of the display period of the variation icon. However, the demonstration effect may be started after the variation icon is deleted.

  Next, the state shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the operation reception of the operation means is detected during the execution of the demonstration effect in FIG. At this timing, the variation icon display area 208z covered with the demonstration effect is displayed, but the variation icon VI is deleted.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has the symbol display means (for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure fluctuation display) that can execute at least the symbol fluctuation display. Device 214), control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means, and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least display. In the gaming machine, the display means is capable of at least starting to display a variable icon (for example, a variable icon VI, VIn, VI1, etc.) when a display start condition is satisfied, and the display start The condition is satisfied at least when the symbol variation display is started, and the display means displays any one of a plurality of display end timings. The change icon can be displayed at least until the display is stopped (for example, until the display control for the actual stop is being executed), and at least one of the plurality of display end timings starts the display of the change icon. It is a timing after the end of the display of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, in the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, when a symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, when a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232). When the special figure variation game is finished, if the next special figure variation game is on hold, the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of the success / failure (for example, big hit, small hit, off) Symbol display means (for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure fluctuation display device 214) capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display to be stopped and the hold information is established, the start information is put on hold. When at least a hold storage means (for example, a hold count storage area of the RAM 308) that can be stored and a hold display condition is satisfied (for example, when one hold is consumed), an icon corresponding to the hold is displayed. And a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least, and a display control unit (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the display unit, The display control means is capable of displaying the icon as a variation icon (for example, variation icons VI, VIn, VI1, etc.) corresponding to the symbol variation display when the symbol variation display is started. The control means displays the variation icon when a display end condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined display period has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, or when a predetermined period has elapsed from the stop display of the symbol variation). It is a game stand characterized by being capable of being finished.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player can expect the variation icon, and the player's interest may be improved.

  The display means may be capable of displaying at least a variation animation indicating a variation of the variation icon.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to gather the player's attention on the variation icon, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the display control means may be capable of displaying at least the change icon as a notice (for example, a notice of the result of determining whether or not the symbol change display is appropriate).

  With such a configuration, the player can expect the advance notice by the change icon, and the player's interest may be improved.

  In addition, the display means is configured to display at least one from the start of display of the change icon to the end of display when a non-display condition is satisfied (for example, when a demonstration effect as shown in FIG. 164 (d) is started). It may be possible to at least hide the variation icon (for example, cover the variation icon with another image or object, delete the variation icon, etc.) during the period of the copy.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the display of the variation icon, and the player's interest may be improved.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least a hold icon when a display condition is established.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the game hold status visually and to improve the interest of the player.

  The display means includes a first display area for displaying the hold icon (for example, the hold icon display area 208y) and a second display area for displaying the change icon (for example, the change icon display area 208z). You may have.

  With such a configuration, the hold icon and the change icon can be easily identified, and the player may be able to grasp the game situation more accurately.

  In addition, the display control means may be configured such that the first gaming state and the second gaming state have different advantages (for example, electric support and non-electric support, probability variation state and non-probability variation state, time reduction). (State and non-short-time state) The display end time of the variable icon may be different.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the way of displaying the variable icon can be varied depending on the gaming state, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, the display control means according to the present invention may end the display of the fluctuation icon while the symbol is changing in the non-electric support state, and may end the display of the fluctuation icon while the symbol is stopped in the electric support state. Further, the display control means may control the display period of the variation icon in the non-electric support state and the electric support state to be the same. Further, the display control means may be capable of displaying the variation icon even after the corresponding symbol variation display is completed. The display control means may display a plurality of variation icons at the same time.

  In addition, the first fluctuation icon whose expected value that the player is advantageous is the first value is the second fluctuation icon whose expected value that is advantageous to the player is the second value different from the first value. The display period may be different from the icon. In addition, the first value is larger than the second value, and the first variation icon may have a longer display period than the second variation icon, may be the same, or may be shorter. There may be.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be a display in which the symbol is stopped for the stop time after the symbol is changed for the variation time. Further, the symbol variation display may be a display in which the symbol is varied during the variation time, and may not include a display in which the symbol is stopped.

  Further, at the start of the symbol variation display, the variation icon may be displayed by moving and displaying the suspension icon in the suspension icon display region to the variation icon display region. Further, when the hold icon is moved and displayed in the variable icon display area, the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed, and the hold icon and the change icon may have the same display mode. In addition, when the hold icon is moved and displayed in the variable icon display area, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed, or the hold icon and the change icon may be different from each other.

  Further, the fluctuation icon may be displayed only when displaying as a notice. The change icon may be displayed only when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. Further, the variation icon display area may be plural. Further, when the variation icon is displayed even after the symbol variation display is finished, the variation icon may be moved from the first variation icon display region to the second variation icon display region.

  Also, the timing for moving and displaying the variation icon from the first variation icon display region to the second variation icon display region may be at least one of immediately after, immediately before, before, and after the end of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the variation icon may be displayed simultaneously in the first variation icon display area and the second variation icon display area.

  Even if a plurality of variation icons (hereinafter referred to as “variation end icons”) moved and displayed from the first variation icon display region to the second variation icon display region can be simultaneously displayed in the second variation icon display region. Good. The change end icon may be a display (for example, the number is indicated by a number or a letter) indicating the number of the change icons that are moved and displayed. Further, it may be possible to display at least a change end animation indicating a change of the change end icon.

  Further, the change end icon may be displayed at least as a notice. Further, when the variation icon is moved and displayed in the second variation icon display area, the variation icon display mode may not be changed, and the variation icon and the variation end icon may have the same display mode. Further, when the variation icon is moved and displayed in the second variation icon display area, the display mode of the variation icon may be changed, and the variation icon and the variation end icon may be different from each other.

  Further, the change end icon may be displayed during the continuous notice (prefetch notice). The change end icon may be displayed so as to increase by the number of at least one hold icon up to the hold icon that triggers the prefetch notice. The change end icon may be displayed so as to increase by the number of at least one hold icon up to the hold icon that triggers the pre-reading notice. When the variable display is preferentially changed, a display that is increased by the number of the special figure 2 variable displays may be performed.

  The change end icon may be displayed so as to increase by the number of at least one hold icon up to the hold icon that triggers the pre-reading notice. When the change display changes preferentially, the change icon corresponding to the special figure 2 change display may not be displayed as the change end icon.

  In addition, when the non-display condition is satisfied, the change end icon is not displayed during at least a part of the period from the start of display of the change end icon to the end of display (for example, it may be covered with another image. It may be at least capable of being covered by an animal from the front, erased, moved out of the display area visible to the player, and the like. Further, when the non-display condition is satisfied, it may be at least possible to hide the change end icon during the entire period from the start of display of the change end icon to the end of display.

  Further, when the non-display condition is satisfied, at least a part of the change end icon may be covered from the front by a movable object in at least a part of the period from the start of display of the change end icon to the end of display. Further, when the change condition is satisfied, the change end icon may be changed at least (for example, change in display mode, change in color, change in display position, change in size).

  Further, the fluctuation icon may be displayed more easily during non-electric support than during electric support. In addition, the fluctuation icon may not be displayed during the electric support. The change end icon may be displayed more easily during non-power support than during power support. Further, the change end icon may not be displayed during the electric support.

  Also, a control means capable of at least starting control based on the input of the first signal, and after the second signal is input to the control means, the first signal is input to the control means. Control state return means capable of returning to the control state when the second signal is input, and the display means receives the second signal to the control means. If the first signal is inputted after that, even if the variation icon is displayed when the second signal is inputted to the control means, at least a display not including the variation icon is displayed. It may be possible.

  Also, a control means capable of at least starting control based on the input of the first signal, and after the second signal is input to the control means, the first signal is input to the control means. Control state return means capable of returning to the control state when the second signal is input, and the display means receives the second signal to the control means. If the first signal is input after the second signal is input to the control means, even if the change end icon is displayed, the display not including the change end icon is displayed. It may be at least displayable.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is capable of controlling the effect means and the effect means (for example, the effect device 260) including at least display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display. An effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect control means controls the display means to hold predetermined game information (for example, a special figure variable game on hold). Number) can be displayed in a first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area), and the effect control means controls the display means to display the predetermined game information in the first display. The game machine is characterized in that it can be displayed in a second display (for example, a normal hold display displayed in a normal hold display area) different from the one display.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above embodiment, the game information can be displayed in the first display and the second display, so that the player's interest may be improved. Conventionally, a player progresses a game while paying attention to display means (liquid crystal display device) arranged in the approximate center of the game board, but the hold display (LED) controlled by the main control unit is a game separated from the display means. Since it is arranged at the end of the board, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player who is paying attention to the display means to confirm the number of holds. In order to solve such a problem, there is a game machine configured to display hold on the display means, but depending on the contents of the presentation performed on the display means, the hold display may not be performed. In order to do this, the line of sight must be greatly diverted from the display means, which has diminished the fun of the game. The present invention may be able to solve such conventional problems and improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the effect control means controls the effect means to produce a specific effect (the effect of moving the second effect movable body 225 up and down as shown in FIG. 125 (a), as shown in FIG. 125 (b). Further, an effect of opening and closing the shielding device 246 to the left and right, a reach effect as shown in FIGS. 146 (e) to (f), can be executed, and the first is performed when the specific effect is executed. May be reduced (a part of the special hold display is covered, the special hold display disappears, the special hold display is reduced, or the special hold display moves).

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to confirm the game information on the second display while enjoying a specific effect.

  Also, a game board (for example, the game board 200) that forms a game area in which the game ball can roll, and a predetermined entry area (for example, the first special figure start) provided in the game board and into which the game ball can enter. Mouth 230, second special figure start opening 232) and when a predetermined start condition including entry of a game ball into the entry area is satisfied (for example, first special figure start opening 230 or second special figure start opening When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered 232, the design pattern corresponding to the determination result (for example, Special Drawing A to Special Drawing L) is stopped after starting the change of the predetermined design. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the symbol display means to be held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The number of holds, which is the number of rights for the symbol variation display, can be displayed. Hold number display means (for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220) and control means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400) capable of controlling the hold number display means. ), And the effect control means controls the display means to start the decoration symbol variation and then stops the decoration symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, symbol display) The display of the decorative pattern in the area) can be displayed, and the game information is the number of holds, the display position of the first display, the display position of the second display, and the number of holds display means Among the positions, the display position of the first display (for example, the special reserved display area 208j shown in FIG. 116C) is the display position of the decorative design change display (for example, the symbol display area shown in FIG. 116C). 208a-2 8c) is the position closest to the second position, and the display position of the second display (for example, the normal hold display area 208h shown in FIG. 116C) is the second closest position to the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. The display position of the number-of-holds display means (for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 shown in FIG. 116C) is third in the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. The distance between the display position of the first display and the display position of the second display is shorter than the distance between the display position of the second display and the position of the hold number display means. May be.

  With such a configuration, since the first display is close to the decorative symbol variation display, there is a case where the number of holds can be confirmed by visually recognizing the first display without greatly diverting the line of sight from the decorative symbol variation display. is there. In addition, since the display positions of the first display and the second display are close, even if the first display becomes difficult to visually recognize, the number of holds can be confirmed by visually recognizing the second display without greatly deviating the line of sight. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of controlling the display means to display the first display and the second display at the same time.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to confirm the game information on the other display even if the visibility of one is reduced.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display on the same display means.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily move the line of sight to the other display even if the visibility of one of the players decreases.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the special hold display is larger than (1) the normal hold display, and (2) the normal hold display. (3) Hide at least a part of the decorative pattern, (4) It is more likely to be harder to see than normal hold display, (5) Easier to pre-read notification than normal hold display Or any of them.

  In addition, the switching between the normal hold display and the special hold display is performed together with the change of the production mode every predetermined number of fluctuations. However, it may be performed when other conditions are satisfied. , When starting a moving object effect, when ending a moving object effect, when a big hit, when a gaming state changes, when returning after turning off the power, a player operates a predetermined operating means In this case, it may be a case where an operating means that can be operated only by a game shop clerk is operated.

  The effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display at the same time. In this case, since the first display and the second display are displayed at the same time, it is possible to make it easier for the player to convey the game information and to improve the interest of the player. In addition, since the first display and the second display are performed by the control by the effect control means, the display timing can be easily adjusted and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first display may be larger than the second display, and the possibility that the second game information different from the game information is notified may be higher than the second display. In addition, the first display may be difficult to visually recognize when at least a part is shielded by a specific effect, and is difficult to visually recognize by shielding at least a part of the specific effect. It may be a thing. In addition, the first display may be able to be displayed in all the plurality of effect modes, or may be displayed only in one effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. Further, the first display may be displayed in front of the symbol variation display or the notice display.

  The first display may be one in which at least one of the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold becomes difficult to visually recognize. The first display may be such that only the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold among the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold may be difficult to visually recognize. The first display may be such that only the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold out of the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold may be difficult to view. The first display may be such that the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are always difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, the second display may not notify the second game information. Further, the second game information may be reserved pre-reading information, or may be advance notice information of symbol variation display. Further, the second display may not be shielded by a specific effect.

  The first display may be an animation display, and the second display may not be an animation display. In addition, one of the first display and the second display may have one possibility that at least a part is shielded by the game ball than the other. Moreover, the other of the first display and the second display may not be shielded by the game ball. In addition, the first display may be displayed in a reduced direction different from the direction in which the second display decreases when the number of holds decreases, and the second display is displayed when the number of holds decreases. The decrease display may be performed in the same direction as the decrease display direction. In addition, the first display and the second display may be displayed so as to decrease toward the specific point when the number of holdings decreases, and one of the first display and the second display is The display related to the symbol variation display may be performed.

  In addition, during a specific period, the first display may be difficult for the player to see and the second display may not be difficult for the player to view, and the reach effect, the jackpot effect, the short time effect, the moving object operation effect It may be during any production period. In addition, the game information may be any of the number of jackpots, the number of profits obtained during one jackpot, or a plurality of jackpots or jackpot games.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display. The display means includes a first display means and a second display means, wherein the first display is displayed by the first display means and the second display is displayed by the second display means. There may be. Further, the first display means may be an image display device, and the second display means may be a light emitting display device.

  Further, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the effect mode is shifted to one of the plurality of effect modes, and the second display is the first number of effect modes among the plurality of effect modes. The first display can be displayed in a second number of production modes less than the first number or more than the first number or the same as the first number. There may be.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is capable of controlling the effect means and the effect means (for example, the effect device 260) including at least display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display. An effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect control means controls the display means to hold predetermined game information (for example, a special figure variable game on hold). Number) can be displayed in a first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area), and the effect control means controls the display means to display the predetermined game information in the first display. The display control means can display a second display different from the first display (for example, the normal hold display displayed in the normal hold display area), and the effect control means can display the predetermined condition (for example, FIG. 117 ( a), (b Change from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one of mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode) as shown in FIG. It is a game table characterized by being possible.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game by either the first display or the second display, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are cases where it is possible.

  Also, a game board (for example, the game board 200) that forms a game area in which the game ball can roll, and a predetermined entry area (for example, the first special figure start) provided in the game board and into which the game ball can enter. Mouth 230, second special figure start opening 232) and when a predetermined start condition including entry of a game ball into the entry area is satisfied (for example, first special figure start opening 230 or second special figure start opening When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered 232, the design pattern corresponding to the determination result (for example, Special Drawing A to Special Drawing L) is stopped after starting the change of the predetermined design. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the symbol display means to be held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The number of holds, which is the number of rights for the symbol variation display, can be displayed. Hold number display means (for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220) and control means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400) capable of controlling the hold number display means. ), And the effect control means controls the display means to start the decoration symbol variation and then stops the decoration symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, symbol display) The display of the decorative symbols performed in the area) can be displayed, and the game information may be the number of reservations.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game due to a difference in the display of the number of holds, and the player's interest may be improved.

  The display position of the first display overlaps at least partly with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display, and the display position of the second display overlaps with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. It may not be.

  With such a configuration, in the first display, the number-of-holds display can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, and the player's discomfort due to the losing design stop can be reduced, and the feeling of the next design fluctuation is felt. May be able to be switched. In the second display, the player's consciousness may be directed to the decorative design.

  The first display may have a larger display area than the second display.

  With such a configuration, the first display can make the hold number display more conspicuous than the second display, so it can reduce the player's discomfort due to loss of symbol stop, and against the next symbol variation Sometimes you can change your mind.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display on the same display means.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily move the line of sight to the other display even if the visibility of one of the players decreases.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the first display may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the decorative design. It may be configured. Further, a special hold display may be displayed during non-electric support to cover the decorative symbol, and a normal hold display may be displayed during electric support to not cover the decorative symbol. Further, the reserved display for special figure 1 may not cover the decorative symbol, and the reserved display for special figure 2 may cover the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to a result of the determination of success / failure after starting a variation of a predetermined symbol, and a predetermined hold A holding number display means capable of displaying a holding number, which is the number of rights to perform the variable display on the symbol display means held when a condition is satisfied, a control means capable of controlling the holding number display means, and a predetermined Display means capable of executing the display, and display control means capable of controlling the display means, wherein the display control means controls the display means to start the variation of the decorative design. The decorative design variation display can be executed to stop and display the decorative design corresponding to the display, and the display control means controls the display means to display the first display indicating the number of reservations and the second indicating the number of reservations. Can be displayed The display control means can change the display from one of the first display and the second display to the other when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the first display The visibility of at least a part of the variable display may be reduced.

  In this case, the player can recognize that the game has changed due to the difference in the visibility of the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, in the first display, the display of the number of reservations can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, the player's discomfort due to the stop of the lost design can be reduced, and the feeling can be switched for the next design variation. There is a case. In the second display, the player's consciousness may be directed to the decorative design.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is configured such that, when the success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) that can execute at least determination of success / failure and the symbol variation condition are satisfied. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing the variation. When a hold storage condition is established, a hold storage means (for example, RAM 308) that can store at least start information as a hold, and when a hold display condition is established, an icon corresponding to the hold (eg, a hold icon) Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can be displayed at least as a hold icon displayed in the special hold display area) and the display means. And a display control means that can be controlled (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), wherein the display control means displays the icon in accordance with the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display is started. Can be displayed as a variation icon corresponding to (for example, a variation icon displayed in the special region variation display area), and the display control means includes the first variation icon including the variation icon when a predetermined condition is satisfied A gaming machine characterized in that the display can be changed from one of the display and the second display not including the variation icon to the other.

In the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, the player can recognize that the game has changed depending on the presence or absence of the change icon together with the number of holds, and may be able to improve the interest of the player. Further, there are cases where the game is sharpened by changing the display indicating the number of holds. In addition, since the variation icon is related to the symbol variation display, when the variation icon is displayed, the player can predict the content of the symbol variation display with the content of the variation icon, and the variation icon is displayed. If not, the player may be able to concentrate by the symbol variation display.

Further, the display control means is capable of executing at least a predetermined notice when the notice condition is satisfied, and the display control means is capable of displaying the variable icon as the notice. Also good.

  With such a configuration, the value of the variable icon can be increased and the player's interest can be improved in some cases.

  In addition, when the display changes from the second display to the first display, the number of the hold icon and the variation icon combined is the same in the second display and the first display. Also good.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the player can have an illusion as if the holding is not reduced, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the display control means can control the display means to display any one of a plurality of background effects including at least a first background effect and a second background effect behind the decorative symbol variable display. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the background effect is switched from the first background effect to the second background effect.

  With such a configuration, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the background effect has changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

  Further, the change icon may end display before the symbol change display ends.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the player's consciousness can be directed to the decorative symbol variation display by ending the fourth display first.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the predetermined condition is established when the variation display of the decorative symbol shifts to the reach effect. Alternatively, it may be established when the decorative symbol variation display shifts from the reach effect to the stop display. Further, a predetermined condition may be established when a big win is won during the display of one of the first display and the second display and the big win ends. Further, the control means can control the gaming state to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the first gaming state and the first gaming state have different degrees of advantage. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

In addition, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect (for example, special symbol A to special symbol L) corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure after starting the variation of the predetermined symbol is displayed. The right to perform the variable display by the executable symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the symbol display means held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The holding number display means (for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220) that can display the holding number that is the number of the holdings, and the control means that can control the holding number display means (for example, main A control unit 300), display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display, and display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the display means. The display control means is the table It is possible to execute a decorative symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, a decorative symbol variation display performed in the symbol display area) after controlling the means and starting the variation of the decorative symbol. The display control means controls the display means to display a first display indicating the number of holds (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area) and a second display indicating the number of holds (for example, A normal hold display displayed in the normal hold display area can be displayed, and the display control means can display the mode A (together as shown in FIGS. 117A and 117B) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The display can be changed from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one mode to the other in mode B (princess mode), and the first display Is the same number of the third hold Including a display (for example, a hold icon displayed in the special hold display area), and a fourth display (for example, a change icon displayed in the special figure changing display area) related to the decorative symbol change display being displayed. It may be included separately from the three displays.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the change has occurred in the game depending on the presence or absence of the fourth display together with the number of holds, and may be able to improve the interest of the player. Further, there are cases where the game is sharpened by changing the display indicating the number of holds. In addition, since the fourth display is related to the decorative symbol variation display, when the fourth display is displayed, the player may expect the content of the decorative symbol variation display based on the content of the fourth display. Yes, when the fourth display is not displayed, the player may be able to concentrate by the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is capable of controlling the effect means and the effect means (for example, the effect device 260) including at least display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display. An effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect control means controls the display means to hold predetermined game information (for example, a special figure variable game on hold). Number) can be displayed in a first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area), and the effect control means controls the display means to display the predetermined game information in the first display. The display control means can display a second display different from the first display (for example, the normal hold display displayed in the normal hold display area), and the effect control means can display the predetermined condition (for example, FIG. 117 ( a), (b Change from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one of mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode) as shown in FIG. The production control means is capable of displaying at least a prefetch notice on the display means when the prefetch notice condition is satisfied, and the production control means is configured to display the first display. The game machine is characterized in that the pre-reading notice can be executed.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game by either the first display or the second display, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are cases where it is possible.

  Also, a game board (for example, the game board 200) that forms a game area in which the game ball can roll, and a predetermined entry area (for example, the first special figure start) provided in the game board and into which the game ball can enter. Mouth 230, second special figure start opening 232) and when a predetermined start condition including entry of a game ball into the entry area is satisfied (for example, first special figure start opening 230 or second special figure start opening When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered 232, the design pattern corresponding to the determination result (for example, Special Drawing A to Special Drawing L) is stopped after starting the change of the predetermined design. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the symbol display means to be held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The number of holds, which is the number of rights for the symbol variation display, can be displayed. Hold number display means (for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220) and control means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400) capable of controlling the hold number display means. ), And the effect control means controls the display means to start the decoration symbol variation and then stops the decoration symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, symbol display) The display of the decorative symbols performed in the area) can be displayed, and the game information may be the number of reservations.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game due to a difference in the display of the number of holds, and the player's interest may be improved.

  The display position of the first display overlaps at least partly with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display, and the display position of the second display overlaps with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. It may not be.

  With such a configuration, in the first display, the number-of-holds display can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, and the player's discomfort due to the losing design stop can be reduced, and the feeling of the next design fluctuation is felt. May be able to be switched. In the second display, the player's consciousness may be directed to the decorative design.

  The first display may have a larger display area than the second display.

  With such a configuration, the first display can make the hold number display more conspicuous than the second display, so it can reduce the player's discomfort due to loss of symbol stop, and against the next symbol variation Sometimes you can change your mind.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display on the same display means.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily move the line of sight to the other display even if the visibility of one of the players decreases.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, a plurality of game balls enter the start area within a predetermined time and the game balls enter. Even when the corresponding notice is given, the notice may be displayed in the second display without specifying the order in which the reserved rights subject to the notice are used.

  In addition, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect (for example, special symbol A to special symbol L) corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure after starting the variation of the predetermined symbol is displayed. The right to perform the variable display by the executable symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the symbol display means held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The holding number display means (for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220) that can display the holding number that is the number of the holdings, and the control means that can control the holding number display means (for example, main A control unit 300), display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display, and display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the display means. The display control means is the table Control means can execute a notice about the result of the determination of success / failure before the symbol mode by the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the display control unit controls the display unit to decorate A decorative symbol variation display (for example, a decorative symbol variation display performed in a symbol display area) for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect after execution of a symbol variation can be executed, and the display control means , A first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in the special hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 119 (a)) and a second display (a special display) showing the hold number by controlling the display means. For example, a special hold display displayed in the special hold display area 208h shown in FIG. 119 (b) can be displayed, and the display control means can display a predetermined condition (for example, FIG. 117 (a), (b ) As shown, the display can be changed from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one of mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode). And the first display can include a notice display indicating the notice, and the second display can include a notice display indicating the notice, and the first display Includes the same number of third displays (for example, a hold icon displayed in the special hold display area), and the first display indicates the digestion order of the held rights to be subject to the advance notice. The notice display can be displayed specifically (for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), an image simulating a snowman is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3 of the special figure hold display area 208j). The second display includes the notice display. In such a case, the notice display can be displayed without specifying the digest order of the reserved rights that are the subject of the notice (for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), a snowman is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208m. A hold icon in which a number indicating the number of hold of the special figure variable game is superimposed may be displayed on the image imitating the image).

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game depending on whether or not the pre-order pending digestion order is specified, and the player's interest may be improved. Further, in the second display, since the display is performed without specifying the digest order of the pre-read hold, the player can concentrate on the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest may be improved. Further, in the first display, the digestion order of the pre-read hold is specified and displayed, so that the player can expect the specified hold decoration pattern change display, and the player's game interest can be improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  The second display may include characters indicating the number of reservations.

  With such a configuration, in the second display, the number of holds is displayed, so that the player can expect the decorative display variation display of the specified hold and improve the interest of the player's game. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the display area of the second display may be smaller than that of the first display.

  With such a configuration, since the second display is small, the player can concentrate on the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest may be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the embodiment includes a start information storage unit (for example, RAM 308) capable of storing start information (for example, a random value) generated based on a game ball entering the start area, and the start The start / failure determination means (for example, special determination / determination means for deriving the determination result) by acquiring start information stored in the information storage means, making a determination of success / failure based on the acquired start information and a gaming state when the start information is acquired. FIG. 1 related lottery process, special figure 2 related lottery process) and symbol variation display that stops and displays the symbol mode (for example, special diagram A to special diagram L) corresponding to the determination result of the success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed. Symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214), and a game state control for controlling to a special game state after a specific symbol form is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means Stage (for example, special figure 1 state update process, special figure 2 state update process), prefetching means (for example, prefetching process) capable of prefetching start information stored in the start information storage means, and variation of decoration pattern Decorative symbol display means (for example, decorative symbol display) capable of executing decorative symbol variation display (for example, variation variation of the decorative symbol performed in the symbol display area) for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect after starting Device 208) and an effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the decorative symbol display means, wherein the effect control means is stored in the start information storage means. Prior notice of whether or not the success / failure determination means derives a specific correct / failure determination result corresponding to the prefetching result of the prefetching means before execution of the symbol variation display based on the stored start information The prefetching means can obtain a first pass / fail type (for example, the pass / fail type information in FIG. 107 shown in FIG. 107 (b)) and a second pass / fail type as the prefetch result of the start information. (For example, the success / failure type information of the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 107 (b)) can be derived, and the effect control means has the prefetch result obtained by prefetching the start-up information by the prefetch means as the first success / failure type. In some cases, it is possible to execute a first notice that suggests the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the starting information, and the prefetching result obtained by prefetching the starting information by the prefetching means is the second failure type. In this case, it is possible to execute a second notice that is not related to the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the starting information (for example, in the case of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), “1 + SP Reach A ” In the case of Special Figure 2, the “thunder” hold icon shown in FIG. 115 (a) is displayed, and the jackpot is confirmed. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above embodiment, the first notice and the second notice can be notified according to the type of success / failure, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

  Further, the number of the first notices that can be selected by the effect control means may be larger than the number of the second notices.

  With such a configuration, since many first notices indicating the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information are performed, the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  Further, the success / failure determination means can execute the determination of success / failure based on the acquired start information and a gaming state when the start information is acquired, and the first success / failure type (for example, big hit) is the start start Regardless of the gaming state when the information is acquired by the success / failure determination means, the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means becomes the first game result (for example, big hit), and the second success / failure type (for example, high-precision time big hit) In the case of low probable time, the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means is the first game result or the second game result (for example, missed) according to the game state when the start / failure determination means acquires the start information. When the prefetching result of the prefetching means is the second type of success / failure and the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means is likely to be the second game result, It may be capable of executing a second notice informing.

  With such a configuration, prefetching notices that are not related to the content of the change are performed when the time is not accurate, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The game control means may be in any one of a plurality of game states including at least a first state (for example, a non-probability change state) and a second state (for example, a probability change state) more advantageous than the first state. The gaming state can be controlled, and the second winning / failing type (for example, the high-accuracy time big hit and the low-probability time lag) is the gaming state when the winning determination means acquires the starting information. In this case, the first game result may be obtained, and the second game result may be obtained when the game state is the second state.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game table can be enhanced.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the prefetching unit derives a third success / failure type (big hit) as a prefetching result of the start information. The notice notification based on the third failure type may include a notice notice having a reliability of 100%. In the case of the first success / failure type, a notice is made based on the variation type, and in the case of the second success / failure type, a notice is made based on the symbol type, and the variation type may be larger than the symbol type. In addition, the first notice notification may be able to notify the notice of the number of pseudo-reams.

  Further, when the gaming state changes according to the number of times of change, the pre-reading notice may be prohibited for a predetermined period before the gaming state changes. In addition, when the gaming state changes according to the number of times of change, pre-reading notification corresponding to the changed gaming state may be performed for the starting information that changes after the gaming state changes.

  Further, only non-electric support may be prefetched only for special figure 1, and special support may be prefetched only for special figure 2. Further, in the case of the second winning / failing type, the winning symbol, the losing symbol, and the winning variation type may be transmitted to the sub. Also, in the case of big hit with high probability and out of low probability, only the big hit variation type may be transmitted to the sub.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment can determine whether or not the game ball can be determined on the condition that the game ball has entered the start area (for example, the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232). If the determination means (for example, special figure 1 related lottery process, special figure 2 related lottery process) and the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means are a specific success / failure determination result (for example, a big hit), A second control state (for example, a probable change) having a second advantage that differs from the first advantage from a first control state (for example, a non-probability variable state) in which the advantage is a first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, special figure 1 state update process, special figure 2 state update process), a predetermined closed state, and a predetermined game ball winning that is easier than the closed state. Open / closed state can be changed from one of the open states to the other Variable winning means (for example, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235) and an abnormality determining means (for example, updating the winning opening counter shown in FIG. 105) that determines an abnormality when a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. Processing) and a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker, a lamp) capable of performing a predetermined notification, wherein the second control state includes the variable prize winning means Satisfaction of at least one of the following conditions: elapse of a first time (for example, maximum opening time) from entering a predetermined open state or entry of a first number (for example, maximum number of balls) of game balls to the variable winning means Including a jackpot gaming state (for example, jackpot game) in which a round game state in which the variable winning means is set to the predetermined closed state is performed by a second number (for example, 16, 4, 2), The notification means is When a game ball exceeding the first number enters the variable winning means during the und gaming state, a first notification (for example, over winning notification) is performed, and the abnormality determination means The gaming machine is characterized in that when a game ball that has entered the variable winning means reaches a third number (for example, the abnormality determination number shown in FIG. 99 (a)), it is determined as abnormal.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, there is a case where a normal player who happens to win excessively during one round does not feel uncomfortable. Moreover, since an abnormality is not determined for each round, an unauthorized person may be alerted.

  The third number may be a sum of the first number and a predetermined number.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where fraudulent acts can be prevented without causing an unpleasant feeling to a normal player who happens to be over-winned during one round.

  Moreover, the said alerting | reporting means may perform the 2nd alerting | reporting (for example, output of an abnormality occurrence signal) different from said 1st alerting | reporting, when the said abnormality determination means determines with the said abnormality.

  With such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected, the abnormality can be reliably transmitted, and an optimal response may be performed.

  Further, the notification unit may give priority to the second notification over the first notification.

With such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected, the abnormality can be reliably transmitted by the second notification, and a quick response may be performed.
[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 165 to FIG. 213, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 165 to 213 are used only in the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not illustrated. 165 to 213 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the effect of changing the effect modes of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 165) by the player's operation. A card button (a CR unit), a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 167) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 166 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 165 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 167). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, and the like need to be changed for each model, and thus are provided on the back of the game board 200. The outer frame 102 is provided for common use.

  FIG. 167 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball in the ordinary figure starting port 228, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, is as follows. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 235, these general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 167, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208 e is fixed to the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 167, one 4th symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the left side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are caused to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 168) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and a signal stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, frequency, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 169 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 169 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 169 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 169 (a), five types of special figures “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 169 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a special diagram high probability normal diagram low probability state. “Special figure C” is 2R and does not shift to the time reduction state.

  “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 169 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are used as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 1, whereas “Stop Special” of Special Figure 2 is “Special Figure”. Four types of special figures, “a” to “special d”, are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where a difference can be provided between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable. In this example, the advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1. For example, the jackpot of special figure 1 includes a latent probability change (special figure C) in which almost no ball is obtained, whereas the jackpot of special figure 2 does not include a latent probability change.

  FIG. 169 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  Then, the 15R special jackpot for "Special Figure A", the 15R big jackpot for "Special Figure B", the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure a", the 8R special jackpot for "Special Figure b", and the 8R big jackpot for "Special Figure c" In the case of notification, the combination of symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped. indicate. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “latency probability change (hidden probability change)” of “special drawing C” or the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” “1-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 169 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 169 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 169 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms). At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next, in addition to being set in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  If a win is received at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234, 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 169 (d)) or the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 169 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of an incorrect selection, the flag for a normal figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 fluctuation game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes flags such as a 16R big hit flag, a 15R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on FIG. 169 (b) shows the special figure a, when the 8R big hit flag is on, and when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, when the special figure b, 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Moreover, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 16 rounds or 8 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and starts at the timing when it is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process to be performed, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed is set. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. Special figure B when figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure C when 2R big hit flag is on Special figure D when small hit flag is on Special figure D when special flag is on, Special figure when off flag is on E The 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in each mode, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to E. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. Further, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit using the table for determining whether or not is stored (see FIGS. 174 (a) to (d) to be described later), or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (see FIG. ) And (b)) are used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) shown in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (see FIGS. 176 and 177 described later).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
FIG. 172 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the starting information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a preliminary decision result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 173 (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information and the special figure 2 variable game The pre-reading control is executed to predetermine the timer number (or variation time) of the prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the prefetch control (preliminary determination process) (the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol, the special figure 2 variable game timer number (or variable time), etc.) ) Is stored in the earliest free area in the special-picture 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2 The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information, the special figure 1 variable game Pre-reading control is executed to predetermine the timer number (or variation time) before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the prefetch control (preliminary determination process) (a special figure 1 variable game stop symbol, a special figure 1 variable game timer number (or variable time), etc.) ) Is stored in the earliest free area in the special-picture 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 172, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

  FIG. 173 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 173 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 173 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special figure E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special figure E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 173 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 173 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 173 (b), “Timer 2” is stored as the timer number in the storage areas “Pending 1” and “Pending 2”, and “Timer 12” is set as the timer number in the storage area “Pending 3”. “Timer 22” is stored as the timer number in the storage area “hold 4”. Note that the variation time may be stored instead of the timer number (or together with the timer number).

  FIG. 173 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 173 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group to be described later, etc. The information may be determined in advance and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

<Various tables>
Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables illustrated in FIGS. 174 to 177 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 174 (a) to 174 (d) show an example of the determination table used for determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The determination table shown in FIGS. 174 (a) to 174 (d) includes items of “special drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 174 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of big hit is about 1/399 (= 164). / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 174 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 174 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times and the probability of big hit is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 174 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 174 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of small hit is 0.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 174 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 174 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 and the probability of big hit is 0. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 174 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  175 (a) and 175 (b) are examples of special figure determination tables used when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Show. The special figure determination table shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b) is configured with items of “result of determination / non-response”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol”. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value or special figure 1 random value. The range that can be taken by the special figure 2 random value and the special figure 1 random value in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  FIG. 175 (a) shows a special figure determination table for special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), in the special figure 1 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 25% for special figure A (15R special big hit) and 25 for special figure B (15R big hit). %, And special figure C (latency probability change) is 50%. The ratio of probability change jackpots (Special Figure A, Special Figure C) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability change probability is 75%. Moreover, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 50% for 15R and 50% for 2R.

  In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of small hit symbol of special figure 1, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, the stop symbol is special regardless of the special figure 1 random value. D is determined. Also, since there is only one type of missed symbol, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol E regardless of the special figure 1 random value. In FIG. 1, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided, and another symbol may be determined based on the result of random number lottery.

  FIG. 175 (b) shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), in the special figure 2 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for special figure a (16R special big hit), and special figure b (8R special big hit) is 5%, and special figure c (8R big hit) is 25%. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figure a, special figure b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75% as in FIG. Further, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game is 70% for 16R and 30% for 8R.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one type of losing symbol of special figure 2, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct, the stop symbol is changed to special figure d regardless of the special figure 2 random value. It is determined. In FIG. 2, it is also possible to provide a plurality of different symbols and determine another symbol based on the result of random lottery.

  FIG. 176 shows an example of the timer number selection table. The timer number selection table is used when determining the timer number in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer number selection tables are provided, and one timer number selection table is selected based on various conditions such as the gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2. The FIG. 176 shows only the timer number selection table for special figure 1 that is selected when the determination of success / failure is during non-electric support.

  In the timer number selection table shown in FIG. 176, the change timer (timer number) can be determined based on the stop symbol, the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the special figure change time determination random number value. Here, the possible values of the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in this example are 0 to 65535. When the stop symbol is special figure E, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, the timer number is determined as one of timers 3 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining special figure fluctuation time. When the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1 or more (1 to 3 in this example), the timer number is one of the timers 2 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. It is determined. In this example, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the selection probability of each variable timer differs depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1, and the distribution of the variable timers also differs. For example, timer 2 can be selected when the number of holds is 1 or more, but is not selected when the number of holds is 0.

  As will be described later, the timers 6 to 22 are variable timers (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “variable timers greater than reach”) capable of executing effects of so-called reach or higher. In the table shown in FIG. 176, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the probability that a variable timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0 (reach occurrence probability) is about 1/8 (reach occurrence probability). = 8536/65536), and the probability that a variation timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 or more is approximately 1/32 (= 2036/65536). In this way, in this example, when the number of holdings is large (for example, when the number of holdings is 1 or more), the special figure variation is activated, and the reach occurrence probability due to the deviation fluctuation becomes lower as the number of holdings is larger. Yes.

  When the stop symbol is special figure A or special figure B, the timer numbers of timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, 18 to 22 are based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings of special figure 1. Decide on either. When the stop symbol is special figure C or special figure D, the timer number is determined by the timer 10 or 14 based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 1. Even in the case where the stop symbol is special figure A to special figure D, the selection probability and distribution of each variable timer may be varied depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1.

  FIG. 177 shows an example of the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer. As shown in FIG. 177, the timers 1 to 5 have a variation time of 2000 to 10000 ms and belong to the timer group 1 (immediately a shift system). The timers 6 and 7 have a fluctuation time of 20000 to 45000 ms, and belong to the timer group 2 (expected small). The timers 8 to 10 have a fluctuating time of 15000 to 55000 ms and belong to the timer group 3 (small expectation: hit). The timers 11 to 13 have a fluctuation time of 70000 to 100000 ms and belong to the timer group 4 (expected: missed). The timers 14 and 15 have a fluctuation time of 80000 to 95000 ms and belong to the timer group 5 (expected: hit). The timers 16 and 17 have a fluctuation time of 120,000 to 150,000 ms, and belong to the timer group 6 (expected large: disappointing). The timers 18 to 22 have a fluctuation time of 105,000 to 300,000 ms and belong to the timer group 7 (expected large: hit).

  In this example, the timers 6 to 22 are reachable or more variable timers. Timers 1 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 are variation timers that are selected when the determination result of the variation is out of order, and timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, and 18 to 22 are It is a variation timer that is selected when the variation determination result is a win. When comparing variation timers that can execute the same effect type, the variation timer that is selected at the time of winning is more variable than the variation timer that is selected at the time of losing so that the winning effect can be executed after the symbol stop display. Is longer by a predetermined time (for example, 10,000 ms). For example, comparing the timer 6 and the timer 9 capable of producing a normal reach, the timer 9 selected at the time of winning has a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms longer than the timer 6 selected at the time of loss. In the special figure variable game in which the timer 6 is selected and the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the normal reach effect in the same manner is possible until immediately before the symbol stops, and in the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the symbol A predetermined winning game can be executed after the stop.

  Note that the timer number and the effect type do not necessarily correspond one-on-one, and a plurality of effect modes may be provided for one timer number. For example, when a certain timer is selected, in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, a determination based on a predetermined condition or a lottery using an effect random number is performed, You may make it select the production | presentation aspect performed with the change time of a timer from several production | presentation aspects. In addition, even if the timer numbers (variation times) are different, it may be possible to provide an effect type such that some aspects are common.

  Further, in this example, when the timers 6 to 22 are selected, an effect higher than reach is executed, but whether or not an effect higher than reach is executed does not necessarily depend on the timer number. . For example, the lottery for the timer number and the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach or higher effect may be performed independently. The lottery for determining whether or not to perform the reach or more may be performed by the main control unit 300 or the first sub-control unit 400.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182. FIG. 178 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 178 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 178 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 178 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 178 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Internal configuration of ROM 406 and VRAM 436>
FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 before image data is expanded on the VRAM 436. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the ROM 406 for storing the control program and the image data, the VRAM 436 for temporarily storing the image data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406. A VDP 434 that generates a display image using a storage area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 406 stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data including still images. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 179, there are three types of movie data, movie data MVa for movie A, movie data MVb for movie B, movie data MVc for movie C, and a plurality of such as texture data T001 and texture data T002. Are stored in the ROM 406. In addition to these data, the ROM 406 previously stores control information including the resolution (image size) of movie data. In this example, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVa is 1280 × 960, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVb is 1024 × 768, and the resolution of the movie data MVc is 800 × 600. And control information including the information indicating “” is stored in the ROM 406.

  The VRAM 436 includes a movie data expansion area MVE for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area TE for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a decorative symbol display device. A frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) are provided for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on 208. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, an image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

<Flow of image drawing processing>
FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a flow of image drawing processing when a movie A is reproduced and a texture image based on texture data is displayed superimposed on the movie A. When reproducing the movie A, the first sub-control unit 400 decompresses the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) corresponding to the movie A into a plurality of image data, and then decompresses the image data for each frame. It is transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) set in the VRAM 436. In the VRAM 436 of this example, in addition to the movie data development area MVE1, another movie data development area having a different resolution (for example, a movie data development area with a resolution of 1024 × 768 and a movie data development area with a resolution of 800 × 600). Area) is set, but the movie data development area MVE1 having the same resolution as the movie data MVa can be used, so that it is used preferentially. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a plurality of texture data stored in the ROM 406 (in this example, texture data T001 to T004 for displaying an animation in which a texture image (a hold icon or a change icon described later) rotates). Is transferred (developed) to the texture data developing area TE (not shown in FIG. 180). Here, the texture data T001 of this example corresponds to the texture image in the initial state, the texture data T002 corresponds to the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture data T003 is 180 clockwise from the initial state. Corresponding to the rotated texture image, the texture data T004 corresponds to the texture image rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state. In this example, the texture image is displayed as a moving image by animation using a plurality of texture data, but the texture image may be composed of movie data.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame buffer of the VRAM 436 based on the movie data MVa transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 and the texture data transferred to the texture data development area TE. 2 (FB2), the image data and texture data information (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP 434. At this time, 1280 × 960 is designated as an image size to be extracted from the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) to the frame buffer, and all areas of the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) can be displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 designates the entire area of the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and issues a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data MVa and an image corresponding to the texture data are displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 sequentially selects and indicates four types of texture data T001 to T004 in time series with respect to the VDP 434, thereby expressing the motion (for example, rotation) of the texture image by animation. Can do. In addition, when displaying a plurality of animations by the same texture image (for example, animations in which a plurality of held icons having the same display mode are respectively rotated), the same texture data is selected for each animation in each frame. For example, a plurality of animations can be synchronized, and a plurality of animations can be made asynchronous by selecting different texture data for each animation in each frame. In this example, four types of texture data T001 to T004 are used to express the operation of the texture image, but three or less types or five or more types of texture data may be used.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image drawing processing when a texture image that appears from outside (for example, below) the display area and gradually moves to a predetermined position in the display area is displayed. The display position of the texture image is determined based on the arrangement coordinates of the texture data that the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the VDP 434. Therefore, by setting the arrangement coordinates of the texture data to gradually different values for each frame, the movement of the texture image can be displayed by animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, in a state where two texture images are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area, the third texture image appears from below the display area, and two textures are displayed. An animation that gradually moves to the right next position of the image is displayed. In the leftmost frame in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436, the third texture image has a resolution of 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin (in this example, matches the range of the movie data MVa). Therefore, more than half of the texture image itself is arranged at a position protruding downward. Thereafter, in the middle frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a position above the position in the leftmost frame in the figure. Thereafter, in the rightmost frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a predetermined position (the same height as the other two texture images) further above the position in the center frame in the figure.

  After forming a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in each frame, the first sub-control unit 400 designates a range of resolution 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin and issues a drawing instruction. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a third texture image (increased) in a state where two texture images (the previous hold icon) are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area. A new hold icon) corresponding to the hold appears from below the display area, and an animation that gradually moves to the right adjacent position of the two texture images is displayed.

  As will be described later, in this example, a hold icon is displayed as an animation of a texture image. The number of held icons displayed is basically the same as the number of held special game games. Each hold icon can be prefetched about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, an animation that is executed when a hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), a previous hold is Due to the digestion, the order of the hold changes, and an animation executed when the hold icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left) (hereinafter, referred to as “pending icon moving animation”). ), Animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “change animation of the hold icon”), and corresponds to the change when the change starts Animation that is executed when the hold icon to be deleted is deleted Animation ”(sometimes referred to as“ animation ”), an animation that is executed when the priority icon on the priority side of the priority change machine is saved when the priority icon on the non-priority side is evacuated (hereinafter referred to as“ evacuation of the hold icon ”). There are cases where it is called “animation”). In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  Further, in this example, after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held. The variation icon and the hold icon may have the same mode. In addition, when a special figure variable game is started, a change icon displayed based on a hold corresponding to the special figure variable game is displayed as an erase animation of the hold icon displayed based on the hold corresponding to the special figure variable game. It may indicate the display of an icon. That is, an animation indicating that the role is switched from the hold icon to the change icon may be referred to as a hold icon erasure animation. In this case, the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon may be the same. That is, the erasure animation is an animation that particularly indicates that the function as the hold icon has been lost, and that indicates that the hold icon has been switched to the variable icon.

  As an animation of a mode related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is different from the hold icon display area when the hold is digested. Animation that moves to a region as a variable icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icon”) and animation that changes from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the change icon (hereinafter “hold / change” It may be called “change animation between icons”). These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently.

<Standby animation>
FIG. 182 (a) shows an example (for example, default mode) of a standby animation of a holding icon corresponding to holding of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, the texture image in the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001, the texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the clockwise rotation from the initial state corresponding to the texture data T003. The texture image rotated by 180 ° and the texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 and rotated by 270 ° clockwise from the initial state are sequentially displayed repeatedly. Each texture image has a circular outer shape with a predetermined color, and four characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle. ("Yatsushiro Shogun" pattern). Each character is arranged so that the center direction of the circle is downward. In the four texture images, only one of the characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” is in the normal position (the vertical position is correct), and in the initial texture image “ “8” is the correct position. When the standby animation shown in FIG. 182 (a) is executed, the circular hold icon is visually recognized so as to always rotate clockwise around the center of the circle.

  FIG. 182 (b) shows another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, the texture image in the initial state, the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, the texture image rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state Images are displayed in this order, and when the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image continues to be displayed. When this standby animation is executed, the circular hold icon is initially rotated only once, and thereafter, it is visually recognized to stop rotating and remain stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered part or all of the increase animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. Further, the increase animation and the standby animation are not necessarily related to each other.

  FIG. 182 (c) shows an example of the standby animation of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, four texture images have a square outer shape. When this standby animation is executed, the square hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the square. In this example, the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 have different shapes, but they may have the same shape. In addition, even a hold icon based on the same special figure may be displayed in a different manner according to a change in the gaming state. In addition, the display mode may be different even in the hold icon based on the same special figure and in the same gaming state.

  FIG. 182 (d) shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003 are repeatedly displayed in sequence. Each texture image matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani), and the states (for example, direction and pose) are different from each other. When this standby animation is executed, a predetermined character is visually recognized as walking in the left direction in the figure. Therefore, by executing this standby animation in combination with a moving animation for moving the hold icon to the left adjacent position, the player visually recognizes that the hold icon (character) moves to the left adjacent position. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, even if the same animation is executed in the standby animation and the moving animation, by changing the interval for switching the texture image in each animation, the other animation is fast-forwarded or slow-played for one animation. You may display as if.

  FIG. 182 (e) shows yet another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 are sequentially repeated. Is displayed. The texture images all match the character pattern similar to that in FIG. 182 (d), and the states (for example, orientation and pose) are different from each other. Since this standby animation uses four types of texture data as in the standby animation shown in FIGS. 182 (a), (c), etc., the standby animation shown in FIGS. 182 (a), (c), etc. It is possible to match the execution time (scale) of the animation for the period. Therefore, even if the waiting animation shown in FIG. 182 (e) is executed for some of the holding icons among the plurality of holding icons and the waiting animation shown in FIG. 182 (a) is executed for another holding icon, these waiting icons are displayed. In some cases, animations can be executed synchronously. In the standby animation shown in FIG. 182 (e), after the four texture images are sequentially displayed and the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image is displayed as in FIG. 182 (b). It may be displayed continuously.

  Here, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same before and after the display mode change. Thereby, the player can be caused to pay attention only to the display mode of the hold icon, and the player can be easily made aware of the change in the display mode.

  Moreover, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the prefetch result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be made different before and after the display mode change. In this case, the sense of incongruity may be caused by the change in the scale of the standby animation, and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the hold icon. Although the description of the standby animation has been made with the hold icon, the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to the standby icon.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 183 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 183 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

<Production control processing>
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the effect control process in step S809 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S1101 of the effect control process, the hold icon display control process is performed, and in the next step S1103, the variable icon display control process is performed. Details of the hold icon display control process and the variable icon display control process will be described later. Note that the hold icon display control process and the fluctuation icon display control process may be executed independently in FIG. 1 and FIG. You may do it. In step S1105 following step S1103, other effect control processing is performed.

<Hold icon display control process>
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the hold icon display control process. First, in step S1201 of the hold icon display control process, it is determined based on various commands such as the prefetch result information command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has increased. If it is determined that the number of holds has increased, the process proceeds to step S1203. If it is determined that the number of holds has not increased, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1203, a pending icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the hold icon change scenario lottery process, referring to a hold icon display mode lottery table (FIGS. 187 to 190) to be described later, the number of hold of the special figure variable game, the timer group corresponding to the increased hold, and the hold icon display Based on the random number value for the mode lottery, a hold icon change scenario for the increased hold is determined by lottery. The on-hold icon change scenario is information representing a change in the display mode of the on-hold icon until the on-hold is consumed. For example, “On winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: blue” is expressed. . The display mode of the hold icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. If the timer group information corresponding to the increased hold cannot be acquired (for example, when prefetching is not executed), the display mode of the hold icon until the hold is consumed is set to the default “white”. Set.

  In step S 1205 following step S 1203, the determined hold icon change scenario is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 508. Here, the scenario storage area in the RAM 508 has the same number of storage areas as the number of reserves for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 (in this example, four for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2). Have. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the first hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the data (hold icon change scenario) in the storage area corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. The data in the storage area corresponding to 2 to 4 is moved up to the storage area corresponding to 1 to 3 and stored again.

  In step S1207 subsequent to step S1205, a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (including a process of setting an increase animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. For example, when it is determined that the number of reservations has decreased based on the symbol variation start command, the prefetch result information command, etc. from the first sub-control unit 400, the process proceeds to step S1211, and it is determined that the number of reservations has not decreased. In this case, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1211, hold icon display position change processing is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds (for example, a movement animation or deletion animation of the hold icon, a movement animation between the hold / change icon, etc. is set). Process). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether a hold icon change condition is satisfied. Here, the hold icon change condition is, for example, when a special figure variation game is started, when an operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, or when a timing defined in the hold icon change scenario arrives. is there. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied, the process ends. In addition, the hold icon change condition includes the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, a specific determination result in the determination of success / failure in a change before the hold icon, or a predetermined operation by the player. May be. Further, the hold icon change condition may always be satisfied before the target hold change is performed, or vice versa. In addition, it may be uncertain whether the condition is established (undefined). Further, the hold icon change condition once determined may be changed or canceled thereafter.

  In step S1215, it is determined whether or not the timer number of the change is timer 2 (shortening change with a change time of 3000 ms). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1217, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1219. In step S1217, after the hold icon change animation 3 (animation for changing the hold icon according to the item of icon change animation 3 shown in FIG. 191 described later) is displayed, the process ends. In step S1219, the hold icon change animation 1 (described later). After displaying the animation for changing the hold icon according to the item of the icon change animation 1 shown in FIG. 191) or the hold icon fluctuation animation 2 (animation 2 for changing the hold icon according to the item of the icon change animation shown in FIG. 191 described later). The process ends.

<Variation icon display control processing>
FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the change icon display control process. First, in step S1301 of the variation icon display control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special figure variation game is started. For example, if it is the timing at which the symbol variation start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, it is determined that the special symbol variation game has been started. Otherwise, at the timing at which the special symbol variation game is started. Judge that there is no. If it is determined that it is the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is determined that it is not the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1303, a variable icon lottery process is performed. In the variation icon lottery process, for example, with reference to a variation icon display mode lottery table (FIG. 1730) to be described later, a display group immediately before the start of variation of the held icon corresponding to the started special figure variation game (immediately before the pending digestion). (If the display mode immediately before the start of the change of the hold icon is white, blue, or red, it is “ball system”, and if it is a box or a thousand box, it is “box system”). Based on the timer and the random number value for variation icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon for the started special figure variation game is determined by lottery. The display mode of the variation icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest”. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be determined in the hold icon display control process (step S1203) together with the display mode of the hold icon. In that case, the variation icon lottery process in step S1303 can be omitted. In that case, the information on the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be included in the hold icon change scenario.

  In step S1305 subsequent to step S1303, a process for displaying the change icon of the determined display mode in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a process for setting a movement animation or a change animation between the hold / change icons). Including). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. For example, if the timing is from receiving the symbol variation start command from the first sub-control unit 400 to receiving the symbol variation stop command from the first sub-control unit 400, the special symbol variation game is being executed. If not, it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1309. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed, the variable icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display interruption condition, for example, an effect that is executed on almost the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a super reach effect is started, or that a power interruption has occurred (for example, the first sub-control unit) The occurrence of power interruption was detected based on the command from 400). If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1311. If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313. Further, the effect of interrupting the display of the variation icon may be an effect that overlaps at least part or all of the target variation icon.

  In step S1311, change icon display interruption processing is performed. In the change icon display interruption process, a process for interrupting (or stopping or stopping) the display of the change icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1313. Here, when the display of the fluctuation icon corresponding to a certain special figure variable game is interrupted, the display of the fluctuation icon may be resumed during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game or may not be resumed. is there. The variation icon display interruption process includes a process of interrupting the display of a part of the variation icon being displayed. When the display of a part of the variation icon is interrupted, the variation icon may not be easily identified. Further, display may be performed such that the display area of the variable icon is enlarged or reduced as time passes. That is, the display interruption of the variation icon includes a state where the variation icon is not displayed or at least a part of the variation icon is not displayed.

  In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the display of the variation icon is interrupted. If it is determined that the display of the variation icon is suspended, the process proceeds to step S1315. If the display of the variation icon is not suspended (for example, the variation icon is being displayed), the process proceeds to step S1319. .

  In step S1315, it is determined whether the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display restart condition, for example, that the super reach effect has been completed, the power is restored from the power interruption state (for example, the power recovery is detected based on a command from the first sub-control unit 400), Etc. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1317. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1317, a variable icon display restart process is performed. In the variation icon display restart process, a process for resuming the display of the variation icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. In the variation icon display restart process, the display of the variation icon may not be resumed if a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In step S1319, it is determined whether the variable icon change condition is satisfied. Examples of the variable icon change condition include winning a predetermined random number lottery performed by the second sub-control unit 500. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1320. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1320, it is determined whether the variable icon change animation shortening condition is satisfied. As the variation icon change animation shortening condition, for example, a predetermined random number lottery performed by the second sub-control unit 500 is won, a predetermined variation time elapses, or a pass / fail determination in a variation before the variation icon is specified. There is a result of determining whether or not the game is correct or a predetermined operation by the player. If it is determined that the variable icon change animation shortening condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1321, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1322.

  In step S1321, after performing the change icon change animation 4 display process (process which displays the animation which changes a change icon according to the item of the icon change animation 4 shown in FIG. 191 mentioned later), it progresses to step S1323, and in step S1322, the change Icon change animation 1 display process (a process for displaying an animation for changing a variable icon according to an item of icon change animation 1 shown in FIG. 191 described later), or a change icon change animation 2 display process (an icon change shown in FIG. 191 described later). After performing the process of displaying an animation for changing the variation icon according to the item of animation 2, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1323, it is determined whether or not the variable icon change animation 1 or the variable icon change animation 2 is being displayed. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1325. If not, the process proceeds to step S1329. In step S1325, it is determined whether or not the shortening condition of the change icon change animation 1 or the change icon change animation 2 is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1327, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1329. In step S1327, after performing the change icon change animation 3 display process (process which displays the animation which changes a change icon according to the item of the icon change animation 3 shown in FIG. 191 mentioned later), it progresses to step S1329.

  In step S1329, it is determined whether or not a variable icon display end condition is satisfied. As the variation icon display end condition, for example, that the special figure variation game has been terminated (for example, that the symbol variation stop command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400), that a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation, etc. is there. If it is determined that the change icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1331, and if it is determined that the change icon display end condition is not satisfied, the change icon display control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control process. .

  In step S1331, change icon display end processing is performed. In the variation icon display end processing, processing for erasing the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting variation icon erasure animation) is performed.

  The variation icon may be displayed during all special figure variation games, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific performance mode is set or according to the game state). It may be displayed only during the special figure variable game (switching the possibility).

  187 to 190 show an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used in the hold icon change scenario lottery process (step S1203) of the hold icon display control process. FIG. 187 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased fourth hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 3 (when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4). ing. FIG. 188 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased third hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 2 (when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3). ing. FIG. 189 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the second hold increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 1 (when the number of holds increased from 1 to 2). ing. FIG. 190 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the first hold increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 0 (when the number of holds is increased from 0 to 1). ing.

<Pending icon display mode lottery table>
In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 187 to 190, a hold icon change scenario for the hold is determined based on the timer group to which the increased variable timer of the hold belongs and the random number value for the hold icon display mode lottery. Is done. The timer group to which the increased hold variation timer belongs is determined based on a prefetch result information command or the like from the first sub-control unit 400, and the hold icon display mode lottery random value is obtained from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. Is done. The range that the random number value for holding icon display mode lottery in this example can take is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  For example, if the number of holds increases from 3 to 4, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 1 to 5 (timer group 1, immediately off-line), as shown in FIG. In the random number range 0 to 79), a pending icon change scenario of “at the time of winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: white, after 3 change: white” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of the display, and thereafter, white is maintained until the hold is digested and the hold icon is deleted. In the display mode column of the hold icon display mode lottery table, “-” indicates that the display mode set before that is maintained. Further, in the same display mode column, the display mode immediately before digestion of the suspension is shown in gray.

  Further, for example, when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 8 to 10 (timer group 3, expectation small: hit), as shown in FIG. With the probability (random number range 56 to 60), a pending icon change scenario of “when winning: white, after 1 change: blue, after 2 change: red” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of display, changes to blue after 1 change, and changes to red after 2 changes (just before the hold is digested).

  The display mode of the hold icon in this example is “red”, “blue”, “white” from the higher reliability (big hit reliability) in the spherical hold icon display group. In the display group, they are “thousand boxes” and “boxes” in order of reliability. In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 187 to 190, the timer groups 3, 5, and 7 selected at the time of winning are more reliable than the timer groups 1, 2, 4, and 6 selected at the time of losing. It is easy to select a high display mode, and it is easy to change to a display mode with high reliability.

  Here, when referring to reliability, general reliability indicates the ratio of occurrence of a target event among multiple occurrences, but reliability in this industry is a big hit. It is an abbreviation for reliability and indicates what percentage of the abbreviation is a big hit when an effect of the same mode is executed. For example, the display mode “red” of the variation icon having a reliability of 30.3% notifies the player that the probability that the success / failure result of the variation is a big hit is 30.3%, The player is informed that the probability that the result will be out of date is 69.7%. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is notifying the jackpot reliability at the same time and notifying the reliability at the same time. In addition, the reliability is not limited to a value of 1, and may have a width, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution of the random number range in the table shown in FIG. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  As described above, there are five display modes of the hold icon in this example: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. There are eight display modes of the fluctuation icon: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, “family crest”. Among these, three types of “white”, “blue”, and “red” are common display modes for the hold icon and the change icon. Two types of “box” and “thousand box” are display modes specific to the hold icon, and five types of “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest” are specific to the change icon It is a display mode. In other words, the hold icon display mode of this example has three types of common display modes and two types of unique display modes, and the display mode of variable icons includes three types of common display modes and five types of unique display modes. There are display modes. In this example, the number of unique display modes of the variable icon (5 in this example) is larger than the number of unique display modes of the hold icon (2 in this example). The display mode of the hold icon may be a common display mode (unique display mode is 0).

  Here, referring to the default display mode in the display mode of the hold icon, 1: a hold icon that displays a hold based on the win without pre-reading at the time of winning a prize at the starting port. 2: One or both of a display mode with low jackpot reliability and a display mode with high appearance frequency among the display modes of the hold icon selected based on the prefetch result, and they are limited to one. It may be a plurality of groups. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon may be set differently for each special figure type, each gaming state, and each production state.

<Icon change animation>
FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an execution opportunity, execution probability, icon display mode change, and display mode of icon change animation. Here, the icon change animation means an animation performed to change the icon of the first display mode to the icon of the second display mode. In this icon change animation, for example, a hold icon in a first display mode (for example, display mode: white savory) is used in a second display mode (for example, display mode: blue savory) (for example, display mode: blue). Change the hold icon change animation to be changed to the hold icon or the change icon (for example, display mode: white) of the first display mode to the change icon of the second display mode (for example, display mode: blue). This includes changing icon change animations to be performed.

  Moreover, the change animation etc. which are performed in order to change the hold icon (for example, display mode: white) of a 1st display mode into the fluctuation | variation icon (for example, display mode: blue) of a 2nd display mode are included. The icon change animation may have a common mode for changing the icon display mode from the first to the second display mode and changing the icon display mode from the third to the fourth display mode. Further, conversely, a change from the first display mode to the second display mode and a change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode may be set individually. In addition, since the change animation is performed, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the hold icon. For example, although the icon change animation is performed on the first hold icon, the icon change animation is displayed. The display mode of the first icon may not be changed even after the end. Moreover, when it is executed, an icon change animation that always changes the display mode of the target hold icon may be configured to be executable.

  In the present embodiment, when the second condition is satisfied, the second icon change animation is executed instead of the first icon change animation. It is good also as a structure which performs a 2nd icon change animation, when conditions are satisfied and an effect lottery is won. In this case, the first icon change animation may be stopped, the icon change itself may be stopped, or the first icon change animation may be performed.

  In this example, seven types of icon change animations, icon change animations 1 to 7, are prepared, and icon change anime group 1 consisting of icon change animations 1 to 4 and icons are changed depending on the execution timing of the icon change animation. It is grouped into icon change animation group 2 consisting of change animations 5-7.

  The icon change animation 1 is an animation that starts with the start of the variation defined in the scenario as an execution opportunity, the execution probability is determined according to the pending icon change scenario, and changes the icon display mode at the time of execution. Further, the display time of the icon change animation 1 is set to 12000 ms, and during the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 to 4 shown in the item “display mode” are performed in this order.

  Icon change animation 2 is an animation that starts with the start of the variation defined in the scenario as an execution opportunity, is executed with a probability of 1/20 when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure is wrong, and does not change the icon display mode at the time of execution. It is. Further, the display time of the icon change animation 2 is set to 10000 ms, and during the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 to 4 shown in the item “display mode” are performed in this order.

  The icon change animation 3 is an animation that starts with the start of the variation defined in the scenario, the execution probability is determined according to the pending icon change scenario, and changes the icon display mode at the time of execution. Further, the display time of the icon change animation 3 is set to 3000 ms, and during the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 to 3 shown in the item “display mode” are performed in this order.

  The icon change animation 4 is an animation that starts with the start of the change defined in the scenario as an execution opportunity, the execution probability is determined according to the pending icon change scenario, and changes the icon display mode at the time of execution. Further, the display time of the icon change animation 4 is set to 3000 ms, and during the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 to 4 shown in the item “display mode” are performed in this order.

  The icon change animation 5 is started with the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 as an execution opportunity, and is executed with a probability of 1/50 when the determination result is out of order, and does not change the icon display mode at the time of execution (so-called “gasset notice”) It is. The display time of the icon change animation 5 is set to 4500 ms from the time when the chance button 136 is pressed. During the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 to 3 shown in the item “display mode” are displayed in this order. Is what you do.

  The icon change animation 6 is an animation that starts when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as an execution opportunity, the execution probability is determined according to the pending icon change scenario, and changes the icon display mode at the time of execution. The display time of the icon change animation 6 is set to 4500 ms from the time when the chance button 136 is pressed, and during the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 to 3 shown in the item “display mode” are displayed in this order. Is what you do.

  The icon change animation 7 is an animation that is started when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the change is started, and the probability of execution is determined according to the pending icon change scenario, and the icon display mode is changed at the time of execution. Further, the display time of the icon change animation 7 is set to 1500 ms from the start of the fluctuation, and during the display time, the animations of the display modes 1 and 2 shown in the “display mode” item are performed in this order. is there.

  As described above, in this example, seven types of icon change animation are prepared. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and more or less may be prepared. The icon change animation is executed based on the lottery result as described above, or when a specific lottery result (for example, a loss) is derived, a predetermined effect lottery is executed and the lottery is won. You may go if you do.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Example 1-1>
FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of Example 1-1 in time series. The periods (b) to (h) in the same figure show the state during the variable period of the special figure 1 variable game. At the timing shown in FIG. 4B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, as shown in FIGS. 5B to 5C, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802. The display size is gradually enlarged and moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800. In the movement animation of the hold icon, as shown in FIGS. 5B to 5C, the hold icons 902 and 903 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 are the first and second areas. Move to each.

As described above, in the hold icon display control process shown in FIG. 185, the second sub-control unit 500 satisfies the hold icon change condition and the change timer number is the timer 2 (change fluctuation of 3000 ms change time). In this case, when the hold icon change animation 3 (icon change animation 3) is displayed, the hold icon change condition is satisfied, and the change timer number is other than the timer 2 (short change of change time of 3000 ms). The hold icon fluctuation animation 1 (icon change animation 1) or the hold icon fluctuation animation 2 (icon change animation 2) is displayed.

Here, because the hold icon change condition is satisfied when the timing defined in the hold icon change scenario has arrived, and the timer number is other than timer 2 (shortening fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms), the hold icon fluctuation animation 1 ( The case where the icon change animation 1) is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 4D shows a state in which the icon change animation 1 is started. In this icon change animation 1, as shown in FIG. 191, (display mode 1: introduction) the character falls from right above the icon → (display mode 2: turn) Jump × 5 times on the icon (loop operation) → (Display mode 3: result notification) Change the mode of the icon → (display mode 4: ending) The animation is performed in the order of disappearing characters.

  At the timings (d) to (e) in FIG. 6, according to the icon change animation 1 (display mode 1: introduction), an animation in which the character of Tono falls from directly above the hold icon 903 is performed. Here, in order to change the mode of the hold icon 903, an animation in which the character falls directly above the hold icon 903 is performed. However, when the mode of the hold icon 902 is changed, the character changes to the hold icon 903. An animation of dropping right above 902 is performed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, an animation is performed in which the character of Tono jumps five times on the hold icon 903 in accordance with the icon change animation 1 (display mode 2: turn). Subsequently, at the timing of FIG. 5G, the mode of the hold icon 903 is changed according to (display mode 3: result notification) of the icon change animation 1 (in this example, the color of the hold icon 903 is changed from white to red). (Change) animation. Here, the color of the hold icon may be changed between one frame or may be gradually changed over several frames. Moreover, the change of the mode of the hold icon is not limited to the color, and may be the type, pattern, shape, size, etc. of the hold icon (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  Finally, at the timings (g) to (h) in the same figure, according to the icon change animation 1 (display mode 4: ending), the character of Tono performs a frame-out (disappears) animation from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is going. In this example, the icon change animation 1 is performed in the period shown in (d) to (h) in the figure, and the display period is 12000 ms.

<Example 1-2>
FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect display of Example 1-2 in time series. The period of (b)-(g) of the figure has shown the state in the fluctuation period of special figure 1 variable game. At the timing shown in FIG. 4B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, as shown in FIGS. 5B to 5C, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802. The display size is gradually enlarged and moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902, 903, and 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 are the first to first as shown in FIGS. Move to each of the three areas.

As described above, in the hold icon display control process shown in FIG. 185, the second sub-control unit 500 satisfies the hold icon change condition and the change timer number is the timer 2 (change fluctuation of 3000 ms change time). In this case, when the hold icon change animation 3 (icon change animation 3) is displayed, the hold icon change condition is satisfied, and the change timer number is other than the timer 2 (short change of change time of 3000 ms). The hold icon fluctuation animation 1 (icon change animation 1) or the hold icon fluctuation animation 2 (icon change animation 2) is displayed.

Here, because the hold icon change condition is satisfied when the timing specified in the hold icon change scenario has arrived, and the timer number is timer 2 (short fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 3000 ms), the hold icon change animation 3 (icon A case where the changed animation 3) is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 4D shows a state in which the icon change animation 3 is started. In this icon change animation 1, as shown in FIG. 191, (display mode 1: introduction) the character falls from just above the icon → (display mode 2: result notification) icon mode changes → (display mode 3: ending) ) Animate in the order that the character disappears. The icon change animation 3 (display mode 1: introduction) is the same animation as the icon change animation 1 (display mode 1: introduction), and the icon change animation 3 (display mode 2: result notification). Is an animation common to the above-described icon change animation 1 (display mode 3: result notification), and (display mode 3: ending) of icon change animation 3 is the same as the above-described icon change animation 1 (display mode 4: (Ending) and the same animation.

  At the timings (d) to (e) in FIG. 6, according to the icon change animation 3 (display mode 1: introduction), an animation in which the character of Tono falls from directly above the hold icon 903 is performed. Here, in order to change the mode of the hold icon 903, an animation in which the character falls directly above the hold icon 903 is performed. However, when the mode of the hold icons 902 and 904 is changed, the character An animation of dropping right above the hold icons 902 and 904 is performed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mode of the hold icon 903 is changed according to (display mode 2: result notification) of the icon change animation 3 (in this example, the color of the hold icon 903 is changed from white to red). (Change) animation. Finally, at the timings (f) to (g) in the same figure, according to the icon change animation 3 (display mode 3: ending), the character of Tono performs a frame-out (disappears) animation from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is going. In this example, the icon change animation 3 is performed in the period shown in FIGS. 4D to 4G, and the display period is 3000 ms.

  FIG. 194 is a diagram for comparing and explaining the display times of the icon change animations 1 to 3. As described above, the icon change animation 3 (display mode 1: introduction) is the same animation as the icon change animation 1 (display mode 1: introduction), and the icon change animation 3 (display mode 2: result). (Notification) is an animation common to the above-described icon change animation 1 (display mode 3: result notification), and (display mode 3: ending) of icon change animation 3 is the (display mode) of icon change animation 1 described above. 4: Ending).

  The display time 3000 ms for the icon change animation 3 is shorter than the display time 12000 ms for the icon change animation 1 by a display time 9000 ms corresponding to (display mode: turn). That is, in the icon change animation 3, the display time is shortened by not using the moving image corresponding to (display mode: turn) while diverting the moving image common to the icon changing animation 1. In the (display mode: turn) animation, a moving image with a display time of 9000 ms may be executed once, or a moving image with a display time of 1000 ms may be executed nine times.

  The display mode of the icon change animation 2 is the same as the display mode of the icon change animation 3. However, by shortening the time of the moving image corresponding to (display mode: turn) by 2000 ms (loop operation is performed five times). The display time is shortened by reducing the number to 4 times.

  Here, in the example shown in Example 1-2, the icon change animation shown in Example 1-1 is based on the fact that the second condition (start of fluctuation in a state where four holds are stored) is established. In other words, it can be said that icon change animation 3 (second hold animation) is executed instead of 1 (first hold animation). For the icon change animation 1, the second condition is set after the execution condition of the icon change animation 1 (winning the pre-reading notice execution lottery) is established and before the execution opportunity of the icon change animation 1. In other words, the execution is stopped and the second icon change animation 2 is executed instead.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the animation is displayed in a shortened manner, the content in which the display mode of the hold icon after the change is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a second hold animation shorter than the first hold animation is performed when the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon. One hold icon may be changed to a third hold icon. In this case, the second hold icon and the third hold icon only need to have different display modes. Furthermore, when the hold animation is not performed, the first hold icon may be changed to the fourth hold icon.

  Alternatively, a plurality of hold animations shorter than the first hold animation may be provided, and the execution conditions may be made different, or a lottery may be performed when the same execution condition is established to determine which one to execute. Further, depending on the hold animation that is executed, the hold icons that are changed during the execution may be different. As described above, the hold icon can indicate the jackpot reliability of the target hold (design variation display) depending on the display mode. The reliability to notify the player can be changed by switching the type of the hold icon after the change according to the type of the hold animation to be executed. For example, in this embodiment, when executing a hold animation that is not shortened, when the hold icon is changed from white to red, the hold animation is shortened or the display of the hold animation is stopped. Alternatively, the hold icon may be changed from white to blue. That is, when an operation different from the schedule is performed, the player may be notified of a reliability lower than the reliability that was originally scheduled to be notified. On the contrary, the player may be notified of a higher reliability than the reliability originally scheduled to be notified.

<Example 1-3>
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of effect display of Example 1-3 in time series. The periods (b) to (g) in the same figure show the state during the variable period of the special figure 2 variable game. At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the special figure 2 display device 214 starts the variable display of the special figure 2. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the holding number of the special figure 2 has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802 as shown in FIGS. The display size is gradually enlarged and moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902, 903, and 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 are the first to first as shown in FIGS. Move to each of the three areas.

  Here, a case will be described in which the hold icon change condition is satisfied when the timing defined in the hold icon change scenario has arrived, and the icon change animation 4 is displayed. FIG. 4D shows a state in which the icon change animation 4 is started. In this icon change animation 4, as shown in FIG. 191, the (display mode 1: introduction) character falls from directly above the icon display area → (display mode 2: beat) displays smoke that makes it difficult to see all icons → (Display mode 3: Result notification) While displaying smoke, the display mode of the target icon is changed. → (Display mode 4: ending) The animation is performed in the order of extinguishing smoke and making all icons visible.

  At the timings (d) to (e) in FIG. 6, according to the icon change animation 4 (display mode 1: introduction), an animation in which the character of Tono falls from directly above the hold icon display area 900 is performed. Subsequently, at the timings (e) to (f) in the same figure, according to the icon change animation 4 (display mode 2: beat), an animation for displaying smoke that makes all the held icons 902 to 904 difficult to view is performed. Yes. That is, the icon change animation 4 is different from the icon change animation 3 in that an animation that may change the display mode is performed on a plurality of held icons. Further, since the number of target hold icons is different, the effect of hiding the hold icon (in this example, displaying smoke) is also different from the icon change animation 3.

  In addition, as described above, the icon change animation 4 has an effect different from that of the icon change animation 3, but the other display is the same. Therefore, the icon change animation 4 has the icon change anime 3 + smoke effect animation. You can also take this view.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 8F, the display mode of the target icon (in this example, the color of the hold icon 903) is displayed during the display of the smoke in accordance with (display mode 3: result notification) of the icon change animation 4. And an animation for changing the pattern of the hold icon 904. In addition, when changing the display mode of the hold icons 903 and 904, the display mode of other hold icons 902 may be changed.

  Finally, at the timings (f) to (g) in the figure, in accordance with the icon change animation 4 (display mode 3: ending), animation is performed so that all the icons can be visually recognized by removing smoke. In this example, the icon change animation 4 is performed in the period shown in (d) to (g) of the figure, and the display period is 3000 ms. In this example, even when the number of holds that is the trigger for execution is one, it is possible to change the display mode of a plurality of hold icons, and it may be possible to perform an effect display that attracts the player's interest.

<Example 1-4>
FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of Example 1-4 in time series. FIG. 5A shows a state in which the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 3. In addition, a hold icon (in this example, an image simulating the chance button 136) 903 for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900.

  FIGS. 9B to 9D show examples of effect display when the chance button 136 is pressed. Here, a case will be described in which the hold icon change condition is satisfied by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 and the icon change animation 6 is displayed.

  FIG. 6B shows a state in which the icon change animation 6 is started. In this icon change animation 6, as shown in FIG. 191, (display mode 1: beat) based on the detection of pressing the chance button, a smoke image is displayed at the position of the hold icon, making it difficult to see the hold icon. → (Display mode 2: Change mode) Change the mode of the target hold icon while it is difficult to view → (Display mode 3: Result notification) Animation in order of smoke clear and the hold icon visible I do.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, in accordance with the icon change animation 6 (display mode 1: introduction), a smoke image is displayed at the position of the hold icon 903 based on the detection of pressing the chance button 136, and the hold icon 903 is visually recognized. Animation that makes it difficult. Subsequently, at the timing of FIG. 5C, according to (display mode 2: mode change) of the icon change animation 6, the mode of the target hold icon 903 (in this example, the hold icon 903) while it is difficult to visually recognize. The color is changed.

  Finally, at the timing of FIG. 6D, according to the icon change animation 6 (display mode 3: result notification), an animation is performed in which the smoke is clear and the hold icon 903 is visible. In this example, the icon change animation 6 is performed in the period shown in FIGS. 4B to 4D, and the display period is 4500 ms. Therefore, in order to grasp the result of prefetching by changing the mode of the hold icon, a time of 4500 ms is required after the pressing operation of the chance button 136.

  On the other hand, (b ′) to (d ′) of the same figure are examples of effect display when the chance button 136 is not pressed. In this case, the hold icon change condition is satisfied when there is no chance button accepting operation and the change starts, and the icon change animation 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 5B ′ shows a state in which the icon change animation 7 is started. In this icon change animation 7, as shown in FIG. 191, the target icon is displayed as an image imitating a chance button (display mode 1: introduction) → (display mode 2: mode change). At the same time, the animation is performed in the order of changing the image of the hold icon.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B ′, according to the icon change animation 7 (display mode 1: introduction), an animation for displaying the target hold icon 901 with an image imitating the chance button 136 is performed. Subsequently, at the timings (c ′) to (d ′) in the same figure, according to (display mode 2: mode change) of the icon change animation 7, the image of the hold icon 901 is changed with an effect based on the start of variation. An animation to do.

  In this example, the icon change animation 7 is performed during the period shown in (b ′) to (d ′) of the figure, and the display period is 1500 ms. Therefore, in order to grasp the result of the prefetching by changing the mode of the hold icon, a time of 1500 ms is required after the start of the next fluctuation.

  In this example, if the chance button is pressed, the prefetch result can be known quickly, but the reserved animation must be viewed for a long time. On the other hand, if the chance button is not pressed, the prefetch result cannot be known until the change, but the period for watching the reserved animation can be shortened. That is, the player can arbitrarily select the timing for knowing the prefetch result and the period for watching the reserved animation. In addition, it may be configured such that when the chance button is pressed, the reserved animation to be executed is shortened while the prefetch result can be known earlier.

  In this example, as described above, if the chance button is pressed, the prefetch result can be known quickly, and if not pressed, the notification of the prefetch result is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The prefetch result may be notified earlier when the chance button is not pressed than when the chance button is pressed. In addition, in this example, it takes 4500 ms if the chance button is pressed and 1500 ms if the chance button is not pressed before the hold icon displayed in the first mode is changed to the second mode. For example, a shorter hold animation may be executed when the chance button is pressed than when the chance button is not pressed.

<Example 2-1>
197 and 198 show examples of effect display in Example 2-1 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 197 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed, and a standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed.

  FIG. 197 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIGS. 197 (c) to (e) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the hold icon display area 900, an erase animation of the hold icon 901 is started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the transparency of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually increases (FIGS. 197 (c) and (d)) and eventually disappears. (FIG. 197 (e)).

  FIG. 197 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 5—decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, so that even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and the state becomes non-variable.

  FIG. 197 (g) shows a state immediately after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the non-variable state and starting the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 based on winning the special figure 1 starting port 230. Since the special figure 1 variable game starts immediately after winning the prize, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 continues to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 0 (the leftmost LED is lit immediately after winning the prize). May be) When the special figure 1 starting game 230 is won in the non-variable state and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the increase animation of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 may be omitted (shortened display).

  FIG. 197 (h) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one after the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon is started. In this increase animation of the hold icon, a hold increase target area of the hold icon display area 900 (an area where a new hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is displayed. The first area when the hold increases from 0 to 1) In FIG. 5, a hold icon 902 with high transparency (for example, 100%) is displayed, and the hold icon 902 becomes visible by gradually decreasing the transparency of the hold icon 902. The increase animation of the hold icon in this example is a mode opposite to the erasure animation (animation in which the transparency gradually increases) shown in FIGS. 197 (c) to (e). In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is also executed during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon. In particular, if the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is the same, the increase animation and the deletion animation may be displayed by reversing the reproduction order of the same animation.

  FIG. 198 (a) shows a state in which the number of suspensions in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 4. In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of three hold icons is started. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icons 903 to 905 having high transparency (for example, 100%) are displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and the transparency of the hold icons 903 to 905 is gradually lowered. The hold icons 903 to 905 appear. In this example, the execution periods of the increase animations for each of the hold icons 903 to 905 overlap. In this example, since the increase animation of the hold icon 902 has not yet ended when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 to 905 is started, the increase period of the hold icon 902 is the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 903 to 905. It overlaps with the duration of the animation. As described above, the execution periods of a plurality of increase animations (in this example, each increase animation of the hold icons 902 to 905) may overlap each other.

  FIG. 198 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon deletion animation and a hold icon movement animation are executed.

  In the hold icon erasure animation, the transparency of the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually increases as in the case of the hold icon 901 deletion animation shown in FIGS. 197 (c) to 197 (e). (Fig. 198 (c)) and finally disappear (Fig. 198 (d)).

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 903 to 905 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively (FIGS. 198 (c) and (d). )). In this example, the execution period of the hold icon movement animation overlaps with the execution period of the hold icon deletion animation. Further, the standby icon standby animation is also executed during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation and the erase animation.

  In this example, the hold icon during execution of the erase animation and the hold icon during execution of the movement animation may be displayed overlapping each other. Specifically, the hold icon 902 that is being erased from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 by the delete animation and the second area of the hold icon display area 900 are moved from the second area to the first area by the moving animation. The hold icon 903 on the way is displayed overlapping each other. Since the hold icon 902 that is the target of the deletion animation has a higher display priority than the hold icon 903 that is the target of the movement animation, the hold icon 902 is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 903. Thereby, part or all of the hold icon 903 may be blocked by the hold icon 902. However, depending on the transparency of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 903 may be visible even in an overlapping portion with the hold icon 902.

  Here, the standby animations of a plurality of hold icons (for example, four hold icons 902 to 905 shown in FIG. 198 (b) and three hold icons 903 to 905 shown in FIG. 198 (d)) are synchronized with each other. May be. Further, the standby animation of the hold icon that is executing another animation (for example, increase, movement, or deletion) may be synchronized with the standby animation of the other hold icon. The period of the standby animation of the hold icon may be maintained from a predetermined trigger (for example, power-on, previous jackpot, etc.). In this case, the cycle calculation control may be continuously performed even when the hold icon is not displayed.

<Example 2-2>
199 and 200 show examples of effect display in Example 2-2 of this embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 199 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. One hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed.

  FIG. 199 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 199 (c) to FIG. 200 (b) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the transparency of the hold icon 901 gradually increases in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 and eventually disappears. For example, the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 25% at the time shown in FIG. 199 (c), 50% at the time shown in FIG. 199 (d), and at the time shown in FIGS. 199 (e) and (f). 75%, and 100% at the time shown in FIG. 199 (g) (or the hold icon 901 itself may be deleted). In this example, when the deletion animation of the hold icon is started, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped.

  Here, at the time shown in FIG. 199 (f), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon, in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) with high transparency (for example, transparency 100%) is displayed, and the transparency of the hold icon 902 gradually increases. By lowering, the hold icon 902 becomes visible. For example, the transparency of the hold icon 902 is 75% at the time shown in FIG. 199 (f), 50% at the time shown in FIG. 199 (g), and 25% at the time shown in FIG. 199 (h). 200% at the time shown in FIG. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped until the increase animation of the hold icon ends.

  In this example, the hold icon 901 to be deleted and the hold icon 902 to be increased have the same display mode “white”, and the delete animation of the hold icon and the increase animation in a mode opposite to the delete animation are provided. Are executed in the same area (the first area of the hold icon display area 900). When the increase animation is started in the middle of the erasing animation, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases to a predetermined transparency and then gradually decreases. Note that the hold icon 901 to be deleted and the hold icon 902 to be increased do not have to be in the same display mode, and the execution period of the deletion animation of the hold icon and the execution period of the increase animation are not the same time. Also good. If the erase animation and the increase animation are started almost simultaneously and the execution periods of both animations are substantially the same, the apparent transparency of the held icon may hardly change during the execution of both animations.

  In this example, in FIGS. 199 (c) to 199 (e), the transparency of the hold icon 901 gradually increases from 0% to 75%, so that the apparent hold icon transparency also gradually increases. In FIG. 199 (f), the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 75%, but the hold icon 902 having a transparency of 75% is displayed in an overlapping manner, so the apparent transparency of the hold icon is lower than 75%. In FIG. 199 (g), the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 100%, but since the hold icon 902 having a transparency of 50% is displayed in duplicate, the apparent transparency of the hold icon is about 50%. In FIGS. 199 (h) to 200 (a), the hold icon 901 is erased, and the transparency of the hold icon 902 gradually decreases. As a result, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases during the period shown in FIGS. 199 (c) to (e), reaches 75% transparency at the time shown in FIG. 199 (e), and reaches 199 (e) to (199). In the period of FIG. 200 (a), it gradually decreases. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped during the period of FIGS. 199 (c) to 200 (a), but the standby animation may be executed.

  In this example, the erasing animation indicating that the hold is consumed and the increasing animation for canceling the erasing animation are executed in an overlapping manner. As a result, the hold icon that should have gradually faded and disappeared may gradually become darker from a certain point in time. Therefore, there is a case where an illusion can be given as if the change was made without decreasing the hold.

  In some cases, it is possible to make an illusion that the number of holdings does not increase in spite of a game ball entering the starting port.

<Example 2-3>
201 and 202 show examples of effect display in Example 2-3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 201 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white), a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani), and a hold icon 903 (display mode: blue) are displayed. The waiting animation is running. Here, in this example, there are Sabo Hani display modes such as “White Sabo Hani”, “Blue Sabo Hani”, “Red Sabo Hani” as the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon, and the Sabo Hani display mode is the same as the Spherical system. In addition, the level of reliability is represented by color (white <blue <red), and each display mode of the Sabohan system has higher reliability than the display mode of the same color sphere system.

  The Sabohani-type hold icon 902 and the ball-type hold icons 901 and 903 may have different standby animation periods (for example, the number of texture data). The kick timing of the standby animation may depend on each animation. The period of the standby animation may be synchronized between the hold icon 901 and the hold icon 903 that are the same sphere system but are different in display mode. Further, the period of the standby animation may be synchronized between the change icon 801 and the hold icons 901 and 903 of the same spherical system.

  FIG. 201 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed. In the variation icon erasing animation, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and finally disappear. In this example, before the erasing animation of the variation icon 801 is completed, the next special figure 1 variation game game is started.

  201 (c) to 201 (f) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. When the animation for moving between the hold and change icons and the animation for moving the hold icon are started, the animation for deleting the change icon is not finished. And the execution period of the animation to delete the floating icon overlap.

In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 and 903 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first and second areas, respectively. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 201 (c), since the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 has not yet ended, four icons (variation icons 801 and 802, hold icons 902 and 903) are temporarily displayed. . Thereby, since more icons than the actual number of holds can be displayed, it may be difficult for the player to specify the number of holds. Further, the icon displayed in a larger number than the actual number of reservations may be either a fluctuation icon or a reservation icon. In addition, the icons that are displayed in a number larger than the actual number of holds may be configured such that an icon having a different form from both the change icon and the hold icon is displayed. (For example, 801 in FIG. 201 (c)).
Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 201 (f), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) appears at the right end of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold increase target area from the right end (if the hold increases from 2 to 3, 3 areas (shown by broken-line rectangles in the figure) are moved by a predetermined movement distance. The moving speed of the hold icon 904 may be a constant speed or may be accelerated / decelerated in the middle. With the hold icon 904 during the increase animation, a predetermined standby animation may be executed. The standby animation at this time may not be synchronized with the standby animation of other icons.

  FIG. 201 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 6-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 3” are displayed. "Is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed. In the variation icon erasing animation, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 802, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 802 themselves gradually become smaller and finally disappear. In this example, before the erasure animation of the variation icon 802 is completed, the next special figure 1 variation game game is started. In the hold icon display area 900, the increased hold icon 904 is in the process of moving from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 toward the third area.

  FIG. 201 (h) to FIG. 202 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable game of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually enlarged. Move to display area 800. In this example, the variation icon 803 itself does not move to the variation icon display area 800 but moves around in the effect display area 208d. This moving animation is executed with a predetermined probability only when, for example, the display mode of the variation icon is a specific display mode (for example, a Sabohan display mode). In this moving animation, the variation icon 803 may overlap a part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (FIG. 201 (h), FIG. 202 (a)), or the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may move outside (FIG. 202 (b)). As described above, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is not limited to a mode in which the change icons are moved from the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800.

  In the variation icon display area 800, not the variation icon 803 but the characters “Gekiatsu” are displayed. As described above, the variation icon display area 800 does not necessarily display the variation icon to be varied.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area. In the hold icon display area 900, the increased hold icon 904 is in the process of moving from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 toward the third area. At the time shown in FIG. 201 (h), the hold increase target area moves from the third area to the second area based on the fact that the hold has been digested, and the target position in the moving animation of the hold icon 904 also changes from the third area. Move to 2 areas. As a result, the movement distance of the hold icon 904 increases from L1 to L2, and the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon 904 becomes longer. Thus, in this example, the movement distance and execution time in the movement animation of the hold icon may change during the execution of the movement animation. In addition, when the suspension of the special figure 2 on the priority change side interrupts, the movement distance and execution time of the movement animation of the suspension icon may be shortened.

  Further, in this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 904 that has reached the target position is synchronized with the cycle of the standby animation of another icon (eg, the hold icon 903) at some timing (eg, the timing when the movement animation ends). It may also be set (FIG. 202 (b)).

<Example 2-4>
203 and 204 show examples of effect display in Example 2-4 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 203 (a) shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 0, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the hold icon display area 900, no hold icon is currently displayed.

  203 (b) to (d) show the subsequent states in the special figure 1 variable game. It is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase icon of the hold icon, the hold icon 901 appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 (the right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208) (FIG. 203 (b)). When it increases from 0 to 1, it moves linearly toward the first region (FIGS. 203 (c) and (d)). At the time shown in FIG. 203 (d), the hold icon 901 reaches the first area, and the increase animation of the hold icon ends.

  The movement distance and execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon vary depending on the position of the hold increase target area. In this example, the first, second, third, and fourth areas are arranged in this order from the left end of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon that increases by the increase animation appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900. The moving distance of the increase animation of the hold icon is the longest when the hold increases from 0 to 1, and the shortest when the hold increases from 3 to 4. When the moving speed of the hold icon in the increase animation is constant, the execution time of the increase animation is the longest when the hold increases from 0 to 1, and the shortest when the hold increases from 3 to 4.

  In this example, during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 901, a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon 901 from “white” to “red” is executed (FIG. 203 (c)). Here, the change animation of the hold icon or the variation icon may be merely changing the icon image of a predetermined display mode to an icon image of another display mode.

  In this example, the standby animation (clockwise rotation) of the hold icon 901 is also executed during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 901. After the increase animation of the hold icon 901 ends, only the standby animation is continued.

  FIG. 203 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 9-decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIGS. 203 (f) and (g) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon deletion animation, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 moves linearly to the left and goes out of the display area from the left end of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed even during the execution period of the deletion animation of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 203 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, so that even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and the state becomes non-variable.

  204 (a) to 204 (d) show a state after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 in a non-variable state and starting the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started (FIG. 204 (a)), and the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (FIG. 204 (c)). . The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 variable game has been started immediately after winning the prize, so that the special figure 1 hold is continuously displayed as 0 (the leftmost LED is lit immediately after winning the prize. You may).

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started (Fig. 204 (a)), and after a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination “decoration 7-decoration 9-decoration”. 5 "is stopped and displayed (FIG. 204 (c)).

  In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon is started based on winning the special figure 1 opening 230. However, since the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested immediately after winning a prize, the hold icon deletion animation is executed immediately after the start of the increase animation. In the present example, the series of animations shown in FIGS. 204A to 204D includes an increase / erase animation of a hold icon having both an attribute as an increase animation of the hold icon and an attribute as an erase animation of the hold icon. Can be considered. The animation may be an animation in which the increase animation and the erasure animation are continuously performed, or may be stored in advance as a single animation having both attributes.

  In the increase / deletion animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 (FIG. 204A) and moves linearly toward the left end of the hold icon display area 900 (FIG. 204B). ), (C)), and goes out of the display area from the left end (FIG. 204 (d)). In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 902 is executed even during the execution period of the increase / erase animation of the hold icon 902.

  The increase / deletion animation of the hold icon is started almost simultaneously with the timing when the special figure 1 variable game is started (FIG. 204 (a)), and ends at a timing later than the end of the special figure 1 variable game (FIG. 204 (d)). That is, the execution time (scale) of the increase / erase animation of the hold icon is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In other words, the execution time of the hold icon increase / erase animation is at least longer than the shortest change time of the special figure change game. The shortest variation time may be the shortest variation time in a predetermined gaming state, or may be the shortest variation time in the game machine.

  Also, in this example, the hold icon 902 when the special figure 1 variable game is finished still reaches the first area of the hold icon display area 900 (the hold increase target area when the hold increases from 0 to 1). (FIG. 204 (c)). In the increase / deletion animation of the hold icon, the time from the appearance of the hold icon at the right end of the hold icon display area 900 to the arrival of the first area is an increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases from 0 to 1 (FIG. 203 (b) to (d)) is substantially the same as the execution time. The execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases from 0 to 1 is the longest among the increase animations of various hold icons. Therefore, in this example, the longest execution time in the increase animation of the hold icon is at least longer than the shortest change time of the special figure variable game.

  Further, in this example, the total display time for a certain hold icon (for example, the sum of the execution time of the increase animation, movement animation and deletion animation of the hold icon, or the execution time of the standby animation of the hold icon) is There is a case where it is longer than the variation time of the special figure variation game corresponding to the hold icon. That is, when the animation is executed in a state where there are one or more holds, the animation may be performed across a plurality of variations.

<Example 2-5>
205 and 206 show examples of effect display in Example 2-5 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 205 (a) shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white sabotani) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani) are displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. At this time, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target area is the third area. In the drawing, the reserved increase target area is indicated by a broken-line rectangle (not actually displayed).

  FIG. 205 (b) shows a subsequent state in the special figure variable game. At this point, it is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 903 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 increases from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  Here, in each animation (for example, an increase animation, a deletion animation, a movement animation, etc.) accompanied by the movement of the icon (pending icon or variable icon), the moving speed of the icon may differ depending on the display mode of the icon. For example, the moving speed of the savory icon may be slower than the moving speed of the spherical icon.

  FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 7-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  In this example, the hold icon deletion animation is started at the timing when the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the hold icon erasing animation, the hold icon 901 in the first area gradually moves downward and goes out of the display area from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900.

  Moreover, in this example, the movement animation of a holding | maintenance icon is started at the timing which the special figure 1 variable game is complete | finished. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 gradually moves from the second area to the first area. Since the hold icon 903 in the third area is still executing the increase animation, the start of the movement animation for the hold icon 903 is delayed.

  FIG. 205 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation of the hold icon 902 that has moved from the second area has ended. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is ended. Due to the decrease in the hold in FIG. 1 from 3 to 2, the hold increase target area moves from the fourth area to the third area.

  205 (e) and (f) show the subsequent state in the special figure 1 variable game. In the hold icon display area 900, the delayed move icon of the hold icon 903 is started based on the end of the increase animation of the hold icon 903 (FIG. 205 (e)). In the moving animation of the hold icon 903, the hold icon 903 gradually moves from the third area to the second area. At the time shown in FIG. 205 (f), the moving animation of the hold icon 903 ends. Here, the movement animation whose execution start is delayed may be different from the normal movement animation. For example, a moving animation with a delayed start of execution may have a moving speed of the hold icon faster than a normal moving animation. Further, the time required for the moving animation may be shortened by stopping the display of at least a part of the animation. However, the display is performed to the extent that it can be seen that the hold icon is moving.

  FIG. 205 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 9-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 4” is displayed. "Is stopped. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is completed, in the hold icon display area 900, an erase animation and a move animation of the hold icon are started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the hold icon 902 in the first area gradually moves downward and goes out of the display area from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 gradually moves from the second area to the first area.

  Further, when the holding of the special figure 1 increases, the holding icon display area 900 starts an increase animation of the holding icon. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. The movement animation of the hold icon 904 from the third area to the second area is delayed until the increase animation of the hold icon 904 ends. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 increases from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  FIG. 205 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the moving animation of the hold icon 903 that has moved from the second area has ended. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is continuously performed. Due to the decrease in the hold in FIG. 1 from 3 to 2, the hold increase target area moves from the fourth area to the third area.

  FIG. 206 (a) shows a state in which the holding of special figure 1 is further increased during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. On the basis of the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, the hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 905 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 904 is continuously performed separately from the increase animation of the hold icon 905. That is, in the third region, an increase animation of a plurality of hold icons is executed, and a plurality of hold icons are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 is increased from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  In a portion where a plurality of hold icons are overlapped, even if these hold icons are displayed in the same layer, they are displayed in the foreground as the image data is developed in the VRAM in a later order. Therefore, in the overlapping part of the hold icons 904 and 905, the hold icon 905 that is increased later is displayed in front of the hold icon 904 that is increased earlier. In other words, in this example, the hold icons that are increased later have a higher display priority and are displayed in front.

  The order in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM is not necessarily related to the order in which the image data is displayed (the image having a slower display order has a slower order in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM). In other words, an image in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM may be displayed later and displayed so as to be hidden behind other images.

  FIGS. 206B to 206D show the subsequent states. When the increase animation of the hold icon 904 in the third area is finished (FIG. 206 (b)), the delayed move icon animation of the hold icon 904 is started (FIG. 206 (c)), and the hold icon 904 is displayed in the third area. The region moves from the region to the second region (FIG. 206 (d)). Further, the movement of the hold icon 905 to the third area is completed at the time shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the increase animation of the hold icon 905 is ended.

<Example 2-6>
207 and 208 show examples of effect display in Example 2-6 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 207 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are displayed and synchronized with the fluctuation icon. The predetermined standby animation is executed. At this time, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target area in FIG. 1 is the third area, and the hold increase target area in FIG. 2 is the first area. In the drawing, each of the reserved increase target areas of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is indicated by a broken-line rectangle (not actually displayed).

  In this example, the special icon 1 and the special figure 2 share the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target areas in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are the same area when the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0, and are different areas in other cases.

  FIGS. 207 (b) to 207 (d) show a state in which the suspension of the special figure 2 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. Based on the fact that the suspension of special figure 2 on the priority fluctuation side has increased from 0 to 1, the retention increase target area of special figure 1 moves from the third area to the fourth area, and the reservation increase target area of special figure 2 is the first Move from the first area to the second area. In this way, the reserved increase target area of FIG. 1 is determined based on the sum of the reserved numbers of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, and the reserved increase target area of FIG. 2 is based only on the reserved number of FIG. It is determined. Further, on the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 and a save animation of the hold icon in FIG. .

  In the increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, in the first area where the hold icon 901 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed, for example, an effect moving image 911a representing a cloud is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 901 (see FIG. 207 (b)), when the display size of the effect moving image 911a is gradually reduced, the hold icon 911 (display mode: white) of FIG. 2 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 911a is displayed. Appears (FIGS. 207 (c) and (d)). In this example, the aspect of the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is different from the form of the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1 (for example, an aspect that rises from below the hold icon display area 900). Further, the mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 (in this example, “Teihei Tenka” pattern) may be different from the mode of the hold icon in the special figure 1 (in this example, the “Yatsushiro Shogun” pattern). Moreover, the mode of the standby animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be different from the mode of the standby animation of the hold icon in FIG. The increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may have a higher display priority than the save animation of the hold icon shown in FIG.

  In the evacuation animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, the hold icon 901 in the special figure 1 displayed in the first area moves to the second area on the right side, and the hold icon in the special figure 1 displayed in the second area. 902 moves to the third region on the right side (FIGS. 207 (b) to (d)). The movement mode of the hold icon in the evacuation animation is the reverse of the movement animation that moves in the left direction. Note that the save animation is omitted, the hold icon 901 in FIG. 1 is instantaneously moved from the first area to the second area, and the hold icon 902 in FIG. 1 is instantaneously moved from the second area to the third area. It may be moved.

  FIGS. 207 (e) and (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 10 ( 0) "is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 801 in FIG. 1 is executed. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 in FIG. 1, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801 (FIG. 207 (e)), and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 itself are gradually reduced (FIG. 207). (F)) and finally disappear. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped. However, the standby animation may be continuously performed during the execution of the erasing animation.

  FIG. 207 (g) to FIG. 208 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 2 variable game. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the holding number of the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Due to the decrease of the suspension in FIG. 2 from 1 to 0, the retention increase target area in FIG. 1 moves from the fourth area to the third area in the suspension icon display area 900, and the retention increase target area in FIG. Moves from the second region to the first region. Moreover, in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons of the special figure 2, the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the change animation between the hold / fluctuation icons of the special figure 2 Is started.

  In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the fluctuation icon 811 and the display size gradually increases. While moving, it moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800 (FIG. 207 (g) to FIG. 208 (a)). In this example, when the movement animation between the hold / change icon is started, the standby animation of the change icon (hold icon) is stopped.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 1, the hold icons 901 and 902 shown in FIG. 1 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first and second areas, respectively ( FIG. 207 (g) to FIG. 208 (a)).

  In the change animation between the hold / change icons shown in FIG. 2, a crack is first generated in the circular change icon 811 in the moving animation. After the movement animation ends, the fluctuation icon 811 vibrates rattlingly (FIG. 208 (b)), the fluctuation icon 811 breaks and a thousand box appears from the inside (FIG. 208 (c)), and finally only the thousand boxes Is displayed as the fluctuation icon 811 (FIG. 208 (d)). The mode of the change animation between the hold / change icons in FIG. 2 may be a unique mode different from the mode of the change animation between the hold / change icons in FIG.

<Example 2-7>
FIG. 209 and FIG. 210 show examples of effect display in Example 2-7 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 209 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are displayed and synchronized with the fluctuation icon. The predetermined standby animation is executed. Although not shown, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 in the reserved icon display area 900 is the third area, and the reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 is the first area.

  FIGS. 209 (b) to 209 (d) show a state in which the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. On the basis of the increase in the number of reserved in FIG. 1 from 2 to 3, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 moves from the third area to the fourth area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 remains the first area. In addition, based on the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, an increase animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is started in the holding icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, a predetermined effect moving image 903a is displayed in the third region (FIG. 209 (b)), and when the display size of the effect moving image 903a is gradually reduced, an effect moving image is displayed. The hold icon 903 (display mode: white) of the special figure 1 newly displayed on the layer below the image 903a appears (FIGS. 209 (c) and (d)).

  FIG. 209 (e) to FIG. 210 (d) show the subsequent state. Assume that at the time shown in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. Based on the fact that the number of reserved in FIG. 1 has increased from 3 to 4, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 is outside the display area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 remains the first area. In addition, based on the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, an increase animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is started in the holding icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, the effect moving image 904a similar to the effect moving image 903a is displayed in the fourth area (FIG. 209 (e)), and the display size of the effect moving image 904a is gradually reduced. Then, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 904a appears (FIGS. 209 (f) to (h)).

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 2 is increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 209 (f). The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. Based on the fact that the holding in FIG. 2 has increased from 0 to 1, the holding increase target area in FIG. 2 moves from the first area to the second area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 remains outside the display area. Further, on the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 and a save animation of the hold icon shown in FIG.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2, the effect moving image 911 a in a different form from the effect moving images 903 a and 904 a is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 901 in the first area (FIG. 209 (f), (G)) When the display size of the effect moving image 911a is gradually reduced, the hold icon 911 (display mode: white) of the special figure 2 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 911a appears. (FIG. 209 (h) to FIG. 210 (b)).

  In the reserved icon evacuation animation of special figure 1 (evacuation animation 1), the hold icons 901 to 903 of special figure 1 displayed in the first to third areas respectively move to the second to fourth areas (FIG. 209). (F) to FIG. 210 (b)). The execution period of the hold icon evacuation animation (evacuation animation 1) shown in FIG. 1 is substantially the same as the execution period of the hold icon increase animation shown in FIG. Since the increase animation of the hold icon 904 of the special figure 1 is being executed in the fourth area at the time when the hold icon save animation of the special figure 1 is started, the save icon (from the fourth area to the display area) of the hold icon 904 is being executed in the fourth area. The start of execution of (outward movement) is delayed.

  The change animation of the hold icon 901 may be executed during the execution period of the save icon save animation shown in FIG. 1 (FIGS. 210A to 210C). In the change animation of the hold icon 901, a predetermined effect moving image 901a is displayed in front of the hold icon 901 in the display mode “white” (FIG. 210A), and when the effect moving image 901a is gradually reduced, the display is performed. A hold icon 901 whose mode has changed from “white” to “red” appears (FIGS. 210B and 210C).

  Here, in the portion where the images are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect moving image has a higher display priority than the hold icon, so the effect moving image 911a is displayed in front of the hold icon 901 in FIG. FIG. 209 (f), (g)). In addition, since the hold icon of the special map 1 on the non-priority change side has a higher display priority than the hold icon of the special figure 2 on the priority change side, the hold icon 901 of the special figure 1 is more than the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2. Is also displayed in front (FIG. 209 (h)). Further, since the display priority of the hold icon increased later is higher, the hold icon 904 of FIG. 1 is displayed in front of the hold icon 903 of FIG. 1 (FIG. 209 (g) to FIG. 210 (a)). .

  At the time shown in FIG. 209 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon 904 of the special figure 1 in the fourth area ends, so the delayed save animation (evacuation animation 2) is started. In this evacuation animation, the hold icon 904 shown in FIG. 1 moves from the fourth area to the outside of the display area (FIGS. 210A to 210C). As described above, the hold icon may be displayed once and then moved out of the display area to be hidden. The hold icon 904 in the evacuation animation may be displayed in an overlapping manner with the evacuation animation hold icon 903 that was previously started (FIG. 210A).

  At the time shown in FIG. 210 (c), the special figure 1 variable game ends. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 9-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 210 (d), the special figure 2 variable game is started. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the fluctuation icon deletion animation of the special figure 1, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon of the special figure 2, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 are started. In accordance with the start timing of the change, the standby animation of each hold icon and the change icon may be synchronized.

  In the variation icon erasing animation of FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 800, for example, an effect moving image 801a having the same form as the effect moving images 903a and 904a is displayed in front of the variation icon 801, and the variation icon 801 is an effect moving image. It is deleted while being hidden by 801a, and then the effect moving image 801a is reduced and deleted.

  In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the fluctuation icon 811 and the display size gradually increases. While moving, it moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800.

  In the hold icon movement animation of FIG. 1, the hold icons 901 to 903 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 gradually move to the first to third areas, respectively. In addition, the hold icon 904 outside the display area gradually moves to the fourth area. In this manner, the hold icon that is once hidden may be displayed again.

<Example 3>
FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect display of the third embodiment in time series. FIG. 5A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In this state, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is four. In addition, in the first, second, and fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icons 901, 902, and 904 having the display mode “white” are displayed, and in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, the display mode “ A “red” hold icon 903 is displayed, and a fluctuation icon 801 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800.

  FIG. 7B shows a special variable game stop display state, and an erasing animation for gradually erasing the variation icon 801 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is started. FIG. 2C shows a state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In this state, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation between the hold icon and the change icon of the hold icon 901, the movement animation of the hold icon 902, the hold icons 903 and 904 are displayed. The moving animation + change animation is started.

  In the movement animation between the hold icon and the change icon of the hold icon 901, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is changed to the change icon 802 as shown in FIGS. As a result, the display size is gradually enlarged and moved to the variable icon display area 800. In the movement animation of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area, as shown in FIGS.

  In the movement animation + change animation of the hold icon 903, the hold icon 903 displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the second area, as shown in FIGS. However, when the predetermined effect moving image 903a is displayed in front of the hold icon 903 of the display mode “red” and the effect moving image 903a is gradually reduced, the display mode changes from “red” to “blue”. A hold icon 903 'appears.

  In the movement animation + change animation of the hold icon 904, the hold icon 904 displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the third area as shown in FIGS. However, when the predetermined effect moving image 904a is displayed in front of the hold icon 904 of the display mode “white” and the effect moving image 903a is gradually reduced, the display mode changes from “white” to “red”. A hold icon 904 'appears.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the special figure 1 hold increases by one, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. On the basis of the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is started in the hold icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 1, the effect moving image 905a having a different aspect from the effect moving images 903a and 904a is displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900, and the display size of the effect moving image 905a is gradually increased. Is reduced, the hold icon 905 (display mode: white) of the special figure 1 newly displayed in the layer below the effect moving image 905a appears.

  In this example, since the display time of the movement animation + change animation of the hold icon 903 and the display time of the movement animation + change animation of the hold icon 904 are the same, the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the change animation. Even in such a case, the player can concentrate on the change of the hold icon. In this example, if the display time of various animations is shortened at the timing of increasing the number of holds in FIG. 4D, the display mode of the hold icon 903 changes from “red” to “blue”, and the hold icon 903 is displayed. It is emphasized that it becomes', and the player can be given the illusion that only the display mode of the hold icon 903 has changed. Thereby, it may be possible to give a misunderstanding to the player and enhance the interest of the game.

  If each animation representing increase / decrease of the hold is not performed as in this example, the state shown in FIG. 5 (f) immediately follows the state shown in FIG. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the hold icon 903 for which the pre-reading notice performed in FIG. 5A has already been moved from the third area to the second area. For this reason, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the hold icon 903 is not moved, and the mode of the hold icon 902 may be misunderstood as if the state is switched from the non-prefetched state to the highly reliable state. In this respect, according to the present example, while performing an animation representing increase / decrease of the hold, and further switching the display mode of the hold along with the execution of the animation, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the hold while effectively producing. There is a case.

<Example 4>
FIG. 212 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of the fourth embodiment in time series. FIG. 5A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In this state, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one. A hold icon 901 with a display mode “white” is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a change icon 801 with a display mode “white” is displayed in the change icon display area 800.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the special figure 1 hold increases by one, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. The hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 based on the increase of the hold in the special figure 1. Here, the result of prefetching performed when the second hold occurs is suggested. Therefore, a pre-reading notice is performed by displaying a hold icon 902 having a display mode “red” in the second area.

  Further, at the same timing, the display mode of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area at the timing shown in FIG. Is changed to “person A”, and in the other display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, character information such as “What is it”, “Wai Wai”, “Gayagaya”, “What was it?” Is displayed. ing. In this example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is not changed based on the fact that the pre-reading notice is performed in the second area, but the display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 may be changed.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the number of the special figure 1 hold increases by two, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold increases from 2 to 4. The hold icons 903 and 904 are displayed in the third and fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 based on the increase in the hold in the special figure 1. Here, the pre-reading notice is performed in the second area. Based on this, the display modes of the hold icons 903 and 904 are set to “person B” and “person A”, respectively. In addition, as the standby animation of the hold icons 901, 903, and 904, a moving image in which “person A” and “person B” scramble left and right asynchronously is displayed.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the hold icon 901 is moved between the hold icon and the change icon in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 in accordance with the decrease of the hold in FIG. Animation and moving animation of the hold icons 902 to 904 are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold icon and the change icon of the hold icon 901, the display size of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually increases as shown in FIGS. The moving image is displayed so that the hold icon 901 is finally deleted. In the movement animation of the hold icons 902 to 904, the hold icons 902 to 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 gradually become the first as shown in FIGS. Move to ~ 3 area.

  Subsequently, during the period of (f) to (h) in the figure, a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon 902 from “white” to “thousand boxes” is performed. At the same time, when the execution of the change animation is started, the standby animation of the other hold icons 903 and 904 is changed, and the character information displayed in other display areas is also changed.

  Subsequently, during the period of (h) to (i) in the same figure, the hold / fluctuation of the hold icon 902 is changed in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 as the hold of the special figure 1 is decreased by one. The movement animation between icons and the movement animation of the hold icons 903 and 904 are started. After that, the hold icon 905 is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900 based on the increase in the hold in FIG. 1. Here, “person A”, Based on the display of “person B”, the display mode of the hold icon 905 is set to “person A”.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 10L, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started and the display mode of the hold icons 903 to 905 is returned from “person” to the default “white”. At this time, the hold icon may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the prefetch result. In particular, at the start of change, the player can easily focus attention on the icon display area in order to confirm the number of holds, so that attention may be easily collected.

  In this way, if the display of the hold that occurred before the hold and the hold that occurred after the hold is changed together with the hold that is the subject of the pre-read notice, the player's attention will be drawn by the pre-read notice. It can be collected and there is no misunderstanding of the subject hold.

<Example 5>
FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect display of the fifth embodiment in time series. FIG. 5A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In this state, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two. In addition, a hold icon 901 indicating a pre-reading notice of the display mode “blue sabotani” is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a display mode “white sabotani” is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900. A hold icon 901 is displayed, and a change icon 801 of the display mode “white sabotani” is displayed in the change icon display area 800.

  During the period of (b) to (d) in the figure, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped and the pre-reading notice is made in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, An erase animation of the display mode of the change icon 801 is started in the change icon display area 800. In the erasing animation of the variation icon 801, as shown in FIGS. 5B to 5D, a moving image is displayed in which the display size is gradually reduced after the “white sabotani” is collapsed.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the hold icon 901 moves between the hold icon and the change icon in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 in accordance with the decrease of the hold in FIG. Animation and moving animation of the hold icon 902 are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold icon and the change icon of the hold icon 901, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is changed to the change icon 802 as shown in FIGS. A moving image that changes and moves to the variation icon display area 800 is displayed. In the movement animation of the hold icon 902, as shown in FIGS. 5E to 5F, a moving image in which the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area. Is displayed.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, the special figure 1 hold increases by 1, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. The hold icon 903 is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 based on the increase in the hold in the special figure 1. Here, in order to suggest the result of prefetching, the display mode is displayed in the second area. A hold icon 903 of “Red Sabohani” is displayed to make a pre-reading notice.

  During the period of (h) to (k) in the figure, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped and the pre-reading notice is made in the second area of the hold icon display area 900, An erase animation of the display mode of the change icon 802 is started in the change icon display area 800. In the erasing animation of the variation icon 802, as shown in FIGS. 9H to 11J, after “Blue Sabohani” collapses, it rises again, utters the dialogue, and then moves out of the variation icon area 800. A moving image to be displayed is displayed. In addition, a standby animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon 903 displayed in the second area is performed in conjunction with the erase animation.

  In this way, if the erasure animation of the hold that occurred before the hold and the change icon of the hold that occurred after the hold is also changed for the hold that is subject to the pre-read notice, Attention can be attracted, and the subject hold is not misidentified. In addition, since the player pays attention to the icon display area at the time of change stop and change start when the number of holds changes, it is more effective to perform the effect in the area during the period.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment has the symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display. ), A symbol display control means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the control of the symbol display means, and a display indicating the number of operation holding balls to be operated by the symbol display means by a hold icon A display device that can execute at least a hold display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a hold display control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that can at least control the hold display means. The game table is a pachinko machine, and the hold display means is capable of displaying at least a first hold icon and a second hold icon. The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a hold animation, the hold animation includes at least a mode in which the hold icon changes, and the hold display control means satisfies the first condition. When there is a change (for example, when a change other than a shortening change is selected), the first control can be executed at least, and the hold display control means has a second condition established (For example, when a shortening variation is selected), the second control can be executed at least, and the first control displays the first hold animation (for example, icon change animation) on the hold display means. 1 (display mode 2: animation corresponding to squeeze) is displayed at least, and the first control includes the first hold animation. During the display, the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 ′ shown in FIG. 192 (g)) is displayed instead of the first hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 192 (b)). The second control includes at least a control for displaying the second hold icon instead of the first hold icon without displaying the first hold animation. , A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display, Control means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing control of the symbol display means and at least display indicating the number of operation-reserved balls that will activate the symbol display means by means of a hold icon A game stand having a hold display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine, and the hold display means displays at least first and second hold icons. The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a first hold animation indicating a change in the hold icon, and the hold display means. The first hold animation can be displayed at least when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a change other than the shortening change is selected), and the hold display means Instead of the first hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 192 (b)) during the display of one hold animation (for example, the animation corresponding to (display mode 2: turn) of the icon change animation 1). The second hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 ′ shown in FIG. 192 (g)) can be displayed at least, and the hold display means can display the second condition (for example, At least the second hold icon can be displayed in place of the first hold icon without displaying the first hold animation when a shortened variation is selected) It is a game stand characterized by being capable of performing.

  Here, “display the second hold icon instead of the first hold icon” means that the display of the first hold icon being displayed is stopped and the second hold icon is displayed. The second hold icon is displayed while the hold icon is displayed, then the display of the first hold icon is stopped, the display of the first hold icon being displayed is stopped, and then the second hold icon is displayed. Etc. are included. That is, the first hold animation is displayed while the first hold icon is displayed, the first hold icon is not displayed at the end of the first hold animation, and the second hold icon is displayed. Just do it.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the content is not limited to the above as long as it appears as if the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon by executing the first hold animation. For example, the timing for displaying the first hold icon may be before the start of execution of the first hold animation, or may be displayed after the start of execution of the first hold animation. Also, the display of the second hold icon may be started during the execution of the first hold animation, or the display may be started after a lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the display of the first hold animation. In addition to the first hold animation and the first and second hold icons, a hold animation and a hold icon may be displayed.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, when the hold storage condition is satisfied, the start information (for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol, the special figure 1 variable game timer number) (Or fluctuating time)) at least as a hold storage means (for example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 or the pre-reading result storage part for special figure 2 in the RAM 308) and the hold display condition are satisfied ( For example, in the case where the number of special figure variable games held increases, the game table includes display means capable of displaying at least an icon as a hold icon for the hold (for example, a hold icon display area 900), The hold icon includes at least a first hold icon and a second hold icon, and the display means changes the hold icon when a hold icon change condition is satisfied. The animation is configured to be displayed, and the display unit is configured to display the first hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 192 (b)) while the hold icon change condition is satisfied. (For example, when a change other than the shortening change is selected), the first change is made after the start of displaying the hold icon change animation (for example, the animation corresponding to (display mode 2: turn) of icon change animation 1). The second hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 192 (h)) can be displayed instead of the hold icon, and the display means displays the first hold icon. If a specific condition is satisfied (for example, if a shortening variation is selected), the previous change icon is not displayed and the previous animation is not displayed. The is one of those pending are capable of displaying the second hold icon on behalf of the icons, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the willingness of gaming by making the player have an illusion as if the game machine is being held more than the actual game machine ( May be reminiscent). In addition, it may be possible to clearly notify that the change is being made based on the fact that the hold has been digested. In addition, there is a case where the mode of the hold icon as the hold prefetch notice is composed of a form related to the change icon displayed based on the result of the determination of whether or not the change, and the continuity between the prefetch notice and the change notice can be maintained. is there.

  Further, the second control includes at least a control for displaying a second hold animation (for example, icon change animation 3) different from the first hold animation on the hold display means. This control may include at least control for displaying the second hold icon instead of the first hold icon during display of the second hold animation.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further increase the relevance of the notice by changing the hold icon in the same manner in both the first and second hold animations. In addition, by making the change icon and the hold icon the same mode, when the change is performed by digesting the hold, the player may be able to make an illusion as if the change was made without reducing the hold. .

  In addition, the second hold animation may have at least some of the aspects (for example, introduction, result notification, or ending shown in FIG. 194) in common with the first hold animation. Here, “the second on-hold animation has at least some aspects in common with the first animation mode” means, for example, that the on-hold animation A is based on the condition being satisfied during the execution of the on-hold animation. When the hold animation B is executed instead of the hold animation A as the first hold animation and the hold animation A + the hold animation B as the second hold animation, the hold animation A is performed halfway. ing. Needless to say, the mode of animation performed under separate control may be common.

  With such a configuration, the variation icon has a common aspect with the hold icon, but has a unique aspect, so that it can be emphasized to the player that the predetermined hold has been consumed. In some cases, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of holds. In addition, for example, when the unique mode of the variation icon has a higher reliability than the common mode, the player's gambling will be overwhelmed by the notice prior to the start of the target variation on hold. Therefore, the player is not greatly discouraged even when the target hold is removed.

  The hold display means is capable of at least displaying the hold animation as a prefetch notice, and the hold display control means displays the hold indication on the hold display means when a prefetch notice condition is satisfied. The first condition, which is at least capable of executing control to display an animation, includes at least a case where the prefetch notice condition is satisfied, and the second condition is the It may include at least a case where the prefetch notice condition is established.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to more easily grasp the remaining number of holds.

  A variation time determining unit capable of determining at least a variation time during which the symbol variation display is performed, wherein the control unit is capable of executing at least control of the variation time determining unit; The condition includes at least a case where the first variation time is established as the variation time, and the second condition is that the second variation time is determined as the variation time. The hold display control means displays the first hold animation for a first period (for example, 12000 ms for the icon change animation 1) on the hold display means. The hold display control means causes the hold display means to display the second hold animation over a second period. The second variable time is shorter than the first variable time, and the second period is shorter than the first period. Also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a variety of aspects while keeping the player's gambling feeling moderately without over-expecting expectations for the target fluctuations, which may reduce the interest of the game Absent. In addition, since the aspect of the icon is more likely to change when it is fluctuating than when it is on hold, there are cases where the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation rather than the hold.

  The hold display means can display the second hold animation at least over a second period (for example, 3000 ms for the icon change animation 3), and the second variation time is the second change time. The second period may be shorter than the first time period, and the second period may be shorter than the first period.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a variety of aspects while keeping the player's gambling feeling moderately without over-expecting expectations for the target fluctuations, which may reduce the interest of the game Absent. In addition, since the aspect of the icon is more likely to change when it is fluctuating than when it is on hold, there are cases where the player's attention can be attracted to the fluctuation rather than the hold.

  And an image display means (for example, a hold icon display area 900) capable of displaying at least an image. The hold display means includes the image display means, and the image display means includes the image display means. The hold icon may be displayed at least.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a variety of aspects while keeping the player's gambling feeling moderately without over-expecting expectations for the target fluctuations, which may reduce the interest of the game Absent. For example, when the specific mode of the hold icon is 0, the player's expectation with respect to the icon change may be able to be concentrated on the change.

  The main control means includes at least a main control means having at least the control means, and a sub-control means having at least a hold display control means capable of executing at least control of the hold display means. The control for transmitting a plurality of types of commands can be executed at least, and the sub-control means can execute at least control according to the command received from the main control means, and the sub-control means can The main control means may be constituted by a different substrate.

  The control means may be capable of executing at least control for holding the operation of the symbol display means when the hold condition is satisfied, and the control means may hold the hold condition. If there is, it may be possible to execute at least control for increasing the number of the operation holding balls.

  Further, the hold icon and the change icon may share at least a part of the display mode and may be different from each other. For example, at least a part of the shape, size, color, written characters, and operation mode (animation) may be common and the other parts may be different.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to see that the change that is the subject of the hold icon notice is being made, and even after the start of change, the notice is continued in a manner related to the notice that was made before the start of change. Can be performed easily, and it is easy for a player to pay attention. Conversely, by displaying at least some of the modes in a unique mode, the player can be made aware that the hold has already been consumed and that the change has been made. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the correct number of pending balances, and the game may be able to proceed smoothly. Further, by displaying the variation icon in a common manner, it may be possible to make the player have an illusion as if more than the actual number is reserved, and to improve the game motivation.

  In addition, if the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon for notifying the same start information is related, when the change icon is viewed, it is possible to grasp which hold icon corresponds to the display. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when switching from the hold icon to the change icon, an animation may be executed.

  In addition, the fluctuation icon having a high reliability may have a large number of times and a ratio to be erased in one fluctuation. With such a configuration, the fluctuation icon serves as a guideline for reliability, and it is easy to grasp the reliability even for a low-skilled player.

  Further, the variation icon may be deleted after the stop display of one symbol. In this case, the player is certain that the change being executed and the stop display of the symbol as a result of the change are based on the fact that the corresponding change icon to be deleted has been consumed. May be able to be notified. Further, the fluctuation icon may be erased based on the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, or the fluctuation icon may be erased between the start of fluctuation and the reach.

In addition, the change icon may be deleted before the display of the change icon display area and the hold icon display area is interrupted after the reach is established, and before the display of the icon display area is resumed. May be. In addition, the fluctuation icon may be deleted before the symbol fluctuation is stopped, or the fluctuation icon may be deleted during the symbol fixed display time (between the fluctuation stop and the next fluctuation start).
Further, the fluctuation icon may be deleted based on reception of a predetermined signal from the main control means, or the fluctuation icon may be deleted based on reception of a fluctuation stop command from the main control means. In this case, even if the main control means is abnormal or the sub-control means misses the command, the variable icon can be deleted, and it may be possible to notify that the hold has been consumed. In some cases, the fluctuation icon can be deleted at a timing that does not interfere with the notice.

  Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area may be displayed even when there is no change. Further, the moving animation from the hold icon to the change icon may be omitted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, since it becomes the same mode as the interruption return in the middle of the fluctuation, there is a case where the number of holds can be misidentified, and the player can be prevented from stopping.

  Further, when the display of each icon display area (the icon itself associated therewith) is interrupted in accordance with the execution of super reach, control may be performed so that at least the display of the variable icon is not restored when the display area is restored. In this case, if a notice with a variable icon has been given, the player may be uncomfortable if the variable icon is shown after the lottery results have been lost, so it must be erased so as not to leave a bad impression. Is preferred.

  Further, there may be a plurality of erasure animation modes of the variable icon. In particular, the jackpot reliability may be different for each special figure. On the contrary, the same type of erasure animation may be performed with variations in reliability or a plurality of special drawings. Further, when the advantage of the special figure 2 on the priority fluctuation side is higher, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation icon based on the suspended special figure 2 that has been interrupted may select the default mode.

  Moreover, there is no need to always display a fluctuation icon. For example, a fluctuation icon is displayed only when a fluctuation icon is displayed as a notice by an effect lottery or when a prefetch notice (holding icon) for the fluctuation is displayed. Also good. Further, the display modes of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area may be different.

  Further, not only power interruption / recovery, but also a predetermined number of hold icons and change icons are displayed in a predetermined manner even when there is a change in gaming state due to a big hit or ST end. Also good. Further, the erasure and restoration of the variation icon may be repeated a plurality of times each time a pseudo-ream is performed. Further, when a special success / failure determination result is derived as the determination result, execution of at least one of the moving animation, the change animation, and the erase animation on the change icon may be restricted.

  In addition, the reliability may not decrease when the hold icon changes from the hold icon, and the reliability may decrease when the change icon changes from the hold icon or the change icon from the change icon. Further, the variation icon may have an aspect in which the big hit reliability is 100%.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon after a change becomes the same when the first hold icon change animation is performed and when the second hold icon change animation is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the first condition is satisfied for the hold icon displayed in the first display mode, the first hold icon change animation is displayed. If the hold icon is displayed in the second display mode after the first hold icon change animation is completed, the hold displayed in the first display mode is performed. When the second hold icon change animation is performed when the second condition is satisfied for the icon, after the second hold icon change animation is finished You may display the Hold icon in a third display mode. Further, the third display mode may be one with lower big hit reliability than the second display mode, and vice versa. Moreover, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed over a plurality of variations, the final display mode of the plurality of changes may be displayed as the third display mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means that can store at least predetermined start information as a hold (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random value storage area, When the special figure 2 random value storage area) and a predetermined hold display condition are satisfied, the hold display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, which can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold) A holding icon display area 900, a first sub-control unit 400, and a second sub-control unit 500), and the holding display means has a predetermined holding movement condition (for example, start of special figure variable game, increase of holding). Is established, a predetermined hold movement animation for moving the display position of a predetermined hold icon corresponding to the predetermined hold (for example, a moving animation of the hold icon, an increase animation) The first hold movement condition is satisfied when the first hold movement condition is satisfied, and the first hold movement condition is satisfied. The predetermined hold movement condition is satisfied even when a second hold movement condition different from the hold movement condition is established, and the hold display means satisfies the first hold movement condition. In the case, the first hold movement animation is executed for the first hold icon corresponding to the first hold stored in the hold storage means, and the hold display means has the second hold movement condition. If established, a second hold movement animation is executed for a second hold icon corresponding to a second hold different from the first hold stored in the hold storage means. When the second hold movement condition is satisfied during the execution of the first hold movement animation, the hold display means, together with the first hold movement animation being executed, The hold display means can start the second hold movement animation when the first hold movement condition is satisfied during execution of the second hold movement animation. The first hold movement animation can be started together with the hold movement animation.

  According to this structure, since the number of reservations is notified in various ways, it is possible to improve the interest of the game stand.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the hold display can be made more conspicuous by performing the animation relating to the increase / decrease of the hold number and simultaneously performing notification while clearly informing each hold.

  In addition, according to this configuration, by simultaneously performing a plurality of animations related to the hold, it is possible to improve the frequency with which a plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously while clearly informing each hold. It may be difficult to identify the number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where it is not necessary to provide display priority order setting or exclusive control for each animation, and the control can be simplified.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the first hold movement animation and the second hold movement animation are performed simultaneously, at least a part of the display in one hold movement animation is displayed on the other It is characterized by being displayed overlapping with the pending movement animation.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to easily grasp a plurality of pieces of information regarding the hold only by looking at one point.

  In addition, according to this configuration, while clearly informing the player about the increase / decrease of the hold, there is a case in which an animation that is particularly conspicuous can be arbitrarily conspicuous.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reserved animation by shielding a part of one animation from the player so as to be difficult to view.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display means displays the first hold icon in a predetermined display form (for example, display form “white”), and the hold display means includes the second hold display means. Is displayed in the predetermined display mode.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for a player to grasp the number of holds by displaying a plurality of hold icons of the same mode at the same time, and as if it is an excellent platform that makes it easy for a player to accumulate holds. There may be an illusion.

  In addition, according to this configuration, in the case where a pre-reading notice or the like that changes the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result is performed, it may be possible to prevent expected confusion.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first hold movement condition is established when the number of holds stored in the hold storage means decreases, and the first hold movement animation is: It is characterized by comprising an animation showing how the first hold icon is erased from a predetermined display area.

  According to this configuration, by performing animation to show that the suspension is reduced, it is possible to clearly notify that the suspension, which is the player's right, has been digested and the change is being performed, while other animations and execution periods When there are duplicates, the number of holds may be confused as described above.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the second reserved movement animation is started after the start of the first reserved movement animation, the first reserved movement animation is ended. It is characterized in that it can be finished before.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to finally notify the correct number of holds while providing a period for displaying a hold icon equal to or greater than the maximum number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, by making the length of one animation shorter than the length of the other animation, it may be possible to shorten as much as possible the period in which the animations are duplicated and the number of holds is mistaken.

  In addition, according to this configuration, one animation is started during the execution of the other animation, and is finished before the other animation is finished. Therefore, there may be a case where the number of holds that have been misidentified during the overlap period can be correctly notified. If the animation that has been performed before the overlap period ends during the overlap period, it is difficult to distinguish when it has ended, and there is a risk that the hold will be misidentified.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means that can store at least predetermined start information as a hold (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random value storage area, When the special figure 2 random value storage area) and a predetermined hold display condition are satisfied, the hold display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, which can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold) When the hold icon display area 900, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500) and a predetermined display position change condition are satisfied, the first position (for example, the first of the hold icon display area 900) To the second position different from the first position (for example, the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the variation icon). On-hold display position changing means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, on-hold icon display area 900, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, on-hold icon display) that can be changed at least in the display area 800 and outside the display area When the position change process (step S1215) and the change icon display control process step S1305) and a predetermined display mode change condition are satisfied, the hold icon displayed in the first display mode is displayed in the first display mode. A holding display mode changing means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon display area 900, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, a holding icon, which can be changed to at least a second display mode different from the mode. A game machine comprising a change process (step S1211) and a change icon change process (step S1321)), When the display position change means changes the display position of the hold icon from the first position to the second position, a predetermined hold movement animation (for example, hold icon movement animation, erase animation, increase) Animation, movement animation between hold / variation icons), and the hold display mode changing means changes the display mode of the hold icon from the first display mode to the second display during execution of the hold movement animation. It is made to change into a mode.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the interest of the game stand can be improved by informing the information regarding the hold in various ways.

  In addition, according to this configuration, the player is notified of the change in the display mode of the hold icon by switching the display mode of the hold icon while attracting the player's attention to the target hold icon by the movement. May be possible and may prevent oversight.

  Further, according to this configuration, while clearly informing that the number of holds has been increased or decreased due to the change of the display position, it is possible to specify the number of holds for a low-skilled player by switching the display mode. Can be difficult. Further, there are cases where a player with low skill level can be confused by simultaneously executing operations having conflicting effects.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display mode changing means is configured to display a predetermined hold display when the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. A feature change animation (for example, a change animation of a hold icon and a change animation between a hold / change icon) is displayed.

  According to this configuration, the animation is performed while the display position is changed while improving the interest by performing the change of the display mode of the hold with the animation, so even if the animation itself is created roughly, It may be difficult to notice. For this reason, there are cases where the interest can be improved effectively with little effort.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, if a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, a determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure (for example, a special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229), FIG. 1). When the related lottery process (step S231)) and a predetermined symbol variation condition are satisfied, at least symbol variation stop display is performed to perform symbol variation and then stop and display the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure When a possible symbol display means (for example, the special symbol display device 212, the special symbol 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208) and a predetermined prefetch notice condition are established, a prefetch notice (for example, a hold icon is displayed). Pre-reading advance notice means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold icon display area 900, variable icon display area) that can start at least in a predetermined display mode 800, a first sub-control unit 400, and a second sub-control unit 500), and the prefetch notice unit may cause the hold display mode change unit to change the display mode of the hold icon as the prefetch notice. It is possible.

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to notice a change in the display mode of the hold icon that is performed as a prefetch notice.

  Further, according to this configuration, the trigger for moving the hold icon is likely to be concentrated at the end of the change or at the start of the change. By performing the pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon in accordance with the opportunity, it may be difficult to compete with other notices that are made in accordance with the change, and may not interfere with each other.

  In addition, according to this configuration, since a notice regarding a specific lottery result of a hold is executed together with an animation indicating increase / decrease of the hold, there is a case where it is possible to easily grasp the time until a highly expected change is performed. is there.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the first display position change condition is satisfied, the predetermined display position change condition is satisfied, and the first display position change condition is This is established when the number of suspensions stored in the suspension storage means decreases due to the start of fluctuation.

  According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to change the display mode of the hold icon at the same time while clearly informing that the hold that is the player's right has been digested due to the change. There may be a case where dissatisfaction caused by a notice of decrease in holding that is not a happy one can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900) capable of at least starting the notice. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500), and the notification means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notification when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied. Yes, the notice means can display at least the hold icon as a look-ahead notice when a predetermined look-ahead notice condition is satisfied, and the notice means, after the symbol variation is started, The variation icon can be displayed, and the display mode of the variation icon is a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The hold display position changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from a third display position (for example, the first area of the hold icon display area 900) based on the establishment of the first display position change condition. When the display position is changed to a fourth display position (for example, the change icon display area 800), the hold display position changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from the third position to the fourth position. The hold movement animation is displayed, and the hold display mode changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from the third position to the fourth position during execution of the hold movement animation. The icon is changed to the variable icon.

  According to this configuration, since it is clearly notified that the hold icon has been switched to the change icon, it may be clearer that the hold has been digested and the change is being performed. In particular, when a pre-reading notice is made at the time when the hold icon is displayed, it is easier to clearly tell the player that the change being executed is the target change of the pre-reading notice. It may be easier to have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon is a mode selected based on the look-ahead result, and a predetermined area (for example, the first icon of the hold icon display area 900 before and after the execution of the animation indicating increase / decrease of the hold number). The display mode of the hold icon displayed in any one of the first to fourth areas may be the same display mode. In this case, it is a condition that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the hold prefetch, and there are two or more hold icon display modes that change by the hold prefetch. If the number of holds increases during execution of the movement animation of the hold icon, and the number of holds at the time of completion or immediately after the movement animation is the same as the number of holds before execution of the movement animation, misunderstanding is more likely to occur.

  According to this configuration, since the display mode of the hold icon is changed during the execution of the movement animation, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition of the hold that is a target of the pre-reading notice that is easy to occur in the conventional configuration. is there.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the modes of conflicting contents (for example, the increase animation and the deletion animation of the hold icon) are paired with each other (for example, one is a mode in which the transparency of the hold icon is gradually reduced. The other may be configured to gradually increase the transparency, one to gradually increase the display size of the hold icon, and the other to gradually decrease the display size. This not only makes it seem that the number of holds has not been reduced, but also can cause the player to have an illusion that the state of the reduction has been interrupted in the middle. The effect of making up for that discouragement may occur after making you feel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a hold icon erasing animation or the like is also performed at the start of the next change, and therefore, the number of holds at the start of the change of the change may be known. In recent game tables, the smaller the hold, the easier it is to reach, so the smaller the hold, the more frequent the production. Therefore, conventionally, when a reach occurs, it may be unclear whether the reach can be expected. Furthermore, since the relationship between the hold and the change is easy to understand, the relationship between the change being executed and the hold may be easily grasped even if the change time is designed to be significantly short. Furthermore, the player can be illusioned as if a plurality of changes are continuously made by one hold icon, which may improve the operation of the game table.

  In the present embodiment, the hold increase animation may be continuously performed even after the target fluctuation is completed. Thereby, it may be possible to make an illusion as if the number of holdings is increased by one starting ball. In particular, when the variation is continuously performed, the effect may be remarkably exhibited.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of increasing animations are simultaneously executed for the same region. Accordingly, there is a case where the operation can be improved by making an illusion as if a plurality of suspensions are generated by one increase animation. In particular, when the plurality of increased hold icons are in the same mode, there may be a remarkable effect because the hold looks as if it has been split.

  In this embodiment, the save animation and the increase animation are executed in duplicate. As a result, it may be easy to understand that the interrupt shown in FIG. 2 has occurred. Conventionally, an advantageous special figure 2 interrupt has occurred, and it was difficult to understand that the fluctuation start due to the disadvantageous special figure 1 hold was delayed. Further, by shielding the disadvantageous hold icon of special figure 1 with the advantageous special figure 2 hold icon, it may be easier to tell the player that special figure 2 is more advantageous.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of movement animations are simultaneously executed in the same manner, and the display manner may change for only one of the hold icons. As a result, there are cases where the change in the display mode of the hold icon can be particularly noticeable as long as the steps are aligned.

  In the present embodiment, the hold display means displays the number of game balls (the number of action hold balls) that will activate the symbol display means by the hold icon, but is not limited to this. For example, a display unit capable of displaying at least a display icon is provided, and the display unit is capable of displaying at least the hold icon / variation icon described above as the display icon. In addition, the variation icon may include an icon that is displayed for a predetermined period after the target variation ends.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  In addition, the actions and effects described in the above-described plurality of embodiments only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are included in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been described. Further, in some cases, the contents described in any of the above-described plurality of embodiments can be applied to the structures of the other embodiments to further increase the breadth of the game.

  The gaming machines described in the above-described embodiments can display at least a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display, a control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means, and a display icon. And a display with a display means. Further, the display icon may include at least a hold icon. Further, the display icon may include at least a variation icon. Further, the display icon may include at least a change end icon. Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least a display indicating the number of the operation holding balls that will operate the symbol display means by the hold icon. Here, the “variation icon” according to the present invention refers to an icon that can make a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) according to the display mode, and the “hold icon” according to the present invention. , An icon that can be used for pre-reading notice about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode, and the above-mentioned “variable icon” is a hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure variable game is held. It can be considered as a kind of.

  Subsequently, although there is a description overlapping with the above, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the effect of changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 214) by the player's operation. A card button (a CR unit), a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 216) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 215 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 214 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 217). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, and the like need to be changed for each model, and thus are provided on the back of the game board 200. The outer frame 102 is provided for common use.

  FIG. 216 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this embodiment is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In the present embodiment, the ease of entering a special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning holes 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, falls on the right path. The game ball that is to be played differs from the game ball that is to be dropped on the left path.

  Since the general start port 228 is arranged on both the right path and the left path, a game ball that falls on the right path, a game ball that falls on the left path, The difficulty or ease is the same.

  Regarding each of the special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, since the special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path, a game ball falling on the right path is inserted. Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine other than a right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 216, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 216, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, the second special symbol hold lamp, and the normal symbol hold lamp 216 respectively correspond to the number (upper limit number) that can hold the operation of the symbol display means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any lamp may be used as long as one lamp can provide a plurality of lighting modes. For example, in the case of a light source capable of four patterns of lighting modes of ultra-slow flashing, slow flashing, high-speed flashing, and lighting state maintenance, each state in which four holdings are accumulated from the state where the holding is 0, including non-lighting Can be notified.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. And one on each of the right side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are caused to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of the present embodiment includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of the present embodiment is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Accordingly, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means). (500)), or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second control unit 400 One unit combined with the sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, a sub-control unit).

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display means, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A display circuit, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, a high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and predetermined movable means, for example, various members for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this embodiment, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  The main control unit 300, or more precisely, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is a game control means for performing game control, such as a success / failure determination means, a special figure 1 display device 212, and a special figure 2 display device 214, which will be described later. It has a symbol variation display means, and controls the driving (lighting and extinguishing operation) of the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined winning opening such as a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, variable winning openings 234, 235 and the like. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 217) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and a signal stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, frequency, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 217, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is shut off and immediately recovered, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically recovered without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

  Next, using FIG. 218 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 218 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 218 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 218 (a), five types of special drawings “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 218 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234, 235 shown in FIG. 216 is represented, and 15 rounds means one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (variable prize area) ( This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first state (here, the closed state) to the second state (here, the open state). During the jackpot game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both of them shift to the electric support state.

  The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the win probability of the usual figure variable game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 100/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 12 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state for one win at the usual start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in the power-up state during the big hit game, a large number of games are entered into the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. In the electric support state (short-time state), it is possible to perform all of the change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the electric chew release period, and the increase of the electric chew release frequency. If one is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the electric support state (short time state) may be set. Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. This electric support state may be maintained after the big hit game is finished until the next big hit game is started, or after the big hit game is finished, the special figure variable game is maintained only for a predetermined number of times. If the predetermined number of times is exceeded, the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state) may be entered. In addition, when a big hit without electric support is won, the game does not enter the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  In the present embodiment, “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability common figure high probability. State. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a special diagram high probability normal diagram low probability state. “Special figure C” is 2R and is a state where the game does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 218 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are used as the stop symbol form of Special Figure 1, whereas the special pattern 2 is “Special Figure”. Four types of special maps “a” to “special map d” are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where a difference can be provided between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable. In the present embodiment, the advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1. For example, the jackpot of special figure 1 includes a latent probability change (special figure C) in which almost no ball is obtained, whereas the jackpot of special figure 2 does not include a latent probability change.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 perform one or more opening / closing operations, so that the player's advantage is relatively high compared to the loss control state. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high, and the first advantage that is less advantageous than the second advantage. The pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of the hit control state (second control state) and the loss control state (first control state). That is, after a symbol form corresponding to a specific success / failure determination result among the determination results is stopped and displayed, a gaming state (hit control state) advantageous to the player is started. The transition of the control state is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit. In the small hit control state, although the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 perform opening and closing operations, it is almost impossible to expect the balls to enter the variable winning openings 234 and 235. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state) having an advantage of 1.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are notifying means for notifying the result of the determination (lottery result), and the pattern mode (special image) corresponding to the result of the determination of the success after the start of the symbol variation. It corresponds to an example of a symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying A to special diagram E or special diagram a to special diagram d).

  FIG. 218 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  Then, the 15R special jackpot for "Special Figure A", the 15R big jackpot for "Special Figure B", the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure a", the 8R special jackpot for "Special Figure b", and the 8R big jackpot for "Special Figure c" In the case of notification, the combination of symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped. indicate. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “latency probability change (hidden probability change)” of “special drawing C” or the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” “1-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 218 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays in which the decorative symbol stop pattern mode (combination of decorative symbols) is stopped after starting this “decorative symbol variable display” is referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. There is.

  In addition, it is displayed in each symbol display area 208a-c on the left and middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 218 (a) and FIG. 218 (b)) of FIG. The decorative pattern (see (c)) of the decorative pattern (see (c)) of one decorative pattern is larger.

  FIG. 218 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are four types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A” to “general map D” that are hit symbols, and one type of “normal map E” that is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, any one of “general figure A” to “general figure D” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure E” is displayed. To stop display. Also in FIG. 218 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. A detailed description of the winning of the variable game will be described later.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays in which the stop pattern mode of the normal figure is stopped and displayed after the “variable display of the normal figure” is started may be referred to as a normal variable display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If it matches with the information (indicating that there is), the entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary figure starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next, in addition to being set in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When a winning is made to the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (the number of the special figure 1 variable games held is a predetermined number (this embodiment) If the value is less than 4), the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 is generated by performing predetermined processing. The special figure 1 winning random value is acquired, and the special figure 1 random value is obtained from the special figure 1 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. That is, the combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 217, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information. It corresponds to an example of deriving means (first starting information deriving means, second starting information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is a predetermined number (this embodiment Is less than 4)), the special figure 2 winning perturbation generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The numerical value is acquired, and the special figure 2 random value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. That is, for the special figure 2 as well, the random number values that are the start information are acquired as in the special figure 1, and the obtained random number values are the same as the set of start information stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit.

  The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  When there is a prize at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (the number of pending custom figure variable games is a predetermined number (2 in this embodiment)). If the value is less than the value, a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value as a normal winning random number and stored in the corresponding general random number storage area. Further, in this winning acceptance process, when a winning is made to the variable winning opening 234, 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234, 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Store.

  It should be noted that, regardless of whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, four types of flags A to D are prepared. In the normal state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the normal symbol per flag A is on, FIG. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the display mode of the hit symbol 1 shown in d) is obtained. When the normal symbol hit flag B is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the universal symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the hit symbol 2 display mode shown in FIG. 218 (d) is obtained. When the common symbol hit flag C is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the universal symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the hit symbol 3 display mode shown in FIG. When the normal symbol hit flag D is ON, the 7 segment LED constituting the universal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off so that the hit symbol 4 display mode shown in FIG. 218 (d) is obtained. On the other hand, when any of the common figure hit flags is OFF, the 7 segment LED constituting the universal figure display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the display pattern of the off symbol is displayed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 causes the winning symbol (any one of the normal symbols A to D shown in FIG. 218 (d)) or the off symbol (normal symbol E shown in FIG. 218 (d)). ) Is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a win, one of the four types of usual figure hit flags prepared according to the hit type (winning symbol) is turned on. If any of the common map flags is on, in the general diagram state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing at which the general diagram stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a solenoid for driving to open and close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (part of various solenoids 332). In addition, a signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is 1 or more, the random number lottery based on the random number winning value stored in the random value storage area described above (the possible numerical range is 0 to 100 and the numerical range size is 101) A hit determination is performed to determine whether the result of the figure variation game is won or not.

  FIG. 221 (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to determine whether or not to store a normal in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 takes out the normal winning random number from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the time reduction flag. If the time reduction flag is on, the normal figure high probability state is assumed, and in this embodiment, the normal figure win / fail judgment result is always a winning (winning probability is 100%). The winning probability may be less than 100%. If the time flag is off, it means that there is a normal low probability state. Therefore, the random number range of the “winning” random number value in the low probability of the normal figure in the lottery table for determining whether or not the normal figure is shown in FIG. 221 (a). Based on the random number range of “out” and “out of”, the normal / unusual determination result is determined. The winning probability is 100% in the normal high probability state, whereas it is 5% in the normal low probability state, which greatly reduces the winning probability.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the usual figure flags A to D based on the usual figure determination result.

  Next, the design of the usual figure is determined based on the result of the usual figure determination.

  FIG. 221 (b) is a diagram showing a common map determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the usual figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to the usual stop symbol form (see FIG. 218 (d)) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  If the time flag is off (ordinary low-probability state) and the normal / unusual determination result is correct, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses a dedicated random number (the possible numerical range is 0 to 99 and the numerical range). Is 100), and the dedicated random number is any of the random numbers of “general map A”, “general map B”, and “general map C” in the general chart determination table shown in FIG. 221 (d). Based on whether or not it belongs to the range, the result of the common figure determination is determined. The winning probabilities for “common chart A”, “common chart B”, and “common chart C” are almost the same, but they may be greatly different.

  If the hourly flag is on (ordinary high probability state) and the result of the usual figure is correct, the result of the usual figure decision will always be ordinary figure D, regardless of whether the hourly flag is on or off. If the result of determining whether or not the result is out of place, the result of determining the usual figure is always the usual figure E. In these cases, it is not necessary to acquire a dedicated random number, but it is also possible to acquire a dedicated random number at the time of winning a prize at the usual start port 228.

  In FIG. 221 (b), the opening / closing pattern of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is shown for reference with respect to the winning symbol of the usual figure determination result. The launching device 110 shown in FIG. 214 allows a player to play a game ball every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player. Fire towards area 124. In the present embodiment, the one-time opening of 0.5 seconds shorter than the firing period of “general map A” is referred to as normal opening. In “general map B” and “general map C”, the opening time is longer than the firing period but slightly longer, but the number of times of opening increases to three. Hereinafter, winning the “common figure B” or “common figure C” and opening the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as “normal figure long open”. In other words, the normal long open here means that the pair of blade members 232a are opened longer than the normal open ("general A") in the non-electric support state. On the other hand, in the electric support state (ordinary high probability state), the number of times of opening is one, but the opening time is significantly increased. The pair of blade members 232a closes even before reaching a predetermined opening time when there is a predetermined number of balls in one opening.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal diagram change time shortening function and the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function are activated along with the change in the general probability state.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the usual figure determination result is out of place ("common figure E"), the pair of blade members 232a remains closed.

  The opening / closing drive of the pair of blade members 232a is performed in the above-described usual state update process (step S221).

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 acquires the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal variation time determination random value as the random number value for determining the normal variation time, and acquires the acquired random number value for determining the normal variation time. Based on the above, one time for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210 is selected from the plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 fluctuation game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes flags such as a 16R big hit flag, a 15R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on FIG. 218 (b) shows the special figure a, when the 8R big hit flag is on, and when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, when the 8R big hit flag is on, and when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 16 rounds or 8 rounds in the case of the special figure 2, 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of the special figure 1), and is started at the end timing. In the special figure 2 state update processing, in order to set to wait for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In addition, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this embodiment, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing of the difference is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. Special figure B when figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure C when 2R big hit flag is on Special figure D when small hit flag is on Special figure D when special flag is on, Special figure when off flag is on E The 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in each mode, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to E. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. Further, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this embodiment, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this embodiment, special figure 1 variable game). Is called. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Or a big hit using the table for determining whether or not stored (see FIGS. 224 (a) to (d) to be described later), or a small hit (in this embodiment, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1). To decide whether or not to make a decision (determining whether or not to make a decision). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result determination result, and the like, a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 225 (a described later)). ) And (b)) are used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) shown in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (see FIGS. 226 and 227 described later).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later. Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the upper limit number of suspension | holding in each symbol display means is set to four, it is not limited to this. Further, the upper limit number of suspension may be different for each symbol display means.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), and bits 11 to 14 are command types. (In this embodiment, basic command, special figure change start command, special figure change stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). The command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 may be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500 as necessary. The commands may be the same, or may be transmitted with the same content, with different types and transmission methods.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a special figure change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2), various big hit flags, a small hit flag, and a miss flag. , Including information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and in the case of a special figure fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, special figure identification information (see special figure 1 or Special figure probability variation flag in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure pending increase command, the prefetch result Set the information.

  Further, in this step S233, a general command usual figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command usual figure pending increase processing, command figure data is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 as general figure identification information, advance notice information (preliminary advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information). ) Is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 222 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 223 (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this embodiment. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this embodiment. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the determination of true / fail (final lottery), but in the following explanation, the word pre-read is referred to as the result of the pre-judgment (final lottery) It may be used in the sense of reading a stop symbol.

  Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2 The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 222, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

  FIG. 223 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 223 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 223 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 223 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 223 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 223 (b), a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 223 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 223 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  FIG. 223 (d) shows another example in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, which is different from FIG. In this example, pre-determined success / failure determination information is stored instead of the pre-determined stop symbol information. In addition, the success / failure determination information in this example is information of “hit” or “off” and does not distinguish between big hits and small hits. As shown in FIG. 223 (d), “Hold” is stored in the storage area “hold 1”. In the storage areas “Hold 2” to “Hold 3”, “displacement” is stored, and in the storage area “Hold 4”, the determination information is not stored. Note that the big hit and the small hit may be distinguished.

  FIG. 223 (e) shows another example different from FIG. In this example, after a stop symbol is preliminarily determined, a timer group (details will be described later) related to the fluctuation time of the special graph is further preliminarily determined, and information representing the timer group is stored. As shown in FIG. 223 (e), the timer group prior determination results are stored in the storage areas “hold 1” to “hold 3”.

  Moreover, you may make it memorize | store multiple types of information (for example, the determination result and variation time information) as a prefetch result (preliminary determination result).

  As described above, the prefetch result information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 but is also transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 224 to 227 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIGS. 224 (a) to (d) show an example of a determination table for determining whether or not the lottery is performed in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Yes. 224 (a) to 224 (d) are configured with items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the ranges that can be taken by the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this embodiment are both 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 224 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 224 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 164). / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 224 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 224 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of big hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 224 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of big hit is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 224 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 224 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 and the probability of small hit is 0.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 224 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 224 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of small hit is 0. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 224 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  225 (a) and 225 (b) are examples of special figure determination tables used when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Show. The special figure determination tables shown in FIGS. 225 (a) and 225 (b) are composed of items of “result of determination / non-response”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol”. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value or special figure 1 random value. The ranges that can be taken by the special figure 2 random value and the special figure 1 random value of this embodiment are both 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  FIG. 225 (a) shows a special figure determination table for special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in the special figure 1 variable game of this embodiment, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 25% for special figure A (15R special big hit) and special figure B (15R big hit). 25%, and special figure C (latency probability change) is 50%. The ratio of probability change jackpots (Special Figure A, Special Figure C) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability change probability is 75%. Moreover, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 50% for 15R and 50% for 2R.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one kind of small hit symbol of special figure 1, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the special symbol D regardless of the special figure 1 random value. To be determined. Also, since there is only one type of missed symbol, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol E regardless of the special figure 1 random value. In FIG. 1, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided, and another symbol may be determined based on the result of random number lottery.

  FIG. 225 (b) shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), in the special figure 2 variable game of this embodiment, the special symbol a (16R special big hit) is 70% and the special figure b (8R special big hit) Is 5%, and the special figure c (8R big hit) is 25%. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figure a, special figure b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75% as in FIG. Further, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game is 70% for 16R and 30% for 8R.

  In this embodiment, since there is only one type of out-of-order symbol in special figure 2, if the result of determining whether or not special figure 2 variable game is correct is out, the stop symbol is determined as special figure d regardless of the special figure 2 random value. Is done. In FIG. 2, it is also possible to provide a plurality of different symbols and determine another symbol based on the result of random lottery.

  FIG. 226 shows an example of the timer number selection table. The timer number selection table is used when determining the timer number in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of timer number selection tables are provided, and one timer number selection table is selected based on various conditions such as a gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure and types of special figure 1 and special figure 2. . In FIG. 226, only the timer number selection table for special figure 1 that is selected when the determination of success or failure is during non-electric support is shown.

  In the timer number selection table shown in FIG. 226, the variation timer (timer number) can be determined based on the stop symbol, the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the random number value for determining the special diagram variation time. Here, the possible values of the random number value for determining the special figure variation time of the present embodiment are 0 to 65535. When the stop symbol is special figure E, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, the timer number is determined as one of timers 3 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining special figure fluctuation time. In addition, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 or more (1 to 3 in the present embodiment), the timer number is any one of the timers 2 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. To be determined. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the selection probabilities of the respective variable timers are different depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1, and the distribution of the variable timers is also different. For example, timer 2 can be selected when the number of holds is 1 or more, but is not selected when the number of holds is 0.

  As will be described later, the timers 6 to 22 are variable timers (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “variable timers greater than reach”) capable of executing effects of so-called reach or higher. In the table shown in FIG. 226, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the probability that a variable timer more than reach is selected when the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0 (reach occurrence probability) is about 1/8 (reach occurrence probability). = 8536/65536), and the probability that a variation timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 or more is approximately 1/32 (= 2036/65536). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of holds is large (for example, when the number of holds is 1 or more), the special figure variation is activated, and the reach occurrence probability due to the deviation fluctuation is lower as the number of holds is larger. ing.

  When the stop symbol is special figure A or special figure B, the timer numbers of timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, 18 to 22 are based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings of special figure 1. Decide on either. When the stop symbol is special figure C or special figure D, the timer number is determined by the timer 10 or 14 based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 1. Even in the case where the stop symbol is special figure A to special figure D, the selection probability and distribution of each variable timer may be varied depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1.

  FIG. 227 shows an example of the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer. As shown in FIG. 227, the timers 1 to 5 have a variation time of 2000 to 10000 ms, and belong to the timer group 1 (immediately a shift system). The timers 6 and 7 have a fluctuation time of 20000 to 45000 ms, and belong to the timer group 2 (expected small). The timers 8 to 10 have a fluctuating time of 15000 to 55000 ms and belong to the timer group 3 (small expectation: hit). The timers 11 to 13 have a fluctuation time of 70000 to 100000 ms and belong to the timer group 4 (expected: missed). The timers 14 and 15 have a fluctuation time of 80000 to 95000 ms and belong to the timer group 5 (expected: hit). The timers 16 and 17 have a fluctuation time of 120,000 to 150,000 ms, and belong to the timer group 6 (expected large: disappointing). The timers 18 to 22 have a fluctuation time of 105,000 to 300,000 ms and belong to the timer group 7 (expected large: hit).

  In the present embodiment, the timers 6 to 22 are reachable or more variable timers. Timers 1 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 are variation timers that are selected when the determination result of the variation is out of order, and timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, and 18 to 22 are It is a variation timer that is selected when the variation determination result is a win. When comparing variation timers that can execute the same effect type, the variation timer that is selected at the time of winning is more variable than the variation timer that is selected at the time of losing so that the winning effect can be executed after the symbol stop display. Is longer by a predetermined time (for example, 10,000 ms). For example, comparing the timer 6 and the timer 9 capable of producing a normal reach, the timer 9 selected at the time of winning has a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms longer than the timer 6 selected at the time of loss. In the special figure variable game in which the timer 6 is selected and the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the normal reach effect in the same manner is possible until immediately before the symbol stops, and in the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the symbol A predetermined winning game can be executed after the stop.

  Note that the timer number and the effect type do not necessarily correspond one-on-one, and a plurality of effect modes may be provided for one timer number. For example, when a certain timer is selected, in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, a determination based on a predetermined condition or a lottery using an effect random number is performed, You may make it select the production | presentation aspect performed with the change time of a timer from several production | presentation aspects. In addition, even if the timer numbers (variation times) are different, it may be possible to provide an effect type such that some aspects are common.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the timers 6 to 22 are selected, an effect more than reach is executed. However, whether or not an effect more than reach is executed does not necessarily depend on the timer number. Absent. For example, the lottery for the timer number and the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach or higher effect may be performed independently. The lottery for determining whether or not to perform the reach or more may be performed by the main control unit 300 or the first sub-control unit 400.

  Note that the normal reach generally stops and displays a decorative symbol having the same two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 216), and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b). ) Is in a variably displayed state (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), This is a state where the combination of symbols is to be stopped and displayed.

  Super reach A and super reach B are a type of reach in which the production effect is improved by adding a special variable display or the like to normal reach.

  In addition, as a super reach, a long reach, a normal reverse reach, a double line reach, and the like are known, and a special reach such as a special multi-line reach, a full turn reach, and a special full turn reach are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 228 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 228 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 228 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 228 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 228 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 229 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 before image data is expanded on the VRAM 436. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the ROM 406 for storing the control program and the image data, the VRAM 436 for temporarily storing the image data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406. A VDP 434 that generates a display image using a storage area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 406 stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data including still images. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 229, there are a plurality of types of movie data such as movie data MVa for movie A, movie data MVb for movie B, movie data MVc for movie C, texture data T001, texture data T002, and the like. Are stored in the ROM 406. In addition to these data, the ROM 406 previously stores control information including the resolution (image size) of movie data. In the present embodiment, information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVa is 1280 × 960, information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVb is 1024 × 768, and the resolution of the movie data MVc is 800 × 600. Control information including information indicating that is stored in the ROM 406.

  The VRAM 436 includes a movie data expansion area MVE for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area TE for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a decorative symbol display device. A frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) are provided for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on 208. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, an image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image drawing processing when a movie A is reproduced and a texture image based on texture data is displayed superimposed on the movie A. When reproducing the movie A, the first sub-control unit 400 decompresses the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) corresponding to the movie A into a plurality of image data, and then decompresses the image data for each frame. It is transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) set in the VRAM 436. In the VRAM 436 of this embodiment, in addition to the movie data development area MVE1, another movie data development area with different resolutions (for example, a movie data development area with a resolution of 1024 × 768 and a movie data development with a resolution of 800 × 600). However, since the movie data development area MVE1 having the same resolution as the movie data MVa can be used, it is preferentially used. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays texture data T001 to T004 for displaying an animation in which a plurality of texture data stored in the ROM 406 (in this embodiment, a texture image (a hold icon or a change icon described later) rotates). ) Is transferred (developed) to the texture data developing area TE (not shown in FIG. 230). Here, the texture data T001 of this embodiment corresponds to the texture image in the initial state, the texture data T002 corresponds to the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture data T003 is clockwise from the initial state. Corresponding to the texture image rotated 180 °, the texture data T004 corresponds to the texture image rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state. In this embodiment, the texture image is displayed as a moving image by animation using a plurality of texture data, but the texture image may be composed of movie data.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame buffer of the VRAM 436 based on the movie data MVa transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 and the texture data transferred to the texture data development area TE. 2 (FB2), the image data and texture data information (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP 434. At this time, 1280 × 960 is designated as an image size to be extracted from the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) to the frame buffer, and all areas of the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) can be displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 designates the entire area of the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and issues a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data MVa and an image corresponding to the texture data are displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 sequentially selects and designates four types of texture data T001 to T004 in time series to the VDP 434, thereby expressing the motion (for example, rotation) of the texture image by animation. be able to. In addition, when displaying a plurality of animations by the same texture image (for example, animations in which a plurality of held icons having the same display mode are respectively rotated), the same texture data is selected for each animation in each frame. For example, a plurality of animations can be synchronized, and a plurality of animations can be made asynchronous by selecting different texture data for each animation in each frame. In the present embodiment, four types of texture data T001 to T004 are used to express the operation of the texture image, but three or less types or five or more types of texture data may be used.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image drawing processing when a texture image that appears from outside the display area (for example, below) and gradually moves to a predetermined position in the display area is displayed. The display position of the texture image is determined based on the arrangement coordinates of the texture data that the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the VDP 434. Therefore, by setting the arrangement coordinates of the texture data to gradually different values for each frame, the movement of the texture image can be displayed by animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 231, in a state where two texture images are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area, the third texture image appears from below the display area, and two textures are displayed. An animation that gradually moves to the right next position of the image is displayed. In the leftmost frame in the figure in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436, the third texture image has a resolution of 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin (in this embodiment, the same as the range of the movie data MVa). Therefore, more than half of the texture image itself is arranged at a position protruding downward. Thereafter, in the middle frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a position above the position in the leftmost frame in the figure. Thereafter, in the rightmost frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a predetermined position (the same height as the other two texture images) further above the position in the center frame in the figure.

  After forming a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in each frame, the first sub-control unit 400 designates a range of resolution 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin and issues a drawing instruction. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a third texture image (increased) in a state where two texture images (the previous hold icon) are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area. A new hold icon) corresponding to the hold appears from below the display area, and an animation that gradually moves to the right adjacent position of the two texture images is displayed.

  As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a hold icon is displayed as an animation of a texture image. The number of held icons displayed is basically the same as the number of held special game games. Each hold icon can be prefetched about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, an animation that is executed when a hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), a previous hold is Due to the digestion, the order of the hold changes, and an animation executed when the hold icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left) (hereinafter, referred to as “pending icon moving animation”). ), Animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “change animation of the hold icon”), and corresponds to the change when the change starts Animation that is executed when the hold icon to be deleted is deleted Animation ”(sometimes referred to as“ animation ”), an animation that is executed when the priority icon on the priority side of the priority change machine is saved when the priority icon on the non-priority side is evacuated (hereinafter referred to as“ evacuation of the hold icon ”). There are cases where it is called “animation”). For example, an animation in which the display position changes from the first display position to the second display position corresponds to the movement icon movement animation. For example, an animation in which the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode corresponds to the change animation of the hold icon. In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. For example, a so-called loop animation in which the standby icon standby animation returns to the first display mode after the display mode has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode and repeats these operations is an example. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held. The variation icon and the hold icon may have the same mode. In addition, when a special figure variable game is started, a change icon displayed based on a hold corresponding to the special figure variable game is displayed as an erase animation of the hold icon displayed based on the hold corresponding to the special figure variable game. It may indicate the display of an icon. That is, an animation indicating that the role is switched from the hold icon to the change icon may be referred to as a hold icon erasure animation. In this case, the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon may be the same. That is, the erasure animation is an animation that particularly indicates that the function as the hold icon has been lost, and that indicates that the hold icon has been switched to the variable icon.

  As an animation of a mode related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is different from the hold icon display area when the hold is digested. Animation that moves to a region as a variable icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icon”) and animation that changes from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the change icon (hereinafter “hold / change” It may be called “change animation between icons”). These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently.

  FIG. 232 (a) shows an example (for example, default mode) of a standby icon standby icon corresponding to the special FIG. 1 variable game hold. In this example, the texture image in the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001, the texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the clockwise rotation from the initial state corresponding to the texture data T003. The texture image rotated by 180 ° and the texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 and rotated by 270 ° clockwise from the initial state are sequentially displayed repeatedly. Each texture image has a circular outer shape with a predetermined color, and four characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle. ("Yatsushiro Shogun" pattern). Each character is arranged so that the center direction of the circle is downward. In the four texture images, only one of the characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” is in the normal position (the vertical position is correct), and in the initial texture image “ “8” is the correct position. When the standby animation shown in FIG. 232 (a) is executed, the circular hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the circle.

  FIG. 232 (b) shows another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, the texture image in the initial state, the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, the texture image rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state Images are displayed in this order, and when the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image continues to be displayed. When this standby animation is executed, the circular hold icon is initially rotated only once, and thereafter, it is visually recognized to stop rotating and remain stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered as part or all of the hold animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. Further, when the hold increases, the first rotation may be performed with the hold icon corresponding to the hold. In this case, the first rotation can be considered as part or all of the incremental animation. Note that the increase animation and the standby animation are not necessarily related to each other.

  FIG. 232 (c) shows an example of a standby icon standby animation corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game hold. In this example, four texture images have a square outer shape. When this standby animation is executed, the square hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the square. In the present embodiment, the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 have different shapes, but they may have the same shape. In addition, even a hold icon based on the same special figure may be displayed in a different manner according to a change in the gaming state. In addition, the display mode may be different even in the hold icon based on the same special figure and in the same gaming state.

  FIG. 232 (d) shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003 are repeatedly displayed in sequence. Each texture image is consistent with the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, a character of a lanyard imitating a cactus), and the states (for example, direction and pose) are different from each other. When this standby animation is executed, a predetermined character is visually recognized as walking in the left direction in the figure. Therefore, by executing this standby animation in combination with a moving animation for moving the hold icon to the left adjacent position, the player visually recognizes that the hold icon (character) moves to the left adjacent position. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, even if the same animation is executed in the standby animation and the moving animation, by changing the interval for switching the texture image in each animation, the other animation is fast-forwarded or slow-played for one animation. You may display as if.

  FIG. 232 (e) shows yet another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 are sequentially repeated. Is displayed. The texture images all match the character pattern similar to that shown in FIG. 232 (d), and the states (for example, orientation and pose) are different from each other. Since this standby animation uses four types of texture data in the same manner as the standby animation shown in FIGS. 232 (a), (c), etc., the standby animation shown in FIGS. 232 (a), (c), etc. It is possible to match the execution time (scale) of the animation for the period. Therefore, even if the standby animation shown in FIG. 232 (e) is executed for some of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons and the standby animation shown in FIG. 232 (a) is executed for another hold icon, these standby icons are displayed. In some cases, animations can be executed synchronously. In the standby animation shown in FIG. 232 (e), after the four texture images are sequentially displayed and the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image is displayed as in FIG. 232 (b). It may be displayed continuously.

  Here, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same before and after the display mode change. Thereby, the player can be caused to pay attention only to the display mode of the hold icon, and the player can be easily made aware of the change in the display mode.

  Moreover, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the prefetch result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be made different before and after the display mode change. In this case, the sense of incongruity may be caused by the change in the scale of the standby animation, and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the hold icon. Although the description of the standby animation has been made with the hold icon, the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to the standby icon.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 233 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 233 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 233 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 233 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  FIG. 234 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the effect control process in step S809 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S1101 of the effect control process, the hold icon display control process is performed. In the next step S1103, the variable icon display control process is performed, and in the subsequent step S1104, the normal long open effect control process is performed. Details of the hold icon display control process, the variable icon display control process, and the ordinary long open effect control process will be described later. Note that the hold icon display control process and the fluctuation icon display control process may be executed independently in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, or may be executed in common in FIG. 1 and FIG. You may do it. In step S1105 following step S1104, other effect control processing is performed.

  FIG. 235 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary flow of a hold icon display control process. First, in step S1201 of the hold icon display control process, it is determined based on various commands such as the prefetch result information command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has increased. If it is determined that the number of holds has increased, the process proceeds to step S1203. If it is determined that the number of holds has not increased, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1203, a pending icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the hold icon change scenario lottery process, a hold icon display mode lottery table (FIGS. 237 to 240), which will be described later, is referred to, and the number of hold of the special figure variable game, the timer group corresponding to the increased hold, and the hold icon display Based on the random number value for the mode lottery, a hold icon change scenario for the increased hold is determined by lottery. The on-hold icon change scenario is information representing a change in the display mode of the on-hold icon until the on-hold is consumed. For example, “On winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: blue” is expressed. . The display mode of the hold icon of the present embodiment includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. If the timer group information corresponding to the increased hold cannot be acquired (for example, when prefetching is not executed), the display mode of the hold icon until the hold is consumed is set to the default “white”. Set.

  In step S 1205 following step S 1203, the determined hold icon change scenario is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 508. Here, the number of scenario storage areas in the RAM 508 is the same as the number of suspensions possible for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (in this embodiment, four for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). have. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the first hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the data (hold icon change scenario) in the storage area corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. The data in the storage area corresponding to 2 to 4 is moved up to the storage area corresponding to 1 to 3 and stored again.

  In step S1207 subsequent to step S1205, a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (including a process of setting an increase animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, it is determined whether a hold icon change condition is satisfied. The hold icon change condition is, for example, that a special figure variable game is started. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the hold icon change condition is satisfied at the timing when a command indicating the start of a special figure variation game such as a special figure fluctuation start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, and otherwise It is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1211. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. In addition, the hold icon change condition includes the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, a specific determination result in the determination of success / failure in a change before the hold icon, or a predetermined operation by the player. May be. Further, the hold icon change condition may always be satisfied before the target hold change is performed, or vice versa. In addition, it may be uncertain whether the condition is established (undefined). Further, the hold icon change condition once determined may be changed or canceled thereafter.

  In step S1211, hold icon change processing is performed. In the hold icon change process, the hold icon change scenario is read from each storage area of the scenario storage area in the RAM 508, and it is determined whether or not the display mode of each hold icon needs to be changed based on each hold icon change scenario. If a change is necessary, a process for changing the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a process for setting a change animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. For example, if it is determined that the number of holds has decreased based on the special figure change start command or the prefetch result information command from the first sub-control unit 400, the process proceeds to step S1215, and it is determined that the number of holds has not decreased. In this case, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1215, a hold icon display position change process is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds (for example, a movement animation or deletion animation of the hold icon, a movement animation between the hold / change icon, etc. is set). Process). Thereafter, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In the hold icon display position changing process, the position where the hold icon is displayed is changed from the position where the hold icon was displayed in a state before execution of the process to a position different from the position, and the process ends, and a different position After the display position of the hold icon is changed, the display returns to the position where the hold icon is displayed in the state before execution. That is, it is only necessary that the hold icon is displayed at a position different from that before the process after the process is executed.

  FIG. 236 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the change icon display control process. First, in step S1301 of the variation icon display control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special figure variation game is started. For example, if it is the timing when the special figure change start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, it is determined that the special figure change game is started, and otherwise, the special figure change game is started. It is determined that it is not. If it is determined that it is the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is determined that it is not the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1303, a variable icon lottery process is performed. In the variation icon lottery process, for example, with reference to a variation icon display mode lottery table (FIG. 241) to be described later, a display group immediately before the start of variation of the held icon corresponding to the started special figure variation game (immediately before the pending digestion). (If the display mode immediately before the start of the change of the hold icon is white, blue, or red, it is “ball system”, and if it is a box or a thousand box, it is “box system”). Based on the timer and the random number value for variation icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon for the started special figure variation game is determined by lottery. The display mode of the variation icon of this embodiment includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest”. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be determined in the hold icon display control process (step S1203) together with the display mode of the hold icon. In that case, the variation icon lottery process in step S1303 can be omitted. In that case, the information on the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be included in the hold icon change scenario.

  In step S1305 subsequent to step S1303, a process for displaying the change icon of the determined display mode in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a process for setting a movement animation or a change animation between the hold / change icons). Including). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. For example, if it is the timing from when the special figure change start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400 to when the special figure change stop command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, the special figure change game is being executed. It is determined that there is, and otherwise, it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1309. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed, the variable icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display interruption condition, for example, an effect that is executed on almost the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a super reach effect is started, or that a power interruption has occurred (for example, the first sub-control unit) The occurrence of power interruption was detected based on the command from 400). If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1311. If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313. Further, the effect of interrupting the display of the variation icon may be an effect that overlaps at least part or all of the target variation icon.

  In step S1311, change icon display interruption processing is performed. In the change icon display interruption process, a process for interrupting (or stopping or stopping) the display of the change icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1313. Here, when the display of the fluctuation icon corresponding to a certain special figure variable game is interrupted, the display of the fluctuation icon may be resumed during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game or may not be resumed. is there. The variation icon display interruption process includes a process of interrupting the display of a part of the variation icon being displayed. When the display of a part of the variation icon is interrupted, the variation icon may not be easily identified. Further, display may be performed such that the display area of the variable icon is enlarged or reduced as time passes. That is, the display interruption of the variation icon includes a state where the variation icon is not displayed or at least a part of the variation icon is not displayed.

  In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the display of the variation icon is interrupted. If it is determined that the display of the variation icon is suspended, the process proceeds to step S1315. If the display of the variation icon is not suspended (for example, the variation icon is being displayed), the process proceeds to step S1319. .

  In step S1315, it is determined whether the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display restart condition, for example, that the super reach effect has been completed, the power is restored from the power interruption state (for example, the power recovery is detected based on a command from the first sub-control unit 400), Etc. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1317. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1317, a variable icon display restart process is performed. In the variation icon display restart process, a process for resuming the display of the variation icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. In the variation icon display restart process, the display of the variation icon may not be resumed if a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In step S1319, it is determined whether the variable icon change condition is satisfied. Examples of the variable icon change condition include winning a predetermined random number lottery performed by the second sub-control unit 500. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1321, and if it is determined that the change icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1321, change icon change processing is performed. In the variation icon change processing, processing for changing the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting variation animation of the variation icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. Further, when the variation icon display interruption condition is satisfied at the same time, control is performed to change the display mode of the variation icon in a state where a part or all of the variation icon is not displayed, and the display interruption condition for the variation icon is performed. Is not established and the display is resumed, a variation icon having a display mode different from the display mode prior to the interruption may be displayed.

  In step S1323, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display end condition is satisfied. As the change icon display end condition, for example, that the special figure variable game has ended (for example, that a special figure change stop command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400), a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, etc. There is. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1325. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is not satisfied, the variable icon display control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control process. .

  In step S1325, change icon display end processing is performed. In the variation icon display end processing, processing for erasing the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting variation icon erasure animation) is performed.

  The variation icon may be displayed during all special figure variation games, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific performance mode is set or according to the game state). It may be displayed only during the special figure variable game (switching the possibility).

  FIGS. 237 to 240 show examples of the hold icon display mode lottery table used in the hold icon change scenario lottery process (step S1203) of the hold icon display control process. FIG. 237 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased fourth hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 3 (when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4). ing. FIG. 238 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the third hold that is increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 2 (when the number of holds is increased from 2 to 3). ing. FIG. 239 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the second hold that is increased when the hold number at the time of winning is 1 (when the hold number is increased from 1 to 2). ing. FIG. 240 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the first hold that is increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 0 (when the number of holds is increased from 0 to 1). ing.

  In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, a hold icon change scenario for the hold is determined based on the timer group to which the increased variable timer of the hold belongs and the random number value for the hold icon display mode lottery. Is done. The timer group to which the increased hold variation timer belongs is determined based on a prefetch result information command or the like from the first sub-control unit 400, and the hold icon display mode lottery random value is obtained from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. Is done. The range that the random number value for holding icon display mode lottery of this embodiment can take is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  For example, if the number of holds increases from 3 to 4, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 1 to 5 (timer group 1, immediately off-line), as shown in FIG. In the random number range 0 to 79), a pending icon change scenario of “at the time of winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: white, after 3 change: white” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of the display, and thereafter, white is maintained until the hold is digested and the hold icon is deleted. In the display mode column of the hold icon display mode lottery table, “-” indicates that the display mode set before that is maintained. Further, in the same display mode column, the display mode immediately before digestion of the suspension is shown in gray.

  Further, for example, when the number of holdings increases from 2 to 3, and the increased holding variable timer is timers 8 to 10 (timer group 3, expected low: hit), as shown in FIG. With the probability (random number range 56 to 60), a pending icon change scenario of “when winning: white, after 1 change: blue, after 2 change: red” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of display, changes to blue after 1 change, and changes to red after 2 changes (just before the hold is digested).

  The display mode of the hold icon of this embodiment is “red”, “blue”, “white” from the higher reliability (big hit reliability) in the ball-type hold icon display group. In the icon display group, they are “Thousand boxes” and “Boxes” from the highest reliability. In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, the timer groups 3, 5, and 7 selected at the time of winning are more reliable than the timer groups 1, 2, 4, and 6 selected at the time of losing. It is easy to select a high display mode, and it is easy to change to a display mode with high reliability. The hold animation to be described later may have its control changed according to the reliability of the displayed hold icon.

  FIG. 241 shows an example of the variation icon display mode lottery table used in the variation icon lottery process (step S1303) of the variation icon display control process. In the variable icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 241, the final display mode (holding icon display group) of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started, the variable timer of the special figure variable game, and the change Based on the random number value for icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon is determined. The random number value for the variation icon display mode lottery is acquired from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. The range that can be taken by the random icon for variation icon display mode lottery of the present embodiment is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is white (the hold icon display group is a ball system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 9, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “white” is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 0 to 34), “blue” is selected with a probability of 40% (random number range 35 to 74), and a probability of 20% ( “Red” is selected in the random number range 75 to 94), and “gold” is selected with a probability of 5% (random number range 95 to 99). In this embodiment, even if the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red other than white, the display mode (white, blue, red, gold) of the variation icon is the same probability as when the display mode is white. Although selected, if the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be different from the above probability. For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon is red, the selection probability of white or blue is lower than the above (including 0%), and the selection probability of red or gold is higher than the above (including 100%). )

  Further, for example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is a box (the hold icon display group is a box system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 14, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “smoke” (for example, a mode in which smoke comes out of the box to indicate that it is an empty box) is selected with a probability of 2% (random range 0 to 1). , “Sake” (for example, a mode in which liquor comes out of the box) is selected with a probability of 33% (random number range 2-34), and “sword” (with a probability of 30% (random number range 35-64)) For example, a mode in which a sword comes out from a box is selected, and a “family crest” (for example, a mode in which a family crest comes out from a box) is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 65 to 99). . Similarly to the case where the hold icon display group is a spherical system, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be varied depending on whether the final display form of the hold icon is a box or a thousand boxes.

  The display mode of the variation icon corresponding to the hold icon of the spherical system is “gold”, “red”, “blue”, and “white” from the higher reliability. The display mode of the fluctuation icon corresponding to the box-type hold icon is “family crest”, “sword”, “sake”, and “smoke” in order of high reliability. It should be noted that the display modes “sword” and “sake” of the fluctuation icon are confronted with the swordsman character and the sword if the specific contents (for example, “sword”) are executed during the fluctuation (for example, “sword”). This suggests a swordsman reach directing, “if you drink”, a drink comparison reach directing by confronting you with a samurai character. The jackpot reliability of each display mode shown in FIG. 240 is the reliability in the special figure 1 variable game in the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state. The reliability of each display mode of the variation icon may be different for each gaming state, or may be the same for all gaming states. In addition, the reliability of each display mode may be different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or may be the same between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. When the reliability is the same and the display mode of the icons is different, the display priority may be determined in advance for one of the icons.

  Here, when referring to reliability, general reliability indicates the ratio of occurrence of a target event among multiple occurrences, but reliability in this industry is a big hit. It is an abbreviation for reliability and indicates what percentage of the abbreviation is a big hit when an effect of the same mode is executed. For example, the display mode “red” of the variation icon having a reliability of 30.3% notifies the player that the probability that the success / failure result of the variation is a big hit is 30.3%, The player is informed that the probability that the result will be out of date is 69.7%. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is notifying the jackpot reliability at the same time and notifying the reliability at the same time. In addition, the reliability is not limited to a value of 1, and may have a width, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution of the random number range in the table shown in FIG. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  As described above, there are five display modes of the hold icon of the present embodiment: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. There are eight display modes of the fluctuation icon: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, “family crest”. Among these, three types of “white”, “blue”, and “red” are common display modes for the hold icon and the change icon. Two types of “box” and “thousand box” are display modes specific to the hold icon, and five types of “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest” are specific to the change icon It is a display mode. In other words, there are three types of common display modes and two types of unique display modes in the hold icon display mode of the present embodiment, and three types of common display modes and five types of display modes of variable icons. There is a unique display mode. In the present embodiment, the number of unique display modes of variable icons (5 in the present embodiment) is larger than the number of unique display modes of hold icons (2 in the present embodiment). The display mode of the hold icon may be a common display mode (unique display mode is 0).

  FIG. 242 is a diagram showing a part of a flowchart showing the flow of the general map long opening effect control process (step S1104) shown in FIG. 234, and FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the remaining part of the flowchart shown in FIG. .

  The RAM 508 of the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a general figure long open effect execution flag and a general figure long open effect execution flag. The RAM 508 of the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a special figure 2 special hold counter.

  In the general map long opening effect control process, first, it is determined whether or not the general map long opening effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S451). If it is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S461 shown in FIG. If it is set to OFF, the process advances to step S452 shown in FIG. In step S452, it is determined whether or not the ordinary long open effect execution flag is set to OFF. If it is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S471 shown in FIG. 243, and if it is set to OFF. , The process proceeds to step S453 shown in FIG. In step S453, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 special hold counter is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S481 shown in FIG. 243, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S454 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, by executing step S453, the execution of a new ordinary long opening effect is restricted until all the suspension of the special figure 2 won during the ordinary long opening is completed. In addition, there is a case where the pair of blade members 232a (electric Chu) of the special figure 2 starting port 232 are opened without the ordinary drawing long opening effect being executed.

  In step S454, it is determined whether or not the normal map is changing. The second sub-control unit 500 is transmitted with a general-purpose change start command indicating the start of a normal change and a normal-use change stop command indicating a change stop of the normal view via the first sub-control unit 400. come. The common figure change start command includes a winning symbol of the universal figure determination result. The RAM 508 of the second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a normal change flag. When the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 saves the common figure change start command as an unprocessed command in step S901 shown in FIG. 233 (b), the CPU 504 performs various update processes (step S1003) shown in FIG. 233 (c). Set the figure fluctuation flag to ON. In addition, when the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 stores the normal map change stop command as an unprocessed command in step S901, it sets the flag for normal map change to OFF in various update processes in step S1003. In step S454, if the normal symbol variation flag is set to OFF, it is determined that the normal symbol variation is stopped, and the general diagram long opening effect control process is ended. On the other hand, if the normal map change flag is set to ON, it is determined that the normal map is changing, and this time, the normal symbol hit pattern included in the normal map change start command is the normal map B or normal map C. (Step S455). If the hit pattern of the ordinary figure is the ordinary figure B or the ordinary figure C, the process proceeds to step S458, and if the hit figure of the ordinary figure is the ordinary figure A or the ordinary figure D, the ordinary figure long open gas is displayed. A roaring effect lottery process is executed (step S456). In this ordinary figure long open rubbing effect lottery process, a dedicated random number is obtained from the RAM 508, random number lottery is performed, and then in step S457, it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure long open rubbing effect lottery is won. If not, the ordinary long open effect control process ends. On the other hand, if it is won, the process proceeds to step S458.

  In step S458, the usual figure long-opening effect is executed. Here, an effect image of the golf game (see FIGS. 256 (a) and (b)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In step S459 following step S458, the ordinary figure long open turning effect execution flag is set to ON, and this ordinary figure long opening effect control process ends.

  In step S461 shown in FIG. 243 (a), which is executed when the usual figure long open turning effect execution flag is turned on, it is determined whether or not the usual figure variation is stopped. If the normal map change flag is set to ON, the normal map long release effect control process is terminated. If the normal map change flag is set to OFF, the normal map long release effect execution flag is set. Set to off (step S462). In the present embodiment, the ordinary long open turning effect is continuously performed until the ordinary long open turning effect execution flag is turned off.

  Next, the ordinary long opening effect is executed (step S463). Here, an effect image (see FIG. 256 (c)) recommended to be right-handed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In step S464 following step S463, the ordinary figure long opening effect execution flag is set to ON (step S464), and this ordinary figure long opening effect control process is ended.

  In step S471 shown in FIG. 243 (b), which is executed when the normal figure long opening effect execution flag is turned on, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold has occurred. A special figure hold increase command including special figure identification information is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 via the first sub control unit 400. In step S471, it is determined whether or not a special figure pending increase command including information indicating special figure 2 is received as special figure identification information. If not received, the process proceeds to step S473. 2 The value of the special hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S472), and the process proceeds to step S473.

  The second sub-control unit 500, via the first sub-control unit 400, an electric chew release command for reporting the opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, and an electric chew for reporting the closure. A close command is also sent. In step S473, it is determined whether or not an electric chew closing command has been received, that is, whether or not the opening of the pair of blade members 232a (electric chow) of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed, If it has not been received, this ordinary figure long opening effect control process ends. If it has been received, the ordinary figure long opening effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S474), and this ordinary figure long opening effect control process ends. become.

  In step S481 shown in FIG. 243 (c) executed when the value of the special figure 2 special hold counter is 1 or more, the special figure 2 is shown as special figure identification information via the first sub-control unit 400. It is determined whether or not a special figure change start command including the information shown is received, and if not received, this ordinary figure long opening effect control process is terminated, and if received, the special figure 2 special hold counter The value is decreased by 1 (step S482), and the process proceeds to step S483.

  In step S483, the special figure 2 special variation effect process is executed. In the special figure 2 special variation effect processing, the special effect (((the special figure variation time) included in the special figure variation start command) is combined with the variation time of the special figure 2 display device 214 (( 256 (e) to (g)) are made to be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In other words, in this embodiment, when the holding of the special figure 2 increased during the execution of the ordinary long opening effect varies. When the execution of step S483 is completed, this ordinary figure long open effect control process ends.

  As described above, it is possible to provide a period during which the special figure 2 is likely to fluctuate in the normal figure low probability state in which the special figure 2 having a high advantage is not likely to fluctuate by providing the special figure long opening effect. In addition, during this period, the hold is more likely to accumulate than usual, so the display frequency of the hold icon, which will be described later, may be improved.

  Next, a specific example of the effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  First, the hold icon corresponds to one hold. One hold means that the start of one symbol variation display is held, and start information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. That is, it can be seen that the start information is stored as a hold. Then, even when the winning number is won in the state where the number of holdings is 0, the starting information is once stored in the RAM 308, so that it can be regarded as being held. Moreover, it can be seen that the determination of success / failure is held, and one hold means that execution of one determination / determination is held. Also, the start of one symbol variation display can be regarded as the operation of the symbol display means, and in that case, the one symbol display means can be regarded as being suspended. Furthermore, since the symbol variation display is a symbol based on the lottery result at the end of the display, and a combination of ornamental symbols based on the lottery result is displayed in the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the symbol or combination of the symbol based on the lottery result It can be considered that the display of is suspended.

  The holding condition is a condition that is established when there is a winning at the starting port and the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number (that is, when the holding condition is not full), and when the holding condition is established, the number of holdings increases by one. . On the other hand, if the pending digestion condition is a special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure operation set by turning on the big hit flag is turned on (that is, during the big hit game). Determine whether it is larger. If the number of holdings is 1 or more, the holding digest condition is established, the determination of success or failure is performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. That is, the reserved digest condition matches the symbol variation start condition when there is a hold (when the number of holds is 1 or more).

  The hold display condition is a condition for increasing the hold icon that is a hold display. In the present embodiment, the hold display condition is satisfied when the number of holds increases. That is, in the case of a special figure, this is a condition that is established at the same time that the above-described holding condition is established at the timing when the special figure starting port 230, 232 has entered the ball. In other words, it is a condition that is satisfied when the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is suspended. However, the hold display condition is, for example, a condition that is satisfied when the start of the special symbol variation display is suspended and the next special symbol variation display is started if the special symbol variation display is in progress. Also good.

  The hold display condition may be the same as the hold condition. In order to establish the hold display condition, it may be necessary to establish another condition in addition to the hold condition.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an increase animation, an erasure animation, and a movement animation are performed.

  In each figure after FIG. 244, the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 when time elapses in the order of (a), (b), (c). The state of the display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is shown. A hold icon display area 2081 and a variable icon display area 2082 are provided below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon display area 2081 is divided into a display area for the special figure 1 and a display area for the special figure 2, for example, it may be arranged in two upper and lower stages or left and right, or one display area without dividing the two. However, unless otherwise specified, the display area for the special figure 2 is omitted, and the hold icon display area 2081 for the special figure 1 is shown larger. A hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 2081. Hereinafter, the hold based on the oldest winning will be referred to as the first holding, and the subsequent holdings will be referred to as the second holding, the third holding, and the fourth holding from the oldest winning order. They are referred to as icon h1, second hold icon h2, third hold icon h3, and fourth hold icon h4. Further, the hold icon representing the hold that has been digested (design variation display has started) exits from the hold icon display area 2081 and moves to the change icon display area 2082. In the following description, the first hold icon h1 before the symbol variation display is started will be referred to as the variation icon H0 when the symbol variation display is started. The variation icon H0 is a change of the hold icon. That is, it can be seen as a kind of hold icon. The variation icon H0 is deleted in the variation icon display area 2082.

  In the following explanations, it is assumed that the special-figure 2 priority variation machine is in a non-electric support state unless otherwise specified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, as shown in the time chart of (X) in FIG. 24 where time elapses from left to right, the increase animation of the held icon is started by the start winning and fluctuates before the end of the increase animation. An erasing animation of the icon H0 is started. The erasing animation ends at the same time as the end of the symbol variation display (end of the final display), the next symbol variation display is started, and the moving animation is also started at the same time. The increase animation here corresponds to an example of the first hold animation, and the erasure animation corresponds to an example of the second hold animation. Further, when the erasure animation is an example of the first hold animation, the movement animation corresponds to an example of the second hold animation. In the example shown in FIG. 244, the increase animation and the movement animation are not displayed in succession. However, due to the erase animation displayed at least between these animations, a plurality of hold animations including the increase animation and the movement animation are displayed as one hold animation. It can look as if it is. That is, it is possible to make the player have an illusion as if one animation is continuously performed during the period of the white thick arrow shown in FIG.

  As shown in this example, in a region where a hold animation is performed, a player can be focused on the region by always performing some movement regarding the hold. Furthermore, by continuously displaying the hold animation performed based on the establishment of the contradictory conditions, it is difficult for the player to overlook the change in the increase / decrease in the number of holds.

  Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  In FIG. 244 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed in a state where two suspensions of special figure 1 remain. In the variation icon display area 2082, a variation icon H0 in which the hold icon indicating that the start of the currently displayed symbol variation display has been suspended is displayed.

  In FIG. 244 (b), in the state where the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 performed in the same figure (a) is continuing, there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the holding icon increases. The execution condition (start condition) of the increase animation of the hold icon is a condition that is satisfied when the hold increases. In FIG. 6B, an increase animation of the hold icon is started, and the third hold icon h3 protrudes from the lower edge of the display screen in the default display mode (white). Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the display mode of the hold icon is the default display mode, but the display mode may be different from the default mode.

  In the middle of the process from FIG. 244 (b) to FIG. 244 (c), an erase animation of the variation icon H0 is started in the variation icon display area 2082. FIG. 244 (c) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 performed in FIGS. (A) and (b) is stopped, and the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is shown in FIG. The third hold icon h3 continues to move toward the hold icon display area 2081.

  In FIG. 244 (d), the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 stopped and displayed in FIG. 24 (c) is fixedly displayed, and the last scene of the erase animation of the fluctuation icon H0 (the scene immediately before disappearing completely) is displayed. Has been. The increase animation of the third hold icon h3 has already ended, and the third hold icon h3 is displayed in the hold icon display area 2081. In the case of an animation even if no movement or change of the symbol is performed (that is, a still image is also an animation), the hold displayed in the hold icon display area 2081 including the third hold icon h3. The icons h <b> 1 to h <b> 3 do not change the display position or the display mode, but execute a standby animation.

  In FIG. 244 (e), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and the moving animation is started. The execution condition (start condition) of the moving animation is a condition that is satisfied when the number of suspensions decreases. In the moving animation, the icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until now changes to the change icon H0, and the movement toward the change icon display area 2082 starts while the size increases, and the second hold icon until now. The icon that was h2 starts to move to the position of the first hold icon h1, and the icon that was the third hold icon h3 increased by the increase animation due to the previous prize starts to move to the position of the second hold icon h2. .

  In FIGS. 244 (f) and (g), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 started in FIG. 24 (e) is continued, and the movement animation is also continuously performed in FIG. In (g), the moving animation ends, the fluctuation icon H0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 2082, and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are displayed in the hold display area 2081.

As described above, in the example using FIG. 244, “the symbol display means capable of executing at least the symbol variation display,
Control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is capable of holding at least the start of the symbol variation display when a holding condition is established,
When a hold display condition is established, a hold display means capable of increasing the hold icon at least is provided.
The hold display condition includes at least that the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The hold display means is capable of displaying the hold icon in a first hold animation,
The hold display means is capable of displaying the hold icon in a second hold animation,
When the first condition is satisfied, the hold display unit is configured to display the second hold animation after the start of the display of the first hold animation and before the end of the display of the first hold animation. The display can be started,
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. That is, “a symbol display means capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
A holding display unit capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of operation holding balls to be operated by the symbol display unit by a holding icon;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a first hold animation,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a second hold animation,
The first hold animation includes at least a mode in which the hold icon changes,
The second hold animation includes at least a mode in which the hold icon changes,
When the first condition is satisfied, the hold display means is the second hold animation after the display of the first hold animation and before the end of the display of the first hold animation. At least be able to start displaying
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this game machine, there are cases where the interest of the game machine can be improved by notifying information about the hold in various ways.

  In addition, there is a case where the interest of the game stand can be improved by executing a plurality of holding animations for the same holding icon simultaneously or successively.

  In addition, since the first hold animation that has been executed first can attract attention to the hold icon, it may be possible to prevent the second hold animation that is executed later from being overlooked.

  The on-hold display means may be capable of displaying at least one on-hold icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display is on-hold once when the on-hold display condition is established (hereinafter, the same).

  The first condition may be a suspended digestion condition. The holding digest condition may be a condition including at least that the number of holdings is stored in the holding storage unit.

  Further, the display of the first hold animation and the second hold animation may be started at the same time, or the display of the second hold animation is displayed during the display of the first hold animation. The display of the second hold animation may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the first hold animation.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the increase animation and the movement animation are continuously performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 245, as shown in the time chart of (X) in the figure, the increase animation of the hold icon is started by the start winning, and the movement animation is started simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. The increase animation here corresponds to an example of the first hold animation, and the movement animation corresponds to an example of the second hold animation. The example shown in FIG. 245 is an example of a plurality of hold animations in which the end timing and the start timing overlap, and the display position and movement of the hold icon at the end of the increase animation (first hold animation) Since the display position of the hold icon at the start time of the animation (second hold animation) is the same, it is easier to make the player have an illusion as if it were one hold animation. That is, it is possible to make the player feel more illusion as if one animation is continuously performed during the period of the white thick arrow shown in FIG. In addition, in the hold animation performed continuously, the display position of the hold icon at the end of the hold animation executed first and the display position of the hold icon at the start of the hold animation executed later are completely As long as it does not match, it is sufficient if In this example, the hold icon moves in both the increase animation and the movement animation. However, the hold icon moving speed (playback speed) in the increase animation and the hold icon moving speed (playback speed) in the movement animation are shown. May be matched, the former may be faster, or vice versa. Further, as will be described later, the moving speed of the hold icon in the increase animation may be adjusted so that the end timing coincides with the start timing. Rather than interrupting the hold animation, the player is more illusioned when the playback speed of the hold animation is changed. Similarly, the end timing of the increase animation (first on-hold animation) and the start timing of the movement animation (second on-hold animation) do not need to be completely coincident with each other. Also good.

  Hereinafter, although detailed description will be made with reference to FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (f), description overlapping with the example illustrated in FIGS. 244 (a) to (g) may be omitted.

  FIGS. 245 (a)-(b) are the same as FIGS. 244 (a)-(b), but in the fixed display of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed in FIGS. In FIG. 245 (c), the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is continuously performed. This increasing animation ends just before the next symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 245 (d) where the symbol variation display of the next special diagram 1 is started, the movement animation is started. . That is, simultaneously with the end of the increase animation of the third hold icon h3, the movement animation of the hold icon including the third hold icon h3 is started. In this way, when the timing of the end of the hold animation executed earlier matches the start timing of the hold animation executed later, as described above, the game is played as if those hold animations were executed continuously. May cause an illusion. Here, if the movement speed (playback speed) of the hold icon in the increase animation is kept constant, or if the increase animation starts immediately when there is an increase in the hold, the start of the increase animation depends on the winning timing. Therefore, the probability that the end timing of the increase animation matches the start timing is greatly reduced. Therefore, if the number of holds increases during the symbol variation display, the first animation (in this case, the increase animation) starts to be executed based on the time until the symbol variation display is stopped (the next symbol variation display is started). May be delayed or the execution time of the first animation may be adjusted. For example, if it can be determined at the start of the increase animation that the variable animation will stop during the increase animation (the next fluctuation start), the movement speed of the hold icon in the increase animation will be increased (fast forward playback) and increased. The animation execution time may be shortened.

  In this example, the erasure animation of the variation icon H0 is performed overlapping with the increase animation, but at least one of the first animation and the second animation performed successively and the third overlapping the execution period. The animation may be performed.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the increase animation and the movement animation are continuously performed in a state where the number of holds is zero.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, as shown in the time chart of (X) in FIG. 246, the increase animation of the hold icon is started by the start winning and the symbol variation display is also started, and the movement animation is displayed simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. Be started. The increase animation here corresponds to an example of the first hold animation, and the movement animation corresponds to an example of the second hold animation. This example is an example in a state where the number of holds is 0. When the number of holds is 0 and there is a prize at the special drawing start port, the start of the movement animation is delayed and the end of the increase animation At the same time, the moving animation is started. Since the increase animation and the movement animation are continuously performed due to the delay of the start of the movement animation, it looks as if it is one pending animation. That is, it is possible to make the player have an illusion as if one animation is continuously performed during the period of the white thick arrow shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, it explains in full detail using FIG. 246 (a)-(g).

  In FIG. 246 (a), there is no special figure hold and no special symbol variation display is performed. No hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 2081 shown in FIG. 246 (a), and the change icon H0 is not displayed in the change icon display area 2082.

  In FIG. 246 (b), there is a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holds increases from 0 to 1.

  FIG. 246 (c) is a diagram illustrating a state after 4 milliseconds after the holding increase is performed. In FIG. 246 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the same figure (b). Further, when the number of hold increases from 0 to 1, an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is also started. From the winning to Special Figure 1 starting port 230 to the start of the increase animation is actually a phenomenon that is performed in an instant. In the present embodiment, the number of holds is reduced in the main control unit timer interrupt process after the main control unit timer interrupt process in step S217 shown in FIG. You may make it reduce the number of pending | holdings in the detected main control part timer interruption process.

  In FIG. 246 (d), the increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is continued. In FIG. 246 (e), the increase animation ends, and the first hold icon h1 is temporarily displayed in the hold icon display area 2081. In (c) to (e) of the figure, a hold animation is performed that moves away from the actual number of holds. That is, although the actual number of holds is zero, an animation in which the number of holds is increasing is being performed. However, since it is true that the number of holds has increased due to the start winning prize, even if a period that does not correspond to the actual number of holds has occurred, the player who misrepresents the number of holds has been shown by the execution of the hold animation. It ’s hard.

  In short, there may be a hold animation that deviates from the actual hold number, and the display of the hold number at the time when the hold animation ends does not correspond to the actual hold number. Here, after the hold animation ends, a hold animation that approaches the actual number of holds may be performed. Further, the hold animation that departs from the hold number and the hold animation that approaches the hold number may be continuously performed (looks like one hold animation). Even if the number of holds changes during execution of the hold animation, the hold animation being executed does not have to be canceled. This is because the change in the number of holds is performed instantaneously, and the hold animation based on the change in the number of holds is performed over time. As a result, the change in the number of holds made in an instant is easily overlooked by the player, so even if the display is contrary to the actual number of holds, the change in the number of holds will be displayed by displaying the hold animation over time. It is hard to overlook. In addition, since a hold animation that finally approaches the correct hold number is performed, there is a case where misrecognition of the hold number itself can be prevented. Furthermore, since the hold animation that departs from the hold number and the hold animation that approaches the hold number are continuously performed, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition of the hold number.

  Simultaneously with the end of the increase animation, a moving animation of the variable icon H0 that was the first hold icon h1 is started. As shown in FIG. 8F, the first hold icon h1 changes to the change icon H0 and starts moving toward the change icon display area 2082. In FIG. Ends. Special Figure 1 From the winning to the starting port 230 ((b) in the figure) through the increasing animation to the end of the moving animation (number (h)), the phenomenon occurs almost at the same time. In this case, a continuous display for emphasizing that one phenomenon is expressed, that is, a display as if a plurality of hold animations are one hold animation, is performed.

  Note that an animation for moving directly to the variable icon display area 2082 without going through the hold icon display area 2081 may be performed by an increase animation.

  FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is an interval between the increase animation and the change animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 247, as shown in the time chart of FIG. The change animation of the hold icon in this example is a hold animation that starts when the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 214 is pressed. The delay of the press of the chance button 136 causes the end of the increase animation and the change animation. There is an animation non-execution period between the start and the start.

  Hereinafter, although detailed description will be made with reference to FIGS. 247 (a) to 247 (h), descriptions overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 244 (a) to (g) may be omitted. In this example, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed in FIG. 247 (a) continues until FIG. 247 (h).

  247 (a) to 247 (b) are the same as FIGS. 244 (a) to (b). However, in the increased animation of the third hold icon h3 started in FIG. The display mode imitates the chance button 136, not the default display mode from the beginning. The increase animation of the third hold icon h3 ends in FIG. 247 (d), and the hold icon display area 2081 displays the third hold icon h3 having a display mode imitating the chance button 136. In this example, the player does not press the chance button 136 simultaneously with the end of the increase animation of the third hold icon h3, and after a while, presses the chance button 136 (see FIG. 247 (f)). As a result, the change animation of the third hold icon h3 is started from FIG. 247 (f) across the animation non-execution period shown in FIG. 247 (e), and changes to the first display mode in FIG. In the same figure (g), it changes to a 2nd display mode, and in the same figure (h), it changes to a 3rd display mode (here the display mode of a prefetch notice), and a change animation is complete | finished.

  If the player presses the chance button 136 simultaneously with the end of the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 (FIG. 247 (d)), the increase animation and the change animation are continuously performed. That is, it may be performed continuously depending on the timing. Further, if the pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted from the start to the end of the increase animation, the increase animation and the change animation may be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a movement animation is started between an increase animation and a change animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, as shown in the time chart of (X) in FIG. 248, the increase animation of the hold icon is started by the start winning, and the movement animation is started simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. Then, the chance button 136 is pressed during the execution of the movement animation, the change animation is started, and the change animation is executed in an overlapping manner with the previously started movement animation. The increase animation here corresponds to an example of the first hold animation, and the movement animation corresponds to an example of the second hold animation. Further, when the movement animation is an example of the first hold animation, the change animation corresponds to an example of the second hold animation. In the example shown in FIG. 248, the second hold animation started after the start of the execution of the first hold animation ends before the end of the first hold animation, as if there is one hold animation. appear. That is, it is possible to make the player have an illusion as if one animation is continuously performed during the period of the white thick arrow shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, although detailed description will be made with reference to FIGS. 248 (a) to 248 (h), descriptions overlapping with the examples illustrated in FIGS. 247 (a) to 247 (h) may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed in FIG. 248 (a) is confirmed and displayed in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 248 (d), the increase animation of the third hold icon h3, which is a display mode imitating the chance button 136, is terminated simultaneously with the symbol variation display. In this example, the erasing animation of the change icon H0 is completed before the confirmation display.

  In FIG. 248 (e), the symbol fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and the moving animation is started. That is, the moving animation is started simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. The moving animation started here continues until it ends in FIG. While the movement animation is being performed, the chance button 136 is pressed, and the change animation of the third hold icon h3 is started (see FIG. 248 (f)). The third hold icon h3 is moved by the moving animation, changes to the first display mode in (f) of the figure, changes to the second display mode (not shown), and then changes to the third display mode (g) of FIG. Here, the pre-read notice display mode) is changed, and the change animation ends before the movement animation ends. That is, in this example, a plurality of hold animations (movement animation and change animation) are simultaneously executed for one hold icon (third hold icon h3).

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a time chart of an example in which different combinations of holding animations are performed in two symbol variation displays, and FIG. 250 shows the state of the example shown in the time chart of FIG. 249 step by step. FIG.

  The hold animation in the first symbol variation display is shown in the time chart of FIG. The movement animation is started by the start of the first symbol variation display, and the deletion animation is started simultaneously with the end of the movement animation, and the deletion animation is completed by the final display of the symbol variation display.

  The hold animation in the second symbol variation display is shown in the time chart of FIG. The moving animation is also started by starting the second symbol variation display. This movement animation is set to have a short execution time, and the fluctuation icon H0 quickly reaches the fluctuation icon display area 2082, and the movement animation ends. Simultaneously with the end of the moving animation, an erasing animation is started here.

  Details will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In FIG. 250 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure performs a definite display, and three special figure 1 holds remain. The display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the third hold icon h3 are haniwa characters imitating cactus, and the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a Tono-sama character. Tono-sama character and Minowa character are examples of the display form of the pre-reading notice. In this example, Tono-sama character has higher reliability than Minowa character.

  In FIG. 250 (b), the first symbol variation display described with reference to FIG. 249 (X) is started, and this first symbol variation display is continued until the final symbol variation display in FIG. Simultaneously with the start of the first symbol variation display, a moving animation is also started. The moving animation here is an animation in which the hold icon changes the display position while changing the display mode in a loop, and the standby animation is executed simultaneously. In other words, the standby animation shown in FIG. 232 (d) is executed on the change icon H0 and the hold icon h3 of the character of the haniwa. Note that the symbol change end of the standby animation may be varied depending on the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the presence or absence of the prefetch notice or the reliability).

  In FIG. 250 (d), the fluctuation icon H0 reaches the fluctuation icon display area 2082, and the movement animation ends and the standby animation also ends. At the same time as the moving animation is finished, the erasing animation of the variation icon H0 is started, and the variation icon H0 of the character of the heel displayed in the variation icon display area 2082 gradually becomes thinner (transparent), and the first design The erase animation ends before the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 250E).

  In FIG. 250 (f), after the breathing animation has ended, the second symbol variation display described with reference to FIG. 249 (Y) is started, and this second symbol variation display is the same. It continues in figure (i). The moving animation is started simultaneously with the start of the second symbol variation display. The moving animation here has a shorter execution time than a character with a low reliability so that the variation icon H0 is a highly reliable character. That is, the execution time of the moving animation may be varied according to the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice and the reliability. The execution time of the moving animation may be varied depending on the fluctuation time of the special drawing. For example, if the fluctuation time is long, the execution time of the moving animation may be lengthened to match the time length of the fluctuation time, and conversely, the execution time may be shortened to make the player see other effects. Also good. In this example, since the reliability is high, the execution time is set short, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon are quickly moved. The change icon H0 of the Tono-sama character reaches the change icon display area 2082, and at the same time as the moving animation is finished, a standby animation is started (see (g) in the figure). The standby animation here is a standby animation of the fluctuation icon H0 in the fluctuation icon display area 2082, and it is expected that the current symbol fluctuation display (second symbol fluctuation display) is expected to be a big hit. It is made conspicuous by the standby animation of the icon H0 (see (h) in the figure). Note that a change animation may be executed instead of the standby animation. When the standby animation ends after the lapse of a predetermined time, the erasing animation is started, and the variation icon H0 of the character of the character displayed in the variation icon display area 2082 gradually becomes thinner (transparent) (FIG. 250 ( i)).

  As described above, the standby animation of the variation icon H0 in the variation icon display area 2082 is not performed in the first symbol variation display, but is performed in the second symbol variation display. As described above, the time until the erasure animation is started is varied by switching whether or not the standby animation can be executed depending on the mode of the hold icon (fluctuation icon) (presence / absence of hold prefetch notice and reliability).

  As described above, in the example using FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, when the second condition (for example, the fluctuation icon H0 reaches the fluctuation icon display area) is satisfied, the first hold animation (in other words, FIG. The display of the second hold animation (in other words, the erase animation shown in FIG. 249 (X)) is started simultaneously with the end of the display of the movement animation shown in FIG. 249 (X). If the predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation icon H0 reaches the fluctuation icon display area, the second icon is displayed after the end of the display of “the first hold animation (in other words, the movement animation shown in FIG. 249 (X))”. Is a game machine that can start displaying a hold animation (in other words, an erase animation shown in FIG. 249 (X)).

  In addition, when the third condition (for example, the start of symbol variation display) is satisfied, the first hold animation (in other words, the erase animation shown in FIG. Display of the hold animation (in other words, the movement animation shown in FIG. 249 (Y)) is started. Therefore, “if the third condition is satisfied, the first hold animation (in other words, FIG. 249 (see FIG. 249) after the end of the display of the second hold animation, the deletion animation shown in FIG. 249 (X)). A game machine that can start displaying the movement animation) shown in Y).

That is, “the hold display means is capable of at least starting the display of the second hold animation after the end of display of the first hold animation when the second condition is satisfied,
The hold display means is capable of at least starting display of the first hold animation after the end of display of the second hold animation when the third condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  The second condition may be the same condition as the third condition.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to surprise a player who thought it was a single hold animation. Further, when only the first hold animation or only the second hold animation is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, there is a case where the player can be noticed by the hold icon.

  In the example using FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, “if the display position change condition (for example, the start of symbol variation display, that is, the suspension of the hold) is satisfied, the first position (for example, the hold icon display area) The position where the first hold icon h1 of 2081 is displayed)) is displayed on the hold icon (for example, the first hold icon h1 of the character-like character shown in FIG. 249 (e)). If at least a different second position (for example, the fluctuation icon display area 2082) can be displayed and a display mode change condition (for example, the fluctuation icon H0 has reached the fluctuation icon display area) is satisfied, the first The hold icon (for example, the first hold icon) is displayed in the display mode (for example, the display mode of the change icon H0 of Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 249 (g)). The variation icon H0 changed from h1 can be displayed at least in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, the display mode of the variation icon H0 of the character-like character shown in FIG. 249 (h)). That is, when the display position of the hold icon is changed from the first position to the second position, a hold movement animation can be displayed, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the first display mode. When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the hold display mode change animation can be displayed. Here, the first hold animation (movement animation) is composed of the hold movement animation or the hold display mode change animation, and the second hold animation (erase animation) is the hold movement animation or the It may consist of a hold display mode change animation.

In short, “the hold display means can execute at least one of the hold movement animation and the hold display mode change animation as the first hold animation,
The hold display means can execute at least display of the hold movement animation and the hold display mode change animation as the second hold animation,
The hold movement animation includes at least a mode in which a display position of the hold icon changes,
The hold display mode change animation includes at least a mode in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  Here, according to the combination of the movement animation and the movement animation, it is possible to prevent an oversight of the movement animation that represents an increase or decrease in the number of holds. It may be possible to prevent misrecognition of a player's hold number.

  Also, what are the combinations of moving animations and moving animations, and changing animations and moving animations? By changing the display mode of the hold icon that has attracted attention by moving the hold icon, it may be possible to improve interest while preventing the change in the display mode from being overlooked. In some cases, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the number of holds that occurs when a change is missed.

  Further, according to the combination of the change animation and the change animation, attention can be drawn by the first-stage change animation and surprised by the second-stage change. Moreover, the opportunity to change the hold icon can be increased.

  Further, in the example using FIGS. 249 and 250, “the hold icon displayed in the first hold animation (moving animation) when the display of the second hold animation (erase animation) is started”. Can be displayed at the third position (here, the same position as the second position), and when the display of the second hold animation (erase animation) is started, the second hold animation “A game stand that can display the displayed hold icon at the third position (here, the same variable icon display area 2082 as the second position)”. That is, “the hold display means displays the hold icon displayed in the first hold animation and the second hold animation when the display of the second hold animation is started. A game table characterized in that a hold icon can be displayed at least at the same position. Was explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to emphasize that there is a continuity by performing a plurality of hold animations for the hold icon displayed at the same position. The illusion can be made as if it is a hold animation.

  The third position is the display position of the hold icon that was displayed in the first hold animation at the end of the first hold animation, and the display is started in the second hold animation. The display position of the hold icon to be displayed at the time of starting the second hold animation may be used. Further, the end time of the first hold animation and the start time of the second hold animation may coincide with each other in time, or the time interval may be long.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the standby animation is not executed simultaneously with other animations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 251, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 25 (X), the increase animation of the hold icon is started by the start winning, and the movement animation is started simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. Then, the erase animation is started simultaneously with the end of the moving animation. In this example, the standby animation is not executed while any pending animation is being executed.

  Hereinafter, although it explains in full detail using FIG. 251 (a)-(g), the description which overlaps with the description so far may be abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 251 (a), there is no special figure hold and no special symbol variation display is performed.

  In FIG. 251 (b), there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of holds increases from 0 to 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is also provided. Be started. The display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a display mode in the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001 shown in FIG. 232 (a) (display mode in which the character “yoshi” faces upward). While the increase animation is executed, the display mode is not changed, and the standby animation is not executed.

  In FIG. 251 (c), the increasing animation of the first hold icon h1 is continued, and the first hold icon h1 is in a display mode in which the character “kichi” is facing upward without rotating. In FIG. 6D, the increase animation ends, and at the same time as the increase animation ends, the movement animation of the variable icon H0 that was the first hold icon h1 is started. The change icon H0 while the moving animation is continued is also in a display mode in which the character of “kichi” is facing upward without rotating. In FIG. 5E, the moving animation of the change icon H0 is completed.

  Simultaneously with the end of the moving animation, an erasing animation of the fluctuation icon H0 is started. The change icon H0 while the erasing animation is continued is also in a display mode in which the character of “K” remains facing up without rotating. In FIG. 6G, the erasing animation of the change icon H0 ends.

  FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a sense of incongruity is generated by performing a standby animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252, a first hold icon h1 (variation icon H0) and a second hold icon h2 appear. FIG. 252 (X) also shows a time chart for the hold animation of the first hold icon h1 (variation icon H0), and FIG. 252 (Y) shows a time chart for the hold animation of the second hold icon h2.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 252 (X), a standby animation is executed for the first hold icon h1, and the display state of the first hold icon h1 is the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001 shown in FIG. 232 (a). From the display mode (display mode in which the character of “Yoshi” faces upward), it rotates around the hour (see FIGS. 252 (a) to (e)). “Left” in FIG. 252 (X) represents a display mode in which the character “yoshi” is directed to the left (see the first hold icon h1 shown in FIGS. 5A and 5E). Represents a display mode in which the character of “Yoshi” faces upward (see the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 5B), and “right” means a display mode in which the character of “Ki” faces right (see FIG. (Refer to the first hold icon h1 shown in the figure (c)), "down" represents the display mode (see the first hold icon h1 shown in the figure (d)) in which the character of "good" faces down (The same applies to FIG. 252 (Y)). The first hold icon h1 starts the moving animation simultaneously with the end of the standby animation. The standby animation is continued during the movement animation. When shifting from the previously performed standby animation to the standby animation performed during the execution of the moving animation, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the character of “Yoshi” is facing left to It changes to a suitable display mode, and continuity is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the time chart shown in FIG. 252 (Y), an increase animation is executed for the first hold icon h2. During the execution of the increase animation, the standby animation is not executed, and the display mode of the second hold icon h2 during the execution of the increase animation remains the display mode in which the character of “Yoshi” faces upward (see FIG. b) and the second hold icon h2 shown in (c)). The second hold icon h2 starts the standby animation simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. At the start of this standby animation, the second hold icon h2 starts the standby animation from the display mode in which the character “K” faces downward (see the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 4D). Therefore, at the end of the increase animation, from the display mode in which the character of “Ki” turned upward, the display mode in which the character of “Ki” turned right is skipped, and the display mode in which the character of “Ki” turned downward at once It will change. When a change (posture change) that disturbs the periodicity of the display mode is performed, the continuity is lost, the player feels uncomfortable, and conversely, the degree of attention to the hold icon increases.

  The standby animation ends when the erase animation starts. The erasure animation starts in the initial display mode (display mode with the character “K” facing upward). In this example, the display mode at the end of the standby animation happens to (See the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 5E), there is a case where continuity is ensured and a sense of incongruity is not caused.

  By the way, conventionally, in order to represent the number of holds, there has been a game machine that individually displays the number of images corresponding to the number of holds and switches the display of the images according to the increase or decrease of the number of holds.

  However, since the display switching of the image was monotonous, the player's attention could not be collected on the hold display.

  As described above, according to the game table described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 252, there may be a case where the hold display that is easy for the player to pay attention can be performed.

  In addition, when the first hold animation and the second hold animation are not overlapped / sequentially displayed, a third hold animation that is overlapped / successively displayed with both the hold animations may be displayed ( For example, the example shown in FIG.

  Here, the third hold animation may be a standby animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon while maintaining the display position of the hold icon. In addition, the third hold animation may be an animation that is performed without increasing or decreasing the number of holds. Furthermore, it is preferable that there are a plurality of patterns (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 250 (f) to (i)) that appear as if the plurality of held animations are one held animation. Further, depending on the execution state of the third hold animation, it may not be seen as one hold animation (for example, the example shown in FIG. 252).

  With these configurations, even if there is no increase / decrease in the number of holds, by displaying the third hold animation, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hold, and the increase / decrease in the hold number during the period of interest. If there is, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the number of holds.

  As another configuration, when the second hold animation is executed during the execution of the first hold animation, the first hold animation and the second hold animation are simultaneously performed for one hold icon. Is called. However, the same kind of animation may not be performed at the same time (for example, a combination of a movement animation and a movement animation, a combination of a change animation and a change animation, etc. may not be performed).

  In addition, the first hold animation that has been executed first may be canceled. However, only when the first hold animation and the second hold animation are of the same type (in the case of a combination of movement animation and change animation, or a combination of change animation and movement animation, the first hold animation will continue. Do.)

  There may also be a period in which the actual number of holds and the apparent number of hold icons do not match. The first on-hold animation and the second on-hold animation may have conflicting meanings (execution conditions are also in conflict). For example, a combination of an increase animation and a decrease animation may be used.

  In addition, a plurality of hold animations with different target hold may be performed as if they were one hold animation. Continuity is maintained by performing the standby animation between the end of the first hold animation and the start of the second hold animation. The hold icon is always subjected to some hold animation (change of display position, change of display mode) from the start of display to the end of display.

  The change in the display mode of the hold icon may include a change in size, shape, posture, transparency, color, and the like.

  The display of the second hold animation that is displayed when the first condition is satisfied ends before the display of the first hold animation ends. By doing this, it looks like one more hold animation.

  Furthermore, when the first condition is satisfied, there may be a case where a hold animation toward an incorrect hold number is performed.

  In addition, the second hold animation may be started after the first condition is satisfied and a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, the start of execution may be waited.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating an example of notifying that the start time of the symbol variation display based on the hold of the new hold icon is delayed due to the change animation of the old hold icon.

  In FIG. 253 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed in a state where four reservations of special figure 1 remain. That is, the hold in FIG. 1 is full. In the hold icon display area 2081 shown in FIG. 253 (a), the first hold icon h1 to the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed. Among these hold icons, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is the blue color of the display mode change pattern 8, and the display mode of the remaining hold icons is the default white color. The display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a display mode of a prefetch notice, but is a display mode with low expectation.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 5B), and the movement animation is executed. The moving animation that was the second hold icon h2 here is also changed, and an animation in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes from blue to red aura is displayed ((c) in the figure). )reference). The display mode of the red aura has a higher expectation level than the blue display mode, and the player's expectation level naturally increases. In addition, when the hold indicated by the hold icon (here, the first hold icon h1) that has changed to a red aura is consumed, the symbol change display based on the hold becomes reach change, This means that there is a possibility that the symbol variation time of will be longer. In other words, this change animation is also an animation indicating that it takes a long time until the hold after the pre-read target hold (here, the first hold) starts to fluctuate.

  Even after the movement animation ends, the change animation continues, and the first hold icon h1 further changes from a red aura to a display mode in which flames are burning (see (d) in the figure). The change animation is finished in a red display mode (see FIG. 5E). In the red display mode shown in FIG. 5 (e), it is determined that the symbol variation display based on the hold becomes a symbol variation display longer than the normal reach, and accordingly, the second hold icon h2 and the third hold icon h3 are displayed. It can be clearly determined that the time until the symbol variation starts is long.

As described above, in the example using FIG. 253, “the symbol display means capable of executing at least the symbol variation display,
Control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A notification means capable of executing at least notification;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is capable of holding at least the start of the symbol variation display when a holding condition is established,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a pending digest condition is established,
The notification means includes at least a hold display means,
The hold display means is capable of increasing at least a hold icon when a hold display condition is established,
The hold icon is capable of telling the player the start time of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon,
The notification means notifies the player that the start time is delayed when the specific notification condition (for example, the change in the display mode of the second hold icon) is established (for example, the red second icon). Hold icon) is at least executable
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. That is, “a symbol display means capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
Control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A notification means capable of executing at least notification when the notification condition is satisfied;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for operating the symbol display means for which the operation has been suspended when the suspended digestion condition is established,
The notification condition is likely to be established when the time from the suspension of the operation of the symbol display means to the operation of the symbol display means with which the operation is suspended is longer than the case where the time is short.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. The holding condition may be a condition that once holds even when the number of the operation holding balls is zero. That is, the control means can execute at least control to hold the operation of the symbol display means even when the number of the operation holding balls is zero. In this case, the operation of the symbol display means is not performed. The time from when the operation is suspended until the operation of the symbol display means for which the operation has been suspended is likely to be shortened.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where the interest of the game machine can be improved by performing various notifications in the period until the symbol change for the hold is started.

  In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game stand by clarifying that it takes a long time to start the fluctuation for specific holding.

  Further, even if the player is away from the gaming table for a short period of time, it is unlikely that the player will overlook a specific change on hold. Since it becomes at least clear that it takes a long time from a state in which the time required to start a specific change to be held is unclear, it may be possible to reduce the player's frustration.

  In some cases, a game can be interrupted by providing a period during which the game can be interrupted and improving the frequency of occurrence of the period. If an appropriate break is not inserted, fatigue will be accumulated, and the player's game time may be shortened.

The hold display means can change the display mode and / or display position of the hold icon and display the hold icon.
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a first hold icon representing a first hold and a second hold icon representing a second hold held after the first hold. ,
The hold display means notifies that the start time of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold indicated by the second hold icon is delayed by changing the display mode and / or display position of the first hold icon. It may be possible.

  Further, the specific notification condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the start time is delayed. That is, “the notification condition includes at least a case where the operation is performed when the operation of the symbol display means is delayed”.

  Since the change start of the symbol is surely delayed compared to the time assumed by the player at the beginning, it is clearly notified to the player that the time until the start of the change is increased, thereby reducing the dissatisfaction that the player feels You may be able to.

  In addition, if the player is paying attention to a change related to a specific hold, by notifying the player in advance that the start of the change has been extended, the player pays more attention to the change. There is a case that can be made.

In addition, “with a holding display means that can at least execute a display indicating the number of the operation holding balls,
The hold display means can execute at least a display indicating the number of the operation hold balls by a hold icon,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a hold animation indicating a change in the hold icon,
The notification includes at least display of the hold animation by the hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Furthermore, the notification means includes at least an image display means,
The image display means is at least capable of displaying an animation of one or a plurality of images over a predetermined period,
The specific notification may include at least an animation display by the image display means. In other words, it comprises “image display means capable of executing at least image display,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least an animation,
The notification includes at least the display of the animation by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  By doing so, the notification that the time required until the start of fluctuation has become longer is displayed as an animation, so that it may be possible to prevent the notification from being overlooked.

  FIG. 254 shows an example in which the hold display area 2083 of FIG. 1 is provided on the left side, the hold display area 2084 of FIG. 2 that is the priority change side is provided on the right side, and the change icon display area 2082 is provided in the center. FIG.

  In this example, since it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, the special figure 2 is given priority over the special figure 1, and the symbol variation is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 254 (X), a hold icon representing a hold with an old winning order is displayed in order from the left side in the hold display area 2084 in FIG. On the other hand, in the hold display area 2083 of FIG. 1 provided on the left side, a hold icon indicating a hold with an old winning is displayed in order from the right side. The numbers surrounded by circles shown in FIG. 254 (x) represent the pending digest priority, and the smaller the number, the faster the digest. In FIG. 254 (X), the moving direction of the hold icon in the moving animation is indicated by a thick arrow.

  In this example, the reserved icon in FIG. 1 has a round shape, whereas the reserved icon in FIG. 2 has a square shape.

  The example here is an example in the non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 254 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed in a state where one suspension of special figure 1 remains.

  In FIG. 254 (b), the special figure hold 1 is increased by one, and the first special figure hold display h1 and the second special figure hold display h2 are displayed in the hold display area 2083 of the special figure 1.

  Here, the interrupt shown in FIG. 2 occurs. That is, in the non-electric support state, a win-win game that is difficult to win is won, and the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. A game ball enters the opening, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by one. In FIGS. 254 (c) to 254 (d), the first hold icon h1 is displayed in the region with high digestion priority (the hold display region 2084 in FIG. 2) as the increase animation of the hold in FIG. This increase animation is also equivalent to an animation for notifying that the time until the start of symbol variation in the suspension of Special Figure 1 has been extended.

  In FIG. 254 (e), the suspension of special figure 2 is performed. Here, an animation in which the fluctuation icon H0 of the special figure 2 moves in a direction opposite to the direction in which the fluctuation icon H0 moves when the number of holds in the special figure 1 is changed is displayed. In some cases, the animation moving in the reverse direction can clearly notify that the number of holds in FIG. 2 instead of FIG. 1 has changed.

As described above, in the example using FIG. 254, “The first symbol display means of the symbol display means can execute at least the first symbol variation display,
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for holding the start of the first symbol variation display when the first holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for holding the start of the second symbol variation display when the second holding condition is established,
The first symbol display means is capable of at least executing the first symbol variation display when the first holding digest condition is established,
The second symbol display means can execute at least the start of the second symbol variation display when the second reserved digest condition is established,
The second suspended digestion condition includes at least that the start of the second symbol variation display is suspended,
The first reserved digest condition includes at least the start of the second symbol variation display is not suspended and the start of the first symbol variation display is suspended.
The specific notification condition is established at least when the second reserved storage condition is established in a state where the start of the first symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. That is, “the first symbol display means of the symbol display means can execute at least the first symbol variation display,
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control to hold the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for increasing the number of first operation holding balls when the first holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control to hold the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of at least performing control to increase the second number of activated balls when the second holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for operating the first symbol display means for which the operation has been suspended when the first suspended digestion condition has been established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for reducing the first number of activated balls when the first reserved digestion condition is established,
The second symbol display means is capable of executing at least a control for operating the second symbol display means for which the operation has been suspended when the second reserved digesting condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for decreasing the second number of activated balls when the second reserved digestion condition is established,
The second reserved digestion condition includes at least a case where the second symbol display means is established when the operation of the second symbol display means is held,
The first reserved digestion condition includes at least a case where the operation of the second symbol display means is not held and is satisfied when the operation of the first symbol display means is held. Yes,
The notification condition includes at least a case where the second holding condition is satisfied when the operation of the first symbol display means is held.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  While notifying that the start of fluctuation of a specific hold in FIG. 1 has become longer due to the interrupt in FIG. 2, the notification itself also serves as a notification that emphasizes that the interrupt in FIG. 2 has occurred. However, there are cases where the player can be made to pay attention to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 as well.

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing an example in which the hold display area 2083 of FIG. 1 is provided on the near side, and the hold display area 2084 of FIG. The numbers surrounded by circles shown in FIG. 255 (x) also represent the pending digest priority, and the smaller the number, the faster the digest. In FIG. 255 (X), the moving direction of the hold icon in the moving animation is indicated by a thick arrow.

  Also in this example, since it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, the special figure 2 is given priority over the special figure 1, and the symbol variation is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (X), the display position (standby position) of the first hold icon in FIG. 2 is higher than the display position (standby position) of the first hold icon in FIG. It is shifted to the side that moves at the time of erasing (the fluctuation icon display area 2082 side).

  The example here is also an example in the non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 255 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed in a state where one first hold icon h1 of special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 255 (b), two interrupts shown in FIG. 2 occur. That is, there are two winnings in the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of the special figure 2 that is preferentially digested is increased by two. In FIGS. 255 (b) to (c), the increase animation of the second reserved icon h2 of the special figure 2 being the priority side is hidden by the first hold icon h1 displayed in front of the special figure 1 being the non-priority side. It has been done.

  In FIG. 255 (d), the moving animation of the holding icon of the priority side special figure 2 is executed, and the holding icon of the non-priority side special figure 1 remains displayed without changing the display mode or the display position.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 started in FIG. 255 (d), a change animation is also executed, and the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is changed from the white display mode to the display mode of the red prefetch notice. (After change, the first hold icon h1) (see FIG. 255 (e)). The change animation to the display mode of the red pre-reading notice here is also an animation indicating that the start of the suspended symbol fluctuation display in FIG. 1 may be delayed.

  FIG. 256 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a general figure long opening effect or a general figure long opening effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 256, on the contrary to the example shown in FIG. 255, the hold display area 2083 of FIG. 1 is more variable than the hold display area 2084 of FIG. It is provided near.

  In FIG. 256 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed in a state where one first hold icon h1 of special figure 1 is displayed. The display mode of the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1 is a blue display mode, and a pre-reading notice is given although the reliability is low. Also, in FIG. 256 (a), a general-purpose long opening curling effect is started. The effect of encouraging the opening of the electric Chu, which is the starting point of the special figure 2 having a high digestion priority, can generally be an effect showing that there is a high possibility that the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 having a low digestion priority will be postponed. . Here, the ordinary long opening roll effect is a golf game, and a nice-in notification image is displayed in FIG. This is an image for notifying that the player has won the ordinary figure B or ordinary figure C. In FIG. 255 (c), since the pair of blade members 232a (electrical chows) of the second special figure starting port 232 perform long opening, a normal long opening effect is performed. Here, the usual figure long opening effect displays an image with a placard in which Tono-san displays “Right-handed while opening Chu”. In other words, an effect is suggested that suggests aiming at a long open electric chew.

  As a result, the suspension of the special figure 2 is accumulated up to the full tank (four), and in FIG. 256 (d), an increase animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 2 is performed.

  Further, in this example, a dedicated continuous effect is performed during the symbol change display of the reserved special figure 2 won while the electric chew is long open. Here, since the winning / non-winning determination of special figure 2 having an advantageous winning probability (e.g., easier to win 16R big hit than 2R big hit) is performed, a display such as “high probability state entry” is performed. The countdown display is performed according to the remaining number of pending (remaining number of times of determination of success / failure in FIG. 2) (FIGS. 256 (e) to (g)). While the special lottery is being performed, all the special icons of the hold icon and the change icon disappear. That is, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is not displayed. The remaining number of reserves in the special figure 2 can be naturally understood by the countdown display, but the number of the reserved balls in the special figure 1 is once unknown. This is because it takes time until the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, so that the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is not looked at. In other words, this dedicated continuous effect itself also becomes an effect of notifying that the start of the reserved symbol fluctuation in FIG. In this example, none of the four hit / no-go judgments of the interrupted special figure 2 is hit, and it is informed that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 interrupted in FIG.

  When all of the interrupted reservations of special figure 2 have been consumed, the display of the reservation icon of special figure 1 is restored (see (h) in the figure). It should be noted that the hold icon display in the special figure 1 may not be restored (disappeared) until all the hold in the special figure 1 when the symbol variation display in the special figure 2 is interrupted is consumed. Alternatively, the display mode of the remaining hold icon of FIG. 1 may be restored only to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure 1 is saved in response to the interruption of the special figure 2 in the non-electric support state.

  In this example, the hold icon of special figure 1 and the hold icon of special figure 2 are displayed in a common hold icon display area. However, in order to distinguish between them, the display mode (shape, color, etc.) of the hold icon is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the hold icon in the special figure 1 has a round shape, and the hold icon in the special figure 2 has Square shape). In addition, the display mode of special figure 1 and the display mode of special figure 2 may be the same (both are round shapes).

  In FIG. 257 (a), the special figure 1 hold increases during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 performed in a state where the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is displayed. An increase animation of 1 hold icon is performed. It should be noted that in the non-electric support state, the reserved icon display area 2086 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved figures of the non-priority side special figure because it hardly exceeds the maximum number of reserved figures of the non-priority side special figure 1. The same number (four in the figure) is displayed.

  In FIG. 257 (b), a win-win game is won, and the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. Three game balls enter the opening, and the hold of Special Figure 2 increases by three. In FIG. 257 (b), a moving animation of the hold icon is executed. In this case, the movement animation is shown in the direction opposite to the time when the hold is reduced to indicate that the change start of the hold in FIG. 1 has been postponed due to the interruption of the special figure 2. Execute the evacuation animation to move to. In addition, when the display of the increased hold icon of the special figure 2 overlaps with the hold icon of the special figure 1 that has been displayed previously, as shown in FIG. The icon is displayed in front of the previously held icon in FIG. In addition, since the total number of holds in FIG. 1 and the total number of holds in FIG. 2 (here, 5) exceeds the maximum number of holds in FIG. 1 (4), the hold icon display area 2086 is enlarged. Is done.

  As a result, in the hold icon display area 2086 shown in FIG. 257 (c), five hold displays are made in the order of change. Here, since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is prioritized, the hold icons indicating the hold of the interrupted special figure 2 are displayed as the first hold icon h1 to the third hold icon h3, and the special figure saved by the save animation is displayed. A hold icon representing one hold is displayed as a fourth hold icon h4 and a fifth hold icon h5.

  In addition, the hold icon display area 2086 is enlarged and displayed so that a total of 8 hold icons including the maximum hold number (4 pieces) in FIG. 1 and the maximum hold number (4 pieces) in FIG. 2 can be displayed. The However, if the total number of holds in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 reaches a predetermined number that is equal to or greater than the maximum number of reservations (4) in Special Figure 1, the enlarged display is stopped and the hold icons for the predetermined number are not displayed. Alternatively, the hold icon may be extinguished outside the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and disappear.

  As shown in FIG. 257 (d), in the moving animation when the hold is reduced, the hold icon moves in the direction opposite to the save direction of the save animation described above. In addition, since the total number of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 2086 is equal to or less than the maximum hold number (four) in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area 2086 is reduced.

As described above, in the example using FIG. 257, “the hold display means moves the hold icon in the first direction when the first display position change condition (for example, hold digestion) is established. The first hold movement animation can be displayed,
The hold display means moves the hold icon in a direction opposite to the first direction when a second display position change condition (for example, hold interruption in FIG. 2) is established. The second hold movement animation to be displayed,
The first display position change condition includes at least the establishment of the on-hold digestion condition,
The second display position change condition is the specific notification condition,
The specific notification includes at least a display of the second pending movement animation.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. That is, “comprising a holding display means capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of the operation holding balls,
The hold display means can execute at least a display indicating the number of the operation hold balls by a hold icon,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a hold animation indicating a change in the hold icon,
The notification includes at least the display of the hold animation by the hold display means.
The first hold movement animation of the hold animation is to move the hold icon in a first direction,
The second hold movement animation of the hold animation is to move the hold icon in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The hold display means can display at least the first hold movement animation when the first display position change condition is satisfied,
The hold display means can display at least the second hold movement animation when the second display position change condition is satisfied,
The first display position change condition includes at least a case that is satisfied when the first holding digest condition is satisfied,
The second display position change condition includes at least a case that is satisfied when the second holding condition is satisfied,
The notification includes at least display of the second hold movement animation by the hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this gaming machine, an animation indicating that it has taken place until the start of a specific hold change in FIG. 1 is executed by the interruption in FIG. 2, and the animation has a change related to the hold in FIG. Since this is the reverse of the hold reduction animation and the hold movement animation performed in response to the start, it is easy for the player to be informed that the time required to start the change is long.

  FIG. 258 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the variation is postponed until a predetermined operation by the player is detected.

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 258 (a) shows a state where a big hit is made with four reservations in FIG. 1 remaining. Of the four holds shown in FIG. 1, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a blue display mode, and a pre-reading notice is given although the reliability is low.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the big hit game (attack open game) is not only the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, but if the game ball does not pass through a predetermined area (the big hit gate 237) on the game board 200, the big hit game The game does not start. A big hit gate 237 is shown on the right side of FIG. The jackpot gate 237 on the game board 200 is marked with a note that says “When you want to start a big hit, pass the ball”. The big hit gate 237 does nothing even if the ball passes through other than when the condition device is activated.

  In the diagram on the left side of FIG. 258 (b), the “big hit start weight effect” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the big hit start effect is displayed. In the left diagrams of FIG. 258 (b) to FIG. 258 (c), a standby animation for blinking the character display “During jackpot start wait” is executed. The hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the back side of the “big hit start weight production”, and it can be seen that the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a blue display mode. This “effect during the big hit start weight” corresponds to an effect of notifying that the start time of the symbol variation display based on the hold of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is delayed.

  The right side of FIGS. 258 (b) to (c) shows how the game ball B passes through the jackpot gate 237 provided on the game board 200. Based on the detection that the game ball B has passed through the jackpot gate 237, the accessory continuous operation device (attacker) is started (the jackpot is started).

  It should be noted that the start of the reserved symbol fluctuation in FIG. 1 may be postponed until a predetermined operation by the player (game ball launch to the jackpot gate 237) is detected. In particular, in this example, until the player performs a predetermined operation, the start of the reserved symbol fluctuation in FIG. 1 is postponed semi-permanently, and during the postponed period “the effect during the big hit start weight” is performed .

  FIG. 259 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the change is postponed until a predetermined operation by the store clerk is detected.

  FIG. 259 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed in a state where four suspensions of special figure 1 remain. Of the four holds shown in FIG. 1, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a blue display mode, and a pre-reading notice is given although the reliability is low.

  As shown in FIG. 259 (b), magnet detection (magnetic force detection) is performed during this symbol variation, and an error operation is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays “error operation notification”. In FIGS. 259 (b) to (c), a standby animation for blinking the character display “WARNING” is executed.

  When the pachinko machine 100 detects the magnet (magnetic force), the pachinko machine 100 notifies that the magnet has been detected, and the main control unit 300 returns to the main process shown in FIG. 219, and at the end of the main process (the tip of step S115) is an infinite loop. I will enter. Therefore, the “operation notification at the time of error” also does not start the fluctuation of the hold in FIG. 1 unless the error is canceled by the power interruption (see (e) of the figure) / recovery (see (d) of the figure) This is an implicit notification.

  At this time, if the symbol is changing, the lottery result and the remaining change time are saved in a predetermined storage area. In FIG. 257 (e), a stop symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 after power recovery. In addition, the number of stored memories has not changed from before the power interruption, and four reserved icons in FIG. 1 are displayed.

  By the way, there is a problem that it is difficult to leave the seat until all the holdings are exhausted once the game is started because it is unclear how long it takes to start the symbol change for a specific holding. .

  According to the gaming table described above with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259, there is a case where the occurrence frequency of the period in which the player can leave the seat can be improved by transmitting the time to the player even a little. is there.

  In the above description, the specific notification is performed based on the result of prefetching the hold before the target hold. However, the specific notification may be performed when the long-change timer is prefetched. (A specific notification may be performed when a long-variation timer and a predetermined pre-reading notice lottery are won), or a specific notification may not be performed when pre-holding a short variation timer is selected. Even in the case of a short variation timer, a specific notification (so-called gasse prefetching notice) may be performed when a predetermined prefetching notice lottery is won.

  Further, the long variation timer only needs to have a high ratio of selecting a long variation time, and a short variation timer may be selected depending on the lottery result.

  Moreover, you may perform specific alerting | reporting by the change animation which changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold from which the long fluctuation timer is selected.

  Note that the time until the start of an unknown change, which is not known whether it is short or long, or that could not be predicted, can be understood or predicted, and the actual time is not changed.

  Depending on the mode of notification, it is also possible to estimate the time until the suspended change stop that is the target of the pre-reading notice, which makes it easier for the player to interrupt the game. In other words, even if the user leaves the seat while the symbol is changing, it is a guideline that it is easy to return until the change stops.

  In addition, in a general game machine, a long variation time is designed to have a high possibility of a big hit, so a big hit is likely to occur in a fluctuation before a specific hold, or even a big hit. Since the gaming state may be relatively advantageous after the occurrence, there may be a case where a sense of expectation can be given to a specific hold when the prefetch notification is performed.

  In the above description, the evacuation display of the hold icon is also described. However, the hold icon is displayed based on the decrease in the hold, the hold decrease animation indicating that the hold is decreased, and the increase in the hold. At least one or both of the hold increase animations indicating that the increase has occurred are performed, and the movement display of the hold icon corresponding to the non-priority side special figure 1 based on the priority side special figure 2 winning is performed by animation. There are cases where it is not.

  When the evacuation animation is performed, the hold icon corresponding to the evacuated non-priority side special figure 1 may not be visible. That is, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 may not be displayed. Or you may enable it to visually recognize the holding | maintenance icon corresponding to the special figure 1 which was evacuated based on the completion | finish of the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 which interrupted (display is restarted). When a plurality of priority side special figures 2 wins, the evacuation animation may be continuously executed a plurality of times.

  In this way, while the interrupted special figure 2 hold is displayed in animation, the special figure 1 saved movement saved by the interrupt is not displayed in animation, and the special figure 2 interrupt occurs. Sometimes it can be emphasized.

  In addition, with the interruption of the special figure 2, the suspension of the special figure 1 is withdrawn, and the situation in which the saved special figure 1 becomes difficult to visually recognize is gradually displayed in an animation so that the special figure 2 is interrupted and It is easy for the player to be informed that the time required for the start of the fluctuation in Fig. 1 has been extended.

  Furthermore, the interruption of the special figure 2 may make it difficult to visually recognize the hold of the special figure 1, thereby allowing the player to misidentify the number of the hold. When the misidentification occurs, the player misidentifies the number of the reservations to a number smaller than the actual number of reservations. Therefore, when the reservation shown in FIG. 1 becomes visible, the start prize is not generated. In some cases, an illusion can be made as if the number of on-holding has increased.

  In the above description, the example in which the fluctuation start of FIG. 1 is postponed indefinitely has been described. However, the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension of special figure 1 is performed until a predetermined fluctuation start postponement cancellation condition is satisfied. You may not have to. Further, the details of the change start postponement cancellation condition and the fact that the change is not performed until the condition is satisfied may be notified. In addition, when the change start postponement release condition is satisfied, the change corresponding to the postponed first hold is started, and when other conditions are satisfied, the postponed first hold Variations corresponding to may be invalidated. Further, the change start postponement condition can be established by the player, and the change start postponement release condition can be established by the player.

  By doing so, the progress of the game is stopped until the change start postponement cancellation condition is satisfied, so that the player can suspend the game with peace of mind. Further, by clearly informing the progress of the game and the method for canceling the suspension, the player who does not understand the situation is not made uneasy.

  As another configuration, the extended animation may be an animation that moves the hold (extended hold / increased hold) in a direction opposite to the hold animation performed at the time of the hold digest. The types of increase animation are (1) displayed on the spot, (2) moved from a direction different from the moving direction during digestion, (3) moved from the same direction as the moving direction during digestion, (4) There is movement from the direction opposite to the movement direction.

  Further, even when the occurrence frequency is low, by displaying the hold icon display area corresponding to the priority special drawing, when the hold icon corresponding to the special drawing hold is displayed in the hold icon display area. Makes it easier for the player to be aware that the time it takes to change the hold in FIG.

  Furthermore, an effect of notifying that there is a high possibility that the winning prize in FIG. 2 on the priority side will occur may be executed.

  In addition, since the time until the start of the symbol change for a specific hold is postponed due to the interruption of Special Figure 2, if a pre-read notice is executed for a specific hold, the pre-read notice is executed. The time can be extended. For example, when the special figure 2 interrupt occurs during execution of the special figure 1 prefetch notice, the special figure 1 prefetch notice is continuously executed even in the interrupted special figure 2 pattern change. On the contrary, the prefetching notice of special figure 1 may not be performed by the design variation of special figure 2 which interrupted. That is, it may be difficult to view or recognize.

  The hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 in which the time until the start of symbol variation is extended by the interrupt in FIG. 2 has a higher display priority than the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an increase animation is canceled due to a decrease in the number of holds during execution of the increase animation.

  In FIG. 260 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (e). Further, in FIG. 260 (a), the third hold in FIG. 1 increases, and an increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is started, and this increase animation continues until (c) in FIG.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the fourth hold in FIG. 1 increases, and an increase animation of the fourth hold icon h4 is started. In the middle of this increasing animation, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is stopped (see (e) in the figure), the fluctuation icon H0 is deleted, and in FIG. 260 (f), the symbol fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is displayed. Is started. As the symbol variation display starts, a moving animation is also started, but the increased animation of the fourth hold icon h4 increased in FIG. In this example, the increase animation of the fourth hold icon h4 is canceled, and the fourth hold icon h4 is skipped to the display position when the increase animation is completed. That is, after the display of the fourth hold icon h4 is started with an increase animation, if the second condition (here, hold-up) is satisfied, a hold animation (here, an animation to be skipped) different from the continuation of the hold animation ) To display the fourth hold icon h4. If the hold decreases during the execution of the hold increase animation at the time of the 4th hold winning, if the execution start of the hold moving animation is postponed until the end of the hold increase animation, the player will have a longer time to stop and the operation will start. There is a risk of lowering. On the other hand, by skipping as in this example, a hold icon corresponding to the actual number of holds can be displayed, and the player is not mistaken for the number of holds.

  In FIG. 260 (g), the skipped hold icon starts moving animation from the position of the fourth hold icon h4 in the hold icon display area 2081.

  FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of holds decreases during execution of the increase animation and the start of the movement animation is delayed.

  In FIG. 261 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (e). In FIG. 261 (a), the second hold in FIG. 1 increases, and an increase animation of the second hold icon h2 is started, and this increase animation continues until FIG.

  In FIG. 261 (d), the third hold in FIG. 1 increases, and an increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is started. In the middle of this increasing animation, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is stopped (see (e) in the figure), the fluctuation icon H0 is deleted, and in FIG. 237 (f), the symbol fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is displayed. Is started. In this example, the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is continued until the end, and the start of the moving animation based on the hold digest is delayed. In this way, the increase animation shows a lie where the number of holds has increased to 3 even though the number of holds has decreased from 3 to 2. In a gaming machine, there is no problem in notifying a large thing small about a player's profit, but there is a problem in reporting a small profit large (notification of a lie). This is because a player who knows the true size later gets angry and leaves. In this example, a forbidden hand in the gaming machine is intentionally caused to give a sense of incongruity and attract the attention of the player. Further, since the lie notification is performed for a very short period (about 2 seconds at the longest), the player is not uncomfortable.

  In FIG. 261 (g), the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is completed. The first suspended symbol variation display has already been started.

  Note that, when the suspension increases during the period in which the start of the movement animation is delayed, the execution period of the movement animation may be extended until the end of the increase animation performed based on the increase.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of holds is decreased during execution of a plurality of increase animations, one animation is continued, and the other animation is changed.

  In FIG. 262 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (c). In FIG. 262 (a), the second hold in FIG. 1 is increased, and an increase animation of the second hold icon h2 is started.

  In FIG. 262 (b), the third hold in FIG. 1 increases, and an increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is started. The increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is slightly delayed from the increase animation of the second hold icon h2.

  In the middle of these increasing animations, the symbol variation display in FIG. 1 is stopped (see (c) in the same figure), and the variation icon H0 is erased before the final display.

  In FIG. 262 (d), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started. In this example, since the execution condition of the movement animation is established based on the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the increase animation (first hold animation) of the second hold icon h2 is canceled, but the third hold The increasing animation (second pending animation) of the icon h3 is continuously performed without being canceled. That is, the second hold icon h2 skips to the display position when the increase animation is completed (the display position of the second hold icon h2 in the hold icon display area 2081), but the third hold icon h3 is the hold icon display area 2081. Gradually approaches the display position of the third hold icon h3.

  In FIG. 262 (e), the skipped second hold icon h2 starts moving animation from a predetermined position in the hold icon display area 2081. On the other hand, the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 that has not been canceled continues and ends in the next figure (f).

  In FIG. 262 (g), the second hold icon h2 continues the movement animation, and the third hold icon h3 also starts the movement animation. The start timing of the moving animation of the third hold icon h3 may be different from the normal time (at the start of fluctuation), giving the player a sense of discomfort and allowing the third hold icon h3 to be noticed.

  In FIG. 262 (h), the movement animation of the second hold icon h2 has ended, but the movement of the third hold icon h3 started late has still continued. Eventually, the hold icon that was the third hold icon h3 reaches the display position of the second hold icon h2 in the hold icon display area 2081.

As described above, in the example using FIG. 262, “the symbol display means capable of executing at least the symbol variation display,
A symbol display control means capable of executing at least the control of the symbol display means;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display control means is capable of at least suspending the start of the symbol variation display when a holding condition is established,
When a hold display condition is established, a hold display means capable of increasing the hold icon at least,
A hold display control means capable of at least controlling the display of the hold icon by the hold display means;
With
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least the hold icon with a hold animation,
The hold display control means satisfies the first condition (for example, hold digest) before the hold display means starts a hold animation (for example, moving animation) for the hold icon (for example, the third hold icon h3). In this case, the execution of the hold animation is postponed,
The hold display control means, when the hold condition is satisfied after the second condition (eg hold hold) is satisfied after the hold display means starts displaying the hold icon (for example, the second hold icon h2) by the hold animation. The hold icon is displayed on the hold display means with a hold animation (for example, skip animation) different from the continuation of the animation.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this game machine, it is possible to display the hold in various ways and to improve the interest of the game machine.

  When the start of the display of the hold icon is postponed, a hold animation that is different from the mode assumed by the player is performed, which may surprise the player. Also, by performing an animation that matches the situation in which the hold animation is executed, it may be possible to switch to a display that most wants the player's attention in that situation.

  In addition, by providing a case where the hold animation is executed to the end and a case where the animation is skipped from the middle, it is possible to create a situation in which the player easily misidentifies the hold. In addition, by canceling the on-hold animation that is displayed prominently in the animation, the player's eyes can be directed to other displays. Furthermore, since the hold animation that is different from the mode assumed by the player is performed by changing the mode of the hold animation being executed, the player may be surprised. Further, if the player thinks that the hold animation is normal and does not pay attention to the hold animation, the player may be mistaken for the hold.

  In addition, the operation is promoted by creating a situation where it is easy to misrecognize the hold to prevent the stoppage. The following advantageous effects are obtained (the same applies hereinafter).

  FIG. 263 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of holds increases during the execution of the increase animation.

  In FIG. 263 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (f). In FIG. 263 (a), the second hold in FIG. 1 is increased, and an increase animation of the second hold icon h2 is started.

  In FIG. 263 (b), the increase animation of the second hold icon h2 continues, and in FIG. 263 (c), the third hold in FIG. 1 increases. However, in this example, the start of the increase animation of the newly increased third hold icon h3 is waited until the previously started hold animation (the increase animation of the second hold icon h2) is completed. In FIG. 263 (c), the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is increased, but the third holding icon h3 is not visible at all. In the standby display of the third hold icon h3, the movement may be kept on standby as long as the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 263 (d), the increase animation of the second hold icon h2 ends, and the increase animation of the third hold icon h3 that has been waiting until now is started.

  In this example, the hold icon display area 2084 in the special figure 2 is cut in by the increase in the number of hold in the special figure 2 (see (e) in the figure). That is, the area for displaying the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the area for displaying the hold icon in FIG. 2 are provided separately.

In FIG. 263 (e), the hold in FIG. 2 is interrupted, and the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is started immediately after entering the second special figure start port 232. The hold animation performed for the hold of the special figure 2 for which the symbol change is preferentially started is displayed with priority over the hold animation performed for the hold icon of the non-priority special figure 1. on the other hand,
The increase animation of the third hold icon h3 in the non-priority side special figure 1 that was in the process of moving in FIG. 263 (e) is skipped (stopped).

  In FIG. 263 (f), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is stopped and the first special figure hold icon h1 is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 2084, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. In 2083, first to third special figure hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed.

  Eventually, the special figure 2 priority change is started. Here, the movement animation of the special figure 2 may not be performed. In particular, in the normal / hidden gaming state where the electric chew release rate is low, the ratio of the special figure 2 in the total fluctuation is low, so the moving animation of the special figure 2 may not be executed.

  As described above, the increase animation of the special figure 1 on the non-priority side may be skipped (cancelled). That is, when the same special figure 1 increases during execution of the special figure 1 animation, the incremental animation continues, and when the special figure 2 increases, the incremental animation of the special figure 1 is skipped (stopped). .

  FIG. 264 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of holds increases during execution of the movement animation.

  In FIG. 264 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is three.

  In FIG. 264 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the moving animation is also started. In FIG. 8C, the movement animation is finished, and in FIG. 9D, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The change icon H0 disappears until the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is confirmed.

  Eventually, in the same figure (e), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and the movement animation is also started.

  In FIG. 264 (f), the hold of FIG. 2 is interrupted, and the increase animation of the hold icon of FIG. 2 is started immediately after entering the second special figure starting port 232. The moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 of the non-priority side special figure 1 is not canceled, but the moving animation of the first hold icon h1 is skipped (cancelled). As shown in FIG. 264 (f), the hold animations for different special drawings may be displayed at the same time, or the priority order is determined in advance, and the execution condition of the hold animation with the low priority during the execution of the hold animation with the high priority. Is held, the execution of the hold animation is postponed or stopped, and if the execution condition of the hold animation with a high priority is satisfied during the execution of the hold animation with a low priority, the priority is low. The animation may be interrupted or interrupted, a high-priority hold animation may be executed, and the low-priority hold animation that has been suspended after the high-priority hold animation ends may be resumed.

  As described above, if the movement animation of the non-priority side special figure 1 is the movement animation of the fluctuation icon H0, it continues even if the holding of the priority side special figure 2 increases, If there is, the moving animation is canceled by increasing the priority side special figure 2 to be held. That is, it skips to the final display position of the movement destination.

As described above, in the example using FIG. 264, “the hold display means can display the hold icon with the first hold animation (for example, the move animation of the hold icon),
The hold display means is capable of displaying a hold icon with a second hold animation (for example, a moving animation of a variable icon),
The hold display control means satisfies the second condition (for example, hold digest) after the hold display means starts displaying a hold icon (for example, the second hold icon h2) in the first hold animation. The hold icon is displayed on the hold display means with a hold animation (for example, skip animation) different from the continuation of the first hold animation,
The hold display control means is a case where the second condition (eg, hold-up) is satisfied after the hold-display means starts displaying a hold icon (eg, a change icon H0) in the second hold animation. Even if there is, the hold icon is displayed on the hold display means following the second hold animation.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the same conditions are satisfied, by making it possible to execute a pending animation that is changed and a pending animation that is not changed, it is possible to display a variety of holdings more diversely, It may be possible to improve. In addition, it is possible to switch the importance of information to be notified to the player. For example, if you do not want to be overlooked and important information that you want to focus on is executed in the second hold animation, and if it is okay to overlook it (rather it is overlooked and misunderstood about hold), if it is executed in the first hold animation Good.

In addition, in the example using FIG. 264, “the hold display control means, when the hold condition is satisfied before the hold display means starts the first hold animation for the hold icon, To stop or postpone the execution of one hold animation,
The hold display control means is configured to display the second condition (for example, the second hold icon h2) while the hold display means is displaying the hold icon (for example, the second hold icon h2) by the first hold animation (for example, the hold icon moving animation). , Hold digestion), the hold icon is displayed on the hold display means in the third hold animation,
The third hold animation is an animation (for example, displaying the last scene by jumping from the scene when the second condition in the first hold animation is satisfied to the last scene of the first hold animation) , Skip animation)
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

Further, in the example using FIG. 264, “the hold display means is different from the hold icon (for example, the second hold icon h2) displayed by the first hold animation (for example, the hold icon moving animation). An icon (for example, a variation icon H0) can be displayed in the second hold animation (for example, a variation icon moving animation),
The second condition is that the hold icon by the first animation, for example, the second hold icon h2) is displayed on the hold display means, and the hold icon by the second animation (for example, the change icon H0). Is a condition that holds for a period that includes at least the displayed display period,
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

  The second condition may be a condition that is also established during a period other than the display period, or may be a condition that is established only during the display period.

  According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period in which a plurality of hold animations are simultaneously executed, only one of the hold animations is canceled, so that the player can be placed in the other hold animation that does not change. Sometimes it can be noticed. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period in which a plurality of hold animations are executed at the same time, by changing the mode of only one hold animation, the hold animation has changed from the other hold animation without change. In some cases, the player can be noticed. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display regarding the hold can be performed in various modes according to the situation.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the standby animation execution mode is changed when the condition is satisfied.

  In FIG. 265 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues to the end. Further, in FIG. 263 (a), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is three. Both the first special figure hold icon h1 and the second special figure hold icon h2 are changed to the display mode of the character of the Minowa imitating a cactus, and a pre-reading notice is executed. In addition, the change icon H0 is also changed to the display mode of the character of the Minowa imitating a cactus, and a pre-reading notice is executed.

  In FIG. 6A and FIG. 8B, standby animation is executed for the first special figure hold icon h1, the second special figure hold icon h2, and the variation icon H0.

  In FIG. 9C, a change animation is started for the second hold icon h2. That is, the curtain appears and prevents the second hold icon h2 from being visually recognized. The standby animation may be continued while the change animation is being executed. Further, the change icon H0 continues the standby animation.

  Eventually, in FIG. 265 (d), based on the change animation changing the aspect of the second hold icon h2, another standby animation is executed. Here, the display mode of the panda is changed.

  On the other hand, the first hold icon h1, which has continued the standby animation, displays a standby animation that is different from the standby animation that has been executed so far, in accordance with the change of the display mode of the second hold icon h2 due to the change animation. Start. Specifically, an animation that shakes the first hold icon h1 is performed and displayed in a small size. Thereafter, the first hold icon h1 continues to execute the changed standby animation until the first hold icon h1 is deleted or until the display mode of the panda disappears. Note that the start of the standby animation for the first hold icon h1, which is different from the standby animation executed so far, is the timing shown in FIG. 5C, that is, the timing at which the second hold icon h2 starts the change animation. Also good.

  Note that the variation icon H0 continues the standby animation. That is, even if the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is changed, the change icon H0 is not affected.

  FIG. 4D shows a state when the change animation is finished. FIG. 4D is an example in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is not changed by the change animation. In this case, the standby animation that has been performed before the execution of the change animation is continuously performed. Moreover, the standby animations other than the change animation target hold are not changed.

In the example using FIG. 265, “the hold display control means displays a hold icon (for example, the first hold icon h1) displayed in the first hold animation when the third condition is satisfied. It is possible to display on the hold display means by four hold animations (for example, a trembling animation),
The third condition is that a hold icon (for example, the second hold icon h2) different from the hold icon displayed in the fourth animation starts displaying a fifth hold animation (for example, a change animation), Or a condition that is satisfied at least by the display of a specific scene (for example, a scene in which a panda appears) in the fifth animation.
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a game is started from the first hold animation by executing the fourth hold animation newly while canceling the first hold animation or changing the mode based on the establishment of the third condition. In some cases, the player may be focused on the fourth hold animation while diverting the player's attention.

  The first hold animation may be an animation in which the aspect is changed and the display is continued. Further, the first hold animation may be canceled.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the change animation for the suspension of the special figure 1 scheduled to be executed is canceled by the interruption of the special figure 2.

  In this example, there is a change animation that is performed across a plurality of games, and another hold animation is also performed during the execution of the change animation, and the animation is combined.

  In FIG. 266 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (d). Further, in FIG. 266 (a), the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 3, and a moving animation is performed. Among the movement animations, the transfer animation of the third hold icon h3 includes a change animation pattern that changes from white to blue to red every time the change starts. The change animation is selected at the time of winning.

  In FIG. 266 (b), the display mode of the third hold icon h3 changes to a blue aura.

  In FIG. 266 (c), the display mode of the third hold icon h3 is changed to a red display mode. Further, in FIG. 266 (c), one hold of special figure 2 is interrupted, and in FIG. 266 (d), another hold of special figure 2 is interrupted.

  In FIG. 266 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 2 is started. The second hold icon h2 in the special figure 1 in which the change animation pattern is set every time the fluctuation starts, does not change the display mode even if the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 is started. In addition, it does not matter if the change animation reset after the change animation set initially is canceled.

  Eventually, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started again (see (g) in the figure).

  In the symbol variation display of this special figure 2, a big hit is won (see (h) in the figure), and a big hit game is started (see (i) in the same figure).

  As shown in FIG. 266 (j), immediately after the big hit game is finished, the display area of the hold icon is changed according to the transition to the electric support probability change state (change of the game state). In this example, the display positions of the hold icons in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are switched. That is, the hold icons h1 and h2 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode at the right end.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 266 (k), the suspension of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the change animation is not executed even if the movement animation is performed. That is, even if the execution condition of the change animation determined at the time of winning is satisfied, the change animation is not executed.

  As described above, when the special figure 2 interrupts, the change animation set in the special figure 1 suspension is stopped. Also, when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and the game state is shifted (normal → big hit, normal → electric support change), the change animation set to the special figure 1 hold is stopped. When all the interrupted special figure 2 is removed and the symbol fluctuation of special figure 1 is resumed, the set change animation may be resumed.

  Note that the change animation may include a change from the first mode to the second mode, or change from a first mode to a second mode to a plurality of modes as in the third mode. Things may also be included.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the mode of the hold animation is changed according to whether or not the variable time shortening function is activated.

  First, the same figure (a) to (d) shown at the left end is an example when the fluctuation time shortening function with the number of holdings less than 4 is not activated (normal state or latent probability changing state), and the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is shown. Is started, the movement animation of the hold icon and the movement animation of the variation icon H0 in FIG. 1 are started.

  Figures (A) to (C) in the center are examples when the variable time reduction function with the number of holdings of 4 or more is not in operation (normal state / latency change state), and the symbol fluctuation display of Special Figure 1 starts. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the movement animation of the hold icon having a short movement distance is executed. Note that the moving animation of the hold icon may be a shortened display (high-speed playback).

  On the other hand, the fluctuation icon H0 having a large movement distance jumps from the hold icon display area 2081 to the fluctuation icon display area 2082 at a stretch. That is, when there are four or more holds, the moving animation of the change icon H0 is not executed, and the change icon H0 disappears in the change icon display area 2082.

  Figures (α) to (β) shown at the right end are examples when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated with 2 or more on-holds (electric support positive variation state / short-time state). When there are 2 or more on-holds Also here, the moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 is not executed.

  Further, when the fluctuation shortening function is activated based on the fact that there are four or more holds, the hold icon movement animation and the fluctuation icon H0 movement animation are not executed.

  In summary, during non-electric support, if the number of holds is 4 or more, the moving animation of the variable icon is stopped, and if the number of holding is 3 or less, the moving animation of the variable icon is started. On the other hand, during the electric support, if the holding number is 2 or more, both the moving animation of the holding icon and the moving animation of the variable icon are stopped, and if the holding number is 1, both are started. During non-electric support, the number of holds is 4 or more and the fluctuation time shortening function works and the hold is digested at high speed, so there is no time for moving animation, and during electric support, the number of holds is 2 or more and the change time Since the shortening function works and the hold is digested at high speed, there is no time for moving animation.

  Depending on the control state, the fluctuation time reduction function may or may not work. Moreover, the conditions under which the variable time shortening function operates may be different.

  As described above, in the example using FIG. 267, “when the first condition (for example, the number of holdings is 2 or more in the electronic support) is satisfied before starting the holding animation (for example, moving animation) for the holding icon, The game machine that stops the execution of the hold animation has been described.

  By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player who thought that the hold animation will be performed, and to make the player pay attention to the hold. Further, by providing a case where the hold animation is executed and a case where the hold animation is not executed, there is a case where it is possible to create a situation in which the player easily misidentifies the hold.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIG. 262, FIG. 264 to FIG. 265, FIG.
A holding display unit capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of operation holding balls to be operated by the symbol display unit by a holding icon;
A hold display control means capable of executing at least the control of the hold display means;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The hold display control means can execute at least the first display control when the first condition is established,
The hold display control means can execute at least the second display control when the second condition is satisfied,
The hold display control means can execute at least the third display control when the third condition is satisfied,
The first display control includes at least control for displaying a hold animation on the hold display means,
The hold animation includes at least a mode in which the hold icon changes,
The first condition includes at least a case where the execution condition is satisfied after the execution condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied,
The second condition includes at least a case that is satisfied after the execution condition is satisfied and before the start condition is satisfied;
The third condition includes at least a case where it is satisfied after the execution and start conditions are satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. Here, the second display control may be a control to postpone the hold animation or a control to change from the start. Further, the third display control may be a control for canceling (skip) the hold animation, a control for temporarily interrupting and then restarting, or a control for changing from halfway. In addition, the execution condition and the start condition may be satisfied at the same time, and the execution condition, the start condition, and the second condition may be satisfied at the same time (such as when winning a prize without holding). Also good. Further, the execution condition may be, for example, an increase in holding (winning), and the start condition may be, for example, a starting condition for displaying the holding icon, and an increase in holding (winning). The symbol variation display may be started.

Further, “the hold display means is capable of displaying at least the first and second hold animations,
The first display control is to cause the hold display means to display at least the first and second hold animations,
The third display control includes at least a case of displaying the continuation of the first hold animation displayed when the second condition is satisfied on the hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the second display control includes at least a case where the hold animation is not displayed on the hold display unit when the start condition is satisfied,
The third display control includes at least a case where the continuation of the hold animation displayed on the hold display means when the second condition is satisfied is not displayed on the hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained. For example, the second display control may be a control in which, when the first condition is satisfied after the execution condition is satisfied, the hold animation is not displayed even if the start condition is subsequently satisfied.

Further, “the second display control includes at least a case in which a hold animation different from the hold animation is displayed on the hold display means when the start condition is satisfied after the first condition is satisfied. Including
The third display control includes at least a case in which a hold animation different from the hold animation displayed on the hold display means when the second condition is satisfied is displayed on the hold display means. It is
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Still further, “the first hold animation indicates a change in the first hold icon,
The second hold animation indicates a change of a second hold icon different from the first,
The second condition includes at least a case where the first and second hold animations are satisfied at least when being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  FIG. 268 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of hold animations each having a different aspect may display the same hold icon.

  First, in the examples of FIGS. 5A to 5D shown at the left end, a change animation is executed at the start of change, and the visibility of the target hold icon is lowered, while the hold icon is being reduced. Change the display.

  The same figure (A)-(D) shown in the center is an example in which the mode of the hold icon may be different even if the change animation is not executed. Even if the status of the hold icon is different, the hold animation of the same mode may be performed. In addition, there may be a plurality of patterns of change animation that change the mode of the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.

  FIGS. (I) to (ii) shown at the right end are examples of increasing animation patterns at the time of winning when the number of holds is zero. As shown in FIG. 5B, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 may be turned on for one interrupt (4 ms). Further, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), the increase animation may be shortened and displayed only in the case of winning when the number of holds is 0. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (), the fluctuation icon H0 may be displayed without performing the increase animation or the movement animation of the fluctuation icon H0. Further, only the moving animation of the variation icon H0 may be executed without executing the increase animation. Further, the movement animation may be executed after the increase animation is displayed in a shortened manner.

  By the way, in the conventional game stand, only a monotonous display such as lighting / extinguishing of the holding lamp is performed to indicate the holding, and the player is easily bored.

  As described above, according to the game table described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268, there may be a case where the hold display that is easy for the player to pay attention can be made, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 260 to 262, the execution condition of the hold animation and the change condition for changing the mode of the hold animation are contradictory conditions. Execution conditions and change conditions consist of increasing or decreasing the number of holds. That is, the mode of the hold increase animation based on the hold increase is changed when the hold is reduced, and the mode of the hold moving animation based on the hold decrease is changed when the hold is increased. In addition, if the hold decreases during execution of the hold increase animation based on the hold increase, the hold increase animation may be canceled (shortened display), and the hold decrease animation may be performed. You may make it delay execution start of the pending | holding reduction animation based on reduction. Furthermore, when there are a plurality of lie notifications, it is preferable to change or cancel at least one of the hold animation modes.

  By changing the mode of the pending animation that is being executed based on the conflicting conditions being met, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the number of holds has changed during the execution of the pending animation. In some cases, misidentification of numbers can be prevented. In addition, by performing the hold animation with the number of hold icons corresponding to the actual number of holds, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the number of holds while emphasizing that the number of holds has changed. In addition, even if the hold is actually decreasing, the execution start of the hold decreasing animation is delayed until the completion of the hold increasing animation, so that a display different from the fact is performed in the delayed period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player misidentify the number of holds. In other words, even if it is different from the fact, even if it is different from the fact, it is possible to clearly display each holding animation according to the increase / decrease in the number of holds, thereby producing an effect of preventing the player from misidentifying the number of holds. Furthermore, since the lie notification is too conspicuous, it becomes a problem. When a plurality of holding animations become lies, it is preferable to change at least one of the aspects so as not to be too conspicuous.

Further, according to the examples of FIGS. 262, 264, and 266, the execution conditions are common to the plurality of pending animations, but the change conditions are not common. In this way, in the period in which the same type of hold animation is performed at the same time, even if the change condition is satisfied, only one of the hold animations is changed. Moreover, some or all of the execution conditions are common to the plurality of pending animations. Furthermore, the first hold animation with the same execution condition changes the display mode when the change condition is satisfied, but the second hold animation with the common execution condition does not change the display mode with the change condition satisfied. Further, the common execution condition may be an effect lottery based on a pending increase / decrease, a prefetch of a lottery result, an operation by a player, or the like. Further, the first hold corresponding to the first hold animation may have a longer period from the start winning than the hold corresponding to the second hold animation (see FIG. 262). Conversely, the first hold corresponding to the first hold animation may have a shorter period from the start winning than the hold corresponding to the second hold animation (see FIG. 264).
.

  According to the examples of FIG. 262, FIG. 264, and FIG. 266, various notifications according to the state can be performed. Moreover, misrecognition of the number of reservations can be prevented by suppressing the notification mode from being flashy. Furthermore, while one of the hold animations is displayed according to the number of holds, the other hold animation is displayed contrary to the number of holds, so that the player can make a noisy effect so that the player does not mistake the number of holds. it can.

  Note that the first hold animation and the second hold animation may have different target hold, or the target hold may be the same. Further, a hold display means for notifying the number of holds may be separately provided without performing a hold animation. Furthermore, the display mode of the hold icon may be switchable depending on the game state, the production state, and the like. Further, the display mode of the hold icon, the display mode of the hold animation, the execution trigger, and the like may be changed according to the prefetch result. In addition, the hold animation related to the hold icon is performed by the decorative symbol display means that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner. Further, when the display mode of the hold animation corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 is changed based on the increase / decrease in the hold in FIG. 1, the display mode may not be changed based on the hold increase / decrease in the special figure 2 ( (See FIG. 263). In addition, even with the same “hold increase / decrease”, it may be determined whether or not the change condition is set depending on the type of hold. In addition, there is a case where at least one of the hold animations performed after the change condition is satisfied is a hold animation (so-called lie animation or deceptive animation) in a mode that departs from the correct number of holds in the current state. There may be. Moreover, you may perform the holding animation of the aspect which approaches the correct number of holdings with the holding animation of the mode which leaves | separates from the said correct number of holdings.

  FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the latter half of the on-hold animation becomes invisible due to a specific effect. According to this example, there is a period in which no increase animation or change animation can be seen.

  In FIG. 269 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (d). In FIG. 269 (a), the number of holds is zero.

  In FIG. 269 (b), there is one hold increase in FIG. 1, and an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is started. The player can visually recognize this increased animation from the start to the end ((b) to (d) in the figure).

  At the timing when the increase animation of the first hold icon h1 ends, there is another hold increase in FIG. 1, and an increase animation of the second hold icon h2 is started.

  In FIG. 269 (e), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started. With the start of the symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a darkening effect, and the display screen starts to become dim. Here, the darkening effect is an effect that is executed based on the result of the effect lottery performed in accordance with the result of the determination of success or failure and the variation timer. At the timing when the symbol variation display is started, there is another reserved increase in the special figure 1, and an increase animation is started. Moreover, the movement animation (so-called reduction animation) of the fluctuation icon H0 is also started. However, since the darkening effect is started, it cannot be seen very well. In this example, the period during which the darkening effect is executed and the period during which the duel effect described later is executed are set as the reserved animation display prohibited period (the same applies to the following examples).

  In FIG. 269 (e), the display screen is completely dark and cannot be seen at all. For this reason, it is not possible to confirm the display mode of the hold icon by the increase animation started in FIG. Also, the moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 is not visible in the latter half. In a situation where the display screen is completely dark, the first sub-control unit 400 and the VDP 434 may generate the hold animation image (corresponding to an example of the first display control) or may not It is also good (equivalent to an example of second display control).

  Eventually, the darkening effect is finished and the reach state is entered, and the duel effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 (see (g) in the figure). In the duel effect, the hold icon display area is not displayed, and even if the hold increases, the increase animation of the hold icon is not executed. This is for concentrating the player's attention on the duel production. In FIG. 5G, the special figure 1 hold increases, and the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 increases by one.

  When the duel effect is finished, the decorative pattern is changed to the fluctuation fluctuation (see (h) in the same figure), and the hold icon display area 2081 is revived and displayed. In the restored hold icon display area 2, a blue display mode, that is, a second hold icon h <b> 2, which is a display mode of a prefetch notice, is displayed. The second hold icon h2 has a display mode changed by a change animation during non-display (during duel effect execution).

As described above, in the example using FIG. 269, “image display means for displaying an image,
Image display control means capable of executing at least control of the image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A symbol display control means capable of executing at least the control of the symbol display means;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display control means is capable of at least suspending the start of the symbol variation display when a holding condition is established,
The image display means includes at least a hold display means,
The hold display means is capable of increasing at least a hold icon when a hold display condition is established,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least the hold icon with a hold animation,
The image display control means is configured to set a reserved animation display prohibition period (for example, FIG. 269 (f)) when a display prohibition condition (for example, dark transition effect execution determination) is established.
The image display control means causes the image display means to display a display image (for example, a darkening effect image) in which part or all of the hold icon displayed in the hold animation is not visible during the hold animation display prohibition period. What is displayed
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. That is, “a symbol display means capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
A holding display unit capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of operation holding balls to be operated by the symbol display unit by a holding icon;
A hold display control means capable of executing at least the control of the hold display means;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a hold animation,
The hold animation includes at least a mode in which the hold icon changes,
The hold display control means can execute at least hold animation display prohibition control when a display prohibition condition is established,
During execution of the hold animation display prohibition control by the hold display control means, at least a part of the hold animation becomes invisible,
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained. Note that during the execution of the hold animation display prohibition control by the hold display control means, the hold animation may be completely invisible, or a part of the hold icon displayed in the hold animation Or the aspect which becomes completely invisible may be sufficient.

  According to this game stand, the interest of the game stand can be improved by making the player pay attention to the hold and displaying the hold in various ways.

  Further, it may be possible to make the player misidentify the hold by making it difficult to visually recognize the hold animation for indicating that the display of the hold has changed. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to displays other than the hold icon during the hold animation display prohibition period. Furthermore, when the hold animation display prohibition period is set, when the entire hold animation cannot be visually recognized, the player does not know that the hold animation has been executed. A player may be surprised by a hold icon displayed at the end of the prohibited period. In addition, by providing a period during which the hold icon and the hold animation cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of holds, which may prevent a decrease in operation due to stoppage or the like.

Further, in the example using FIG. 269, “The image display control means executes display control of the hold animation,
The display control of the hold animation is a control for changing at least one of the display mode of the hold icon and the display position of the hold icon, or both.
The image display control means executes display control of one of the first display control and the second display control during the reserved animation display prohibition period,
The first display control is control for displaying the display image on the image display means while executing display control of the hold animation (for example, increase animation, movement animation, change animation).
The second display control is control for displaying the display image on the image display means without executing display control of the hold animation.
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained. That is, “the hold display control means can execute at least display control of the hold animation,
The display control of the hold animation is control to change at least one of the display mode of the hold icon and the display position of the hold icon, or both,
The hold display control means is capable of executing at least display control of any one of the first and second display controls as the hold animation display prohibition control,
The first display control is control for executing display control of the hold animation,
The second display control is a control that does not execute the display control of the hold animation,
During the execution of the first display control by the hold display control means, even though the hold animation display control is being executed, at least part of the hold animation is not visible,
During execution of the second display control by the hold display control means, display control of the hold animation is not executed, and at least a part of the hold animation is not visible,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, according to the first display control, the hold animation that was visible from the start until the hold animation display prohibition period is set is continued, so that the hold animation is more than the end. Even if the hold animation display prohibition period has ended before and the display of the hold icon is restored, the hold animation is performed, so that it is difficult to misidentify the hold. That is, it is easy to understand that it is a hold animation performed for the same hold icon. Further, when returning the display of the hold icon, there is no need to newly set the display position and mode of the hold icon. Furthermore, when the hold animation display prohibition period ends, the hold animation can be played back from the middle, and it is easy to tell the player that the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, according to the second display control, a player who tends to pay attention to the hold animation can be made to pay attention to the display of the hold animation. Further, during the on-hold animation display prohibition period, it is not necessary to perform control on the on-hold animation in which the period and the execution period overlap, so that the load on the control can be reduced.

  In addition, the display period of the hold animation varies depending on the type of animation, and there is a long scale and a short scale. In addition, the execution period of the production that covers the hold animation varies depending on the type of the production, and there is a long one and a short one.

In the example using FIG. 269, “the hold display means can display at least the hold icon with a predetermined type of hold animation or one type of hold animation selected from a plurality of types of hold animation. Is,
For each type, the hold animation has a fixed display period from the start of the animation to the end of the animation,
The image display control means is set with a predetermined type of reserved animation display prohibition period selected from a predetermined type of reserved animation display prohibition period or a plurality of types of reserved animation display prohibition periods with different lengths. And
At least the hold animation display prohibition period (for example, duel effect execution period) having the shortest length among the one or more types of hold animation display prohibition periods is the shortest display period ( For example, longer than the change animation display period)
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained. That is, “the hold display means is capable of displaying at least one type of hold animation selected from a predetermined type of hold animation or a plurality of types of hold animation,
For each type, the hold animation has a fixed display period from the start of the animation to the end of the animation,
The hold display control means holds the hold over a predetermined type of hold animation display prohibition period selected from a predetermined type of hold animation display prohibition period or a plurality of types of hold animation display prohibition periods with different period lengths. The animation display prohibition control can be executed at least,
At least the hold animation display prohibition period of the shortest period in one or more types of hold animation display prohibition period is longer than the longest display period of one or more types of hold animation display,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize from the start to the end of the on-hold animation, so that the player can be reliably prevented from recognizing that the on-hold animation has been executed. In addition, when the hold animation display prohibition period is set after the start of the hold animation, the hold icon is longer than the period until the display of the hold icon is restored when the hold animation display prohibition period is not set. Therefore, it is difficult to identify which hold icon corresponds to the hold animation performed before the setting of the hold animation display prohibition period.

  FIG. 270 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the first half portion of the on-hold animation becomes invisible due to a specific effect.

  In FIG. 270 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and the number of the reserved figures in the special figure 1 is two.

  In FIG. 270 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the moving animation is also started. The player can visually recognize this moving animation from the start to the end ((b) to (c)).

  In FIG. 6C, an effect is performed that is performed based on the result of the pre-reading and the result of the lottery indicating whether or not the notice can be executed. Here, the dynamite written "Heat" rolls.

  In the same figure (d), there was an increase in the holding of special figure 1 (the number of lights of special figure 1 holding lamp 218 has increased by one), but the dynamite exploded and the first part of the increasing animation became invisible. ing. In this example, the animation that notifies the pending lottery result has a higher display priority than the animation that indicates that the number of holds has increased or decreased, and the period during which the dynamite is performing the explosion has been held. Set to the display prohibition period.

  When the dynamite explosion stops, the hold icon display area 2081 becomes visible, and the hold icon display area 2081 shown in FIG. 5E shows the first hold icon h1 whose display mode is changed to blue. . The change in the display mode was performed while the change animation disappeared due to the explosion of the dynamite, and the display mode changed from the white display mode to the blue display mode. Moreover, it seems that the increase animation of the 2nd holding | maintenance icon h2 which was not visible by the explosion of dynamite is played from the middle.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display start of the hold animation is also restricted during the hold animation non-display period.

  In FIG. 271 (a), the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and it is in the reach state. In FIG. 271 (a), the number of holds is zero.

  In FIG. 271 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and a big hit is won. Also, there is one hold increase in FIG. 1, and an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is started.

  In FIG. 271 (c), the big hit game start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon display area 2081 becomes invisible. During the big hit game, the hold icon display area 2081 is not visible, and the hold icon display area 2081 is not visible even in the big hit game end effect scene shown in FIG. Therefore, the increased animation of the first hold icon h1 that has increased in FIG. Further, even at the timing of FIG. 6D, the holding of the special figure 1 is increasing (the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is increased by one), but the increasing animation is not visible at all. In this example, the jackpot game period is set to the hold animation display prohibition period.

  When the big hit game is finished, the hold icon display area 2081 is returned and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are displayed at predetermined display positions in the hold icon display area 2081 shown in FIG. Has been. As described above, the first hold icon h1 has a slightly increased animation at the beginning. On the other hand, the second hold icon h2 is displayed at a predetermined display position in the hold icon display area 2081 even if the hold icon display area 2081 returns and displays during the increase animation execution period. That is, the hold animation is not executed even immediately before the end of the non-display period (when the hold animation is longer than the length from this timing to the end of the non-display period).

  In addition, it is good also as non-display period of a holding | maintenance icon during reach and during big hit game. In this case, during the reach, if the execution condition for the increase animation of the first hold icon is satisfied, the execution control of the increase animation is performed. On the other hand, when the execution condition for the increase animation of the second hold icon is satisfied during the big hit, the execution control of the increase animation may not be performed.

  Moreover, you may make it not hold animation which straddles the change of a game state (control state).

  FIG. 272 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of hold displays are performed for one hold.

  In this example, a second reserved display area 209 made up of LEDs is prepared under the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, even in the non-display period of the hold animation, the player can check the hold number by the second hold display area 209.

  In FIG. 272 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (d). In FIG. 272 (a), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is two. In the hold icon display area 2081 and the second hold display area 209 in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a hold. A display indicating that two have been accumulated is made.

  In FIG. 272 (b), the third hold in FIG. 1 increases, and an increase animation of the third hold icon h3 is started in the hold icon display area 2081. On the other hand, in the second hold display area 209, lighting 2093 indicating the third hold is immediately made.

  In FIG. 272 (e), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started. With the start of the symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a darkening effect, and the display screen starts to become dim. As described above, the darkening effect is an effect that is executed based on the result of the effect lottery performed in accordance with the result of the determination of success or failure and the variation timer. At the timing when the symbol fluctuation display is started, the movement animation of the fluctuation icon H0 (so-called reduction animation) and the movement animation of the hold icons h2 and h3 are also started. However, since the darkening effect is started, these on-hold animations are not seen so well.

  In FIG. 272 (f), the display screen is completely dark and cannot be seen at all. At cono timing, there is an increase in hold in FIG. 1, but the increase animation of the hold icon is not visible. On the other hand, in the second hold display area 209, a lighting 2093 indicating an increase in hold is immediately made, and the player's eyes turn to here. Moreover, the lighting mode of the LED in the second hold display area 209 due to the increase in the current hold is a lighting mode of the pre-reading notice, and is a lighting mode different from the default lighting mode.

  Eventually, the darkening effect is finished and the reach state is entered, and the duel effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 (see (g) in the figure). In the duel effect, the hold icon display area is not displayed. However, in this example, the player can easily confirm the number of holds by turning on the LED in the second hold display area 209.

  FIGS. 273 and 274 are diagrams showing examples in which the hold animation is executed for each control state, and FIG. 273 is a diagram showing an example in the non-electric support state.

  In the non-electric support state, the hold animation is executed for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (a), a hold icon display area 2083 shown in FIG. 1 is shown.

  In FIG. 5B, the hold icon display area 2084 in FIG. 2 is cut in by the increase in the number of holds in FIG. This cut-in corresponds to the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG.

  Further, during non-electric support, the non-priority special figure 1 occupies a large percentage of symbol variation, and therefore various holding animations are executed in the holding icon display area 2083 of the special figure 1.

  In FIG. 7C, the number of holds in the special figure 2 is increased by one in the state where the special figure 2 is held, that is, in the state where the hold icon display area 2084 in the special figure 2 is displayed. At this time, a normal increase animation by the hold icon is executed.

  In the example described above, during the non-electric support, both the special map 1 and the special map 2 execute the hold animation. As for the special figure 1, as described above, during the non-electric support, the special figure 1 on the non-priority side accounts for a large proportion of the symbol fluctuation. On the other hand, for special figure 2, the allocation is more advantageous than special figure 1 (for example, it is easy to win an advantageous big hit, etc.) and it is easy to attract the attention of the player. Since the rate of fluctuation in is small, it is not necessary to perform the hold animation. Further, the special figure 2 may be configured not to display the hold itself.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram illustrating an example in the power support state.

  In the electric support state, the hold animation is not performed for the special figure 1 and the hold animation is executed only for the special figure 2. This is because the hold icon is not displayed during the electric support because the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is small. That is, the hold animation for the special figure 1 is not performed. In this example, with regard to the special figure 1, “electric support” is set to the suspended animation display prohibition period. However, in this example, in the reserved number display area 2089 provided in the upper left part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the current reserved number is displayed for both Special Figure 1 and Special 2.

  First, an example of FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (d) on the left side will be described. In FIG. 11A, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 3 is displayed in the number-of-holds display area 2089. Moreover, in the same figure (a), the three hold icons h1-h3 of the special figure 2 are displayed by changing the display mode. These hold icons h1 to h3 are executing a standby animation.

  In FIG. 5B, the hold in FIG. 2 increases by one, and an increase animation of the fourth hold icon h4 is executed. Here, during the electric support, since the fluctuation efficiency is better than during the non-electric support, it is preferable that the scale (execution time) of the hold increase animation during the electric support is shorter than the hold increase animation during the non-electric support.

  In FIG. 10C, the increase animation of the fourth hold icon h4 is finished, and the fourth hold icon h4 is completely moved to a predetermined position. At this point, the fourth hold icon h4 is synchronized with the other hold icons h1 to h3 that are executing the standby animation.

  In FIG. 9D, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started, and the variation icon H0 moves to the variation icon display area 2082 and disappears.

  Next, examples of FIGS. 274 (A) to 274 (D) on the right side will be described. In FIG. 6A, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0 is displayed in the number-of-holds display area 2089. Therefore, no hold icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 6C, there is a special digest in FIG. 1, but in this example, the hold icon in special figure 1 is not displayed, so no hold animation (for example, moving animation or erase animation) is executed.

  Further, in FIG. 4D, the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one, but no holding animation is executed even in this case.

  FIG. 275 is a diagram illustrating an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize the on-hold animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 275, at least a part of the beginning and end of the hold animation is visible.

  In FIG. 275 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (c). Further, in FIG. 275 (a), the reserved number in the special figure 1 is zero.

  In FIG. 275 (b), the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one, and an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is executed. Here, an increasing animation in which a hold icon enters from the right side is executed. The execution time (scale) of this increase animation is long, and the symbol variation display of Special Fig. 1 is stopped and the next symbol variation display, that is, the symbol variation display based on the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1, is started. The increasing animation is still being executed (see FIG. 4D).

  In FIG. 275 (e), a darkening effect is started. Also during this darkening effect, the first sub-control unit 400 and the VDP 434 are performing image control of the increasing animation of the first hold icon h1, but the increasing animation is not visible to the player due to the darkening effect.

  Eventually, the darkening effect ends, and the hold icon display area 2081 is returned and displayed (see (f) in the figure). The increasing animation of the first hold icon h1 is still continuing, and eventually the moving animation of the change icon H0 is changed (see (g) in the figure). In this example, since the display position is continuously changed even in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the display position is different at the moment when it becomes difficult to visually recognize. As a result, the player can be given an illusion as if it was a newly started hold animation, and the number of holds may be misidentified.

Further, in the example using FIG. 275, “the hold display means displays at least the hold icon with a predetermined type of hold animation or one type of hold animation selected from a plurality of types of hold animation. Is possible,
For each type, the hold animation has a fixed display period from the start of the animation to the end of the animation,
The image display control means is set with a predetermined type of reserved animation display prohibition period selected from a predetermined type of reserved animation display prohibition period or a plurality of types of reserved animation display prohibition periods with different lengths. And
At least the reserved animation display prohibition period (for example, the darkening effect execution period shown in FIG. 275 (e)) of the shortest period of the one or more types of reserved animation display prohibition periods is one or more types of the reserved animation display prohibition periods. Shorter than the longest display period (for example, an increased animation display period from FIG. 275 (b) to exceeding the figure (f)),
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained. That is, “the hold display means is capable of displaying at least one type of hold animation selected from a predetermined type of hold animation or a plurality of types of hold animation,
For each type, the hold animation has a fixed display period from the start of the animation to the end of the animation,
The hold display control means holds the hold over a predetermined type of hold animation display prohibition period selected from a predetermined type of hold animation display prohibition period or a plurality of types of hold animation display prohibition periods with different period lengths. The animation display prohibition control can be executed at least,
At least the hold animation display prohibition period of the shortest period in one or more types of hold animation display prohibition period is shorter than the longest display period of one or more types of hold animation display,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, by making it difficult to see the middle of one hold animation executed in response to one hold (the first and last are shown), a plurality of hold animations are executed. As a result, there is a case where it is difficult to specify the number of reservations, or the number of reservations can be misidentified. In addition, even if the hold animation and the hold animation display prohibition period overlap, at least a part of the hold animation can always be seen, so the player can be sure that the hold animation has been executed. Can be made.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the default display mode of the hold icon is changed with a period during which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  In FIG. 276 (a), the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is performed under the stage A effect, and the symbol fluctuation display ends in FIG. At the timing when the symbol variation display ends, the special figure 1 hold increases, and an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is executed. The first hold icon h1 is a default display mode (first display mode). In stage A production, the hold icon display area 2081 is provided below the display screen.

  In FIG. 276 (c), the next symbol variation display, that is, the symbol variation display based on the hold represented by the first hold icon h1, is started, but the increasing animation of the first hold icon h1 is being executed.

  In FIG. 276 (d), the darkening effect is started. Also during this darkening effect, the first sub-control unit 400 and the VDP 434 are performing image control of the increasing animation of the first hold icon h1, but the increasing animation is not visible to the player due to the darkening effect. A change animation that changes the display mode of the first hold icon h1 may be executed together with the increase animation or simultaneously with the end of the increase animation. However, by providing a period during which the hold icon cannot be visually recognized before changing the display mode of the hold icon, it may be possible to prevent the player from being confused by the change and misidentifying the hold number. That is, by providing a period during which all the hold icons are not visually recognized, it may be possible to prevent misidentification by releasing attention to a specific hold icon.

  In FIG. 276 (e), the darkening effect is finished, the stage is changed, and the stage A effect is switched to the stage B effect. In stage B production, the hold icon display area 2081 moves to the left end of the display screen. In the hold icon display area 2081 shown in FIG. 5E, an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is still being executed. At this stage, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 has already been changed to the Tono-sama character, and the animation starts from the middle, but the transmittance is about 60% and still not visible.

  In FIG. 276 (f), the transparency of the character of the first holding icon h1 increases to 30%. In FIG. 276 (g), the transmittance becomes 100%, and the increase of the first holding icon h1. The animation ends.

  Note that after the display mode is changed, the hold animation that is performed before the display mode is changed may not be performed. In a period in which the hold animation performed before the display mode change is not visible, the hold animation is stopped and a hold icon corresponding to the display mode change is displayed. Since the scale of the hold animation is shorter than the period in which the visual recognition is difficult, it does not extend over the period after the display mode is changed.

  In the present embodiment, the contents that the hold icon and the hold icon display area 2081 become visible at the same time as the end of the period in which it is difficult to see are described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The change of the hold icon and the hold icon display area 2081 may be displayed as an animation. In the middle of the animation, the display of the hold icon and the hold icon display area is in a state that is difficult for the player to discriminate.

  FIG. 277 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a period in which visual recognition is difficult spans a plurality of pending animations.

  In this example, the multiple hold animations appear to be continuous and appear to be integral.

  In FIG. 277 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (d). Further, in FIG. 277 (a), the reserved number in the special figure 1 is zero.

  In FIG. 277 (b), the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one, and an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is executed. The display mode of the first hold icon h1 may be a display mode corresponding to the prefetch result, and the display mode of the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 4B is a blue color different from the default display mode. It is a display mode.

  The state of FIG. 277 (c) is a state in which, if the first hold icon h1 is displayed, the increase animation is completed and the state where the first hold icon h1 is waiting can be visually recognized. However, an effect occurs here, and the end of the increase animation and the standby animation are not visible. In this example, the period during which the effect presentation is executed is set to the reserved animation display prohibition period.

  In FIG. 277 (d), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed while the effect is generated.

  In FIG. 277 (e), the next symbol variation display is started. Again, an effect has occurred and the moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 is not visible. However, display control of the moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 is performed.

  In FIG. 277 (f), the effect ends, and the moving animation of the change icon H0 is displayed again. The moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 is displayed from the middle. In this way, by connecting to another hold animation in the non-display state, the hold icon can be displayed at a position different from the position assumed by the player when the non-display state is restored, so that the player is surprised. be able to.

  In FIG. 277 (g), the moving animation of the fluctuation icon H0 ends.

Further, in the example using FIG. 277, “the hold display means displays one hold icon with a first hold animation (for example, an increase animation) and then a second hold animation (for example, a movement animation). ) Is at least displayable,
The image display control means has a suspended animation display prohibition period (FIG. 277 (FIG. 277), which is a period from the start of the first hold animation and before the end to the start of the second hold animation and before the end. c) to period (e) in FIG.
Part or all of the hold icon at least at the end of the first hold animation becomes invisible by the display image (effect effect image),
Part or all of the hold icon at least at the beginning of the second hold animation is also invisible by the display image (effect effect image),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained. That is, “the hold display means can display at least one hold icon with the second hold animation after displaying the one hold icon with the first hold animation,
The hold display control means can execute at least the hold animation display prohibition control after the start of the first hold animation and before the end and after the start of the second hold animation and before the end. Is,
The hold display control means is capable of executing at least a control not to display at least the last of the first hold animation on the hold display means by executing the hold animation display prohibition control,
The hold display control means is capable of at least executing a control that does not display at least the first of the second hold animation on the hold display means by executing the hold animation display prohibition control.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second hold animation may be started simultaneously with the end of the first hold animation.

  According to this gaming table, when a player can make a player illusion of a plurality of hold animations executed corresponding to one hold as if one hold animation is executed, the hold can be misidentified. There is.

In the above description, “image display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least displaying an image;
With
The hold display means comprises the image display means,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “a main control means (for example, a main control section) having at least a symbol display control means or a control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214). 300),
Sub-control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) having at least hold-display control means capable of executing at least control of the hold-display means;
With
The main control means is capable of executing at least control for transmitting a plurality of types of commands to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means is capable of at least performing control according to the command received from the main control means,
The sub control means is constituted by one or a plurality of substrates (for example, basic circuit 402, VDP 434) different from the main control means,
A game table that features ”Was also explained.

Also, “The symbol display control means or the control means has a holding condition (for example, the number of holds is not full, and there is a winning at the starting point during the symbol variation display or the big hit game) In the case), it is possible to execute at least the control to suspend the operation of the symbol display means,
A game table that features ”Was also explained.

Further, “The symbol display control means or the control means is configured to increase the number of the operation holding balls when the holding condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 308). The process of adding 1 to the value of the number of holds in the special figure 1 or 2) that can be executed at least,
A game table that features ”Was also explained.

  FIG. 278 is a diagram illustrating an example of restricting execution of the pending animation when an abnormality occurs.

  In FIG. 278 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues until the figure (e). In FIG. 278 (a), an increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is started. The display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a blue display mode different from the default display mode (display mode of pre-reading notice).

  In FIG. 278 (b), the power is cut off, and the display of the increased animation of the first hold icon h1 is stopped.

  FIGS. 278 (c) to 278 (d) are waiting for power recovery, and the fluctuation of the initial symbol is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The symbol fluctuation display at the time of the occurrence of power interruption performed in FIG. 5A varies as the fluctuation fluctuation of the initial symbol after the power recovery for the remaining fluctuation time at the time of the occurrence of power interruption. Note that the increase animation of the first hold icon h1 is not displayed during power recovery standby.

  Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (d) during standby for power recovery, the suspension in FIG. 1 increases, but the operation tends to become unstable during the period from the power recovery until the display is restored. The hold animation is not executed even if the animation execution condition is satisfied. That is, the period until the operation is stabilized is set as the suspended animation display prohibition period.

  The first sub control unit 400 returns the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the reception of the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. In FIG. 278 (e), the stop symbol is displayed, and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 2081. Both the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are returned and displayed in the default display mode.

  By the way, in the conventional game stand, when the number of holdings is increased or decreased, only the number of LEDs or images corresponding to the holdings is changed, so that the display tends to be monotonous and the player can be noticed. There wasn't.

  As described above, according to the game table described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 278, there may be a case where a hold display that is easily noticed by the player can be performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, according to the example in which the default display mode of the hold icon is changed across the difficult-to-view state described with reference to FIG. 276, the hold icon is displayed in the first mode before setting the hold animation display prohibition period. Is displayed, and after the suspension animation display prohibition period is released, the suspension icon is displayed in the second mode. Although the default display mode is different, other modes (for example, the notice of notice based on the prefetch result) may be common. Moreover, the display mode of the hold animation may be different before and after the change, or may be common.

  According to this example, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the display mode is controlled without complicated control by restricting the display of the hold icon and the hold animation performed corresponding to the hold icon. It can be easily changed. Further, when changing the display mode, by restricting the execution of the hold animation, the correspondence between the hold icons before and after the change is made easy to understand.

  In addition, according to the example in which the display related to the hold described in FIG. 272 is performed at a plurality of places and the display of the hold animation in at least one of the hold animation display prohibition periods is prohibited, The display of the hold animation (hold display) in the first hold display means is restricted, and the display of the hold animation (hold display) in the second hold display means is not restricted. In addition, during the hold animation display prohibition period, the display that can specify the number of holds on the first hold display means (display of the hold icon in the example of FIG. 272) is restricted, and the number of holds on the second hold display means can be specified. Display (LED in the example of FIG. 272) is not regulated. Further, when the hold animation is performed in the first hold display unit, only the display mode may be changed without displaying the hold animation in the second hold display unit. Furthermore, in the hold display means for which display of the hold animation is prohibited during the hold animation display prohibition period, effects other than the hold display (in the example of FIG. 272, display of darkening effect or duel effect, etc.) may be executed. Further, the first hold display means may be able to perform hold display in various modes than the second hold display means. For example, the first hold display means may be a liquid crystal display device, and the second hold display means may be a lamp.

  According to the example described with reference to FIG. 272, attention can be focused on effects other than the hold display performed by the first hold display unit, and the display mode can be changed also by the second hold display unit. It is possible to give the player a choice of watching the player's favorite display. In addition, when the display on the first hold display means that can display the hold icon and the hold animation in various modes is prohibited, the second hold display means can perform a modest display. .

  Note that the display of the hold icon itself may be prohibited during the hold animation display prohibition period. Further, during the prohibition period, an alternative notification regarding suspension may be performed. In addition, a plurality of hold animations having different execution conditions can be executed for one hold, and one or more of the hold animations may be difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, it is not necessary for all of the hold animation to be difficult to see, and only a part of the hold animation may be difficult to see, and the part includes the start part of the hold animation, the end part of the hold animation, and the part in the middle of the hold animation. Either may be sufficient. Further, as in the example shown in FIGS. 273 and 274, the set period of the hold animation display prohibition period and the presence / absence of the setting may be changed according to the game state (control state). In addition, as in the example shown in FIG. 278, the behavior of the gaming machine becomes unstable at the time of power recovery, and therefore the period until the operation becomes stable may be set as the reserved animation display prohibition period. Further, it is possible to pre-read the lottery result of the hold before the start of the fluctuation based on the hold, and to determine whether or not to execute the hold animation and the execution mode according to the pre-read result. By doing so, a part or all of the pre-reading notice may be displayed in a difficult-to-view manner by setting the hold animation display prohibition period.

  In addition, although the example which applied this invention to the pachinko machine was demonstrated here, this invention is applicable also to a rotation game machine (slot machine).

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix A)
When a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as hold,
When a predetermined hold display condition is established, hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold; and
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is capable of displaying the hold icon in a first hold animation,
The hold display means is capable of displaying the hold icon in a second hold animation,
When the first condition is satisfied, the hold display unit is configured to display the second hold animation after the display of the first hold animation and before the end of the display of the first hold animation. A game table characterized by being capable of starting display.

(Appendix B)
In the game stand described in Appendix A,
When the second condition is satisfied, the hold display means is capable of starting display of the second hold animation after the end of display of the first hold animation,
The hold display means is capable of starting display of the first hold animation after the end of display of the second hold animation when the second condition is satisfied. Amusement stand.

(Appendix C)
In the game stand described in Appendix A or B,
When a predetermined display position change condition is satisfied, the hold icon display position changing means capable of displaying at least the hold icon displayed at the first position at a second position different from the first position;
On-hold icon display mode changing means capable of displaying at least the hold icon displayed in the first display mode in a second display mode different from the first display mode when a predetermined display mode change condition is satisfied. When,
A game machine equipped with
The hold icon display position changing means is capable of displaying a predetermined hold movement animation when changing the display position of the hold icon from the first position to the second position.
The hold icon display mode changing means changes the display mode of the hold icon from the first display mode to the second display mode. A predetermined hold display mode change animation can be displayed,
The first hold animation consists of the hold movement animation or the hold display mode change animation,
The game table characterized in that the second hold animation is composed of the hold moving animation or the hold display mode change animation.

(Appendix D)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to C,
When the first condition is satisfied and the display of the second hold animation is started, the hold display means displays the hold icon displayed in the first hold animation as a third Can be displayed in position,
The hold display means displays the hold icon displayed in the second hold animation when the first condition is satisfied and the display of the second hold animation is started. A game table that can be displayed at a position.

Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit after a specific symbol is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means;
A symbol fixed residual number display means capable of indicating the remaining number of symbol fixed displays by the number of predetermined symbols;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol fixed remaining number display means displays a first pattern of the predetermined patterns in a first display mode,
The symbol fixed remaining number display means displays a second pattern in the second display mode among the predetermined patterns,
The symbol fixed remaining number display means switches the display mode of the first design to the second display mode on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and switches the second design to the first display mode. A characteristic game stand.

(Appendix E)
When a hold storage condition is established, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as hold,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least a symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension when a symbol variation display condition is established;
A notification means capable of executing at least notification when the notification condition is satisfied;
A game machine equipped with
The holding storage means is capable of storing at least a specific holding,
The symbol display means is capable of executing at least a specific symbol variation display corresponding to the specific suspension when a specific symbol variation display condition is established,
The specific symbol variation display condition includes at least that the specific hold is stored in the hold storage means,
The specific symbol variation display condition is at least satisfied even after a first period has elapsed since the specific hold was stored in the hold storage means.
The specific symbol variation display condition is satisfied at least even after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the specific storage was stored in the storage unit.
The notification means is capable of executing at least a specific notification when a specific notification condition is established,
The specific notification condition includes at least that the time period required for establishment of the specific symbol variation display condition is the second period,
The notification means is capable of at least executing the specific notification after the storage of the specific hold by the hold storage means and before the start of the specific symbol change display by the symbol display means. A game stand characterized by being.

(Appendix F)
In the game stand described in Appendix E,
The symbol display means is capable of deferring the start of the specific symbol variation display from the first period to the second period when the variation start delay condition is established,
The variation start postponement condition is established after the storage of the specific hold by the hold storage means and before the start of the specific symbol change display by the symbol display means,
The game table characterized in that the specific notification condition includes at least the establishment of the change start postponement condition.

(Appendix G)
In the game stand described in Appendix E or F,
The informing means includes at least an image display means,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least an image when an image display condition is established,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or a plurality of images in an animation over a predetermined period,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification includes at least an animation display by the image display means.

(Appendix H)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices E to G,
The first symbol display means of the symbol display means can execute at least the symbol variation display when the first symbol variation condition is established,
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a second symbol variation condition is established,
The hold storage means is capable of storing the first hold when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied and the first hold storage condition is satisfied,
The hold storage means is capable of storing a second hold when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied and the second hold storage condition is satisfied,
The first symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when the first holding digest condition is established,
The second symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when the second reserved digest condition is established,
The second hold digestion condition includes at least that the second hold is stored in the hold storage means,
The first hold digestion condition includes at least that the second hold is not stored in the hold storage means and the first hold is stored.
The specific hold includes at least the first hold;
The variation start postponement condition is at least satisfied when the second hold storage condition is satisfied when the first hold is stored in the hold storage means. Amusement stand.

(Appendix I)
In the game stand described in Appendix H,
When the hold display condition is satisfied, the hold display means can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold stored in the hold storage means,
The holding display means can display a holding movement animation for moving the display position of the holding icon when a holding movement condition is established,
The hold display means displays a first hold movement animation for moving the display position of the hold icon from the first display position to the second display position when the first hold movement condition is satisfied. Is possible,
The hold display means moves a display position of the hold icon from the second display position to the first display position when a second hold movement condition is satisfied. Can be displayed,
The first holding movement condition includes at least establishment of the symbol variation display condition,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second holding movement condition includes at least the establishment of the change start postponement condition.

(Appendix J)
Image display means for displaying an image;
Image display control means capable of executing at least control of the image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means includes at least a hold display means,
The hold display means is capable of at least executing a display indicating the number of operation hold balls that will activate the symbol display means by a hold icon,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least the hold icon with a hold animation,
The image display control means causes the image display means to display a display image in which part or all of the hold icon displayed in the hold animation is not visible when a display prohibition condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix K)
In the gaming machine according to appendix J, the image display control means executes display control of the hold animation,
The display control of the hold animation is a control for changing at least one of the display mode of the hold icon and the display position of the hold icon, or both.
The image display control means executes display control of any one of the first display control and the second display control when a display prohibition condition is satisfied,
The first display control is a control for displaying the display image on the image display means while performing the display control of the hold animation.
The second display control is control for displaying the display image on the image display means without executing display control of the hold animation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix L)
In the game stand described in Appendix J or K, the hold display means can display at least the hold icon with a predetermined type of hold animation or one type of hold animation selected from a plurality of types of hold animation. And
For each type, the hold animation has a fixed display period from the start of the animation to the end of the animation,
The display image is a predetermined type of display image with a fixed display period, or one type of display image selected from a plurality of types of display images with different display period lengths,
At least the display period of the shortest display image among the one or more types of display images is shorter than the display period of the longest hold animation among the one or more types of hold animations.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix M)
In the game stand described in Appendix J or K, the hold display means can display at least the hold icon with a predetermined type of hold animation or one type of hold animation selected from a plurality of types of hold animation. And
For each type, the hold animation has a fixed display period from the start of the animation to the end of the animation,
The display image is a predetermined type of display image with a fixed display period, or one type of display image selected from a plurality of types of display images with different display period lengths,
At least the display period of the shortest display image among the one or more types of display images is longer than the display period of the shortest hold animation among the one or more types of hold animations.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix N)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J to M,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a second hold animation after displaying the one hold icon with the first hold animation,
The display image is displayed at least during a period from the start of the first hold animation and before the end to the start of the second hold animation and before the end.
Part or all of the hold icon at least at the end of the first hold animation becomes invisible by the display image,
Part or all of the hold icon at least at the beginning of the second hold animation is also hidden by the display image.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 208a-208c Symbol display area 208d Effect display area 208e 4th symbol display area 212 Special figure 1 display device 214 Special figure 2 display device 300 Main control part 400 First sub control part 500 Second sub Control unit 2081 Hold icon display area 2082 Fluctuation icon display area h1 First hold icon h2 Second hold icon h3 Third hold icon h4 Fourth hold icon

Claims (5)

A means for determining whether or not it is possible to determine whether or not it is correct;
A first display means capable of displaying at least a symbol variation display;
A second display means capable of displaying at least a hold icon;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the number of suspensions related to execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the number of holds based on the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of animations,
At least one of the plurality of types of animations is a pending increase animation,
At least one of the plurality of types of animation is a notice animation,
The hold increase animation includes at least a display in which the number of hold icons increases,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the hold increase animation when there is an increase in the number of holds.
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the hold increase animation over a first time,
The notice animation includes at least a display that suggests whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed.
The pending increase animation is not displayed on the second display means during the display of the notice animation.
The second display means displays the holding increase animation from the middle when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second time is shorter than the first time,
The second time is the time taken from the increase in the number of the hold to the end of the displayed notice animation when the number of the hold is increased during the display of the notice animation.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
A third display means capable of displaying at least the number of suspensions;
The third display means is capable of displaying at least the number of suspensions even while the notice animation is being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 ,
The third display means is capable of displaying at least the number of holdings according to the number of lamps to be lit.
The second display means, when the number of holdings increases and reaches the first number, after the first time has elapsed since the number of holdings increased, The hold icon can be displayed at least,
The third display means is capable of at least lighting the lamp at the second position before the first time elapses when the number of holdings increases and reaches the first number. ,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3 ,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the notice animation for a third time,
The third time is longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
Control means capable of at least controlling display on the second display means;
The control means is capable of at least performing display control of the hold increase animation after the increase in the number of hold even during display of the notice animation.
The second display means displays the hold increase animation from the middle for a fourth time,
The fourth time is a remaining time obtained by subtracting the second time from the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.